University of PortsmouthRAE analysis |
Collaboration has continued alongside individual research programmes, recognising the need for multidisciplinary Research and Development (R&D) in Health Care. An example of this is a survey of R&D in Medway Maritime NHS Trust conducted by RG and CNRPD, funded by a College Research Grant (£1,400). Collaboration with other Faculties and Schools (eg. Education, Business School) has enabled development of innovative research receiving significant European funding under the ADAPT Round 2 programme. CHER became a World Health Organization (WHO) Collaborating Centre (1997) for work on Health Promoting Schools.
Attention is given to developing collaborative/supportive links in and outside the College. Work demonstrating such links includes that of Chapman-Jones (RG) in Medway Maritime NHS Trust, MacInnes (CNRPD) in East Kent Community NHS Trust, Prosser (CNRPD) in East Kent Hospitals Trust and Holmes and MacInnes in the Prison Service. Such work helps to promote practice development and generate the evidence-base for Health Care in line with current Government policy. This also provides evidence of continuing development of R&D in SAMs.
College infrastructure is designed to evaluate, monitor and support the growth of research in both staff and students. Mechanisms developed by the Research Office, Graduate School, and Departments, ensure consistent, high quality research supervision. Support and monitoring are managed through the Research Policy and Research Degrees Committees and the Graduate School. Regular training is offered to all research supervisors; students are supported by a panel of two specialist supervisors and a chair responsible for an annual performance review. The College is also responding to regional, national and international needs in developing postgraduate research training directed towards improving the quality and quantity of Health Care Research. The Research Training Programme offered by the Graduate School, is recognised by the ESRC for its contribution to postgraduate research training in Education; students access this and must provide evidence of training at annual review. All staff and students have access to a range of databases (eg. BIOMED, BIDS) and analytical programmes (eg. SPSS, NUD-IST). The Graduate School provides additional quality assurance and provides pump-priming and internal support for developing individual research studies. Many staff including those who do not appear in RA2 have carried out research supported in this way (eg. E. James, K. Hutchfeld) and have published at least once in peer-reviewed or professional journals. The training courses for doctorates in Clinical Psychology, (D. Clin. Psychol), hosted at the Salomons Centre for Applied Social and Psychological Development have produced 88 completions during the present RAE census period (75 pre-qualification and 13 post-qualification). Although not returned under the research student statistics for HESA, they do nevertheless include a substantial research element. Indicative of this is the fact that several substantial papers have been produced by successful D. Clin. Psychol. candidates during the census period.
Such factors have helped to promote the quality of research and the number of research publications has increased significantly since 1996. Dissemination of research, through publication and presentation, is encouraged. While the principal means of disseminating research findings remains peer-reviewed journals, those working in vocational disciplines play important roles in influencing current Health Care practice through the professional press (eg. Nursing Times, Synergy, British Journal of Therapy and Rehabilitation, Professional Nurse) and through textbooks.
Regular research seminars, offered by the CNRPD and CHER, involve external and internal speakers; all staff and interested parties outside the College are invited. Subjects covered include methodologies and aspects of health-related research. CHER also offers a regular research discussion group focusing on current developments in theory and methodology in Health Care research. A quarterly Research Newsletter is disseminated to all relevant Departments.
STAFFING POLICY
The desire to promote SAM’s research is evidenced by the appointment of a Professor (Holmes, 1996), two Research Fellows (MacInnes, Coakley, 1997) a visiting professor (A. le May, University of Southampton) in Nursing, and the appointment of a Professor in the Centre for Health Education and Research (Clift, 1998).
Overall staffing policy focuses on staff development and encouragement of research. All staff are contractually required to engage in research and scholarship with a time allocation of 30 days/year; additional time may be available through the Study Leave scheme. Six staff are registered for research degrees (MPhil/PhD); most are funded by the College. Five staff (Prosser, MacInnes (Nursing), Robinson (CHER), Chapman-Jones, Pringle (RG)) have been awarded PhDs between 1996-2000.
Within Nursing and Radiography some staff have been given a small remit from teaching to develop research (eg. MacInnes, T. Clark, E. James, B. Worster (Nursing), Chapman-Jones, Piper (RG)). Some staff have also been awarded sabbatical leave (Chapman-Jones, Colyer, L. Bird (RG)). Funded research enables replacement teaching and/or appointment of research assistants. Attendance and presentation at courses/conferences are actively supported from both Departmental and central funds. Individual performance in is closely monitored through staff appraisal.
THE CENTRE FOR HEALTH EDUCATION AND RESEARCH (CHER) is a small department with three members of research active staff. Individual staff are responsible for their research activity and for managing research staff attached to their projects. Currently, CHER is responsible for the supervision of five part-time research students. Research focuses on health education and promotion, particularly on travel and health and the health promoting school. Travel, Lifestyles and Health (Clift), funded by South Thames Regional Heath Authority (£50,000), investigated a number of areas including general health preparations and health problems among tourists to 'low risk' destinations (Malta) and The Gambia (particularly malaria prophylaxis) and health problems in a 'high risk' area; issues of sexual health were explored in Genitourinary clinics in the South East, and a gay tourism and sexual behaviour survey was based in Brighton. Clift has also participated in a 3 year study in Estonia, funded by the Nordic Council of Ministers and located at the Nordic Institute of Women's Studies and Gender Research (University of Oslo) designed to address issues of youth culture, gender and HIV in the post-soviet context of Estonia. As a result of Stears’ work for the European Network of Health Promoting Schools CHER became a WHO Collaborating Centre in 1997. Total grants for work on the health promoting schools via WHO and local health trusts amount to £62,000. Stears has also contributed to an EC-funded project concerning peer education on HIV/AIDS co-ordinated from the University of Lund, Sweden and a European project for Adult Health Education (£19,000).
THE CENTRE FOR NURSING RESEARCH AND PRACTICE DEVELOPMENT (CNRPD) was established in 1998 and is led by Holmes. CNRPD co-ordinates research and advises on the integration of research, practice and teaching. Its primary aim is to lead R&D and support staff in research, scholarship and publication, providing a focus for staff to develop and hone research skills and opportunities for neophyte researchers to gain experience in research. The proportion of research active staff has increased; many staff who had not previously published, although not presented in RA2, have now done so. The CNRPD also supports staff in conference presentations involving, over the last 2 years, around 55% of staff. Currently staff in the CNRPD supervise 5 part-time, postgraduate research students.
Staff represent the Faculty on the College Research Policy Sub-Committee and oversee applications for postgraduate study, liaising with the Director of Research. The CNRPD works closely with local NHS Trusts and Health Authorities in Kent providing support for research and practice development and with other SAMs, thus promoting interprofessional research. Staff represent the College on the East Kent Hospitals Trust R&D Committee (Holmes) and the Research Ethics Committee (P. Angrave, S. Daykin). The Centre has developed a high profile with institutional and non-institutional bodies, developing strong links across different Health Care settings. Staff deliver research-based development programmes and support and promote the delivery of collaborative practice in the field (eg. MacInnes, Prosser).
Active research currently focuses on mental health and the provision of health care in UK prisons.
1. Mental Health (MacInnes): This growing area of research considers the influence of health beliefs and illness awareness and their impact on compliance with treatment in severe and/or enduring mental illness. It involves evaluation of clinical interventions using a structured quantitative approach reliant on a pre- and post-test design. This ongoing work, funded by East Kent Community NHS Trust (£34,000 over 2 years), is developing this approach in mental health rehabilitation. Further work will focus on the mental health of older people and adult mentally-ill.
2. Prison health care (Holmes, MacInnes): This work focuses on the training needs of health care workers in custodial environments. A qualitative analysis of health care and a training needs analysis, funded by the Prison Service (£16,300), was undertaken in HMP Holloway to identify factors affecting health care provision and identify staff learning needs. The central aim of this work was to improve health care delivery to women prisoners; further proposals have been prepared focusing on the health needs of women prisoners (with Clift, CHER) and promoting team working amongst prison health care staff (with R. Hayward, Continuing Care Nursing).
3. Nutrition and older people: Holmes has undertaken consultancy work related to the nutrition of older people (funded by the Department of Health/University of Newcastle (£9,000)) resulting in a significant publication distributed to all health authorities and NHS Trusts in England (Eating Matters: A Resource for improving Dietary Care in Hospitals, Centre for Health Service Research and the Institute for Health of the Elderly, University of Newcastle, 1997).
4. Asthma: Coakley's research, funded by Glaxo Welcome (£10,000) focused on asthma and compliance with therapy.
Research students in Nursing undertake diverse studies linked by their qualitative methodologies. Students are supervised by CNRPD staff and attend the Postgraduate Training Programme run by MacInnes. Topics include: A family nursing approach to cancer; Evaluating the effectiveness of Degree level education for community nurses; and The symptom experience of patients with colorectal cancer. Much of this work is supported by College Research Grants.
CENTRE FOR HEALTH SERVICES RESEARCH (CHSR): Two large studies have dominated CHSR's work during 1996-2000. A 3-year study of decision-making in nursing and therapy professions, funded by NHS South East Thames Research and Development Directorate (£270,000 over 4 years; £178,950 over the review period), was led by Lemmer. A Delphi study helped to establish a UK expert panel for Phase One; a systematic review of literature was modelled on the Cochrane protocol. Cognitive mapping was used to establish how non-medical professions conduct their clinical reasoning.
The second study was a collaboration with the Business Development Unit (BDU) and Health and Social Service partners. This transnational study of training needs in the care homes sector in the UK, Germany and Italy, led by Lemmer, was funded by the European Union (£16,873 from a total contract of £383,803 held by the BDU who are not submitting in this RAE). A training needs analysis used original questionnaires and focus groups in stratified samples. Qualitative methods and basic statistics addressed pressing problems between health and social services that impact on the care homes sector. Another outcome was development of a Diploma in Care Home Practice and Management. With EU partners, CHSR identified a need for research in dementia care. This collaborative activity with NHS, Social Services and other stakeholders, identifies a need for service development research in the care of older people.
CHSR, together with the Critical Care Nursing Department, has also undertaken a hospital-based study in Intensive Care Units, funded by the NHS SE Thames R&D Directorate (£47,000 and part of the £270,000 figure cited above) to examine the efficacy of the ITU-Critical Care course assessment scheme by examining skill acquisition against nursing practice competencies (Lemmer and B. O'Riordan, 1997). O'Riordan is currently completing her MPhil based on this work. Currently CHSR supervises 6 part-time research students.
THE DEPARTMENT OF OCCUPATIONAL THERAPY focuses on forging links with clinicians to develop combined research including inter-professional work. A. Wilson is seconded part-time from Kent Education Consortium (KEC) to conduct research into student attrition from health courses at the College. M. Helm has obtained support (£55,773 (KEC)) to develop, with others, an effective recruitment strategy to SAMs and Science degree programmes. A second strand of funding (£40,000) for this project has come from the Outer London Education Consortium (OLEC). Pringle has, with Brighton University, obtained £3,500 from the Kent & Sussex Education Consortia to work on a dissemination and implementation strategy for the SAMs' Continuing Professional Development (CPD) Framework (report entered in RA2).
There are two current areas of research. The first relates to work specific to the profession including defining Occupational Therapy (Rubin), hand splinting (Goodrick-Meech), cross-cultural research in OT (Helm), CPD and evidence-based practice (Pringle), standardisation of models of assessment, falls in the elderly (Atwal), recruitment to the profession (Gillen), provision of housing for disabled clients (Jensen). The second includes work overlapping with other health professions such as use of qualitative methodologies (Helm), simulated learning exercises (Dean), health-related decisions in mature adults (Rubin). Funding from the University of Kent (Rubin, £2,000) (with Dr L. Quine) supported work on Hormone Replacement Therapy and a College Grant (Rubin, £1,680) work on Hormone Replacement Therapy and on Viagra.
Staff have presented papers/posters at national and international conferences (eg. the British Psychological Society (Health Division) annual conference (2000)), and published in, for example, British Journal of Health Psychology and the British Journal of Occupational Therapy (RA2). Several students have published with staff (eg. Taylor and Rubin, 1999; Franks T, Goodrick-Meech A, 1997) exemplifying the ethos of research promotion within the programme.
THE DEPARTMENT OF RADIOGRAPHY has defined its research direction on the concept of evidence-based practice. Research is central to the overall ethos, preparing students for life-long learning and equipping staff with a research-based teaching agenda. There are currently 3 full-time and one part time research students in the Department. Departmental research complements the aims of the Medical Imaging programme to encourage multi-professional collaboration and to enable Radiographers and other Health Care Practitioners to undertake new and developed roles; it also reflects the ever-changing nature of UK Health Care provision. Reflecting the clinical specialities and academic interests of the Department, 3 distinct but complementary areas of research, encompassing a strong scientific base and clinically-relevant practice, are the focus of research activity. Both under- and postgraduate students are encouraged to participate in Departmental work and to develop their interests under one of these themes.
1. Clinical Science: The primary focus here lies in musculo-skeletal medicine (Chapman-Jones, L. Bird). A collaborative project with Medway Maritime Hospital is evaluating the efficacy of musculo-skeletal ultrasound c.f. magnetic resonance imaging and arthroscopy (Chapman-Jones). This work, supported jointly by Medway Maritime NHS Trust and the College, involves each organisation donating staff resources. The Trust also provided the necessary equipment and research facilities. Work with other clinical centres has also taken place, e.g. the imaging and evaluation of bleeding patterns in haemophiliac patients (Chapman-Jones with the East Kent Hospitals NHS Trust). Researchers were invited to present this work at the World Haemophilia Conference (Canada, 2000). This work is also supported by the College and by Dynamic Imaging Ltd. The NHS Trust and the College each provided staff resources; the Trust also provided additional support facilities.
There are also opportunities for development in the areas of arthritis and soft-tissue pathology in degenerative and inflammatory joint disease (L. Bird), building on existing PhD work. The recent acquisition of a biological science laboratory will enable in-vitro assessment of the in-vivo studies, and will be particularly useful for work undertaken on chronic tendon pathology (Chapman-Jones). Opportunities also exist in collaboration with an International Authority at the Norwegian University of Science and Technology and the Canterbury Archaeological Trust related to imaging archaeological bone samples to evaluate bone pathology (R. Denton).
2. Radiation Science: A. Eyden has, for the first time, identified the effective radiation dose obtained from radiographic examination of the ankle. Of particular importance was the development of suitable tools and methodologies to enable determination of effective dose. This work has been exposed to scrutiny at national conferences and will lead to further work in minimising radiation dose and risk in clinical radiological practice.
3. Professional role development: This is a particularly strong area of work (Paterson, Colyer, Piper). With the development of postgraduate, work-based learning programmes in radiographic reporting. The Department was the first in the UK to research and develop such programmes and is continuing to break new ground with further studies evaluating their expansion in collaboration with East Kent Hospitals NHS Trust and Maidstone & Tunbridge Wells NHS Trust. The excellence of this work is reflected by the number of national and international presentations and papers the team are invited to give. Equally important is the work related to other aspects of role development including: on-treatment review, review clinics, breast planning and treatment mark-up by therapeutic radiographers; lower limb venography and barium studies by diagnostic radiographers, and diagnostic angiography by radiological nurses.
Colyer has been invited to undertake research and consultancy for the College of Radiographers in which she was the lead researcher. This work, combining qualitative, quantitative and consultative approaches, has enabled the development of a strategy for the future development of therapeutic radiotherapy and the roles of therapeutic radiographers. She has also investigated the role of radiographers in a project funded by a College Research Grant (£500).
The College has a Research Strategy, a Research Policy and embeds Research within its New Corporate Plan (initially for the period 2000-2004, but extending the strategic view to 2010). Challenges for the College are to escalate the level of research activity by, initially, a significant re-orientation of resource, moving away from an exceptionally heavy emphasis on teaching. The ability to attract funding for Research will, in part, derive from the scale and effectiveness of the internal resource transfer as well as success in competition for research funds.
Embedding Research within the committee structure and culture of the College has provided an identity and stimulus for Research. New levels of participation and accountability are engaged.
The Annual Operating Statement 2000 (paragraph 13.1, page 24) sets out the College’s research intentions:
“The College is committed to promoting further its research performance,
confirmed as a key feature of its role in higher education and as a major
contribution to the quality of academic activity undertaken by the institution.
At the same time, the College recognises that it has to further develop the
culture of ‘accountability’ for research. During Academic Year 1999-2000, the
College will complete a review of its research functions so as to provide clear
statements and forecasts in regard of levels of resourcing as appropriate
management models.”
Benefits deriving from an engaged research strategy are acknowledged across the institution and would be expected to encompass the following:
· research outputs enhancing institutional reputation and standing;
The College is open in its recognition of:
· the necessity of its engagement with a re-vitalised research agenda;
At College level, research leadership is provided by the Director of Research and Scholarship, who reports to the Deputy Principal. Research policy is determined by the Research Committee (a sub-committee of Academic Board) which also allocates the research budget. All academic staff are expected to engage in research as defined in individual Personal Research Plans; this generates a range of research profiles. Research performance is assessed via the staff appraisal system and monitored by Heads of School and the Director of Research. Staff are supported through centrally organised development sessions on such topics as writing for publication, applying for research grants and effective supervision of research students. An on-line newsletter promotes research opportunities and publicises staff and student research achievements. The ‘town and gown’ lecture series disseminates staff research findings to a wider audience and invites high profile external speakers to lead debate on topical issues.
At School level, the unit operates a regular programme of research seminars, open to all staff and students and affording opportunity for collaborative development. Such activity will be further enhanced within the new Sport and Health building, due to open in 2003. The importance of ICT in the sharing of good practice has been recognised by the development by Matthew Molineux of a virtual British Institute for Occupation and Health (OccupationUK) whose website is hosted by the College.
School Research Co-ordinators, who are members of the College Research Committee, act as the channel for research related information, including the production of a regular “Research Update” sheet. The School Research Committee allocates funding against clearly identified priorities which include support for staff with book contracts (currently five new contracts are in place) and granting of sabbatical leave for staff undertaking part-time PhDs.
The majority of staff either have a higher degree or are working towards completion and provide collaborative supervision for post-graduate students on degrees validated by the University of York and the University of Leeds.
Dr Mary Connor and Val Wosket work within the field of Counselling, both focussing their research on aspects of counsellor training and supervision. Mary Connor has carried out research into counsellor training and psychotherapy. Continuing Professional Development is a theme explored in her research in relation to the use of doctors as mentors for counsellors. Val Wosket has focussed on issues in the supervision of counsellors, especially those who are already experienced practitioners. Research by the unit's research students is extending this theme. Two of them (one in his writing up period) are researching the training of counsellors in Malaysia, both being established counsellors themselves in that country. The third research student is exploring the sensitive issue of dual relationships in counselling.
Dr Christine Mayers and Matthew Molineux work in the field of Occupational Therapy. Christine Mayers' research explores the quality of life for people with problems caused by physical disabilities or mental health. Matthew Molineux has researched issues arising in OT when working with prisoners and people with HIV/AIDS or different sexual orientations. Dr Ian Rivers also works in the field of sexual orientation, particularly the psychological problems facing lesbian, gay, bisexual and transgendered youths, e.g. bullying in schools, homophobia within the church. His research also relates to issues of therapy and nurse education, so has strong links with other health-related research in the unit. Laura Potts' main research interest is perceptions of breast cancer. She has worked in collaboration with colleagues both in Britain and abroad to examine the ideologies of breast cancer from a feminist perspective.
Dr Andy Smith is Head of the School for Sports Science and Psychology. His research and professional work falls into two clusters:
1. Research to determine the social psychological determinants of exercise adherence in adult populations. This work has focused on the use of the Theory of Planned Behaviour and began with his PhD and continues through the supervision of Cath Jackson, who is looking at the social norm dimension of this theory. Whilst his work began by adopting a purely quantitative approach, recently he has moved to more qualitative approaches and his other PhD student (Diane Crone-Grant, in her writing up period) is using grounded theory to explore the experience of people on GP exercise referral schemes and how this experience relates to their mental well-being.
2. The development of evidence based guidelines for professional practice in the use of exercise interventions targeted at improving the health of individuals and communities. This work has included involvement in the development of the accreditation system for the British Association of Sport and Exercise Sciences; contributing to the physical activity/mental health guidelines for the HEA, and working with the NHS on a National Quality Assurance Framework for Exercise Referral Systems (published April 2001).
Research groups:
Research activity in the Centre is focussed around three research groups which are interdisciplinary in nature. The groups have been formed to strengthen and consolidate the Centre's research activity and to enhance the opportunities for our post-graduate students. The groups are as follows:
The lower limb group. Paul Beeson, Jackie Campbell and Mike Curran. There are also 4 research students attached to this group. This group focuses on clinical research relating to the foot and leg. It has been particularly successful in attracting external funding, including the largest single research grant awarded to podiatrists in the UK (£50,000 from the NHSE Eastern Region R&D Committee plus £5,000 from the Society of Chiropodists and Podiatrists) for a longitudinal study investigating the foot-health and economic outcomes of NHS podiatry disinvestment programmes. This group organises the Anglia and Oxford Podiatry Research Forum for practitioners across the Midlands and East Anglia. Prof Campbell has an international reputation in the field of pain and works closely with colleagues across Europe in her work on the electrophysiology of the peripheral pain pathways. This work attracted significant funding under the EU Framework IV programme (100,000 ECU of which 16,500 ECU came to UCN). The work on leg pain in cardio-velo-facial syndrome is internationally acclaimed and one of the research students working in this area, Ahmad Al-Khattat, is a member of the executive committee of the VCFS Educational Forum, based in the USA. The European VCFS conference (2002) is being organised by members of this group and will be held at University College Northampton. The group has also recently attracted funding for studies into inter-professional working for podiatrists and effective marketing of podiatry as a profession. Four research student successfully completed their PhD within the assessment period, supervised by members of this group: Jackie Dabney, Sylvia McNeely, Simon Spooner and Scott Turner (2000).
Food science and nutrition. Simon Langley-Evans, Carol Phillips, Iain Wiliamson, This very successful group work in the area of human nutrition and metabolism and on food pathogens. They have produced a total of nearly 60 papers in the last five years and Dr Simon Langley-Evans has a respected international reputation in the area of fetal programming of adult disease. A new multidisciplinary research centre, The Centre for Low Birthweight Studies, has just been established at the University College arising out of the work of this group which will involve researchers from sports science, psychology, midwifery and physiology. A research assistant has recently been appointed to work with this Centre in a major cohort study. This group’s work on the role of antioxidants in health is currently investigating the role of the constituents of tea in prevention of coronary heart disease and saliva antioxidants in the aetiology of periodontal disease. Dr Phillips’ work on food pathogens is also internationally recognised. Iain Williamson has published important work on eating disorders in the gay community. Four research students are attached to this group (2 part-time and 2 full-time) The group is supported by a technician (Sue Maloney) who gained her MPhil in 1998, supervised by staff in this group.
Professional Practice. Mary Cooke, Mary Hanley, Clency Meurier, Sarah Neill, Brian Hemmings and Sarah Earle. This is a new research group which focuses on research directly related to professional practice across a range of health-care professions. Membership of this research group is extensive and incorporates many health professionals who are less experienced in research than the 6 who are submitted for this Research Assessment Exercise. Dr Earle's work on the sociology of the body, particularly with respect to sexuality, and disability, has earned her an international reputation in this field and has helped to shape national policy. Two members of this group work on user involvement. Mary Cooke is currently working on the role of the user in healthcare practice and collaborates internationally in this work (notable with colleagues in the USA and Scandinavia) and Sarah Neill’s work focuses particularly on the involvement of parents as users of children’s health services. Dr Hanley has recently completed a substantial body of work on depression following myocardial infarcts and this work is informing rehabilitation practice. Much of this work was done in collaboration with colleagues from Belfast as part of the Northern Ireland Cardiac Outcome Study. Dr Hemmings also researches into aspects of rehabilitation and his work on sports rehabilitation incorporates both physical and psychological aspects. Dr Meurier has an extensive publication record in the field of clinical error. The research outputs of this group are all intrinsically linked to informing practice and they work closely with colleagues from local NHS Trusts, GP practices, Primary Care Groups and user organisations in order to achieve this.
Promotion and development of a research culture:
Research has been, and continues to be, a major focus of development across the Centre. The Centre has attracted external research income totalling over £480,000 within this assessment period and this has enabled us to appoint a senior research fellow and 7 research assistants. This has had a profound effect on the research culture across the Centre. Staff from all disciplines are now seeking research grants and embarking on pilot projects prior to external applications for funding. The research work from these groups is feeding into the teaching and learning on the seven MSc courses within the Centre as well as providing a research environment for eight PhD students. About 100 conference presentations have been given at national and international conferences since 1996, many of which were given by staff who had not previously presented work. The Centre’s programme of research seminars has proved to be a useful platform not only for a forum for research-based dissemination and discussion, but also for a ‘launch pad’ for novice researchers and research students. A mentorship scheme for new researchers is in operation and incorporates research mentors across all the research groups. There is also a significant amount of involvement of staff within the NHS who are also seeking to develop their research capability.
The Centre’s reputation for research degrees in health-related areas has spread and we receive approximately 20 enquiries to study for a PhD per year. Although the standard of these candidates in generally very good, we will only accept in the region of 3 per year as we wish to maintain our high standard of experienced supervision and appropriate match of subject expertise. In order to ensure this quality, a Director of Studies for a research degree must have previously successfully supervised at least one PhD student, and the supervisory team must have at least two completions. The Centre has been successful in obtaining 3 full-time studentships as part of a competitive bidding process. Applications for externally funded full-time studentships are currently being prepared and are part of the Centre's future strategy for research degree activity.
Research infrastructure:
Research in healthcare benefits from the provision of specialist facilities which includes a purpose-built podiatry clinic and access to day surgery facilities, a specialist occupational therapy building, a microbiological laboratory, and an analytical instrument laboratory. Within the laboratory accommodation, researchers have access to a wide range of analytical techniques and equipment, including a scanning electron microscope, mass spectrometry, gas chromatography, infra-red spectrometry, HPLC, PRC, tissue culture, and SDS PAGE electrophoresis.
The Centre for Healthcare Education has a dedicated librarian within the University College’s Learning Resources department who specialises in health-related library matters. In addition to the College’s journal collection and book stock, staff have access to unlimited inter-library loans and a wide variety of electronic information sources. A specialised collection of research resources have been also assembled for healthcare staff use
Support for research students:
We have placed considerable importance upon our programme for research students in order to promote research by both young researchers and those with considerable clinical experience.
The University College employs a system of supervisory teams to support its research degree students. All teams must meet the requirement of supervisory experience to successful completion. As the majority of the academic staff within the Centre came into higher education via the health professions, the number of staff having the more traditional doctoral qualifications and previous supervisory experience is limited. To meet College requirements staff development programmes support staff in obtaining PhDs. Those with a doctorate but without previous supervisory experience able to join supervisory teams alongside experienced staff and required to complete a College training course for research degree supervisors. The Centre has 8 current doctoral students (3 full-time and 5 part-time) and has 5 successful completions (4 PhD, 1 MPhil) since 1996.
Research degree students are each allocated a research degree tutor for pastoral support in addition to their supervisory team. A substantial programme of general and specific research training is compulsory for research degree students before registration as an Advanced Postgraduate Student. Thereafter they must meet the approved formal requirements for transfer to registration for a specific award (PhD or MPhil). Students within the Centre for Healthcare Education participate in the series of research seminars and colloquia and access modules within the Masters programmes as part of their research degree training. Courses for teaching within HE are available and required to be taken by all research students undertaking part-time lecturing or demonstrating as well as being available for career development for those wishing to progress to post-doctoral lectureships.
Collaborative research
Relationships with research users
Staffing policy
Our post-graduate provision formed part of the successful QAA subject review for healthcare which was given a score of 22 points. This was an interdisciplinary review and included all provision across the Centre.
Collaborative research activity is seen as a vital element of the department’s research programme. Its importance is related to both the multi-disciplinary and inter-disciplinary nature of much of the activity within healthcare, the intrinsic link between theory and practice in much of the Centre’s work, the relationship that the Centre for Healthcare Education maintains with local healthcare purchasers and providers and the opportunities that linking with external research teams, both internationally and nationally, affords.
As examples of international collaboration, work has just been completed with the Universities of Genoa, Paris, Turin, Rome and Liverpool as part of an EU Framework IV (Biomed II) research programme on the mechanisms of trigeminal pain. An application for funding under Framework V has also just been made with colleagues in Italy, Belgium and Holland.
Collaborative work is being undertaken with institutions in Boston, Florida and the New York and Pennsylvania Colleges of Podiatric Medicine investigating leg pain in children with velocardiofacial syndrome. This work is also involving a number of European collaborators in a European survey of the prevalence of leg pain in children. A research project into community healthcare in Poland is being undertaken with the Universities of Posnan and Katowize.
National collaborative work includes several joint projects with the University of Cambridge (to determine the nature of the human papilloma virus, study of the effects of low level laser irradiation on human DNA, study of the mechanisms of pain relief using RF lesions), Imperial College London and the University of Nottingham on the effects of air pollution of the lung function in children, University of Newcastle (lower leg amputation rates), the Open University (infant mortality), King’s College London and University of Cardiff (stroke rehabilitation), University of Ulster (use of lasers in clinical practice), University of Bristol (antioxidant research) and nutritional programming and early life nutrition research with the University of Southampton.
The Centre for Healthcare Education places great importance on close liaison with service providers, purchasers and users, all of whom are also users of healthcare research. Consequently there are a variety of mechanisms, both formal and informal, to ensure that this liaison is effective. These range from formal committees (e.g. between the nursing/PAMs leads for all local NHS Trusts and senior managers of the Centre for Healthcare Education, reciprocal membership of research committees, clinician and user (patient/client) representation on research project steering groups), a system of ‘account management’ whereby identified Centre staff have a role in linking with senior management of individual Trusts or private/voluntary sector provision, coordination and/or membership of research networks and informal links on an individual or research group basis. This enables joint research projects to be planned and pursued, evidence from research to be fed back into practice and evidence-based practice to be a lived reality for all staff and students. This interchange involves NHS acute and community Trusts, primary care (at both individual practice and Primary Care Group levels), private hospitals and practitioners, the ambulance service and the voluntary sector. As an example, a part-time research assistant (Rose Streeton) was appointed in September 1999 to work on a project investigating the expectations and perceptions of both patients/clients and health practitioners in primary care consultations. This has been identified by the local Primary Care Research Network as being the area of most interest for its members and involves collaboration with primary healthcare teams, community trusts acute hospital trusts and the health authority.
Local collaborative work with users of research includes the Anglia and Oxford Regional Podiatry Research Forum (which cluster members have initiated and coordinate), active participation and facilitation of the Northamptonshire Primary Care Research Network and the Oxford and Anglia Research and Development Ambulance Consortium. Current research projects with local NHS Trusts include an investigation of contemporary patterns of daily activity, the use of pain charts in hospice care, evaluation of assessment tools for mental health care and the role of rostered service in nurse education. A large research project investigating the outcomes of ‘low-risk’ elderly patients discharged from NHS care is currently being undertaken in collaboration with community trusts in Cambridge and Huntingdon. Close links have been established with the Research and Development Unit at Northampton General Hospital. Collaborative work with the primary care sector has developed significantly and includes a piece of commissioned research into the development of integrated nursing teams within a primary care setting. Staff members have also been involved in research development for local Trusts (acute, community and ambulance), a private hospital and primary care teams. There has also been increased liaison with the private healthcare and nursing home sector.
In the food science area there are links with local and national industrial partners including a part-time post-graduate student (Michelle Walker) who works in a local food manufacturing company and collaborates with Aplin and Barrett, UK on her research project.
Other research projects are also underway with local industrial partners (Dr C. Phillips) which have informed practice within the industry.
Development and support of staff research
Currently 8 members of staff are working towards a PhD and three have completed their research degree in the last two years (2 PhD, 1 MPhil). Staff are following the College research degree supervisors’ training course and gaining experience within supervisory teams.
Newly appointed staff are encouraged to join one of the four research groups and are appointed an appropriate mentor, if necessary. Staff are made aware that research outputs are an important part of their appraisal and targets are set each year, tailored to the needs of both the individual staff member and their staff sections/research groups.
A mini-sabbatical scheme for staff has been particularly useful at the beginning of a new project, in enabling staff to write up their research work for publication and to work on research grant applications.
Small amounts of internal funding is available for staff to bid for. This is specifically to enable pilot projects or small scale research projects to be undertaken. In the case of pilot projects, it is expected that staff will then apply to external bodies for grants for the main study.
Developing new researchers
Staff that have not previously been research active are actively encouraged to move along a continuum from research awareness through research engagement to research activity. There is an expectation that all staff are research aware and can integrate evidence from others’ research into their practice and teaching. All staff have personal research objectives which are defined and monitored as part of the Centre’s performance review system.
The Centre runs a programme of research development workshops covering topics ranging from methodological issues to statistics and writing for publication. There is also a research seminar programme which includes research presentations from all disciplines across the Centre. These are given by Centre staff, research students and external speakers. The lunchtime programmes are being complemented by half-day internal research conferences. In addition, discipline-specific journal clubs are held for staff and students.
Staff are supported to undertake formal research training as part of Masters or other courses and the Centre operates a research mentor scheme to support staff undertaking a research project for the first time. This has also been extended to include some NHS and private hospital staff. New researchers will usually undertake research projects as part of a team which includes experienced researchers.
A programme of ‘writers’ groups’ has been established, following a model established in the University of Strathclyde to help new researchers develop towards writing for publication.
Staff recruited during the assessment period
Three staff have been recruited during the assessment period: Simon Langley-Evans joined us as a senior lecturer from the University of Southampton in September 1998, Mary Cooke was appointed as a senior research fellow in July 1999 from a post in Homerton College. Cambridge. Sarah Earle joined us as a senior lecturer in January 2001 from a post at the University of Central England.
Research Structure and Environment: USR is a separately funded HEI within the Federal University of Surrey. The institutional architecture of USR ensures that research activity is both encouraged and monitored, while leaving considerable autonomy to academic units. A simple structure of research committees at university and school level determines research policy and funding allocations. The Senior Pro-Rector chairs the University Research Committee and, following re-structuring, a second Pro-Rector has oversight of "enterprise", the two functions jointly providing academic, business and administrative support. While 20% of HEFCE research income contributes to the wider research infrastructure and to matched funding for external grants, the remaining 80% is automatically devolved to be spent on research in line with School strategic plans. The University's policy has been to encourage and support areas judged to have the potential for research of high national and international quality, including clinical nutrition.
Research at Roehampton centres on Research Clusters, which has allowed Grimble to work closely with staff from related research disciplines and provides a supportive research environment for postgraduate students. In the School of Life Sciences, 7 staff members and 3 postgraduate research students are members of the interdisciplinary Health Sciences Research Cluster which meets every 2-3 weeks for research seminars, workshops and discussions. External speakers are regularly invited to give research seminars and to lead sessions at workshops. Cluster meetings are also a forum for discussion of work-in-progress, in a supportive critical environment. The role of the cluster convener (Grimble) has been reviewed during this RAE period and has changed from a largely administrative role to one with a stronger emphasis on promoting and co-ordinating research.
In addition, the Research Cluster system has enabled and encouraged:
· Purchase of shared technology: e.g. collaborative purchase of a cryostat, image analyser and fluorescence video microscope is being used for research on the immunohistochemistry of neuroreceptors (Opacka-Juffry UoA 13), and RUBISCO and PEPC compartmentation within plant leaf anatomy (Kinsman UoA 21) and transporter expression in Crohn's disease (Grimble).
· Shared PhD supervision: of Patel and Malik by Grimble and Olwyn Westwood
· Statistical support: for students and staff provided by Nigel Reeve and Jurg Huber)
· Network with clinical and academic contacts: For example Opacka-Juffry (UoA 13) at Imperial College School of Medicine, Hammersmith Hospital, London and Grimble (St Marks and Central Middlesex Hospital, London).
· Fostering commercial links: Stuart Thorne - University of Tartu, Tallinn Technical University, Estonian Agricultural University - Developing the food chain in Estonia (UK "Know-How" fund, 1996-1998; E.U. PHARE initiative, 1997-1999).
Research has been further supported as follows:
· A biomedical laboratory has been upgraded to Category 2 through internal investment of £90,000.
· Matched funding provided support for a 3-year post-doctoral fellowship for Jaspaul Marway (1994-1999, alcohol and tissue damage) who worked closely with Grimble.
· PhD studentships, two in clinical nutrition (grant-in-aid from Novartis Nutrition), one in microbiology (consultancy income).
· Small grants to individuals. The School allocates money each year to fund research grants of up to £1500 which are open to all academic staff and are judged against published criteria. Several were awarded to fund Health Sciences projects (1996-2000: 5 grants totalling £6,000).
· Staff development funds support the presention of papers, typically at one or two national or international conferences per year.
· Sabbatical leave for lecturers on a rotational basis. Since 1998 staff have been eligible to apply for sabbatical leave for one semester every five years. Grimble will be eligible in 2002/2003
· Financial support for PhD students to undertake short training courses, attend conferences and present papers.
· Research students have their own offices (some sharing with one other student) and a computer and for most purposes are treated as staff members with equivalent access to library facilities, use of telephones, postal services etc.
· The opening of the new £4.6 million Learning Resources Centre has widened access to books and journals which support both research and the new undergraduate programmes in Nutrition & Health and Biomedical Science and existing research-based MSc degrees in Diabetes, Clinical Nutrition, Neuroscience and Stress. CD Roms such as Medline, PsychLit and BIOSIS are provided to enable literature searching by staff and students.
As evidence of the high value placed on joint research, Grimble is collaborating in development of biochemical analytical methods in the study of lemur nutrition with Curtis (UoA 37) and foodstuffs for crop-raiding baboons (Warren and Ross, UoA 37) from the Environment, Ecology and Evolutionary Biology Cluster. Similarly, £46,000 of HEFCE 9952 money has purchased a replacement ion-chromatograph for analysis of carbohydrates, anions (e.g. lactate, pyruvate), cations (e.g. heavy metals) and pollutants in clinical (Grimble UoA 11) and environmental (Shaw UoA 21) samples. In collaboration with Carter and Doust (UoA 69) of the School of Sport, Exercise & Leisure, Grimble and Patel have helped design and execute a study of exercise and muscle glycogen reserves using a novel urinary marker whose usefulness was identified by Patel's PhD studies.
Clinical nutrition (Grimble) has close links with industry and the Research & Development Office provided support in setting up consultancies with companies or pan-national organisations either as advisor (e.g. UCB Sidac Ltd, ML Laboratories plc) or as national organiser of an international multi-centre clinical trial (e.g. Fresenius Intensive-Care Glutamine Trial). Research in this submission aims to meet the policy recommendations of the King's Fund Report on Hospital nutrition ("A Positive Approach to Nutrition" 1992) since Grimble co-authored (with Payne-James and Silk) three national surveys of nutrition support in UK hospitals (1988-1995) which provided an impetus for the King's Fund/BAPEN initiatives. In addition, this submission addresses areas identified by the Foresight and HEFCE/Department of Trade & Industry Initiatives through SMART 1 & 2 Awards and patented IPR.
Staffing Policy: Our policy can be defined as follows:
· Recruitment and retention of academic staff with high research potential.
· Internal research grants which favour younger staff and projects that will generate publications and external funding (e.g. Grimble, Dextran project)
· Teaching workload assessment system which protects research time.
· Encouraging internal presentations of research findings and conferences attended.
· Supervision of MSc projects, which provides a continuous research background for staff.
In the period 1996-2000, MSc students completed 19 projects supervised by Grimble, many of which were collaborations with major London teaching hospitals. The expectation is that students and their supervisors will produce work of sufficient calibre for publication at national or international level (e.g. see Gall et al. Clinical Nutrition 1998;17:259-264).
Occupational Therapy: Research activity in the Department of Occupational Therapy Studies is co-ordinated by Cox who joined the department to lead this brief in 2000, and supported by the Head of Department (Ravetz). Research interests range as follows: career pathways in OT, Lifespan development, cardiac rehabilitation, European perspectives, role of the OT in work, ethics, the use of psychological therapies in OT, accessibility of OT as a career for those with a disability, chronic fatigue syndrome, neurological rehabilitation, and the use of outcome measures in OT practice.
Radiography & Imaging Sciences: The department's interests include i) the development of relevant new procedures; ii) the evaluation of practice, and iii) improving clinical effectiveness in diagnostic imaging. A Readership in Medical Imaging provides a focused area of responsibility for research management through Manning, who develops the activity through co-ordinating projects, supervising postgraduate research, securing funds to support research efforts and representing the department's research interests at institutional level. The post and title was created in recognition of progress of research in Radiography and signals the College's commitment to continued progress in research. Over the next five years a planned increase in staff will allow appointments of further PhDs to strengthen the research base. The department has formed the following research groups: (1) Interpersonal Communication; (2) Diagnostic Performance; (3) Visual Perception; (4) Screening Evaluation.
Public Health and Primary Care: The Department of Primary Care was created in 1995 and in 2000 its title was extended to encapsulate its work in Public Health. Its research activities lie in the areas of public health, health promotion and health services research. The department's methodological strengths lie in policy- and practice-linked, participatory and action-oriented approaches. The Head of Department (Talbot, promoted to Associate Dean in March 2001) is delegated by the Dean (Filkins) to chair the Faculty Research Committee and to represent faculty research interests on the College Research Committee. BALOGH, the Director of the newly-formed Centre for Health Research & Practice Development, also sits on the Faculty Research Committee and the College Research Committee.
2. Research Environment
Occupational Therapy: Postgraduate studies within the department have recently commenced with the start in 2000 of a newly validated multidisciplinary MSc in Rehabilitation Studies. The department plans to launch and establish MPhil/PhD studentships to further enhance its existing postgraduate activity and the research environment more generally.
The department collaborates with occupational therapy research colleagues in other HE institutions and with practitioners locally, nationally and internationally. An international ERASMUS funded research project was established in 1999 with colleagues in Holland and Denmark to collect and disseminate case study material and data to promote insight into occupational therapy practice in different European countries, culminating in a recently published book. A Collaborative Care Research Group was established in 1997 to support local development with Mancunian Community NHS Trust, Bay Community NHS Trust and West Cumbria NHS Trust.
Local collaborative projects currently in progress within the department include a project to evaluate the use of Assessment of Motor & Process Skills (AMPS) in the three local NHS trusts (Chard, RA2:2) funded by Lancashire and S. Cumbria Education & Training Consortium; and a Younger Persons Mobility Project (Cox) jointly funded by Morecambe Bay Health Authority and Lancashire Social Services in collaboration with the Physically Disabled and Sensory Impaired Forum. Staff have presented at conferences consistently throughout the assessment period. Cox has presented 6 international and 2 national papers on Chronic Fatigue Syndrome (RA2), and Chard has presented her research on access for the disabled (RA2:3,4), AMPS (RA2:2) and brain injury at 2 international and 5 national conferences.
Radiography & Imaging Sciences: The research culture across the Department has grown through a number of initiatives:
1. Interpersonal Communication Communication style between practitioners and their patients has been investigated using transactional analysis and a test tool devised to classify interaction styles used by practitioners in a variety of clinical settings. Results were reported at an international radiology conference and in a PhD thesis. The work as a whole has a strong interprofessional bias across the Faculty.
2. Diagnostic Performance Manning (RA2) has carried out performance analysis by applications of receiver operating characteristics (ROCs) to a variety of situations. Collaboration with Lancaster University resulted in four publications including an international peer reviewed conference with its published proceedings. Techniques developed from the work have been adopted in clinical practice in monitoring the performance of radiographers in reporting. Manning also submitted a successful PhD thesis in this subject area in 1997. Two PhD projects (supervision: Manning) continue, one in a collaboration with the University of Cambridge evaluating diffusion weighted MR brain imaging in specific neurological disorders.
3. Visual Perception Manning has secured funding to investigate human eye tracking and visual fixation patterns in the interpretation of medical images. This work contributes to PhD work jointly supervised with Lancaster University and forms a distinct area of interest in this department (eg Manning, RA2:2). Future collaborative projects have been identified with similar research groups at the University of Derby .
4. Screening Evaluation Group Marshall (RA2:2,3,4) leads a research group investigating the veracity of screening procedures in medical imaging. Their work has led to 4 journal articles and several conference presentations on the role of radiography, ultrasound, biochemical tests and bone density measurement in population screening.
The department has linked with other institutions and organisations with common research interests through postgraduate research students. Installing research findings to clinical practice has been pursued by providing thematic seminars and study days for practitioners from hospital Trusts. Further Research Links and Collaborations include:
1. The Institute of Health Research, Lancaster University: PhD students have contributed to the 1999-2000 seminar programme of this Institute and further collaboration is planned.
2. Manchester University Dept of General Practice: collaboration through Manning with the Telemedicine Evaluation Group headed by Dr Carl May.
3. Department of Dermatology Morecambe Bay NHS Trust: link (Manning) with Dr Philip Harrison continues with the prospect of telemedicine projects in clinical dermatology and its education.
Public Health & Primary Care: The approach to fostering a research environment is multi-disciplinary and multi-agency and reflects the professional education orientation of the College. The department runs four Masters programmes, one on Health Research jointly with Lancaster University. The range of external consultancies reported in 1996 continue to grow, with joint appointments, membership of Trust Research Committees, and contracts to provide R & D advice and support to NHS partners (eg Balogh, N Lakeland NHS Trust). Regular open seminar programmes each term are held at Lancaster and Carlisle, attended by SMC staff and students, and local staff working in the NHS and other sectors.
Occupational Therapy: The department's eight teaching staff are encouraged to develop their research activities by the Head of Department and more recently by Cox whose role is to co-ordinate its research programme and increase postgraduate research activity. Two staff members have benefited from sabbatical leave by successful application to the Faculty Research Committee, and a further staff member has won internal funding to evaluate the accessibility of Occupational Therapy as a career for those with a disability. One joint teaching/ research post has been established (Sheath) funded by the Education and Training Consortia, and there is a commitment to maintain this post and where possible create others. Two staff members are engaged in postgraduate study: Chard is in the final stages of a MPhil/PhD to investigate how occupational therapists integrate a new skill into established practice and Wright has been awarded funding to pursue a DEd.
Radiography & Imaging Sciences: Support for staff research is through Research Assistants who have been funded by successful applications to the Faculty Research Committee. New members of academic staff appointed since the last RAE include PhD student (Booth) who will undertake postdoctoral training in research supervision. Her subsequent contribution to MPhil/PhD supervision will strengthen the Department's postgraduate research. The general arrangement for new staff is for them to have a research active academic mentor for the first 12 months of their appointment to integrate them into the research culture.
The research culture across the department has grown through a number of initiatives. Over the last four years 3 full-time and 2 part-time MPhil/PhD students have registered. Sabbatical leave has facilitated completion of projects and staff have been funded to present at conferences both nationally and internationally. Postgraduate research students contribute to the undergraduate teaching programme, underlining the research ethos of our teaching. All staff are encouraged to participate in scholarly activity and seminars at Departmental and Faculty level and the department actively identifies staff development needs for training in research skills and supervision.
Public Health & Primary Care: There are eight staff members currently pursuing study at doctoral level, and three staff have successfully gained doctorates since 1996. Recruitment has brought four post-doctoral staff to the Department since the last RAE, thus increasing the pool of research expertise; and three staff members are planning MPhil/PhD study. Five staff members contribute to the supervision of postgraduate students. The department has recently gained two honorary research appointments in Public Health Medicine, one at Carlisle and one at Lancaster.
Staff are also enabled to pursue contract research through replacement by part-time teachers, and there are part-time staff members who can have their contracts temporarily expanded. Five staff members have benefited from sabbatical leave and other support from successful applications to the Faculty Research Committee. The support of a full-time Research Officer has allowed staff to respond to calls for proposals and local commissions. These arrangements have enabled the development of small specialist teams of staff who can make rapid responses, as evidenced by the growing portfolio of locally-commissioned projects, consultancies and successful bids.
Self-assessment
The establishment of a Faculty-wide Centre for Health Research & Practice Development demonstrates the Faculty's commitment to collaborative approaches. The Faculty has enabled the departments to spend research resources in ways appropriate to their individual needs, assisting the different disciplines to grow in their research experience and output in styles best suited to their levels of maturity and their areas of teaching and practice. Whereas research efforts five years ago were relatively fragmented, the infrastructure now exists for much greater co-ordination through a strong Centre Steering Group which represents all departmental interests and the interests of new and established researchers.
Occupational Therapy: The department acknowledges that at present it represents an emerging discipline in terms of the quantity of its research output although the quality of research carried out since its inception is high. It is now establishing a programme of postgraduate study and plans to consolidate this programme with MPhil/PhD studentships and the newly validated multidisciplinary MSc in Rehabilitation Studies. It is anticipated that projects arising from this programme of study, along with doctoral and post-doctoral studies will broaden the research base of the department and strengthen existing areas of expertise.
Radiography & Imaging Science: The Department has matured considerably since the last RAE and now has a smaller number of strong, well-defined research groups. Output from these groups has grown and they demonstrate their ability to network well with others. There is a much stronger research culture; a better understanding of what it means for our discipline to be research led and greater confidence is shown in us from others in our ability to publish and report our findings. However, the number of staff who are consistently research active is small and we are not yet satisfied with our ability to secure all the external funding we wish for our research ambitions. But we are moving into areas of international recognition with some of our output and this should encourage us to pursue grant-supported research on a greater scale.
Public Health & Primary Care: Research activities in this department have become much more clearly focused in the Assessment period, so that there are now coherent research groupings working in two areas: Healthy Public Policies (including health policy, health education and health promotion) and Mental Health (shared with Nursing Studies). Our expertise is gaining momentum in the former area with several research projects commencing in 2001. In mental health, new funded research is also beginning; four staff members are undertaking PhD studies; and the STAnD project will be publishing the results of long-term evaluation work. This will break new ground in multi-disciplinary and multi-agency approaches to staff development and training needs analysis.
1. From Department of Health, NHS Estates: £83 000 over 18 months (from December 1998) for the project The UV disinfection of Mycobacterium tuberculosis and other airborne pathogens in UK hospital buildings: Hospital based pilot study. Principal investigators C B Beggs, J K Donnelly, K G Kerr, P A Sleigh, D D Mara.
2. From Department of Health, NHS Estates: £101 000 over 24 months (from March 2000) for the project The use of small negative air ions to disinfect MRSA and other airborne pathogens in a UK hospital. Principal investigators C B Beggs, J K Donnelly, K G Kerr, P A Sleigh, D D Mara.
3. From Engineering and Physical Sciences Research Council (EPSRC): £219 000 over 3 years (from May 2000) for the project UV disinfection of Mycobacterium tuberculosis and other airborne pathogens in UK hospital buildings. Principal investigators C B Beggs, P A Sleigh, J K Donnelly, K G Kerr, D D Mara.
(1) Public Health Nutrition
· Dr Donnelly is the Co-Director of the Public Health Nutrition Unit (PHNU) established at Trinity and All Saints in 1998 to house the DH/MRC funded Supermarket Nutrition Information Project (SNIP, value of grant awarded: £162,800), for consultancy and for development of courses and seminars on nutrition for health professionals and educators. The PHNU has already successfully organised a major conference (Nutrition for Pharmacists, September, 1999) and a number of tailored courses (see RA6a).
· The award of the DH/MRC grant in 1998 has permitted staff development. The PHNU Co-Director and fellow principal investigator, Joan Ransley, was able to take a sabbatical from her Senior Lecturer post to become the Research Fellow on the Supermarket Nutrition Information Project (SNIP), register for a PhD award and develop a research profile in public health nutrition.
· In the SNIP project barcode technology and supermarket databases have been used to investigate whether the fat and energy content of the family shopping can be measured using itemised till receipts. Such information is essential for nutritional epidemiology studies and is usually collected using food diaries. The use of food diaries has many difficulties, this project has tesed an alternative methodology which has considerable strengths.
· Dr J E Cade at the Nuffield Institute for Health, University of Leeds and Mrs K Tonks at Tesco Stores Ltd, Cheshunt, are collaborators on the SNIP project.
· Papers on the methodology developed and findings of the SNIP project have been submitted for publication and are in preparation. Public Health Nutrition have accepted a paper entitled The Use of supermarket till receipts to determine the fat and energy intake in a UK population (Donnelly and Ransley) for publication. Presentations of results have been given at the Healthy Weight Conference, Royal Society of Medicine, London (December, 1999), the Nutrition Society Summer Meeting, University College, Cork, Ireland (June, 2000) and the Fourth International Conference on Dietary Assessment Methods, University of Arizona, Tucson, USA (September, 2000).
(2) Public Health Engineering
· The public health engineering projects in which Dr Donnelly is involved are in two areas, water disinfection and air disinfection.
· Dr Donnelly’s role in these projects is as a specialist in mechanisms of free radical biochemistry. Free radicals are atoms or molecules containing unpaired electrons. They can be generated, for example by ultrasound or UV light, to act as agents of disinfection. Many disinfection techniques depend on efficient and reliable production of free radicals to destroy pathogenic micro-organisms.
· The water treatment project, conducted with Prof. E I Stentiford (School of Civil Engineering, University of Leeds), was funded by industry (and experimental results are not for publication). Dr Donnelly’s main interest in water treatment is in the application of ultrasound and advanced oxidation processes (UV, ozone and ultrasound) for removal of the protozoan gastro-intestinal parasite Cryptosporidium parvum. At present water companies are unable to guarantee removal of Cryptosoridium and a number of large outbreaks of cryptosporidiosis have been associated with public water supplies in the UK, USA and elsewhere.
· The air disinfection projects are funded by NHS Estates and EPSRC. Dr Donnelly is a principal investigator on projects with four colleagues at the University of Leeds. The multidisciplinary team, the first team of its kind in the world, includes a ventilation/aerobiology engineer (Dr Beggs), a medical microbiologist and consultant microbiologist (Dr Kerr), a numerical modeller (Dr Sleigh) and a public health engineer (Prof Mara).
· In these disinfection projects, which are mainly hospital-based, the team are using techniques including ultraviolet irradiation and air ionisation for removal of pathogens, with particular attention to multiply drug resistant strains of Mycobacterium tuberculosis (MDR-TB) and organisms responsible for hospital acquired infections including methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA). In the UK one in ten patients acquire an infection during a hospital stay; costing the NHS over £1 billion per annum. Conventional methods of hospital infection control have failed to prevent the sharp rise in infections originating in hospital and there is a need to develop alternative approaches to infection control.
Staff work in two major research areas: Biomedical Sciences and Optometry. In the biomedical sciences group, Mr. Ingle and Dr. New (Bioengineering) are members of the Department of Design and Engineering, and Dr. Roser is a member of the Department of Life Sciences.
Mr Ingle leads a group researching into engineering aspects of bone surgery. Collaborators include Dr New (who left the University in 1999), 2 Ph.D. students, Visiting Professor John Dowell, Mr. Jeremy Tuite and Visiting Research Fellow Mr Kevin (Broomfield Hospital). Their research has concentrated on the optimum position of keying holes in the fixation of the acetabular cup in total hip replacements, cement pressurisation in the femur and thermal necrosis due to bone drilling.
Dr Roser’s Biostability Research Group is developing novel techniques to stabilise drugs and vaccines so as to obviate any need for refrigeration. These methods are based on the ability of certain sugar derivatives to solidify as glasses in which the drug or vaccine molecules are immobilised and stabilised. Stable liquid formulations have been developed by incorporating microspheres of sugar glass stabilised vaccines in suspension in stable non-aqueous liquids. Disposable needle-free injectors have been designed by the group to deliver these stable liquids by liquid jet-injection. Several patents have been granted in the current assessment period.
Optometry staff are developing working relationships, and currently conduct their research within two loosely related groups. Dr. Calver, Dr Dymond, Prof. O’Leary, Dr. Osuobeni and Dr Siderov have a focus on paediatrics. Their prime activities currently are in the development of optical components of the eye, accommodation, visual discrimination and visual performance in children. Dr Dymond is investigating visual discrimination especially in autism. Prof Pardhan, Dr Waugh and Dr Simunovic are primarily conducting psychophysical investigations into visual performance in both clinical and non-clinical areas. Optometry currently has 5 full-time and 2 part-time PhD students.
Mechanisms and practices for promoting research and sustaining and developing an active and vital research culture.
An important feature of APU's 7 year strategic plan is that academic staff should undertake research and scholarship. The major tool in enabling individual academics to plan and resource these activities is the annual assessment undertaken in conjunction with the Head of Department. Research plans are developed at these assessments and monitored annually. In addition the research plan drawn up annually by each department ensures that a public review of activity and achievement are available so that staff activites can be integrated, and leading edge activities and achievements can be highlighted.
Research is promoted through frequent research seminars given by staff, research students and visitors. These are widely advertised within the University and also with relevant groups in neighbouring institutions. They are well attended by staff, research students and undergraduates, and are open to all. Research activity is also facilitated through sabbatical leave provisions within the School of Applied Sciences, through support for attendance at national and international conferences, and through allocation of research studentships to support research active staff. Staff are encouraged to display their research work on posters around the Schools.
Monthly joint research meetings of the Bioengineering Group with Orthopaedic surgeons from local hospitals act as a forum to identify new research areas and to formulate bids for funding both from within the Hospital Trusts and bioengineering companies
Within each School, Departments or Research Centres produce an annual Research Management Plan reviewing earlier plans and setting out research goals. They define the work and resources allocation strategy intended to allow those goals to be achieved. The University and the Schools make funds available to Departments and to individual researchers through competitively allocated strategic development grants and project grants. In addition the University Research Office gives support to researchers seeking external funding either for research grants or for collaborational research with industrial partners.
Research Infrastructure.
All research students are supported through the Graduate School. APU has established a compulsory three phase generic training programme for research students. This, together with the quality of supervision at APU, was highly commended during a recent QAA visit
. Schools also have internal training programmes which all research students are required to follow. In addition, students are required to attend and contribute to the research seminars in their department. Directors of Study (postgraduate studies supervisors) are offered a training programme in Research Supervision which includes a mentoring system for those new to supervision.Biomedical Sciences: The Bioengineering laboratory is fully equipped with dedicated electronic and mechanical hardware including "flock of birds" tracking system, precision metallographic preparation equipment and force plates for gait analysis. Bioengineering research has access to a fully equipped engineering machine shop, and specialised laboratories for: Metallurgy (microscopes, polishing equipment, tensile testing equipment & hardness testers); Strength of Materials (deflection of beams fatigue testing, air flow centrifugal force and digital compression apparatus); Electronics and Telecommunications (consisting of 20 electronic workstations); Embedded Systems (20 PCs for practical computing using various I/O devices and programming techniques, and supporting software packages). Thermodynamics/ Fluids/ Mechanics/ Environmental Science (investigation of areas such as mass, density, harmonics, flowrates, heat pumps, dynamic balancing, beams and deflection and strain); a Computer Aided Design Center equipped with software packages including AutoCad V14, Cosmos, PEPs, Orcad, Pspice and I Deas software. A CAD & Multimedia Studio (10 Pentium 200 computers with a range of software including 3D Studio Max which can be used for animation and gait analysis). A Resource Centre provides a permanently manned store with a comprehensive stock of components, a linked PCB manufacturing facility and assembly equipment, digital cameras and technician support for electronics, manufacturing and computing. Radiology at Broomfield Hospital supplies MRI and CT Scans, enabling the research group to model anatomically correct orthopaedic joints for stress analysis by Finite Element.
The Biostability Research Group has a fully equipped laboratory for drying and stabilising most active biomolecules in sugar glasses and microspheres. This includes spray, freeze and vacuum drying plus a wide range of analytical equipment to test stabilised products. There is an active collaboration with the National Institute of Biological Standards and Control on the stabilisation and testing of vaccines.
Optometry: Research facilities include laboratories equipped with: 3 Hercules EEG biofeedback devices; Shack-Hartmann aberrometer with software analysis pack; Heidelberg Retinal Tomograph with analysis software; 3 Ocular Blood Flow monitors; a dedicated Haag-Streit Video slitlamp for capturing optic disc images to use in conjunction with the HRT, and for IOP measurement; tonopen tonometers; Octopus Visual Field Analyser (with full software package, including blue on yellow field option); Zeiss corneal videotopography. An i-scan 3 dimensional ultrasound facility which allows state-of-the-art biometry of the eye for research in both glaucoma and in refractive error development has recently been acquired. An Infrared Power-Refractor is used for binocular monitoring of the level of accommodation allowing extended measurements of accommodative functions in children with different refractive errors. Psychophysical laboratories are equipped with an anomaloscope, a computer controlled Medmont Acuity and Contrast Sensitivity chart, and a series of computer controlled dedicated psychophysical stimulus generators. A sound-attenuated behavioural analysis laboratory with touch-sensitive stimulus screen and nonhuman operant apparatus, seven individual participant-testing laboratories (one of which is soundproofed); a psychophysiological laboratoru with DataLab2000 recording hardware and software, and an observation room with a two-way mirror. A public Optometry Clinic ensures a wide patient base is available for research, and provides additional clinical facilities which are shared with teaching programmes.
Arrangements for supporting interdisciplinary or collaborative research.
The University provides funds earmarked for supporting interschool research collaboration. In addition each School supports and encourages the extensive collaborative activities of its staff both financially, and by offering academic appointments to individuals in external organisations collaborating with University groups. Applied Sciences offers Research Outreach support through HEROBC to external organisations wishing to improve their research activities.
Relationships with industry, the public sector and other research users, and where appropriate, on the account taken of government policy initiatives and objectives.
The Graduate School facilitates the development of links with industry through a number of routes, and has put some emphasis on devloping TCS grants, one of which has been awarded to Mr Ingle for the development of novel orthopaedic drills.
Mr. Ingle works closely with Broomfield Hospital Chelmsford & Colchester Hospital, conducting research in conjunction with the Departments of Orthopaedic Surgery, as well as with industrial groups such as Smith and Nephew (long term stability tests of Spectron Hip Systems), Johnson & Johnson Professional (pressurisation of the bone cement in Total Hip Replacements) and de Souter Medical (thermal necrosis during orthopaedic sawing). This group has contributed to the understanding of the factors that affect the stability of total hip replacements including the uses of cements and optimising drilling procedures. The group attracts funding from the Mid Essex NHS Trust, Three Rivers NHS Trust as well as the Wishbone Trust, The Royal Society, local Charities and Orthopaedic companies. Ph.D. students use facilities at Queen Mary & Westfield College to verify the results of Finite Element Analysis of the fixation of the acetabular cup in Total Hip Replacements. Work has also been carried out at the Southampton University on specialist FEA modelling of the acetabular. Mr. Ingle has a TCS grant with McGrath Orthopaedics of Portsmouth investigating orthopaedic drill design, and a new Ph.D. Studentship to investigate the stability of the Glenoid in Total Shoulder Repair in collaboration with Mr. Jeremy Tuite (Director of Orthopaedic Surgery, Broomfield Hospital), fully funded by the Chelmsford Medical Education & Research Trust. Work is also proceeding with Dr. Mark Aitken (Director of Research at Colchester Hospital) into the stability of the elderly and the effects of Osteoporosis.
Dr Roser has been awarded two stage one SMART awards from the Department of Trade and Industry to facilitate development of various stages of their programme. The latest award is funding a collaborative project with Arthur D Little / Cambridge Consultants to develop pilot scale manufacturing of disposable injectors. Discussions are also ongoing with four Multinational Corporations to participate in the next phase of development of the technology.
Dr. Dymond has established collaborative links with a local school for children with autism to investigate the role of overt language in symbolic learning. Other members of the optometry group have formed collaborative research links with the West Norwich Hospital Departments of Ophthalmology and Orthoptics, and Addenbrooke’s Hospital Department of Ophthalmology.
The submission for the UoA Professions Allied to Medicine at Bath Spa University College, as in 1996, is based on a single entrant, Scriven. The entrant, working as part of a multi disciplinary team within a small research active department in a small HEI, is the only member of the team to have research efforts and related publications centred exclusively on health promotion. The particular focus of Scriven’s research is best summarised as the relationship between policy and practice in health promotion. The main thrust of the research endeavour and related output during the assessment period has involved an evaluation of the influence of national and international health and other associated policies on the delivery of health promotion in specific contexts. Publications have emerged from research on two main policy initiatives: The Health of the Nation (intersectoral collaboration, parasuicide prevention in primary health care) and the international policy initiative, Agenda 21 (sustainable development and health promotion).
The School offers an integrated multidisciplinary research environment where, strategically, staff with recognised expertise are brought together to achieve critical mass in specific areas creating much constructive overlap. Research is described under four group headings; [numbered] references identify relevant RA2 publication output numbers and submitted staff are highlighted in bold.
Disease Processes: Nine academic staff (Allen, Bone, Cunningham, Faragher, I. Green, M. Green, Hardy, Horne, Yeoman), 8 PDRA/PGRA and 18 PGRS (3 external) bring together expertise in in vitro/vivo modelling, cell biology, electrophysiology, gerontology, and health psychology to study characteristics of disease, normal biological ageing, and patient behaviour and compliance. Output: original papers, 60; research sponsorship, Wellcome Trust, BBSRC, NHS, EU, JDRF, TCS.
Highlights: Bone, Cunningham, I.Green and M.Green, investigating mechanisms of beta-cell destruction and factors affecting the development of diabetes (Wellcome Trust, EU CA programme), have demonstrated changes in islet cell proteomic profiles (I.Green [4]), apoptosis (I.Green [1,2]), DNA damage (Cunningham [1,2], M.Green, I.Green[2]), and defence and repair mechanisms (Bone [4]). Bone has completed the first longitudinal analysis of the diabetes process (Diabetologia, 2001, 44, 320) linking beta-cell apoptosis with disease progression. I.Green [3] has developed a novel method for the rapid isolation of pure undamaged beta-cells as a major improvement over FACS methods. Allen [1] and Faragher [1] have dissected the mechanisms of cellular senescence in multiple, normal and progeroid human cell types (BBSRC). Studies in the premature cell senescence disease Werner’s syndrome have shown that this can be corrected by telomerase (Faragher [2,3]). This work on cells obtained from Werner's syndrome patients has produced the first all-encompassing model to explain why the disease attacks some tissues but spares others. Telomerase is being used by the group to create immortal human bronchial and pancreatic cell lines for research and potential therapy in lung disease and diabetes (JDRF). Yeoman [1-4], with his experience of Lymnaea neural physiology, has recently established a means of investigating the neurobiology of ageing.
Hardy, studying the pore-forming action of bacterial enterotoxins [3], has recently characterised the action of a novel toxin from Bacillus cereus (FEMS Microbiol. Lett. 2001, 197,47). Hardy (J.Physiol., 2001, in press) and Allen, have developed the first selective activator of the maxi chloride channel, intending to bypass the CFTR mutation in cystic fibrosis (CF).
Established in 1999, the NHS-funded (£779k) regional Centre for Health Care Research (section 1.8) has catalysed research expansion in the psychosocial aspects of disease and therapy (Horne [3]; CHCR director). Horne [1,4] has shown that incorrect perceptions of symptoms by patients are the major cause of harmful treatment delays for myocardial infarction and he has identified the main psychological reasons for physician failure to prescribe optimal therapy. His work [2] has produced the first validated questionnaire on beliefs about medicines which has been adopted by over 50 research groups (translated into 6 languages). He has also contributed to the development of an illness perceptions questionnaire, considered a global standard, used in over 200 studies (12 languages).
Molecular Mechanisms and Design: Six academic staff (Cragg, Gallacher, M. Green, O'Hare, Naughton, Moghimi), 4 PDRA/PGRA and 8 PGRS (3 external) apply a chemical perspective to biological systems in health and disease. Specific areas are: oxidative/free radical and radiation damage; drug delivery; ion channels; and catalytic antibodies. Output: Original papers, 48; patent applications, 9; research sponsorship, Wellcome Trust, Leverhulme Trust, EPSRC, MRC, DoH, BNFL, Ataxia-Telangiectasia Children's Project.
Highlights: O'Hare [3,4] has developed novel scanning probes allowing oxygen permeability to be mapped with sub-micron resolution in cartilage (Wellcome Trust). He has monitored the effects of electrical stimulation on oxygenation and perfusion in muscle in vivo using multiple microelectrodes. Cragg [1] and O'Hare have developed further a sensitive and selective NO sensor. Advances in the detection and elucidation of mechanisms of free radical and radiation damage in biological systems have been made using novel photoelectrochemical sensors (O'Hare; Analyst, 1996, 121, 1779), comet assays (M.Green [1]), and NMR spectroscopy (Naughton; Free Radicals: The Practical Approach Series. IRL Press, 1996, Chpt 3) (EPSRC, MRC, BNFL, DoH). M.Green has characterised the roles of type of radiation-induced DNA damage and repair processes in cytokine release [1,2] and apoptosis [3,4]. Naughton [2] has demonstrated that xanthine oxidase can generate nitric oxide and potentially peroxynitrite. Novel catalytic antioxidants (Cragg, M.Green; A-T Project grant [US funding]) and antioxidant chelators (Naughton) have been designed and synthesised to suppress free radical damage. Naughton is developing new vasodilator-antioxidant analogues (2 patent applications, 1999). Cragg has developed quartz crystal (piezoelectric) resonance sensing (QCRS) to study manganese SOD-mimetic binding to DNA and correlated reduced pro-oxidant activity with capacity to extend lifespan (Chem. Comm. 2001, 841).
Naughton has demonstrated the anti-inflammatory properties of bioreductives (2 patent applications, 1998/9) and has developed bioreductive-conjugates for drug delivery to hypoxic tissues [3]. Targeted drugs include PARP inhibitors, corticosteroids and calcium channel blockers (to prevent active drug efflux) for anti-cancer and anti-arthritic therapy. Bioreductives have been radically redesigned to remove toxicity [by self-alkylation] in a drug-targeting programme leading to five patent applications (Naughton; 1998/9). Moghimi [1-4] has utilised novel strategies for site-specific nanoparticle delivery to selected macrophage sub-populations for cancer therapy and imaging. The immuno-toxicity of these delivery systems is under preliminary investigation with the US Walter-Reed Navy Institute.
Cragg, with Allen [4], has synthesised an artificial transmembrane sodium ion channel inducer and demonstrated its activity in cell culture (Leverhulme Trust, EPSRC), potentially offering entirely new therapeutic approaches. The paper was featured in New Scientist (10
Microbiology: Three academic staff (Denyer, Hanlon, Lloyd), 2 PDRA/PGRA and 9 PGRS currently pursue applied microbiology research with strong clinical and biomedical industry relevance in areas of microbiological control, microbial biotransformations, rapid diagnostics, and biomedical implant infections. Output: original papers, 28; patents/patents pending, 3; research sponsorship, industry, EU, MAFF, BBSRC.
Highlights: A major UK/US multi-industry sponsored programme (Reckitt-Benckiser, Procter & Gamble, Sauflon, Sterilox, Unilever Research) studying the mechanisms of action and cross-resistance of disinfectant biocides (Denyer, Hanlon, Lloyd) is providing leads to performance-enhancing strategies for antimicrobial control (eg. Int.Biodet.Biodeg., 1998, 41,261). Denyer and Hanlon have investigated biocide efficacy against E. coli 0157 biofilms (MAFF). Hanlon, with the School of the Environment, is participating in an EU programme studying the environmental prevalence of vancomycin-resistant enterococci and the survival of toxigenic E. coli in natural water sources. Hanlon’s [3] investigation of ophthalmic preservative performance has triggered the revision of national DoH guidance on eye-drop usage in hospitals.
Denyer ([3]; 2 patents granted (1997/8), 1 pending) has developed a rapid phage amplification-based pathogen detection test with Nottingham University; this is currently undergoing world-wide trials as a TB diagnostic (EU CRAFT). Hanlon and Denyer are evaluating bacteriophage for the treatment of antibiotic-resistant Ps. aeruginosa infections associated with CF, a possibility brought closer by their recent discovery of a phage-associated enzyme degrading protective pseudomonad biofilm polysaccharide (Appl.Env.Microbiol., 2001, 67, in press). Collaborating with local hospitals, this work has been extended to include Acinetobacter colonisation in burns patients. Hanlon [1,2] and Lloyd [1] have achieved microbial chiral inversions of the anti-inflammatory 2-arylpropionic acids (profens) to produce enantiomerically pure compounds of reduced toxicity.
Bacterial colonisation of biomedical implants (Denyer [1,2], Hanlon [4], Lloyd) has been characterised for dialysis catheters, orthopaedic pins, ureteral stents and ocular devices, complementing the activities of the Biomedical Materials group. Denyer and Hanlon [4] have designed a comprehensive in vivo-reflective model of peritonitis in continuous ambulatory peritoneal dialysis which integrates physiological parameters influencing the pathogen phenotype. Hanlon has recently received BBSRC ROPA funding to study bacterial biofilm behaviour on surfaces in real time using advanced QCRS technology.
Biomedical Materials: Five academic staff (Denyer, Faragher, Hanlon, Lloyd, Mikhalovsky), 6 PDRA/PGRA and 15 PGRS study interfacial phenomena between indwelling materials and the biological host, modifying bulk material and surface chemistry to achieve biocompatibility in clinical application. Output: original papers, 32; patent applications, 3; research sponsorship, BBSRC, EPSRC, Wellcome Trust, DTI, EU, industry, TCS.
Three ecobiologists (Waite, Allison, Metcalfe) have been included in the University's Geography submission and two staff (Sosabowski, Olivier) are submitted under Education for their work in learning technologies, taking the overall number of submitted staff in the School to 23.
Highlights: Biocompatible coatings derived from betaine-based copolymers (Lloyd [3], Hanlon, Faragher; BBSRC), bioactive osteointegrative phospholipids for orthopaedic implants (Lloyd, Denyer; 1 patent application (1999); EU BRITE EuRAM), and glassy carbon for cardiovascular stents (Mikhalovsky, Lloyd, Denyer; EPSRC IMI 1) are recent promising developments. Novel bulk materials have been created as osteointegrative biodegradable scaffolds for bone regeneration (Lloyd, Denyer; EPSRC). Active carbon filtration has been used as a means of recycling haemofiltrate following renal failure offering leads to novel adsorbents for the removal of cytokines during the treatment of sepsis (Mikhalovsky, Lloyd; MRC, Wellcome Trust). This work has signalled a broader use of activated carbon haemoadsorbents for the removal of poisons and toxins in other critical treatment procedures (Mikhalovsky, Lloyd; EPSRC IMI 2); engineered carbon supports show promising catalytic capabilities (Mikhalovsky [1]). Denyer's research [4] has increased understanding of factors affecting device functionality (EU BRITE EuRAM). Two patent applications have been filed (Denyer, 2000/01) for a novel urethral anaesthetic delivery device and electrically-transparent biocompatible coatings enabling non-linear dielectric spectroscopy sensors to be used in biological systems (Woodward et al. Biochem., 2000, 51,13).
A substantial reputation has been established in ophthalmic biomaterials (recognised by extensive international links and by industry through 3 TCS programmes). Two major DTI/LINK funded research projects have produced a novel biomimetic intraocular lens with improved biocompatibility (Mikhalovsky [3]) and a novel glaucoma filtration device (Lloyd [2]). Research has also delivered novel biocompatible coatings and materials to enhance tissue integration of keratoprostheses (Faragher, Lloyd [4]; BBSRC) and an understanding of the influence of ocular cell ageing and senescence on biomaterial integration (Faragher [4]); additionally this has led to the first reference strain of human ocular keratocytes (Mikhalovsky [2]). Through strategic investment the School has collaborated with the East Grinstead Eye Bank to establish a repository of research material.
1.3 Other Units of Assessment
1.4 Research Culture
The RSG has adopted an integrated strategy to promote high quality research in a stimulating and active research culture. Five specific policies support staff development (section 2.1): (i) peer-review resource targeting, to promote and enhance nationally and internationally excellent research; (ii) establishment of career-track research appointments to allow outstanding young researchers to develop their independent research to an internationally competitive level (section 2.2); (iii) exploitation of research expertise through industrial and end-user links (section 1.8), encouraged by explicit University reward strategies. This culture has stimulated a joint venture partnership, intellectual property protection, spin-off companies and research-focused consultancies; (iv) proactive support for interdisciplinary research encouraging external collaborations with leading laboratories worldwide (section 1.7); (v) strategic recruitment for research track record and biomedical science fit. Examples include: I.Green, diabetes; M.Green, free radicals; Moghimi, drug targeting; Naughton, molecular design and free radicals; Yeoman, neurobiology of ageing; the permanent appointment of Mikhalovsky (biomaterials) and Cunningham (diabetes).
Two non-returned staff have significant roles in research support: Davies, a joint NHS appointment and designated academic director of the pharmacy practice teaching unit, provides clinical links to NHS hospital services. Olliff, Research Student Division Leader (a new role in the University meeting strategic training objectives; section 3.1), leads postgraduate student pastoral care and training support (section 1.6).
1.5 Research Infrastructure
Core facilities include state-of-the-art instrumentation for automated analytical and quantitative chromatography (eg. GC, HPLC, CZE), CHN analysis and spectroscopy (UV, FT-IR). A dedicated image/surface analysis suite houses electron, confocal, optical and atomic force microscopes plus 3 quartz crystal resonance sensors and other electroanalytical equipment. The analytical equipment base also includes a GC-mass spectrometer, a 360MHz NMR and molecular modelling work stations. School support facilities include general/electronic workshops, a GMP-accredited pharmaceutical manufacturing suite, a newly commissioned containment level 3 microbiology laboratory, a dedicated animal facility, an electrophysiology laboratory, a radiation suite, and three category II tissue culture rooms. Recent (2000) equipment acquisitions include: a Nicolet FT-IR/FT-Raman spectrophotometer, a Wallac gamma-counter, a Malvern Zetamaster and a MALDI-TOF mass spectrometer. A total of £1.2m has been spent on laboratory re-equipment/ refurbishment since 1996; equipment donations over the period are valued at £220k.
1.6 Research Students
The School's Research Student Division (leader-Olliff) is responsible for the recruitment, admission, training, support and monitoring of research students. Our current training programme, emphasizing transferable and multidisciplinary skills and including elements from the University Certificate in Research Methodologies, when allied with research supervisor training workshops and an effective monitoring process, has ensured a 100% 4-year completion rate. Research students also gain teaching and demonstrating experience following successful completion of a Certificate on Facilitating Learning in HE. The quality of University research training support has been commended in a QAA Continuation Audit (2000) and was recognised recently by the award of HEFCE-funds to develop an enhanced international PhD Programme; Brighton is the only new university in a consortium of 10 UK universities chosen for this pilot initiative and the only one offering biomedical sciences. This "New Route" programme will provide the School with an estimated 10 extra students per year.
1.7 Interdisciplinary and Collaborative Research
Our integration of chemistry, biology and pharmacy strongly encourages interdisciplinary biomedical research, an approach advocated by the Joint Action Group of the Chemistry and Health & Life Sciences Foresight Panels (1999). We have 52 active international collaborative links in 24 countries. Senior research staff routinely foster links between their established external collaborators and new/junior staff; new appointees are actively encouraged to maintain their existing external research links and the Business Services Office further assists with developing industrial collaborations. Highly productive external links have been established through these policies (see RA6).
Background and research management
This UoA draws on the work of two established research centres based on the University’s Eastbourne campus: the Clinical Research Centre for Health Professions (CRC) incorporating the disciplines of physiotherapy, occupational therapy and podiatry; and the Chelsea School Research Centre (CSRC), specifically the discipline of exercise and sports science.
CRC was established in 1994 to foster the work of the Professions Allied to Medicine. CRC thrived during the late 1990's and has grown particularly in activity levels, output and external recognition. In 1996 CRC submitted 18 research active staff. The post-1996 period saw a number of staff changes and a re-focusing of research activity which has been sustained throughout the period by Haas, Mandy, Moore, Petty, Robinson and Springett, with more recent contributions by Dawson, Jones, Lucas, Martin, Otter and Sadlo.
CRC provides the major research focus and direction for academic staff and research students in this UoA. It has a core staff including, the Head of Research (HOR) (Moore, Professor of Physiotherapy) (full time post created August 1998), a Senior Research Fellow (Mandy appointed in 1999) a Junior Research Fellow, a Research Assistant and a full time research administrator. The latter two posts were funded by post 1996 NFF/CollR monies.
Exercise sciences within CSRC developed initially in the context of the Human Performance Research Unit in the late 1980's and then throughout the 1990's within Sport and Exercise Sciences. Exercise Sciences were included in the submission to UOA 69 in 1996 when 5 staff were submitted. The strong scientific base of that submission has been sustained in the work of Burden, Maxwell, Folland and Wragg.
The close geographical proximity between CRC and CSRC has enabled a working relationship between them to evolve since 1996 resulting in a number of joint research student supervisions (O'Riordan, Golby, Britten and Holmes), and joint research work and publications (Haas and Burden: balance performance monitor validation, Redhead and Burden: shoulder instability, Bailey and Moore: injuries in triathletes, Moore, Doust and Trew: lower back pain, Petty and Messenger: force measurement during lumbar mobilisations) have naturally evolved.
The appointment of a full time Head of Research for CRC in 1998 gave the opportunity for closer links to be forged between CRC and CSRC resulting in the formation of the Health and Sports Science Research Group (HSSRG). This is a strategic collaboration between the two centres designed to increase the critical mass and coordinate the diversity of laboratory based and other research activities.
The HSSRG’s Research Student Division (RSD) has a cohort of 31 research students (including those writing up) from a range of disciplines. Such a critical mass provides a rich learning and supportive culture for students many of whom seek to register because of the individual reputations and specific expertise of the supervisors. The core academic research staff, Mandy and Moore, engage in research activity, provide support to staff and students in funding procurement, supervise and manage research and offer mentoring support and guidance on research matters to staff and students. A Research Strategy Committee chaired by Moore, meets regularly, includes representatives from each of the major research foci and is responsible for overseeing research developments and activity.
Research groupings
There are three operational research groups co-ordinating and focusing staff and students’ interests and expertise. These groups are designed to address acknowledged professional and health service needs at national and international level by broadening and deepening the scientific basis of health professionals' and sports scientists' activities:
1. Clinical Sciences Group (including clinical effectiveness and outcomes): Jones, Mandy, Moore, Otter, Robinson, Springett, Webborn.
2. Clinical, Health and Professional Education Group: Dawson, Lucas, Martin, Moore, Sadlo.
3. Laboratory Based Human Movement and Functional Analysis Group: Burden, Folland, Haas, Petty, Maxwell, Moore, Wragg.
The three groups provide a stimulating and supportive framework for both new and experienced researchers. Regular group meetings provide a forum for critical appraisal of output, publication support, discussion of new research ideas and sharing of research experience. They also operate to facilitate collaborative work within the group and with external partners.
Research groups' achievements
All groups have achieved good quality outputs and each contains individuals with international/national profiles who are frequently invited as keynote speakers to prestigious conferences as listed in RA6. The groups provide cultures which aim to produce peaks of excellence in experienced researchers whilst also nurturing and encouraging young researchers who did not reach the quality threshold for inclusion in this exercise. Moore leads research activity and as a matter of policy is an active member of all three groups.
Clinical Sciences Group
The work of this group focuses on outcomes of health care from both patient and therapist perspectives. Established researchers include Mandy in the field of burnout in health professionals and the psychological impact of health interventions including depression, hip surgery and non-gynaecological surgery and Moore, established in the field of measuring the effectiveness of musculoskeletal therapy for low back pain and the development of systems for standardised data collection in outpatient physiotherapy services and patient focused outcome measures. Springett’s work in wound and skin assessment and management has attracted a number of industrial sponsors for contract work researching the effectiveness of foot care products. Developing researchers include Robinson, who is already a nationally recognised expert in podiatric surgery; her growing surgically related research work which includes the management of candida albicans and identifying routes for cross infection with drill techniques is imperative in this emerging field of practice. She has recently been short-listed for a research grant by the Hospital Infection Society. Jones is a developing researcher who is already publishing significant research findings in the field of community stroke rehabilitation and Webborn is a Faculty Fellow whose established work in the field of GP exercise prescription indicates the diversity of interests and also the commitment by this group to the field of healthcare and applied outcomes. Otter is a novice researcher who has been in post for only 1 year, but is already developing expertise in the field of the rheumatoid arthritic foot and temporal characteristics of plantar foot pressures.
Clinical Health and Professional Education Group
Leading this group is Sadlo, an internationally recognised expert in the field of research into problem based learning (PBL) in health professional education. She has been designated as co-ordinator for a pan-European-funded project in occupational therapy education under the E.N.O.T.H.E umbrella. Based on her research in PBL she has also established an innovative curriculum for Occupational Therapy students. We anticipate the development of a centre for PBL research in the University of Brighton in the near future. Lucas is a lead researcher in health promotion, particularly for his well-regarded work illuminating adolescent smoking behaviours. He is a senior grant holder for a number of funded projects. Moore and Martin are developing research into models of clinical and fieldwork education placements. This funded work has already begun to lead to collaborative projects with colleagues in Queensland University, Australia. Dawson, having spent many years working in the Middle East, is now further developing her research expertise in cultural influences on physiotherapy education for applications in the Western World.
Laboratory Based Human Movement and Functional Analysis Group
Established researchers in this group include Moore who with a research team has done much to develop valid and reliable methods of lumbar spine measurement including a range of motion measures and imaging techniques. The team is also developing new methods of measuring peripheral nerve motion. Other established researchers are Burden (EMG applications) and Maxwell (muscle physiology and performance) who have been concerned with the testing and refinement of methodological parameters and experimental design in exercise and health sciences and together with Folland a developing researcher (muscle overload and genotypes) and Wragg, a novice researcher (reliability and validity of field tests of repeated sprint ability) ensure that the scientific analysis of movement has been increasingly applied to sport and health issues with implications for a wide range of subjects, patients and clients. They have gained national recognition for their work in this area. Haas’s work on sway (balance performance reliability and validity; Ashworth scale reliability) and spasticity measurements has attracted much academic and public interest. His current innovative work in Parkinson’s disease and exercise has received funding from the Parkinson’s Disease Society. Petty is a developing researcher, whose work on the effects of lumbar spine postero anterior mobilisation techniques in collaboration with colleagues from Lidcombe University (Australia) and on the grading of manual therapy techniques is contributing to the scientific underpinning of manual therapy concepts.
The HOR runs an open-door policy in order to advise both staff and research students on their proposed or ongoing research activity. A regular newsletter is circulated widely which reports staff and students’ successes including publications, grants awarded, conference presentations, and carries information about new staff and students' research work. A detailed report on research performance and activity is published annually, which is circulated widely within the University and externally to NHS, industrial, commercial and academic contacts ensuring that all stakeholders are aware of the rate, nature and quality of research growth.
Nature and quality of the research infrastructure
The research centre offers working space for core research staff and the student cohort. A dedicated seminar room is available for research purposes. Research facilities include a biomechanics laboratory, a human physiology and performance laboratory and an environmental chamber. A purpose-built human movement and functional analysis laboratory (equipped in 1998 at a cost of approximately £500,000) houses a comprehensive range of new and advanced equipment for the detailed analysis of movement (eg CODA, VIKON, OSI CA 6000 Spine Motion Analysis system) structural imaging (Colour Doppler Ultrasound), and for testing respiratory function, muscle activity (EMG, Biodex) and force generation (Biodex Musgrave footprint, Kistler force platform). The equipment offers the opportunity for integrated and complex monitoring and measurement of human activities and important publications have emanated from work undertaken in this facility. Additionally, the University is currently investing a further £1.8 million on laboratory developments to support sport and exercise sciences which will offer the opportunity for more diversity in collaborative work particularly in physiological and biomechanical sciences. A new professorial appointment in sports science is being made in April 2001.
Training and support for students
The maintenance of good quality support structures, as set out in the QAA Code of practice for research degree programmes, has been a central feature of the University's development over recent years. The University has reorganised its support and study arrangements for research students by establishing 15 research student divisions (RSDs) to offer suitable and supportive environments in which research students can study. In its recent Continuation Audit report (April 2000) the University was praised for commendable progress in the management arrangements for research students since the 1993 audit event.
Each student registering for a research degree is allocated a thesis panel consisting of the Head of School (HOS), the HOR and two or three supervisors. The thesis panel is responsible for offering support and overseeing the progress of the student throughout their research degree. Every student meets with the HOS and the HOR (or their nominees) annually to discuss progress in the previous year. Students also feed back anonymously on their academic experience via an annual monitoring and evaluation form. An overview of the quality of the students’ experience is taken by the Faculty’s Academic Board and by the University’s Research Degrees Committee.
A local research division student handbook in addition to a standard university research student handbook is provided for each student, which gives information to help throughout the duration of the programme. In their induction period students meet with their supervisors and the HOR to plan a programme of related work which might include for example relevant Masters modules from the Faculty of Health’s Graduate Programme (choice of 130 modules) and conference attendances. The HOR provides pastoral support for the research student cohort as a whole. Training in research occurs via the University's Certificate in Research Methods course which runs one evening a week over an academic year. Students join with other students from across the University for these weekly sessions and are supported by action learning sets and a multi-professional team of tutors. Students also attend the CRC and Chelsea School's regular training workshops.
Arrangements to support interdisciplinary or collaborative research
The research groups are multi-professional thus encouraging collaborative research between the professions. In addition these groups provide a forum for interdisciplinary discussion and debate. Strong links exist with research centres in other schools and faculties for research supervision and research activity, e.g. the Institute of Nursing and Midwifery, Bioengineering, Information Technology, Pharmacy, the Centre for Learning and Teaching, Health and Social Policy and the University of Brighton’s NHS R&D Support Unit. The R&D support unit facilitates the formation of research partnerships between NHS and university researchers. There are also established links with UK universities e.g. the University of Kent at Canterbury, where Moore is an honorary Research Fellow, Oxford Brookes University and the University of Ulster, (for student supervision), and with overseas universities, e.g. the University of Queensland Department of Physiotherapy; Lidcombe University Department of Physiotherapy; Karolinska Institute Division of Occupational Therapy, Professor Borell (recently appointed to the First-funded Chair in occupational therapy in Europe) from the Karolinska Institute (Sweden) visits the Centre regularly to support qualitative research work, particularly in the field of gerontology.
Relationships with industry, the public sector and other research users
Relationships have been established with industrial sponsors such as Seton Scholl and Coloplast and Marks and Spencer for footcare product research (subject to confidentiality agreements). These relationships are growing with the success of the recently funded research projects by Springett and in the past by Lang and Whiting. Additionally and more recently links have been established with Cable and Wireless for the development of interactive computer based teaching packages (Mandy).
Moore has worked collaboratively with 14 NHS Trusts over the last five years developing a data collection and outcome measurement tool for outpatient-physiotherapy services. This work has led to the formation of a South Thames Physiotherapy Clinical Audit and Research Development Group which includes representatives from all the Trusts involved and the University of Brighton. There is increasing involvement of staff in local trust R&D activity. For example: Mandy is working with three local trusts to evaluate surgical procedures for total hip replacement; Moore sits on two local NHS Trust R&D committees; Moore, Sadlo, and Martin have close links with managers of relevant Health Care Professions in a large number of trusts within the South Thames region; Lucas is regularly commissioned to undertake research consultancy for the Local Health Authority, eg adolescent smoking behaviours study.
If staff are engaged in substantial research, a one semester sabbatical is offered at a mutually convenient time in order to aid the write-up of the research work. Peer support amongst staff is very strong and the general research culture is vibrant, which helps to motivate new researchers. Staff are encouraged to present at national and international conferences, with the University subsidising travel to and attendance at these conferences.
This return is based on achievement and output within three areas:
1. Food and Health (Cat. A Prof. Peter J. Aggett OBE MSc FRCPCH FRCP DCH; Cat. A* Dr. Eunice Taylor PhD)
2. Bioethics (Cat. A Dr. Mairi Levitt DipEd PhD; Prof. Matti Häyry PhD; Cat. A* Prof. Ruth Chadwick LLB DPhil; Cat. C Prof. J. Stuart Horner MD FRCP FFPHM)
3. Chronic Disease and Rehabilitation (Cat. A Prof. John A. Goodacre MD PhD FRCP; Cat. C Prof. L. Peter Ormerod MD DSc FRCP)
Management of Research Overall responsibility for this Unit of Assessment research rests with the Dean of the Faculty of Health and Head of CPE. The Unit’s research programmes are planned and managed commensurate with University and Faculty aims and policy, and are closely-aligned with governmental (including EU), non-governmental and Foresight research priorities, strategies and policies. Since 1998 Interdisciplinary Research and Training Groups have been established within the UoA to facilitate research in the cognate areas with two principal aims, first to develop and maintain the link between staff at the University and healthcare agencies, and second to aid the bidding for external funding. They operate across traditional professional and sectoral boundaries to bring together staff with cognate interests, to identify core research themes and to establish collaborative projects, as well as to co-ordinate the development of taught postgraduate programmes integrated with these themes. In addition to managing and evaluating research within the Interdisciplinary Research and Training Groups, Goodacre works closely with staff of the UoA to co-ordinate the research seminar programme, assist with the planning of research bids and maintain the research student training programme.
Research Groups – Activities and Achievements The three research areas have each attracted external funding and generated substantial peer-reviewed published output as articles in learned journals, chapters in edited collections and books. The Unit currently supports 10 postgraduate research students including both PhD and MD students. Each of the three areas involves young members of staff who are currently developing their research careers and who are expected to attain levels of output and esteem to merit their inclusion in the next RAE.
1. Food and Health (F&H)
The F&H IDRTG is led by Aggett, who took up post as Head of LPSMH in 1998, having previously been Assistant Director at the Institute of Food Research, Norwich. Research conducted by this group is focused on food and water safety, and nutrition.
1.1 Food and Water Safety.
In view of his other responsibilities in establishing the LPSMH, Aggett has initially concentrated on building research in Food Safety, utilising Taylor’s extensive experience in the Hazard Analysis Critical Control Point (HACCP) approach. Taylor and Aggett, in collaboration with other University Departments and the Public Health Laboratory Services (PHLS), have established research projects closely-aligned to their postgraduate programmes (Food Safety; Food Safety Management; Food Microbiology) which deploy the increased research capability engendered by these programmes. Barriers to the effective implementation of HACCP are being investigated in:
1.2. Nutrition.
Aggett’s research on trace element metabolism in infants, and on zinc deficiency and its impact on protein turnover, has continued since he left the Institute of Food Research. His work on placental transfer of trace elements (funded by Phoenix Medical, £30,000) is being established here with Dr Lea (Biological Sciences, who has been returned in UoA14), and complements work with
2. Bioethics
Research continues to be built upon the foundations described in the 1996 return and is focused on genetic screening and genetically-modified foods. This work combines empirical research with ethical analysis orientated towards the formation of European policy in the field of biotechnology. Specific funded projects in the period of review are as follows:
3. Chronic Disease and Rehabilitation (CD&R)
Goodacre, since joining the University in 1998, has established the CD&R programme by engaging University staff with relevant skills and interests in this field together with colleagues in the University’s partner NHS Trusts, Primary Care Groups (PCGs) and the PHLS. The CD&R IDRTG encompasses multiple specialties and disciplines and possesses generic skills in quantitative and qualitative methodologies, clinical trials design, statistics, health psychology, sociology and biomedical science. Funding has been obtained to appoint two postdoctoral researchers, both of whom are actively involved in project development and supervision, organisation of weekly journal clubs and research meetings. Work is focused on two main topics:
3.1. Novel approaches for health professionals to clinical assessment and care.
Patient perspectives are being characterised and incorporated into work aimed at:
3.2. Immunological mechanisms of chronic diseases.
Research Culture Members of staff in this Unit have organised a substantial number of international, national and professional conferences which have enhanced the Unit’s external recognition. These have included conferences on “Consensus in Bioethics” (1996), “Genetic information: acquisition, access and control” (1997), “Genetic screening: implications for health care professionals” (1997) and “Food for the Future? The impact of genetically-engineered food” (1999), as well as Lancashire & South Cumbria Interdisciplinary Research and Education symposia (three to date have been on Arthritis (1999), Refractory Angina (2000), and Asthma (2001) respectively). The Unit has developed a network of Visiting Fellows from the UK and abroad including Dr. Kalokerinou, University of Cyprus; Dr Siurana, University of Valencia, and Dr Blazquez-Ruiz, University of Navarra. The research seminar programme has brought the following eminent external speakers to the University: Prof Dieppe (MRC Health Services Research Unit, University of Bristol), Prof Holgate (MRC Professor of Immunopharmacology, University of Southampton), Prof Coggon (MRC Epidemiology Unit, University of Southampton), Prof Panayi (ARC Professor in Rheumatology, University of London), Prof Lewkonia (Dept. Medicine, University of Calgary), Prof Haimes (Dept. Social Policy, University of Newcastle), Prof Scott (School of Health, University of East Anglia), Prof Gylling (Dept. Philosophy, University of Helsinki), Prof Davis (Illinois Institute of Technology, Chicago), and Prof Kleinig (City University, New York). The Canadian Society for International Health funded two six-month visiting internships (K. Petrie and J. Marshall) 1997-98, and a Marie Curie fellow, Dr A. Marturano, 2000.
Postgraduate research students The Unit currently accommodates 10 research students (an increase from 3 in 1996) several of whom are jointly-supervised by CPE and LPSMH staff. Supervisory arrangements for research students involve a regular schedule of progress monitoring meetings timetabled at the beginning of each academic year, and an expectation that students will attend and contribute to the research seminar series. In addition, each student is expected to complete a programme of associated studies, which includes compulsory attendance at appropriate research methods modules on Departmental and Faculty masters’ programmes. New students attend a University-wide induction event, managed by senior research supervisors representative of all disciplines and designed to ensure that students become familiar with the principles and processes of achieving a higher degree. Students have access to dedicated facilities, including networked computers, personal desks and storage space.
Other initiatives to enhance interdisciplinary research The research ethos of the Unit enables staff to benefit from access to wider knowledge and collaboration, as result of which one (Taylor) has already achieved promotion to a Research Chair. Aggett serves on several international and national committees that determine and advise on interdisciplinary research priorities, and he and Goodacre sit on R&D Committees of several NHS Trusts and PCGs. Two NHS Trusts (Preston and Chorley; and Wrightington, Wigan and Leigh) are working in partnership with Goodacre to set up Clinical Studies Centres (CSCs) to support, amongst other things, research physiological, metabolic and pharmacological and clinical trials, closely-linked with the Industrial sector. CSCs will provide further opportunities to form stable research partnerships with the NHS Trusts. Members of the Unit contribute towards general development of NHS R&D capability in Lancashire and South Cumbria by advising on study design and methodologies for AHPs and other NHS staff, and by co-organising R&D meetings with NHS Trusts.
Relationships with industry and research users The Unit’s relationships with the NHS are determined by the latter’s needs for enhanced research skills and capability to conduct R&D and to fulfil requirements of clinical and research governance. The Unit’s relationships with industry are closely aligned to the priorities of relevant regional, national and European policy-making and funding bodies, including HEFCE, DoH, OST, DTI, research councils and charities, EU Framework programmes, Foresight panels, and the North West Development Agency.
Staffing Policy
· Improving design and utilisation of assistive devices in chronic diseases.
· Translating knowledge of the psychological, social and cultural determinants of health behaviour into clinical settings.
Results from these studies will enable health professionals to target new healthcare and educational initiatives and resources more selectively and effectively to different subgroups of patients. Current projects being supervised by Goodacre and undertaken by occupational therapists, physiotherapists and nurses include:
· “Development of a new patient-centred functional measure in rheumatoid arthritis (RA)”, which will be validated internationally in collaboration with groups in Europe, USA and Japan, and a closely-related project conducted by a rheumatology nurse in the Burnley NHS Trust to develop such a measure in ethnic populations. These projects are conducted and supervised by a postdoctoral occupational therapist, supported by a research fellowship from AstraZeneca (£126,000).
· “Health needs and NHS use by SLE patients from ethnic minority populations” (conducted by a research nurse in the Blackburn NHS Trust and supported by an NHS R&D project grant, total £120,000) and “Musculoskeletal disability in ethnic communities in Preston” (with K Patel, Ethnicity and Health Unit (returned in UoA41)).
· “Effects of adverse early life experiences in chronic diseases in adulthood” and “Employment strategies for young adults with chronic arthritis” (with Prof Wattam, Dept Social Work (returned in UoA41)), and “Health behaviour in ankylosing spondylitis” (with Dr Smith, Dept of Psychology).
· “Parenting and arthritis: design needs of assistive equipment”, which is an occupational therapist’s PhD project and arises from a major new programme on the theme of “Design and Evaluation of Assistive Technologies in Chronic Disabilities” in collaboration with Dept Engineering and Product Design.
Four abstracts based on the early work from these studies will be presented at the forthcoming British Society for Rheumatology Annual Meeting.
In his previous post Goodacre set up and led a laboratory group which achieved a strong record of biomedical research in the cellular and molecular mechanisms of autoimmune disease, and which received over £330,000 funding from the ARC between 1995-98.
· He is continuing to study bacteria in chronic disease immunopathogenesis, now using two models arising from existing clinical and scientific interests in Lancashire:
1. He has set up a large interdisciplinary collaboration to investigate post-Campylobacter autoimmune sequelae in Lancashire, utilising internationally-renowned Campylobacter surveillance expertise in PHLS Preston (Prof Bolton, returned in UoA14). Epidemiological studies are being conducted by a postdoctoral clinical scientist, funded (£28,000) jointly by the Preston / Chorley NHS Trust, PHLS and ARC, to provide a basis for future biomedical projects. The collaboration involves the PHLS, the Preston and Chorley NHS Trust [Microbiology, Clinical Immunology, Neurology], six rheumatologists, ten general practices, and Prof Leirisalo-Repo (University of Helsinki).
2. In collaboration with Ormerod, he is investigating TB and asthma concurrence in ethnic populations in East Lancashire, utilising the former’s strong expertise in TB and his own in T cell biology.
All new members of staff must have recognised research experience and expertise as a condition of appointment so that they can contribute to the continuing development of established research groups. The Unit includes several post-doctoral research staff who are developing research careers with support and guidance of senior staff in the expectation that they will be returned in the next RAE. These include Dr L. Goodacre (postdoctoral occupational therapist) and Dr S. Zia (postdoctoral clinical scientist), both of whom are conducting projects as members of the CD&R IDRTG (see 3.1 and 3.2 above), and Dr Powell, Dr Eliah and Dr Judd, all recently appointed to posts within the F&H IDRTG (see below). Health service staff from all sectors, including clinicians, doctors, AHPs, and managerial and laboratory, staff, can apply for honorary appointments, which are negotiated with employers and line managers to agree jointly the job plans and appraisal. The Category C members of staff included in this return (Ormerod and Horner) hold honorary appointments and as such have key roles in the Unit’s research and teaching developments. Chadwick left the CPE in September 2000 to take up the post of Professor of Bioethics at Lancaster University. Her replacement, Häyry, took up post in March 2001 and has the necessary background both to maintain and extend activities in philosophical and applied work. Taylor left the LPSMH to take up a Research Chair in Food Safety at the University of Salford in January 2001. Dr Powell, her replacement, possesses established expertise in Food Safety and will start from a higher level of research culture and ethos than was initially available to Taylor.
Prevention and management of falls and injuries in older people: Lamb has completed a systematic review of fall prevention with the Cochrane collaboration (Gillespie et al., 2000 - see RA2). The Chartered Society of Physiotherapy has commissioned two reviews from the group; an effectiveness bulletin for clinicians and a response to the National Service Frameworks for Older People. We have submitted a £700,000 grant application for a multi-centred trial of fall prevention in primary care to the Medical Research Council. We are also working with statisticians at the University of Oxford to improve estimates of fall risk, and clinical methods of screening. We have fostered good collaborative links with the Yale Fall Prevention Group in the USA (Professor Tinetti), and the National Institute of Aging (Dr Guralnik) to further the transfer and development of knowledge concerning fall prevention in the UK. Dr Gough has strong links with falls prevention researchers in Finland and Greece, and has made significant contributions to researching and improving fall prevention services in the Coventry and Warwickshire area. We have been successful in establishing a special interest group in falls prevention research comprising clinicians, public health professionals and academics from Coventry, Warwickshire and Oxfordshire to enhance collaboration and user relevance of research. We have published a number of studies concerning the management of hip fracture (some submitted in RA2), and are developing a research strategy to address this neglected area. Dr Ward has been involved in a large randomised trial of different surgical methods in hip fracture, published in the Journal of Bone and Joint Surgery, 2001.
Mental Health Care: This is an emerging theme. We have been involved in work in using computers to interview patients with psychiatric problems, and more recently, the development and evaluation of an OT led, early intervention programme for psychosis in adolescents. The intervention was well received by practitioners, clients and their families, resulted in two publications (Fischer et al., 2001 Journal of Occupational Therapy) and has been used to support a successful £250,000 bid by Coventry NHS Trust to provide early interventions.
There are currently six research students in the group, who benefit from strong links with the Psychosocial Research Centre, and MSc in manipulative therapy and acupuncture. Lamb was an external supervisor to two additional students, who successfully completed their studies during the census period. As in the Psychosocial Research Centre, many research students are experienced health care professionals, often studying part-time.
The management of research resides with heads of subject groups, designated research leads and directors of research centres. The overall research strategy is agreed at School Board level, and is developed and monitored by the School Research Sub-Committee and Research Degrees Sub-Committee. The School Research Sub-Committee is chaired by Professor Wallace (submitted UoA13), and is concerned with implementing research policies and strategy agreed by the Central University Research Committee, monitoring progress and the award of internal research funds via a competitive process. The Research Degrees Sub-committee is chaired by Professor Barlow, and oversees the management, development and training of post-graduate research students, review of proposals for PhD research, annual monitoring of progress and review of examination arrangements.
8. Comparison with plans in RAE 1996
The Psychosocial Research Centre has achieved its main aim of broadening its research scope to include chronic conditions other than arthritis and to strengthen its link with national priorities. For example, self-management featured in the recent White Paper, Saving Lives: Our Healthier Nation, and led to the establishment of the Expert Patients' Task Force. Consequently, the Centre has extended its work on arthritis to encompass interventions for people with other chronic conditions (e.g. endometriosis, haemophilia, polio, depression, liver disease, diabetes). New research areas have been established on risk perception with projects in breast cancer screening, sports injuries and post-traumatic stress following childbirth. In addition, the accumulation of skills within the Centre led to development and evaluation of a touch therapy programme for parents of children with disabilities. The core of researchers based solely within the Centre has increased and a total of five are entered for the RAE, 3 recently appointed researchers are not submitted. In the 1996 RAE, development of clinical research, and lecturer-practitioner posts were identified as strategic aims. This has been consolidated in the last year, and we feel we have made good progress in this respect. In the 1996 RAE, none of the current staff in the subject groups of physiotherapy, occupational therapy and health sciences were returned. We now have a flourishing post-graduate student community, and are submitting grants to major research councils, with some success. The group is working closely with local NHS providers to develop a research and clinical effectiveness network that is responsive to local and national research agendas, and encourages collaboration with clinical colleagues. We are developing a culture that balances research and lecturing roles, and has proven successful in facilitating the development of younger researchers. The Group has a growing record of publication in peer-reviewed journals, some of which are co-authored with researchers in the Psychosocial Research Centre.
In 1996, we had 4 staff with PhDs and 10 submitted as research active. Now we have 13 staff with PhDs and 17 submitted as research active. In 1996, we had 1 member of staff registered for a PhD and 3 postgraduate research students. Now we have had 20 people registered for PhD's; 5 are staff registered externally or in other departments within the University of East London (UEL); 7 are postgraduate research students with 2 recently transferred to King's. Three staff and 3 students have successfully completed PhD's; 4 within Health Sciences and 2 by staff registered externally.
Research management within the Department
Each research grouping elects a representative to the Research Committee which also has a representative postgraduate student and is chaired by the Research Advisor (Scott) who also represents the Faculty of Science and Health on the Academic Board Research Committee (RA5c). The Departmental Research Committee co-ordinates planning, encourages active researchers, supports grant applications, monitors recruitment and progress of PhD students and ensures effective communication with minutes of each meeting circulated electronically. It also promotes and channels funds for presentations at international conferences to disseminate our findings to target audiences likely to implement those findings. Research projects are managed by individual staff with the support of the Graduate School (RA5c) and of the Research Advisor
Research Groupings, activities and achievements.
Ø Human Motor Performance Group (HMPG - established in 1994)
Hooper (1996-99) an internally funded postdoctoral bioengineer from Iowa, whose expertise and enthusiasm underpinned the movement analysis laboratory and the work of grant funded young researchers, worked with Coutts and Morrissey in investigating trauma and recovery following knee injury. Coutts is continuing to focus on motion analysis following hip replacement and with Cramp looks at effects of training on walking patterns after stroke. Morrissey with Goodwin (1998-2000), Man (1998-2000), Perry (1999-2000) and Klarenta (2000) worked on knee training after injury, transferring to King’s in December 2000; Drechsler worked with Morrissey and has remained at UEL sustaining work on knees with Hudson.
The group has support from Visiting Professors including: Cywinski, Switzerland, Greenwood, RNRU, Homerton Hospital, Rothwell, Institute for Neurology, Queen Square and Vrbová, UCL and clinical links with Medical Consultants Greenwood & Lethman, Homerton Hospital (Scott, Cramp, Bateman, Culpan), Gill, Newham General Hospital (Cramp, Scott), Wade, Rivermead Rehabilitation Centre, (Scott, Bateman, Culpan, Dawes), McAuliffe, Whipps Cross Hospital (Morrissey, Coutts) and King, Royal London Hospital, (Morrissey). Each institution provides accommodation and support for clinically based research and researchers, enabling us to work closely with clinical colleagues
.Achievements (1996-2000) include
Ø Practice Development Research Grouping (PDRG - established in 1996)
This group has built on work done in the area of clinical reasoning, exploration of expert knowledge and of perceptions held by learners at all levels of professional practice. Facilitated respectively by grants from the Chartered Societies of Physiotherapy (CSP) and Occupational Therapy (COT) and using focussed student projects, Bithell and Ryan employed qualitative methodologies to explore the nature of expert knowledge and clinical reasoning. Publications (RA2) and presentations at international and national professional conferences (RA6) provided insight into professional knowledge associated with physiotherapy diagnosis (King & Bithell), musculo-skeletal physiotherapy (Minns-Lowe & Bithell), and paediatric occupational therapy (Ryan). Much of their work has been co-authored with practising therapists leading to increased research links with the workplace.
Collaboration with, and education of NHS managers and clinicians has been enhanced through action research exploring new models of clinical education (Baldry Currens, Bithell), funded by two education consortia (South Essex and South East London). Dissemination of findings has been through local and national presentation and publication (RA2), and has been extended recently with additional funding to facilitate widespread implementation. Recent funding from City and East London Education Consortium (CELEC) (RA4) is for assessing education and training needs of professionals allied to medicine in evidence-based practice (Beeston, Rastall, Ryan). Minns-Lowe returned to act as research assistant on this work.
Ø Applied Sport and Exercise Grouping (ASEG - established in 2000)
Lopes focuses on heart rate variability and respiration both in predicting and assessing risk in Coronary Heart Disease and as a marker of autonomic dysfunction in his work with overtrained elite cyclists with the British Cycling Federation. In addition to analysis of complex waveforms using artificial intelligence with Northern Ireland Bio-Engineering Centre, the Medical Informatics Group and the Northern Ireland Knowledge Engineering Laboratory, he works with Nitzan (Jerusalem) on a fibre optic sensor to assess depth and frequency of breathing. He has established community partnerships to look at the effects of moderate physical activity (walking) in diverse populations such as over 60s, children, pregnant women and those with mental disabilities.
Recently appointed, Trenberth and Burrows provide complementary research experience. Trenberth studies performance prediction of soccer teams; stress amongst football players; and leisure and its use as a strategy for coping with stress. She has ESRC funding for a multi-national project with Australia, Holland, New Zealand and UK on relationships between human resource management, health and performance. Burrows is extending her work on ethnicity and bone mineral density and on menstrual status in female endurance runners. Coombs, an internally funded research assistant (RA) to Garbutt collaborates with Clarys in Belgium to facilitate an ongoing study in the isokinetic laboratory.
Ø Health Studies and Promotion Grouping (HSPG - established in 1997)
Funded projects completed by Rickard include: 'HIV/AIDS Testimonies: the positive impact and lasting legacy', a collection of life-histories from people with HIV/AIDS (1995-2000) and 'The Oral History of Prostitution' recording a social history of prostitution (1997-2000) both with the British Library National Sound Archive. In "Life Testimonies and Health promotion", with the Health Education Authority, life histories were drawn from individuals with experience of being homeless, refugees or young people 'looked after' in care, (1999-2000). The "Newham Gay Men's Survey" was commissioned by East London and the City Health Authority and the London Borough of Newham to undertake a needs assessment of gay men's health promotion. This included an analysis of demographic characteristics, the issues of transience, social class analysis, sexual practices and sexual health needs (1999-2001).
Through both organising conferences and attending seven national and five international conferences (RA6), the grouping has developed a research reputation. Two conferences have been co-organised by Rickard in collaboration with other universities and agencies: In 1998, with UEL Sociology and Lifeline Manchester, ‘Sex Work Reassessed’ was organised and hosted at UEL. In Spring 2000, ‘Pleasure and Danger in the City: Urban Oral History’ was organised in collaboration with the Oral History Society, the BBC, Open University and the Museum of London. ‘Basic counselling skills for HIV/AIDS and sexual health promotion workers and volunteers working with African communities’ was a short course organised in partnership with the Reform Trust in 1998.
Since 1996 Life Sciences has expanded its undergraduate and postgraduate course provision in applied biology, biochemistry, pharmaceutical sciences, biomedical science, sports science, applied nutrition and exercise physiology. Courses are underpinned by research and are designed to produce professionally relevant final awards which, where appropriate, are jointly accredited/validated by professional bodies such as the IMLS. MSc pathways in biomedical science and molecular biology have also developed with substantial research led modules provided by academics from the Research Centre. Staff also contribute to MSc courses organised by the Food Systems Department of the Natural Resources Institute (NRI).
In the last five years the University, public and private sectors have provided nearly £1.5 million to support infrastructure improvements to upgrade and equip research and teaching laboratories, maintaining and expanding our provision in specialist facilities for tissue culture, radio-isotope work, biotechnology, molecular biology, exercise physiology and mass spectrometry. These enhancements will shortly be supplemented by a new NMR facility (500MHz, 300MHz [solid state] and 270MHz) endowed by a grant of £700,000 from the recent HEFCE Research Initiative.
Finally, in recognition of the success of SAM (Grade 4 in RAE 1996), the University has restructured space within the School of Chemical and Life Sciences so as to create an area solely dedicated to research (one entire floor of the Life Sciences building). This has greatly facilitated the interaction of research staff and the establishment of joint research projects.
SAM research is now structured as four interacting research groups, namely molecular biology/medical technology, neurobiology/pharmacology, exercise/sports science and nutrition/food. This represents an increase in number of groups from those submitted in the RAE 1996 (when only three were present).
Each group is led by a senior research active academic. These group leaders meet frequently to consider research strategy, review research progress and grant proposals and to ensure the maximal use of facilities and synergy between groups. Grouping encourages mutual support and ensures that younger or less experienced staff are not isolated. There are also regular meetings of each academic’s research team within each group to discuss the management and progress of each project. There has been a continuing policy of supporting new staff positively, where applicable they are assigned mentors who are established and experienced researchers within the Group. These mentors also provide support in a pastoral way for the less experienced group researchers. Each researcher has an annual appraisal during which agreed goals are set for the year ahead. These appraisals also identify essential needs which are made available where possible.
Monthly seminars by invited speakers of international standing are arranged to enhance research awareness and to provide an opportunity for collaborative studies by all SAM members. This is coupled with weekly internal postgraduate seminars to develop the presentational skills of research students. In addition financial assistance is given to staff to present their findings at International Conferences and research students are encouraged to attend at least one International Conference during the life of their projects. The Research Centre meets once a quarter to discuss and set research strategy.
The University monitors and manages approved PhD research programmes through its Research Degrees Committee. Every postgraduate student has two academic supervisors and progress against research objectives is closely monitored. To ensure adequate strength of supervision at least one of the academics involved must have an established track record of successful postgraduate supervision. Almost all students initially register for MPhil and are subsequently transferred to PhD on submission of a transfer report which is discussed by them and their supervisors. To aid postgraduate students in their research they are encouraged to attend the research methodology unit of the School’s MSc by Research. Finally, the school has a postgraduate tutor and all research students register both with the University and the Research Degrees Committee.
Research Strategy
Research Groupings: Our strategic plan continues to be to prioritise and focus on the development of research in the areas noted above and to rationalise existing and new material and human resources in such a way that interdisciplinary and co-operative research occurs across SAM. We achieve our research goals as a result of natural synergies that exist between the research groupings (see below), and well qualified research active academic
staff. This also enables us to cover molecular biology, physiology, biochemistry and bio-analysis, in an integrated fashion. A synopsis of the activities of the research groups is given below. Research themes overlap between groups making use of interdisciplinary skills especially in molecular diagnostics, chemical analysis, as well as where common skills are required eg molecular biology. This synergy is evidenced by the increasing number of shared author journal articles by different group members.Nutrition and Food, Group A: Prof. Westby leads Food and Nutrition research. The group's activities are centred on food and nutrition in developing countries and food safety, considered within the wider context of contributing to the sustainable livelihoods of poor people. The group has collaborative projects with UK and EU Universities, but the major emphasis is on international collaboration involving more than 50 countries, especially African and Asian, since 1996.
The group addresses practical problems in developing countries and has attracted significant funding from the UK DFID, FAO, International Fund for Agricultural Development and the EU. The international dimension of the group's research is enhanced by secondment of staff to senior management positions in international organisations. These include: the International Foundation for Science as Head of Programme (1995-2002), the World Health Organisation (1996-1999) to work on the WHO Programme of Food Safety and Food Aid and as Chief of Operations at the Food Safety Authority of Ireland, as the West Africa Co-ordinator of the DFID Crop Post-Harvest Research Programme.
Members of the group shared responsibility with NRI staff for the award in 2000 of the Queen's Anniversary Prize for Higher and Further Education. Their work was said to be of "international renown". The citation states that the "practical projects together with its educational and training programmes have brought huge benefit, making a real difference to the lives of thousands of people". A medal was also received for its project "Food Security for the 21st Century" which registered in the Projects Around the World category of Expo 2000. The group was also a part of a project that won 'The World Vision Award for Development Initiative' at the 1997 Worldaware Business Awards.
Academic members of this research group include:
Prof. Westby and Dr. Bainbridge whose main research interests are in post-harvest aspects of tropical root crops. They have developed an understanding of the major mechanisms of cyanogen reduction during cassava processing. Using these findings they have adapted and tested improved processing techniques to benefit the nutrition of poor people in Africa. They have published an authoritative guide to the quality assessment of food crops (ISBN 0-85954-400-1), and an innovative distance learning guide for extending research on cassava processing (ISBN 0-85954-456-7). Models for the optimisation of legume germination to maximise nuritional quality have also been developed. Prof. Westby played a lead role in the FAO/IFAD initiative to develop a "Global Strategy for Cassava Development". Since 1996 he has won research projects valued at over £1.88 million which included the extension and successful execution of a DFID Regional Africa Project (1993-1996; 1996-1998) valued at £1.02 million.
Dr. Myhara (Senior Scientist) joined the University from the Sultan Qaboos University, Oman in 1999. His main research interest is the optimisation of food processing operations. He has designed and validated an artificial neural intelligence model to predict the stability of foods based upon chemical composition and moisture control that optimises retention of vitamins, and prevents microbial and oxidative degradation. He has also investigated the chemical and sensory changes occurring during maturation of tropical fruits. In addition to peer reviewed publications, this has resulted in the publication of an authoritative guide to the quality improvement of dates. A new area of work has been developed to investigate and optimise (using isothermal calorimetry and NMR imaging) the thermodynamic and kinetic parameters associated with the osmotic drying of foods.
Molecular Biology/Medical Technology, Group B: This group, led by Prof. Bruce, has expanded significantly since the last RAE, due in part to the merger of the separate Molecular Sciences and Medical Technology research groups which existed previously. It continues to have
a wide range of research interests involving process engineers, biochemists, molecular biologists, geneticists, microbiologists, software engineers and statisticians within and outside the University. There are also researchers and secondees from academic and industrial centres in the UK and abroad visiting or working with individuals in the Group. Current research concentrates upon: (i) the genetics and biochemistry of halogenated aromatic herbicide and pesticide dissimilation by B. cepacia, (ii) methods and product development for molecular biology/diagnostics, (iii) magnetisable solid phase supports (iv) DNA/RNA modification chemistries, (v) biosensors for mycotoxins (vi) bioanalysis for mycotoxins using Saccharomyces cerevisiae, (vii) Bacillus spp, (viii) medical NMR and mass spectrometry (MS).
The group has attracted significant, >£2 million, BBSRC, EPSRC, DTI and Industrial funding over the last 5 years, and this has continued to include LINK, ROPA, EPSRC and TCS grants. Most recently the group has started to attract EU funding (FP5-RTD 5.207 million Euro). Many of the grants have specifically been for process and hardware innovations in the general area of molecular biology and diagnostics. These have, and will have, a significant impact in health and medicine diagnostic processes. Major collaborations and research grants are held with other academic, government agencies and companies including; Hercules Limited, AKZO (Organon Teknika), Whatman Plc Hybaid Ltd, Techne (Cambridge) Ltd, the Central Public Health Laboratories (London), the Food Research Association Laboratory ([FRA] Leatherhead), and the Forensic Science Service ([FSS] DNA profiling laboratories, Birmingham). International collaborations include the Instituto Zooprofilattico (Perugia, Italy), Universita di Urbino (Italy), Proligo GmbH (Hamburg, Germany), MIRA Diagnostica GmbH (Leverkusen, Germany), Savyon Diagnostics Ltd (Tel Aviv, Israel) and Bar-Ilan University (Tel Aviv, Israel).
Academic members of this research group include;
Prof. Bruce, Drs. Hurst (Senior Lecturer in Molecular Biology) and Davies (Senior Lecturer in Bio-organic Chemistry) who form a sub-grouping with interests in areas (i) to (iv) above. Dr. Davies' work also overlaps with that of the pharmacology/neurobiology group. Since 1996 these individuals have successfully supervised 6 PhD students and an MPhil student to completion. Specific areas of collaboration and research can be highlighted by the following:
FSS: development of hybrid capture silica-magnetite based materials for sperm head enrichment for DNA isolation and profiling in rape and sexual assault cases using antibodies provided by Prof. Harry Moore, University of Sheffield.
CPHLS: have recently awarded 5 joint PhD studentships to the group for: (i) development and application of Helicobacter pylori surveillance to improve antimicrobial treatment; (ii) molecular epidemiology of human cryptosporidiosis with particular reference to the identification of Cryptosporidium infectious to humans in farm animals and the environment; (iii) sensitive salivary assays using PCR-amplified detection methods: application to the monitoring of measles, mumps and rubella vaccination programmes; (iv) development of novel molecular methods for the detection and characterisation of human gastrointestinal pathogens; and (v) developing a strategy for the in vitro detection of VTs by means of their N-glycosidase activity.
Universita di Urbino: joint masters in biotechnology with EU and British Council funding for staff exchange.
Dr. Bishop, (Senior Lecturer in Microbiology) with special interests in Bacillus spp. classification and method development for spore DNA extraction. This has been with particular reference to the use of wild type or enhanced Bacillus thuringiensis strains as pesticides in the third world and more recently the identification and discrimination of Bacillus species involved in food poisoning. This work has received funding from DFID and more recently a collaborative link with the CPHLS has been formed with respect to food poisoning Bacillus species. This latter work is also relevant to that of the Nutrition and Food Research Group.
Dr. Smith (Reader in Microbial Biochemistry), whose principal interests lie in enzymes that degrade xenobiotic compounds (notably 2,4-dichlorophenol hydroxylase, EC 1.14.13.20), the outer membrane proteins of the cell walls of phytophathogens (Pseudomonas syringae and Erwinia amylovora), lipopolysaccharide (LPS) side-chain and extracellular polysaccharide (EPS) structure in relation to disease. The work on LPS resulted in the characterisation of the structure of the Pseudomonas common antigen. His collaborations include PHLS-CAMR (Porton Down), East Malling Research Station, INRA - Angers (France), and Dr. J-P Cabral of University of Porto (Portugal). Most recently he has been developing research in the extra-cellular polysaccharide and lipopolysaccharide of Pseudomonas strains isolated from cystic fibrosis patients in order to see if these are involved in gel formation in pulmonary fluid and thereby can lead to an increase in mucus secretions viscosity. He currently supervises a Post-Doctoral Fellow and 2 PhD research students one of which received funding from the Perry Foundation (£40,000).
Dr. Howells (Senior Lecturer in Analytical Chemistry) is an interdisciplinary researcher with interests in tumour classification and response to therapy by NMR both in vivo and in vitro in conjunction with ex-colleagues at St. George’s Hospital (London). In addition she has concentrated on analytical NMR and capillary electrophoretic approaches to biological fluids analysis particularly lipids profiling in plasma and defining patterns for urine and using these in disease diagnosis. Dr. Howells will be responsible for the new NMR facility and a research technician to support its work.
Dr. Evans (Reader in Molecular Genetics), and Prof. Coker (Professor of Food Safety), form a sub-grouping with overlapping interests in the development of methods for the control of food contaminants, which are deleterious to public health in both developed and developing countries. Prof. Coker has been particularly involved in the control of mycotoxins for some twenty four years and has led the development of a variety of analytical and detoxification procedures. This sub-grouping's current interests include the development of bioassays, using genetically modified microorganisms, for the study of the toxicity of mycotoxins, and other toxins; and the development of an immunosensor for the determination of mycotoxins. Their work is funded by DFID and the EU and overlaps with the Nutrition and Food group.
All of the above staff are classed as category A. The final member of this group is Prof. Mallet who is classed as category C. Prof. Mallet left Kings College School of Medicine ([KCL] London) and moved his facility of 3 mass spectrometers to the University of Greenwich as a result of its reorganisation. This has caused the development of a Centre for Mass Spectrometry at the University which is funded by the British Heart Foundation. Prof. Mallet interacts with many Research Centre members providing a mass spectrometric analysis service. Recently a Hewlett Packard capillary electrophorisis system has been purchased for Dr. Howells which will be mounted on one of the mass spectrometers to further develop aspects of biological mass spectrometry of body fluids. Prof. Mallet continues his collaborations with ex-colleagues at KCL and this is reflected in the significant numbers of journal papers in which he is co-author.
Pharmacology/Neurobiology, Group C: This group is headed jointly by Drs. Harbige (Reader in Nutrition and Immunology), who joined the University in 1996 from St. Thomas' Hospital, London and Leach (Reader in Pharmacology and Drug Development). Specifically Dr. Harbige's interests are in fatty acids, and related lipids, and their role and significance in immune system function and immune-mediated disorders of the CNS. Dr. Leach's interests centre around the use of neuroprotective drugs and surrogate markers of cerebral ischaemic damage with respect to cerebral trauma, stroke and epilepsy. Research is supported by grants from the Henry Smith Charity, Scotia Pharmaceuticals Plc, CeNeS Ltd, Glaxo Smith Klein and Quest Pharmaceuticals.
The third member of this group is Dr. Habtemariam (Senior Lecturer in Biomedical Sciences), who has recently joined Greenwich from the University of Strathclyde where he held a Glaxo-JAC lectureship. His area of research is natural products chemistry/drug discovery, with particular interests in plant extracts as anti-inflammatory agents, integrin mediated cell adhesion and immune cell function and its modulation. Dr. Habtemariam has collaborations with the University of Strathclyde, Scotland, Centro de Investigacion Cientifica de Yucatan (CICY), Mexico and Southern Cross University, Australia.
Exercise/ Sports Science, Group D: This is a relatively small group with currently only one research active, academic staff member Dr. Price, a Senior Lecturer in Sports Science, appointed in 1997. The group is rapidly developing and a number of other academic staff members are being supported to attain 'research active' status. Dr. Price's interests are in thermo-regulation of disabled athletes and significant investment has been made by the University (in excess of £300,000) into new laboratories and equipment for the development of both research and teaching in this general area. Dr. Price is an accredited member of British Association for Sports and Exercise Science, ([BASES] research) and is currently working towards the accreditation of the sports science laboratories by that organisation. This group is involved with the 'Greater London Cycling Sports Science Support Project' and 4 international athletes (throwing and sprinting) use the Sports Science facility for performance assessment and enhancement. His research is currently supported by 2 MSc students and it is likely that further postgraduate students will be recruited to this area.
Relevance of SAM research: It continues to be the case that almost all of the research of the SAM group is relevant to areas highlighted in Foresight 2015 as areas of national and international importance. Specifically the areas of (i) 'Ageing Population', (ii) 'Chemicals', (iii) 'Crime Prevention', (iv) 'Health Care' and (v) 'Food Chain and Crops for Industry' (Foresight.gov.uk).
Istituto Zooprofilattico: transfer and establishment of diagnostic methods and materials and help in setting up regional laboratories for GMO testing and development of hybrid capture silica-magnetite based materials for Brucella, Listeria and Mycobacterium detection in milk (DNA based).
The Future: Our aim for the future is simple, we intend to continue to build upon the processes already initiated and on our past successes. In the first instance we will ensure that new staff appointed in Life Sciences will continue to come from strong research backgrounds with a record of publication and will have worked in areas of topical interest, preferably overlapping with those of existing SAM members.
Specific examples of Research Group future work are:
The Pharmacology/Neurobiology group: Dr Leach's future work will involve the characterisation of the ion channel actions and mechanisms of action of the neuroprotective agent sipatrigine (in phase II clinical trials for stroke) and related chemical structures in relation to their pharmacological properties. These studies will be carried out in collaboration with: CeNes Ltd, Glaxo Smith Kline, De Montfort University, Wolfson Institute of Biomedical Research (UCL), University of Tor Vargata (Rome) and the Institute of Psychiatry.
Dr. Harbige will continue with a phase II clinical trial of specific fatty acids in relapsing-remitting multiple sclerosis (MS) with clinical colleagues at Kings, Guy's and St. Thomas' Hospital (Dr. Sharief, Consultant Neurologist). Further work will establish the relationship between membrane fatty acids and cytokines, the regulatory effects of these molecules in vitro and the characterisation of cytokine/eicosanoid dysregulation in in vivo models of MS (Dr. Amor, Imperial College School of Medicine and Dr. D. Pham-Dinh, CNRS, University of Paris). Collaborative work with Prof. M. Crawford and Dr. K. Ghebremerkel (UNL) will continue on infant nutrition in relation to brain and immune system development.
The Molecular Biology/Medical Technology group: Dr Smith will continue his research efforts to elucidate the potential interaction between bacterial cell surface and host lung epithelial cell polysaccharides, in the development of Cystic Fibrosis whilst Dr. Howells will continue her studies in the use of NMR in the diagnosis and management of tumours and analysis of body fluids. Prof. Bruce, Drs. Davies and Hurst will be using the EU-FP5 grant to investigate the use of silica-magnetite nano-particles and novel phosphoramidite chemistries for new diagnostic strategies in medicine. Dr. Bishop will continue his investigations into Bacillus taxonomy and epidemiology whilst Dr. Evans and Prof. Coker will continue with the development of biosensors for the determination of food toxins and bioassays to evaluate both toxin/toxin and toxin/host interaction. Finally Prof. Mallet has applied to the Wellcome Trust for a grant to support investigations into 'Markers for Oxidative Stress in Muscular Disease' and will continue to oversee the mass spectrometry service for the School as a whole.
The Food and Nutrition group: will continue to apply a multidisciplinary approach to key issues within the food-nutrition-health continuum maintaining a developing country focus. A variety of key issues will be addressed which determine the quality, safety and nutritional status of a range of foods including root crops, cereals and edible nuts, e.g. mechanisms of cyanogens elimination during the fermentation of cassava. Multi-disciplinary research into root crop processing will be developed and expanded within the context of the Global Cassava Development Strategy.
The Exercise and Sports Science group: is developing rehabilitation oriented research (e.g. gait analysis, osteopathic treatments, fatigue and muscle rehabilitation, nutritional aspects of energy expenditure, and health promotion in a range of populations). Particularly, Dr. Price will be developing themes concerned with peak and submaximal oxygen uptake (in collaboration with the University of Luton) and thermoregulatory responses including leg blood flow in relation to calf skin temperatures during incremental and submaximal upper body exercise. Also cooling strategies during prolonged exercise in hot conditions relating to both able-bodied and disabled populations in both rehabilitation and sporting scenarios, particularly the spinal cord injured who demonstrate lower body thermal dysfunction.
· Research activity has increased
2. Research Structure and Environment
2.1 Research Groups
Research within this area is divided into two sections which reflect the two Departments from which this submission is made, with further division of research groupings:
Department of Art & Arts Therapies: Faculty of Art & Design
Department of Social Care: Faculty of Health & Human Sciences
The Research Groups are:
Art Therapy and Learning Disabilities including Autism
Dance and Therapy
Loss, Trauma and the Arts Therapies Research Centre
Eating Disorders
Each group has developed a coherent focus and strategy while sharing common aims and objectives across the two Faculties. Cross-collaboration is encouraged, as is collaboration, both national and international, with other institutions. An outline of each area is given below.
2.2 Art Therapy and Learning Disabilities including Autism
Postdoctoral research further developing the ‘Art Therapy with Children who have Autism’ project conducted by Dubowski & Evans. This work is partly applied research in reference to the methods of therapeutic intervention and partly pure research related to an understanding of symbolic functioning. Dr. Dubowski is also developing work into the relationship between symbolic thinking and imagination in children with autism. A paper outlining this work, Transitional Objects, Autistic Objects & Imagination, was given at the 1999 ‘Arts Therapies in Learning Disabilities and Autism’ conference.
Within the focus on Efficacy Research in Arts Therapies and Learning Disabilities, the work in this area, begun in 1998, will be completed in 2002, involving the analysis of existing hospital records filed by Arts Therapists. (A PhD Scholarship was awarded to Helen Quenet to work alongside Dr. Dubowski on this project). Phase two (2002 – 2006) will develop a method of record-keeping using this data, accessible to text and statistical analysis, to be piloted by approximately 100 practitioners nation wide. It is planned that this will eventually lead to the development of a central facility enabling a regular national audit of outcome measures with this client group. Dr. Dubowski delivered a paper outlining this project to the 1999 ECArTE Conference (European Consortium for Arts Therapies Education).
Collaboration with the Horizon NHS Trust has included a 1998 national conference on the theme of Efficacy Measures in the Arts Therapies, and in 1999 on the theme of Clinical Assessment in Arts Therapies, (Published in 2000). Both conferences were hosted by the University of Hertfordshire. The national Learning Disabilities and Autism: The Creative Dimension conference (1999) held in London will have proceedings published by Jessica Kingsley. (Edited by Dr J. Dubowski, anticipated publication date in 2001). The second conference, The Challenge to Create will take place in April 2001 again in collaboration with Horizon NHS Trust.
2.3 Dance and Therapy
The Arts Therapies focus within the Counselling Group has as its central theme an interest in psychological and therapeutic issues relating to the body-mind relationship. Our principal achievements in this area are the publication of Julia Buckroyd's book, The Student Dancer, which incorporates and develops much of her research since 1986. Helen Payne's extension of her interests in dance therapy into authentic and creative movement has brought her international recognition resulting in the publication of her book on the subject in Italian, Danzeterapia e Movimento Creativo. Maggie Turp’s work argues for full consideration to be given to a client’s use or abuse of physicality within the context of verbal psychotherapy.
2.4 Loss, Trauma and the Arts Therapies Research Centre
This newly established centre has a focus on bereavement, work with refugees, poverty and social exclusion including anthropological contributions, trauma including PTSD, and working with the terminally ill.
The work of the centre includes a collaborative project with Addenbrooks NHS Trust, Cambridge that has been in place since 1997 and will continue until 2001. Preliminary findings have been delivered during the EXILES conference (1998) and in several publications. (D. Dokter 1997. 1998. Dr A. Gersie. 1997). S. R. Johnsons work into the relationships between the Arts Therapies and Medical Anthropology relate to this focus, as has the research and publications into the Therapeutic use of Story-telling led by A. Gersie. Helen Payne’s book, Leave No Stone Unturned and Eileen Smith’s book, Integrity and Change both concern themselves with the welfare of vulnerable and excluded groups.
2.5 Eating Disorders
Julia Buckroyd continues to lead this area, which has expanded into an ongoing project working in the community with women who eat compulsively. A bid has been made to West Herts. Health Authority to fund a specialist clinic for adolescents with bulimia and anorexia. This will provide a research, as well as treatment, environment in the area of primary and community care.
2.6 Research Facilities
The Research Facility within the Faculty of Art & Design provides well-equipped accommodation for both staff and research students. The excellent computer facilities include the availability of a wide range of specialist software. Staff have access to a number of established centres of health research within the University, these include HRDSU (Health Research and Development Support Unit) and CRIPACC. (Centre for Research in Primary and Community Care). In 2000 the Dept. of Health & Social Care established the CRC (Centre for Research in the Community) with representatives from Counselling, Social Work, Criminal Justice, Mental Health and Learning Disability. Start-up funding has been provided by the University together with physical and administrative resources. Both Julia Buckroyd and Maggie Turp are members involved in projects related to the treatment of eating disorders and self-harm.
3. Staffing Policy
All contracted staff have time allocated for research and self-managed study. In addition, research-active staff with registered research projects are further supported with remission against teaching where appropriate. The Faculty research budgets are managed by research co-ordinators monitored by the Faculty Research Policy Committee. A regular series of research seminars provides opportunities to share progress on projects with the research community. In addition, the Faculty provides a seminar series for research students that also includes an element of supervisor training. There has been an increase in overall research activity. Philippa Brown’s work has a focus on the understanding of Group Art Therapy processes. Other changes include the appointment of Michèle Wood who has contributed greatly to the Loss, Trauma and the Arts Therapies Group.
4. Research Strategy
4.1 Introduction
Both Faculties continues to develop and support graduate education by the introduction of new courses at Masters level and an increase in the research student population. In the Faculty of Art and Design the achievement of 'Excellent' (22) at Subject Review in 2000 partly reflects the strategy of fostering links between research and teaching across the Faculty. Staff have also submitted to UoA 64 and 65 for the 2001 RAE. In the Faculty of Health and Human Sciences staff have benefited from the very strong health sciences research culture. In both Faculties our research strategy provides opportunities for collaboration and sharing of expertise and good practice across the diversity of our work:
4.2 Aims and Objectives
Our focus on clinical excellence and measurement of efficacy has lead to specific aims and objectives that rely on research partnership and collaboration with service providers. To these ends we have established partnerships and collaborative projects with local NHS funders as well as other national and overseas clinics. This specific policy has also led to the recruitment of overseas research students based both in Europe and the USA. Specific aims and objectives within this area at the local level include an anorexia and bulimia clinic based in St. Albans to be funded by West Herts, Health Authority. We will continue to develop our work with compulsive eaters and seek funding from Eastern Region NHS. We will continue our partnerships with the Horizon NHS Trust and Cambridge Heath Authority. The areas of work that we span include counselling and psychotherapy as well as the arts therapies. These disciplines have traditionally relied on methodologies based on reflective practice with a particular focus on case studies. Whilst embracing these established modes of enquiry, we have also been at the forefront of developing a diverse methodological framework that relies on both qualitative and quantitative techniques. Current outcomes included in this submission reflect these trends. Whilst opportunities for external funding for research within these areas have been minimal, we anticipate that this is likely to change significantly in the next RAE period. Our aim to support staff research includes providing opportunities for registering for research degrees and for the provision of remission against teaching for specific projects registered with the Faculty.
4.3 Research Management and Monitoring
University Level
The University Research Policy Committee is responsible for co-ordinating research efforts across the institution including the monitoring of research funds, infrastructure and policy. The Research Degrees Committee is responsible for the registration and support of research students within the University Strategic Plan for Research. This work is supported by University Generic Research Methodology Courses and the Masters by Research and M.Res schemes instigated by the University in 1997. A wide range of required training prepares and updates staff with responsibility for supervising research.
Since 1998, the University has established a Graduate School and Graduate Board of Studies, which has responsibility for cross-faculty co-ordination, infrastructure and support for research students. Each Faculty is represented by an Associate Dean for Research who encourages cross/multi-disciplinary research efforts. Since 1998 the University has benefited from its new Learning Resource Centre which offers excellent support for research including super/JANET facilities, an extensive range of research journals in both electronic and hard copy and extensive computing facilities.
(a) Faculty of Art & Design
(b) Faculty of Health and Human Sciences
The research committee’s structure follows the same pattern as the Faculty of Art & Design. Research is managed by the Faculty Research Policy Committee responsible for strategic planning and management. The Research Degrees Committee is responsible for research student academic quality and welfare. The Research Leader for Counselling sits on both these committees. In developing research ideas and projects, staff have access to HRDSU and CRIPACC for methodological and statistical support. The faculty has a specialist subject ethics committee which considers research proposals submitted by staff and students. In 2000 the Dept. of Health & Social Care established the ‘Centre for Research in the Community’ with representatives from Counselling, Social Work, Criminal Justice, Mental Health and Learning Disability. Start-up funding has been provided by the University together with physical and administrative resources. Both Julia Buckroyd and Maggie Turp are members.
5.1 Faculty / Departmental Level
The Faculty of Art & Design runs a weekly Research Seminar Programme. Within Counselling the Counselling Research Group and the Staff Development Group meet monthly. A new cross-Faculty Eating Disorders Forum has been established with links to the NHS. The Centre for Community Research also offers a monthly seminar programme.
5.2 Local Level
5.3 International/National Level
We are active in three areas:
This provides a national conference framework for people involved with these client groups, details can be obtained from the web-site at:
Formed by Kathy Evans, which now provides a national forum for practitioners with regular meetings and seminars.
Brings together an international network of practitioners and researchers working with refugees and migrants. This follows the highly successful international conference in collaboration with The Medical Foundation for the Victims of Torture (UK) and the Pharos Foundation for Refugee Healthcare (The Netherlands) organised and hosted by the University in 1998.
5.4
Within the Faculty of Health & Human Sciences group, the newly validated MA in Counselling Enquiry includes specialist modules in research methodologies. A new MA in Eating Disorders is currently being developed. Within the Faculty of Art & Design the MA in Art Therapy, MA in Dramatherapy and MA in Dance Movement Therapy all have methodology modules incorporated into the curriculum.
At the level of clinical training in both Counselling and the Arts Therapies research methodology related to evaluation and efficacy are provided. Research students are encouraged to contribute to theory seminars providing a useful avenue for dissemination of findings to trainee therapists.
5.5 Resources
Following RAE 1996 our UoA 11 submission scored 2 (with the Arts Therapies flagged) as a result, as well as the Dev. R support, the Arts Therapies Area has received a University Grant of 20K per annum. The University has funded full-time PhD scholarships for the periods 1996 - 1999 and 1999 - 2002. Since 1996 the area has employed a number of part-time Research Assistants as well as providing staff cover for research active staff. The Counselling group used a University research grant of £20,000 to employ Maggie Turp as an Independent Investigator working alongside Julia Buckroyd. In October 1999 Ms Buckroyd was awarded a European Social Fund grant of £2,500 to carry out research on the assessment of clients for counselling. The first of three papers resulting from this project has now been submitted for publication. In January 2000 she was awarded an ESF Grant of £6,500 (with matching University Funding) for an investigation into treatment for women who eat compulsively. The project was completed in June 2000 and the data is currently being analysed prior to submission for publication. Ms Buckroyd has been awarded a further grant of £1,800 to continue this work.
6. Research Outputs
The establishment of the Arts Therapies Research Library, a collaborative project between the University of Hertfordshire and Jessica Kingsley Publications, provides a new peer reviewed vehicle for research dissemination. Between 1997 – 1999 Phil Jones established the infrastructure for the Journal. He was the acting editor for the library until the appointment of Vicky Karkou in 2001. Vols. I and II, Resistance, Destructiveness and Refusal are to be published in 2001. Vols. III, IV, and V are in preparation.
We have contributed to established events such as to the International ECArTE Conferences as well as hosting specialised events ourselves. These include the formation of Creative Dimensions – The Arts Therapies in Learning Disabilities and Autism in partnership with the Horizon NHS Trust. The first conference Research and Innovation held in November 1999 included contributions from Prof. Ann Cattanach and Prof. Tony Wigram and a 9-chapter book based on the proceedings is currently being prepared. A second conference will be taking place in April 2001 under the title of The Challenge to Create. Other important events we have contributed to include the International Innovations in Psychiatry conference, the Pan American Congress of Psychosocial and Behavioural Oncology and the International Congress of Group Psychotherapy. Julia Buckroyd has twice presented papers at the International Association for Dance Medicine and Science (1997, 1999). She has also presented a paper to the International Organisation for the Transition of Professional Dancers (1998) and to the Not Just Anybody conference held simultaneously in The Hague and Toronto (2000).
Staff have also contributed to established journals such as Inscape, Dramatherapy, the Japanese Bulletin of Arts Therapy and other specialised peer reviewed journals such as the British Medical Anthropology Review, the Journal of Contemporary Health, and the European Journal of Psychotherapy, Counselling and Health.
7. Research Studentships
Kathy Evans was awarded her PhD in 1998, and produced a number of joint publications with Dr J. Dubowski over the period of her research. She has been a member of the joint working party for the establishment of the 'Resources for Autism' clinic in North London and in 2000 she was appointed as the Clinical Director for the Centre. She has co-authored with Marijka Rutten-Saris, who progressed from MPhil to PhD in 2000 and will be submitting her thesis for examination in 2001. In 1998 Helen Quenet was appointed to a University Studentship to work with Dr J. Dubowski. Some initial findings were included in the Key Note Paper presented by Dr J. Dubowski to the 5th. ECArTE Conference in 1999 and some joint publications have been submitted for publication. Dr A. Gersie was awarded a PhD by Published Work in 2000. Phil Jones has now submitted his portfolio of publications for examination in 2001. Maggie Turp registered for this degree in 2000.
In our 96 RAE submission we identified a number of areas that have continued to develop. In the areas of learning disabilities and autism, as well as several publications and a successful PhD, we have hosted a major national conference (November 1999). We have continued to support the development of the Autism Resource Centre. Efficacy research into learning disabilities is now very well developed. Collaboration with Addenbrooks Hospital continues. Research into the application of Art Therapy in Palliative Care has been another continuing focus.
The Eating Disorders Research Focus moved from an Arts Therapies bias towards Counselling. Since 1996 Julia Buckroyd has focused her investigations on eating disorders in professional dance trainees Progress in this area continues with her work on compulsive eaters. Maggie Turp has extended this work into the area of body consciousness relating eating disorders to the larger framework of psychosomatics.
The Faculty of Art & Design’s Associate Dean for Research is responsible for chairing the Faculty Research Policy Committee (FRPC) and representing the Faculty at central committees. The FRC is also responsible for the Faculty Strategic Plan for Research and regularly reports to both the Faculty Board and Faculty Academic Quality Committee. The Faculty Research Degrees Committee (FRDC) chaired by the Faculty Research Tutor has responsibility for registration, support and monitoring of research students as well as the formulation and implementation of a Faculty Strategic Policy for research student support. Research infrastructure has been greatly enhanced since our 1996 RAE submission following our move, in 1998, to the current new purpose built Faculty of Art & Design site on the main campus of the University.
The Primary Care Research Network for Hertfordshire (Hertnet), based at the University, provides a forum for debate in the areas of primary and community care. The arts therapies area is a member of The Hertfordshire Arts Therapies Development Consortium and has hosted two annual research conferences. We maintain close links with the Horizon NHS Trust with whom we have collaborative projects. Counselling sponsored the Talkback (a county wide network of mental health professionals) conference in 2000.
· The Art Therapy and Autism Group
Collaborative projects with a number of agencies have been developed and implemented since 1996, including Addenbrooks NHS Trust, The Autism Resource Centre (London), Horizon NHS Trust and the Dept of Forensic Psychiatry, Rheinische Kliniken, Bedburg-Hau in Germany. In addition we are direct partners with Jessica Kingsley Publications, Arts Therapies Research Library. We continue to be active within ECArTE collaborating in two major conferences, 1997 in London for which we chaired the Organising Committee, hosted by the Central School of Speech and Drama and 1999 hosted by the University of Munster in Germany. We also published the full proceedings of the ECArTE 1995 conference held in Ferrara, Italy in 1998. Collaboration with the Horizon NHS Trust has included a 1998 national conference on the theme of Efficacy Measures in the Arts Therapies, and in 1999 on the theme of Clinical Assessment in Arts Therapies. Both conferences were hosted by the University of Hertfordshire. The national Learning Disabilities and Autism: The Creative Dimension conference (1999) held in London will have proceedings published by Jessica Kingsley. Julia Buckroyd’s research on assessment was conducted in collaboration with the Women’s Health Information Service (ESF Funded Project). The work on Compulsive Eating is in collaboration with The Women’s Resource Centre (ESF Funded).
9. Future plans
We anticipate that the formation of the Arts & Humanities Research Board will open new opportunities for research funding applications for the Arts Therapies.
Continuing and future research plans fall into the following areas:
9.1 Art Therapy & Autism
Postdoctoral research further developing the Art Therapy with Children who have Autism project conducted by Dubowski & Evans.
9.2 Efficacy research in Arts Therapies
The preliminary work in the area of learning disabilities, in collaboration with Horizon NHS Trust, begun in 1998 will be completed in 2002. Arts Therapies Efficacy in Psychiatry with a particular focus on methodological development has been taking place between 1997 – 2001 in collaboration with Addenbrookes and the Rheinische Kliniken, Bedburg-Hau, Germany. This work has resulted in one published paper in Kunst und Therapie and a second paper has been accepted for publication in 2002.
9.3 Dance and Therapy
Julia Buckroyd will continue her research on the emotional welfare of professional dancers with projects on the use of the mirror in dance training and students’ perceptions of their training. A joint project with the University of Amsterdam is planned to investigate the effects of professional dance training on trainees’ self-esteem. Funding will be sought from EU/WHO.
9.4 Arts Therapies and Ethnic Diversity in Client and Therapist Populations
A collaborative project with Addenbrooks NHS Trust, Cambridge has been in place since 1997 and will continue until 2001. D. Dokter will continue her research in collaboration with Dept. of Forensic Psychiatry, Rheinische Kliniken, Bedburg-Hau, Germany. In addition, Ms Dokter is also involved as a single researcher with Arts Therapies as a form of Supportive Psychotherapy for Asylum Seekers and Refugees.
9.5 Body / Mind Interrelationship
Maggie Turp has been commissioned to write a book for MacMillan, Psychosomatic Health, (estimated date of publication, March 2001), and has a number of papers at various stages of development, continuing her existing themes. She plans work on the relationship between touch/movement and well-being in the elderly population. Ms Turp is also involved with staff at the Tavistock Clinic/UEL with a view to an edited book entitled
‘The Physicality of the Self’.
9.6 Encouraging new researchers within the Department
Maggie Turp is a new active researcher. She was recruited as a .5 researcher for 3 years in September 1996 and at the same time for .2 with the money from the last RAE. This major commitment from UH has facilitated both Maggie's own development and the development of a research culture in Counselling. Eileen Smith has been integrated within the Counselling research team from the Counselling Service and has become an active researcher.
Within the Arts Therapies area we have been encouraging other staff in the Department to conduct research and have their findings either published or presented at conferences. Subsequently a new research group has been formed under the leadership of Michèle Wood including Philippa Brown and Richard Lanham. This 'Art Therapy process analysis group' plans to conduct research into a number of related areas including the study of the evolution and change of imagery within the art therapy context and the effect of group process on image construction. Richard Lanham has published two articles in INSCAPE, the Journal of the British Association for Art Therapy.
Radiography Research Group Achievements
Radiography has made a significant contribution to research into the developing roles of radiographers and the consequent need for educational and organisational change. More recently, research has investigated clinical decision-making using innovative simulation techniques.
Professional and Educational Issues in Radiography
Research covers the extended role of radiographers and curriculum design, and builds on work submitted to RAE96. Occupational standards has become a key area of research which has developed on a collaborative basis with clinicians and the private sector. The developing role of the radiographer project funded by the College of Radiographers (CoR) and the Council for Professions Supplementary to Medicine (CPSM) (£40,000) was led by Richard Price in collaboration with Dr L. Miller, Psychology. The research outcome provided a clear view of how changing roles were perceived by radiographers. Studies on extended roles in diagnostic and therapeutic radiography are investigating the impact of new technologies on practice. Work is supported by a research assistant from RAE 1996 CollR. Initial results were presented at Radiology 1999. Development of occupational standards in diagnostic ultrasound was a collaborative project between the University of Hertfordshire (UH) led by Regina Fernando and Lindsay Mitchell (Prime R & D Ltd) funded by the NHSE South and West (£18,000). The outcome was the production and publication of research based national occupational standards. A follow up survey was commissioned by the sponsors (£5,000) to determine the extent to which standards had been disseminated. The Occupational standards in diagnostic radiography and oncological sciences project is funded by the NHSE Eastern Education Innovation Fund (£63,000). This project, in collaboration with the Continuing Education Department and senior clinicians, investigated the potential for development of occupational standards in diagnostic radiography and radiotherapy.
Clinical Radiography Practice
An innovative project on clinical decision making is led by Dr Sue Le Masurier. It makes simulation plots of the decision-making pathways of diagnostic radiographers based on think aloud and video simulation. Results were presented at Radiology 1998 &1999. A further project, supported by the Trauma Imaging Group, explores simulation as an aid to clinical practice in decision-making.
Physiotherapy Research Group Achievements
Physiotherapy clinical practice focuses on 3 significant areas: electrotherapy; haemophilia; and neuro-rehabilitation. Innovative work on educational and professional issues addresses the use of new technology. Critical review has been an essential prelude to further evidenced based research in these areas. All researchers joined UH since 1996 with prior research experience and output.
Clinical Physiotherapy Practice
Dr Tim Watson has been involved in electrotherapy and tissue healing research for several years. Current studies include investigation of the physiological effects of pulsed short-wave therapy, the physiological changes associated with ipsilateral and contralateral cryotherapy, and the clinical use of ultrasound therapy and a study considering the differential effects of traditional (MHz) and long wave (kHz) ultrasound. He has attracted several PhD students who have enrolled since 2000. Karen Beeton, Research Leader for Physiotherapy, leads haemophilia research. Her research stems from many years of clinical practice and as the lead physiotherapist in multidisciplinary teams. Her collaborators include Professor Christine Lee, Dr Simon Brown and Dr Thynn Yee and Riva Miller, social worker, all from the Royal Free Haemophilia Centre. Other collaborative work involves a joint publication with Dr Rodriguez-Merchan, La Paz University Hospital, Spain. Heather Thornton leads neuro-rehabilitation research. Her particular interest is neurological rehabilitation and new adjuncts to therapy. She was a researcher into the use of a Hinged Ankle Foot Orthosis in adult hemiplegia. She has investigated hemiplegic patients walking three months post onset, with the Regional Rehabilitation Unit (RRU), Northwick Park Hospital. She was lead researcher in a clinical study into the assessment of the hemiplegic shoulder, funded by South Essex Education and Training Consortium, with Northwick Park Hospital and Brunel University. She has also been involved in implementing a multi-centre study into aerobic activity post single incident neurology that was funded by North Thames. She has collaborated with rehabilitation consultants and physiotherapists at Northwick Park, Royal Free Hospital; Brunel University, and Southampton University.
Professional and Educational Issues in Physiotherapy
Dr Tim Watson leads a NHS(E) North Thames funded project on the education framework for physiotherapy assistants. The aim is to critically evaluate the educational possibilities by which individuals employed in NHS Trusts can follow a variety of educational pathways, culminating for some in a full professional qualification. A further NHS(E) funded project (with a sociologist) will investigate physiotherapy applications from ethnic minority groups. The physiotherapy department has been commissioned by South Essex Education & Training Consortium to develop IT support for undergraduates whilst on placement (Physio-Net). This has resulted in the development of an Internet based education and research tool accessed by students from 4 institutions and staff in over 60 clinical sites. The research component here is £18,400.
Other Units of Assessment
Related work on professional and organisational issues has been submitted to Psychology Unit 13, and on curriculum and training issues to Education Unit 68. Interdisciplinary projects on Health Service Research, have been submitted to Nursing Unit 10. OSAMs research is intrinsically multi-disciplinary, with related work submitted to Units 7, 10 and 13 which enriches our research culture.
Mechanisms and Practices for Promoting Research
100% of CollR research funding is allocated at the discretion of the two departments. Funding helps support infrastructure with a Faculty Health Research Co-ordinator and a Faculty Health Statistician. The strong infrastructure fosters collaboration across disciplines and promotes a vibrant research environment. CollR also supports research assistants for promising new projects. At departmental level there is support for: sabbaticals, conference attendance, research expenses, and Ph.D completion.
Nature and Quality of the Research Infrastructure
The University Research Policy Committee is responsible for strategy and allocation of RAE and University funds to support promising projects. At Faculty level, the Associate Dean (Research) chairs the Research Degrees Committee which is responsible for research student academic quality, welfare and the quality of MPhils and PhDs. Ethical approval for research involving human subjects is considered by the joint Radiography and Physiotherapy Ethics Committee. Facilities for research students include access to the Internet, databases and library services. Students have access to a dedicated research student common room supported by a special HEFCE initiative. The Faculty Research Student Forum organised by and for students meets monthly. Students attend a Generic Training in Research Skills course and may also attend parts of taught MSc schemes and statistics and information technology workshops for specific skills.
Supporting Interdisciplinary and Collaborative Research
Radiography has long standing links with the Departments of Psychology, Education and Continuing Education. Physiotherapy has a long history of collaborative work with medical and other health care professionals. Dr. Tim Watson has formed a promising international collaboration with Dr Shinichi Shindo from Japan, a physiotherapy postdoctoral overseas visiting research fellow, investigating education and quality assurance.
Younger and Newer Researchers
Aspiring researchers are assigned a research active mentor. New staff are encouraged to initiate new research or join existing projects. Staff are encouraged to study for research degrees, free for staff registered at UH. Currently 3 staff members are registered for doctorates at UH and 4 are registered elsewhere. It is envisaged that several young researchers will, in the next 5 years, generate projects as part of the departmental strategies, and become fully research active. These are: S. Murray and M. Vosper in radiography; and A. Baily-Metcalfe, Dr. Jill Higgins, V. Sparkes and C.Mason in physiotherapy.
During the current assessment period the quality and quantity of research conducted by the Group has been considerably enhanced by:
Evidence of the improvements include:
Davies and Jones provide joint strategic leadership for the BPSRG, and Davies is the research
co-ordinator. The recruitment of Jones in 1998 from King's College London (KCL) resulted in the merger of the original BSRG with a group of pharmaceutical scientists to give the existing research team. Another major development was the joint investment by KU and SGHMS in 1999 that established a laboratory (the Joint Laboratory) on the St. George's site, for research in the area of haematology and oncology. The current BPSRG comprises five professors, five readers, 14 additional Category A staff, two more Category C staff, four postdoctoral workers, over 30 research students, and support staff. The team aims to contribute substantially to knowledge of non-infectious and infectious diseases in humans and animal models, and applies the molecular understanding of organic chemistry to these processes and their treatment.
Research sub-areas within the BPSRG
The research strengths of the BPSRG in Therapy, Parasitology and Pharmaceutical Sciences form the basis of the interactive and complementary sub-areas:
A. THERAPY – H. Ahmed, [ ], [ ] (C), Fielder, Garrod, [ ], Jewell, [ ], McGuckin, [ ], [ ] (C), Opara, Palmer, [ ] and [ ]
This sub-area has 15 members, five of whom (H. Ahmed, [ ], Garrod, [ ], Opara) hold joint KU/SGHMS appointments (see RA1). Research in this sub-area is focused into four main themes, with collaboration between members of themes (i) and (iii), and with the Parasitology and Pharmaceutical Sciences sub-areas. [ ] leads the Therapy sub-area. Her research concerns the biology of haemopoietic stem cells, the investigation of cellular and sub-cellular events to improve lymphoma diagnosis and treatment, and the role of viruses in lymphoma. Treatment of HIV-related and non-Hodgkin’s lymphoma are among her main research interests and she is currently principal investigator in seven international clinical trials. She uses her expertise to conduct collaborative work with a number of external researchers, and with colleagues in the Joint Laboratory and SGHMS.
(i) Haematology and immunology - [ ], [ ], Jewell, McGuckin, [ ] and [ ]. [ ] works closely with McGuckin, supervising three research students and a postdoctoral worker in the Joint Laboratory. Their research, which also involves the Medical Research Council (MRC) Institute of Molecular Medicine, University of Oxford, entails the selection of rare populations of haematopoietic progenitor cells for clinical use. McGuckin has played a major role in establishing the Joint Laboratory at SGHMS and acts as its research director. His work in haematology concentrates on developing protocols for acquiring stem cells through labelling and imaging techniques. Since the Joint Laboratory was established, [ ] and McGuckin have also enlisted the experience of Davies (Parasitology sub-area) in immuno-ultrastructural aspects of their research programme, which has led to conference presentations and published abstracts (URL http://www.kingston.ac.uk/bpsrg). [ ] and [ ] are concerned with mechanisms of autoimmune rheumatic disease, and the role of N-acetylglucosamine and galactose components of antigens in the aetiology of the disease processes. [ ] has funding from the South Thames Regional Health Authority, Oxford Glycosciences, the British Medical Association, Lupus UK, and the European Union (EU), and his investigations of neuropsychiatric lupus using MR spectroscopy have demonstrated clinical utility, which will be the subject of a multi-centre trial. [ ]’s reputation in immunochemistry has led to involvement in joint research with workers in Vancouver, Brest, Birmingham and University College London (UCL). Jewell investigates induction of apoptosis in chronic lymphocytic leukaemia. His work with researchers from the Departments of Immunology and Haematology at UCL is funded by the Leukaemia Research Fund, the Nuffield Foundation and a number of pharmaceutical companies. [ ]’s research focuses on colorectal cancer cell metastases and thymus innervation in immunodeficient mouse models. He has productive collaborations in histopathology with workers at the universities of Southampton and Hamburg.
(ii) Respiratory function, fatigue and exercise - Garrod, Palmer and [ ]
[ ], the leading researcher within this theme, is recognised for his work on human bio-energetics and gas exchange in health and disease, with special reference to exercise intolerance. He has established that exercise stoke volume, one of the major determinants of cardiovascular function, can be estimated non-invasively. [ ] also studies coupling between high-energy phosphate metabolism in skeletal muscle, using whole-body Nuclear Magnetic Resonance (NMR) spectroscopy, and parameters of muscle and pulmonary gas exchange. His work is done in collaboration with researchers in Glasgow, Spain and Japan, and Griffiths (SGHMS UoA 03), with whom he holds grants from the MRC, and the Wellcome Trust. Palmer’s research, funded by GlaxoSmithKline, also involves exercise testing, but uses sports-specific methods to determine factors affecting athletic performance under laboratory-controlled conditions. Information obtained in these experiments is used to optimise exercise performance. Garrod's work includes strategies for treatment of chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, such as respiratory muscle training and pulmonary rehabilitation.
(iii) Alimentary tract, gut flora and nutrition – H. Ahmed, Fielder, [ ] and Opara
[ ] has a Joint Falk award to study alcoholic liver disease and has funding approved from the Department of Health (DoH) to study hepatitis C in drug users with Drummond and Abou-Saleh (SGHMS UoA02). He has common research interests with [ ] (theme (i) above) on the role of glycosylation in inflammatory bowel disease. [ ] also collaborates with H. Ahmed, who investigates cholesterol and phospholipid transport in relation to cholesterol gallstone disease and examines gastric mucosal hydrophobicity in the presence of Helicobacter pylori infection. In addition to their joint research, [ ] and H.Ahmed work with clinicians from SGHMS, in particular, [ ] (SGHMS UoA 01). Fielder has a background in medical microbiology. His research has centred on the epidemiology and role of enteric bacteria in rheumatic disease, and more recently, mechanisms involved in the immunisation of gut mucosal surfaces. He is developing a series of screens to assess the antibiotic properties of novel compounds with Storey and S. Ahmed (Pharmaceutical Sciences sub-area). They jointly supervise a postdoctoral researcher working on this project. Opara is a biochemical nutritionist. She investigates properties of foods that confer allergenicity, and also examines the toxicological effects of foods and the safety of Chinese herbal remedies. This work is funded by the Food Standards Agency in collaboration with the Central Science Laboratory, York, and the Government Chemist in Hong Kong.
(iv) Medical physics - Briers, [ ] and [ ]
[ ]’s research concerns imaging techniques for medical investigations. He has established methods to identify and correct patient motion in nuclear cardiology and is now developing a gamma camera collimator for high-energy imaging, and a method to optimise injection of contrast agents for magnetic resonance angioplasty. [ ]’s research involves the improvement of magnetic resonance, ultrasound and Doppler techniques for medical imaging. His work has been funded by the EU and the British Technology Group plc, and he has a recent grant from DoH for joint research with the Institute of Cancer Research and the National Physical Laboratory. Briers, who recently retired, has published papers concerning the use of low-powered lasers for monitoring of subcutaneous blood flow, and Augousti is an emerging researcher contributing to this theme (see RA6c). Medical Physics has many clinical links with cardiac, vascular and stroke groups returned in SGHMS UoA03.
In addition to three postdoctoral researchers, there are currently 16 research students within Therapy with a further 11 having completed during the assessment period. Since RAE 1996 members of the sub-group have produced over 140 refereed papers, 116 poster/paper conference presentations, and 27 invited lectures.
B. PARASITOLOGY- Daszak (C), Davies, Kirk, Pittilo, Smit and Walker.
This sub-area has six members, one of whom (Pittilo) has a joint KU/SGHMS appointment (see RA1). The sub-area is led by Davies. She has several long-established national and international research links, and is much respected for her research on blood and tissue-infecting protozoa. In recognition of her work on apicomplexans, a parasite was recently named in her honour (see RA6a), and over the last two RAE periods Davies has been sole or senior author on three substantial articles in the highly regarded Advances in Parasitology. Her research has been recently funded by Centro de Ciência e Tecnologia, Madeira, The Zoological Society of London, The Canon Collins Educational Trust for Southern Africa, The Royal Society and the National Research Foundation of South Africa. Davies has been instrumental in the development of this sub-area, which has two main themes of research.
(ii) Intracellular parasites, migration, and control – Daszak, Davies and Pittilo
This theme examines intracellular stages of apicomplexans and flagellates, their migration within the host and adaptation to host defences, and drug responses. The main focus of these studies is ultrastructural research using cell culture, animal models and known drug treatments. The recent research of Jones (Pharmaceutical Sciences sub-area) on the design and synthesis of anti-parasitic compounds is now being developed by Davies and Jones in a study of the effects of these molecules on trypanosomes. Pittilo is a long-established member of the Parasitology sub-area and Dean of the Joint Faculty. He has a particular interest in apicomplexans and studies their morphology and drug responses. All members of this theme, by virtue of their skills in electron microscopy (EM) and disease processes, also undertake research that links closely with the Therapy sub-area. Davies’ knowledge of blood cells, immunogold-transmission electron microscopy (TEM) and scanning electron microscopy (SEM), and her co-supervision of a postdoctoral researcher in the Joint Laboratory, is crucial to studies into cellular communication in the progenitor cell research of McGuckin and [ ] (see above). Pittilo’s interests in endothelial injury and SEM have led to interdisciplinary research in relation to cigarette smoking (RA2), while Daszak’s TEM experience was central to a collaborative project on the aetiology of Crohn’s disease with workers at UCL (URL http://www.kingston.ac.uk/bpsrg).
There are currently five research students within Parasitology, with five having recently completed. Davies and Daszak also jointly supervise five research students in other UK institutions and overseas. Since RAE 1996 members of Parasitology have produced over 50 refereed papers, 46 poster/paper conference presentations, three keynote and 31 invited lectures.
C. PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES- S. Ahmed, Barker, Jones, Storey and Tyrrell
Research in this sub-area spans the interaction of chemistry with biosciences and medicine. One core research strength is organic chemistry, supplied particularly by Jones, Storey and Tyrrell. This sub-area is led by Jones. He is recognised for his work across the broad area of heterocyclic chemistry and natural products. He has over 50 refereed publications in the last 10 years and has both organised and given plenary lectures at a number of international meetings. Two areas of his research have recently led to patents, one on the luminescent molecule coelenterazine (used for the measurement of calcium ion concentration in cells) and one on novel anthelmintic molecules. The latter arose through research with parasitologists at KCL, and is developing into collaboration with the Parasitology sub-area. In addition, he has an on-going collaboration with clinicians at St. Thomas’ Hospital that is targeted towards identifying a molecule which may predispose towards hypertension in mammals. This has led to a joint publication in the Lancet. Tyrrell is well known for her work on the use of organometallic chemistry in the synthesis of heterocycles which she has presented at international meetings (eg. 213th American Chemical Society National Meeting, April 1997). Jones and Tyrrell have collaborated extensively with bioscience companies (e.g. SmithKlineBeecham/GlaxoSmithKline, Glaxo-Wellcome, Aventis, Schering-Plough, Maybridge and Zeneca Agrochemicals) and much of their chemistry is directed towards molecules with biological activity or potential medical applications. They currently have several collaborations with clinicians (eg. at St. Thomas’: sodium pump hormones and iron chelators), life scientists (KCL: anthelmintics) and life science companies (Pharmagene and Maybridge: bioactive molecules). Storey was appointed in 1998 having previously been a Research Fellow at the Australian National University for three years. He has considerable expertise and recognition in the area of free-radical chemistry. He is also engaged in collaborative research with Fielder (Therapy sub-area) on the antimicrobial properties of plant extracts. Barker was appointed in 1999 having previously worked at the Centre for European Nuclear Research (CERN). His research focuses on the use of mass spectrometry in biomedical research and the discovery of new bioactive compounds from plants. He was one of the co-founders of Accelerator Mass Spectroscopy (AMS) and its biomedical applications. AMS is now widely used by pharmaceutical companies. He jointly supervises research students at the University of Greenwich (three PhD completions, one in progress) and collaborates with CERN and the Jodrell Laboratory at Kew. S. Ahmed was appointed in 1997 and is active in the area of medicinal chemistry with a growing reputation in the field of cancer chemotherapy. His work involves computer-modelling of enzyme active sites in steroid biosynthesis pathways and the subsequent synthesis of novel inhibitors for the treatment of hormone-dependent cancers.
Pharmaceutical Sciences has one postdoctoral researcher and 16 current research students with nine completions. Jones also has eight PhD completions since 1996 at KCL. Since 1996, the work of this sub-area has resulted in over 50 refereed publications, 50 poster/paper conference presentations, five plenary and 13 invited lectures, and 17 patent applications of which two are licensed.
Management of Research
The BPSRG is one of two joint KU/SGHMS research groups (UoA 10 and UoA 11) targeted for support to foster research excellence across both institutions. Within the joint research infrastructure, Davies and Jones work with the Pro Vice-Chancellor for Research (KU), the Dean of Research and Development (SGHMS), and a number of committees, including the BPSRG Management Committee. The BPSRG leaders identify research objectives, new initiatives and priorities for the Group. Information is disseminated to the membership regularly by electronic mail, but also through frequent informal meetings, and more formal termly meetings or away-days. The research progress of individuals and the BPSRG as a whole are closely monitored, and annual targets for the Group, and its sub-groups, are set by the Management Committee. Regular reports are discussed at Faculty and at Joint Executive levels (KU and SGHMS), and outcomes are fed back to the BPSRG for consideration and action. The staff appraisal system monitors individual research contributions and sets goals for core members of the Group.
Mechanisms and practices for promoting research
The allocation of significant finance to the Research Investment Fund at KU has ensured resources to support strategic development in research. Competitive bids by the BPSRG to this Investment Fund, for additional funding through Faculties and Schools/Departments, and for research funds at SGHMS, have provided the Group with resources well in excess of £400 K for this assessment period. These funds have permitted support for pump-priming, postdoctoral fellows, research studentships and the purchase of equipment. Generous staff development funds have also allowed frequent conference participation by BPSRG members. In addition to funding, strategic use has been made of sabbatical leave. Individuals in all sub-areas and emerging members of the BPSRG have been granted leave of one year or one semester. In several instances increased external research income resulted from grant applications prepared during sabbatical leave (eg. Storey and Joy, see RA6a and RA6c). Fortnightly seminars, with an outside speakers' programme, also foster the research culture of the Group (URL http://www.kingston.ac.uk/bpsrg). Additional examples of practices that promote research are recorded in the descriptions of interdisciplinary and collaborative research below.
Research Infrastructure
Specialist equipment and facilities for Research
The Joint Laboratory at SGHMS allows BPSRG workers and their research students access to microscopy, cell and molecular biology facilities. Confocal microscopy, polymerase chain reaction (PCR) systems that include real-time PCR, flow-cytometry, and a fluorescence activated cell sorter (FACS) with full sterile capabilities are available. Other SGHMS and SGH staff within the BPSRG are housed in a research block with access to imaging (TEM, SEM, further laser scanning confocal microscopy and conventional light microscopy, all with digital imaging and data transfer systems), cell sorting, cell culture and functional genomics facilities. Individual staff at SGHMS and SGH also have their own specialist equipment. For example, [ ] currently has the only equipment, world-wide, capable of simultaneously determining profiles of breath-to-breath gas exchange throughout the exercise transient. [ ] and [ ] have instruments for imaging gamma radiation, X-rays, ultrasound and allowing Doppler measurements.
Training and Support of Research Students
All research students within the BPSRG undergo an assessed formal research training programme, in which research methods, ethics, and the use of libraries and databases are introduced. Later, they benefit from instruction on thesis preparation and careers advice. They are members of the University Graduate School at KU under the guidance of a Director of Graduate Studies and have access to the newly completed Graduate Centre with areas for personal study, extensive computer networks, a resources room, seminar rooms and extended social space.
At a local level, progress of research students is the concern of their immediate supervisors, but they also have independent staff mentors. Their progress in research is closely monitored by their supervisors, and recorded formally in an annual monitoring report that is subject to scrutiny at School/Department, Faculty and University levels. Research students also have their own representatives on research committees at both Faculty and University levels, and on Faculty Board (KU). Individual groups of researchers hold weekly informal meetings, at which students and staff discuss relevant literature and students present their results. Staff also use these meetings to give short courses on advanced topics to students and postdoctoral researchers. Fortnightly seminars provide postgraduate students with experience of formal research presentation and allow interaction between Kingston and St. George's students. An active colloquium programme exposes students to a range of lectures by internal and external speakers. All research students are expected to attend and to present material at national and international conferences through the provision of personal development funds.
Arrangements for supporting interdisciplinary or collaborative research
This joint submission between KU and SGHMS, the Joint Laboratory, and the appointment of staff to the Joint Faculty, are powerful indicators of the approaches adopted to promote collaborative, interdisciplinary research within the BPSRG. As a result, biomedical researchers have close links with the teaching hospital that shares the SGHMS site, name, and many facilities, which allows them ready access to clinical samples. The stem cell research in the Joint Laboratory, in particular, benefits greatly from this arrangement. Interdisciplinary research and collaboration are also encouraged by open research seminar programmes and colloquia, at KU, in the Joint Faculty and at SGHMS. Collaboration with researchers at other institutions is promoted by publication of research in both peer-reviewed journals and, importantly, at conferences. Examples of successful collaborations are demonstrated by joint publications in RA2 and in the above descriptions of the sub-groups.
Relationships with industry
The BPSRG is well placed to contribute to and benefit from industry by virtue of the breadth of its research interests. [ ] is an external consultant to Oxford Glycosciences and Mannatech Inc. Jones was a long-standing consultant in medicinal and process chemistry with Rhone-Poulenc Rorer and has been involved in consultancies with SmithKlineBeecham, Pharmagene and Denovo Pharmaceuticals. The work of Jones on novel anthelmintics has led to licensing of a patent to Schering-Plough and joint, funded, research with a biotechnology company (Pharmagene). A spin-off company (Jones and Storey) has an interest in bioactive and luminescent molecules and Tyrrell is involved in a teaching company scheme (Maybridge). Amgen and Miltenyi Biotech Ltd. have donated ca. £230K worth of antibodies, cytokines, drugs and equipment to support the work of McGuckin and [ ]. Amgen has also donated funds to support a research assistant in the Joint Laboratory, and Roche Ltd. partly resources [ ]’s research in this laboratory. Elsewhere, funding from Rhone-Merieux (Pittilo) and Rhone-Poulenc-Rorer (Tyrrell and Storey) has been obtained. Healthcare is one of the main themes of Technology Foresight. The panel identified two issues addressed by current research in the BPSRG. These are Pharmaceuticals, Biotechnology and Medical Devices on the one hand and the Organisation and Delivery of Healthcare on the other. One of the underpinning technologies for Pharmaceuticals was identified by Foresight as research in heterocyclic chemistry, a particular strength of the Pharmaceutical Sciences sub-group.
STAFFING POLICY
It is BPSRG policy to recruit new/younger academic staff (eg. Barker, Fielder, Garrod, McGuckin, Opara, Palmer, Smit, Storey, Walker) from highly rated research departments and institutions, and both KU and SGHMS appoint staff on the basis of their research record and potential. These factors are also important at SGH where appointment panels have representation from both SGH and SGHMS. The Group encourages younger and established staff to expand their research and generate new work through sabbaticals, and research excellence has had an impact on promotion to more senior positions (eg. S. Ahmed, Davies, McGuckin). Recruitment of senior staff, with established research reputations and clear leadership qualities (eg. Jones), is another key element in the area of staffing the BPSRG. It is also BPSRG policy to ensure that when staff are first appointed they are integrated into an appropriate sub-area and provided with a mentor, who is an established researcher. New appointees are given research space and start-up equipment at both KU and SGHMS. Research progress is subsequently monitored, especially by Davies and Jones, but also through staff appraisal schemes (KU and SGHMS), and Heads of Department in conjunction with the Dean of Science (KU) and the Dean of Research and Development (SGHMS). Training courses and workshops at KU help young researchers prepare for funding bids. Researchers are encouraged by the Group leaders to bid for funds from internal sources, but there is an expectation among BPSRG members that their research should be externally funded. Grant proposals and other bids from all staff are internally peer-reviewed before submission. The experience and contacts of Category C staff play a key role in promoting research collaboration both within the Group and externally.
SELF-ASSESSMENT
This joint submission is evidence that KU and SGHMS are firmly committed to the BPSRG and have supported it strongly through internal funding, provision of research space (including the Joint Laboratory), equipment, library and IT provision. Acting upon the plans outlined in RA5 for the 1996 RAE, the BPSRG (formerly the BSRG) has met or exceeded its objectives and all the indicators show a strong upward trend. The Group has grown substantially in size (10.6 to 23) and substance during its evolution. Young researchers of outstanding potential have been recruited, so that the age profile of the Group shows an excellent spread (29 - 64), with a mean age of 44. All 104 outputs cited in this present submission (RA2), are in journals with rigorous refereeing standards and above average impact factors. Numbers of postgraduate research students within the Group vastly exceed those during the period up to 1996, and research degrees awarded have risen from one, in the previous submission, to 25 (not including the completions of Jones at KCL). The research expertise of the Group has led to strong collaborations with other institutions and with industry, both within the UK, and overseas. Research income has undergone a fifty-fold increase since the 1996 submission, with considerable amounts having been derived from UK government bodies, UK industry and commerce, and the EU. The BPSRG has undergone a major transformation in the last five years. We believe it is well positioned with its unique blend of medicine, life sciences and organic chemistry to become one of the leading research groups in this area in the UK.
Environment
Staffing
Biomedical Science: Toxicology and Molecular Pathology
This theme is led by DB (Professor of Medical Biochemistry) whose main research interests lie in the general area of liver function in health and disease. This work has resulted in 11 publications in major journals. DB's research group is able to study liver function at all levels of biological organisation. A £30,000 grant from the Mersey Gastroenterology Fund has contributed to two notable outputs. Firstly, cyclosporin A, the most commonly used immunosuppressant drug in transplant patients, has been shown to increase hepatic tight junction permeability, explaining in part the cholestatic side effects of this drug. Secondly, a novel finding is that hepatic inactivation of leu-enkephalin is primarily via cell surface peptidases; decreased inactivation during cholestasis offers an explanation for the pruritis associated with this condition. Collaboration with JMG has resulted in the development of new rapid methods for the centrifugal separation of endosomes and human plasma lipoproteins; indeed, this latter method has been taken up by three major lipoprotein research groups in the U.K. (Glasgow, Reading and Guildford).
KR's research interests lie in the general area of nutraceuticals, and in particular the health promoting effects of garlic. In collaboration with DB, he has been awarded £60,000 (1995-98), £5,000 (1997) and £66,000 (1998-2001) from Wakunaga of America Co. Ltd. to investigate the cardioprotective and hepatoprotective effects of garlic. Experiments have clearly shown that hepatoprotection is correlated to increased hepatic glutathione concentrations and that organosulphur compounds in garlic conjugate directly to toxic electrophilic moieties, thereby sparing hepatic glutathione. This research on garlic has been extended into a dietary intervention study which clearly demonstrated anti-thrombotic effects in humans. Current research is focussing upon the antioxidative properties of garlic in relation to cardiovascular disease and identifying the active organosulphur compounds in garlic. JMG is a freelance consultant holding an honorary lectureship in the School of Biomolecular Sciences who, together with DB, is jointly responsible for the management of the Centre for Centrifugation Research. Its prime function is to research the separation of biological particles using novel density gradient media. A recent collaboration with the lipoprotein research group at Cardiff has shown that ciprofibrate therapy reduces the postprandial lipemia (and oxidative stress) in Type 2 diabetics. Other collaborative projects carried out include separation of the endosomal and secretory compartments in liver and the isolation of human monocytes and dendritic cells. A method developed for purifying viruses has been widely adopted for vectors used in gene therapy.
CJRe leads the only UK academic research group working on nasal toxicity. During this RAE period she has attracted two Glaxo-Wellcome studentships (2 x £45,000), one BBSRC collaborative studentship with Glaxo-Wellcome (£60,000) and one MRC collaborative studentship with Astra-Zeneca (£50,000). Her research has concentrated upon developing in vitro models for predicting respiratory tract toxicity for eventual use in screening during drug development. The bioactivation of respiratory tract toxins such as the widely used industrial methylating agent methyl iodide has been characterised. Recently, CJRe's research has been extended to respiratory tract absorption enhancers which are being investigated as adjuncts to gene therapy.
FRCM has continued to collaborate with Dr S. Patierno's group at the George Washington University Medical Center (Washington DC, USA). A major focus of research has been the mechanisms of Cr-induced toxicity and carcinogenesis. The work has clearly shown that Cr-induced DNA damage arrests polymerase activity in exposed human lung cells and may be implicated in apoptotic cell death and the development of lung cancer. Further work has shown increased expression of the metal-regulated stress gene GRP78 in malignant, but not benign, human breast cancer.
Biomedical Science: Structural Analysis of Medically Important Proteins
This theme is led by CDR (Professor of Structural Biochemistry). During this RAE period, CDR has published 13 papers examining the structure of plant and fungi lectins with potential medical applications. He has secured funding from the Mizutani Foundation for Glycoscience (£36,000, 1995-97) and from the Leverhulme Trust (£46,000, 1996-98). In addition, he has been awarded beam time worth in excess of £100,000 at the CLRC Darebury Laboratory. A major achievement has been to solve the stuctures of Narcissus (daffodil) lectin, which is a potent anti-HIV agent, and Scillia (bluebell) lectin, which possesses only modest anti-HIV activity. These structural differences are currently being used to design candidate anti-HIV agents by investigating the recognition patterns between these proteins and key carbohydrate ligands.
Following his elucidation of the structure of human growth hormone in 1995 (Protein and Peptide Letters 2, 333-340), FCFK has concentrated on improving crystallography methodology to facilitate high resolution structure determination of medically important proteins. For this he has been awarded beam time worth £58,000 at the CLRC Daresbury Laboratory. A particularly exciting recent development has been semi-time-resolved cryo-crystallography which has enabled previously unaccessible structural detail for insulin to be visualised (see preliminary abstract, Acta Cryst. (1999) A55 suppl., Abstr. P13.04.002) and is now being applied to other peptide hormones.
Biomedical Science: Free Radicals, Antioxidants and Antibiotics
This theme is jointly led by RFB (Professor of Applied Biochemistry) and CJRh (Professor of Chemistry). RFB has been supported by grants of £41,000 from the North-West Cancer Research Fund and £66,000 from the World Cancer Research Fund. This work has demonstrated that secondary bile acids generate DNA-damaging free radicals in colonic cell cultures, implicating them in colorectal cancer. In addition, RFB has provided mechanistic evidence for the potential pro-oxidant activities of beta-carotene and lycopene. This innovative work is relevant to the recent CARET and ATBC intervention trials in Finland and the USA, where carotenoid supplementation in smokers resulted in significant increases in rates of lung cancer, and has since been replicated in two international laboratories.
GML became a lecturer in September 1998 having previously worked as a postdoctoral research fellow with RFB. He has begun to establish his own independent research into the health promoting effects of dietary antioxidants and his recent study on the antioxidant potential of human LDL subfractions (output No. 3) was subsequently reviewed as a 'highlight' in the Journal Club of Clinical Laboratory. This study showed that small, dense LDL particles are more likely to oxidise, and hence contribute to the formation of atherosclerotic plaques, because they are relatively deficient in antioxidant carotenoids and vitamin E.
CJRh's work on several aspects of free radicals in toxicology is underpinned by techniques involving ESR and muon radiolabelling spectroscopy. During this RAE period CJRh has been awarded facilities worth £4.8 million by the Paul Scherrer Institute in Switzerland and ISIS beam time worth £266,000 by the Rutherford Appleton Laboratory in the U.K. In house facilities centre around three spectrometers (2 Bruker ER200D and 1 Varian E9). He also collaborates with Bruker Analytik GmbH in Karlsruhe and with Professor Anders Lund (Linkoping University, Sweden) to explore the potential of pulsed ESR methods in toxicological research.
HM has applied electron spin resonance, and to a lesser extent nuclear magnetic resonance, spectroscopy to biomedical problems. H-1 NMR spectroscopy has been used to show that a broad resonance in the 500MHz region due to ceramide can be used as a marker for the highly malignant glioblastoma multiforme whilst the signal is not present in either normal brain or low-grade astrocytomas. ESR spectroscopy has been used to show: (i) the normally very reactive vitamin K radical can be stabilised in bilogical surfactants for up to 20 minutes, (ii)
Nutrition
Recent research of AH, supported by the Meat and Livestock Commission (£34,000), has explored the role of meat in the diet and health of young people, challenged the validity of existing information and identified new areas of concern (the role of vegetarian convenience foods). The other major aspect of AH's research has continued to develop an epidemiological tool for assessing the dietary intake of large groups of children (supported by the North-West NHS Executive, £40,000). This is now being used to carry out surveys on an unprecedented scale both in this country and abroad. Indeed, it has contributed to our understanding of the epidemiology of nutritionally related diseases in children in the U.K., as evidenced by references to his work in the National Diet and Nutritional Survey of Young People (2000).
SMM's research on nutrition and health in developing countries has examined the occurence of aflatoxins in body fluids and tissues of children with respect to health. This area of research, initiated by SMM, has continued to emphasise and publicise the health risks that children are exposed to following consumption of contaminated foods. This topic has become a priority area for research by colleagues in tropical countries for whom SMM is a valuable collaborator. Her work into the extent of tetanus antibody seropositivity after immunisation programmes has highlighted the need for tetanus booster vaccination in early adolesence in order to protect women through their reproductive lives, as indicated in the strategies, policies and practises of the WHO. This research has been carried out in collaboration with the Liverpool School of Tropical Medicine, Dr L. Brabin (University of Manchester) and Dr O. Oyelami (Nigeria). More recently, SMM has researched the nutritional consequences of dieting in adolescent girls, an area of considerable topical interest.
Public Health
MAB (Professor of Public Health) is Head of the Public Health Sector at JMU (www.phslive.com). The Sector consists of 12 research staff and carries out Public Health research, development and education at local, regional, national and international levels. Specific areas of expertise include epidemiology and statistics, environmental health, ethnic health, sexual health and substance misuse. During this RAE period, MAB has published 10 papers in major journals, 16 British library catalogued reports/books (e.g. HIV and AIDS in the North West of England, by J.McVeigh, P.A. Cook, P. Rimmer, Q. Syed and M.A. Bellis, June 2000, 112 pages, ISBN 1-902051-18-1), 3 letters in the British Medical Journal and 2 lead features in the Health Services Journal. He also regularly contributes chapters to the Annual Report of the Regional Director of Public Health. MAB has attracted over £2million of external research and development funding during this RAE period. He has recently attracted two important Regional Units to the Public Health Sector: the North West Regional Public Health Observatory (www.nwpho.org.uk, as outlined in the white paper Saving Lives, our Healthier Nation) and the Public Health Practice Unit (www.phpu.org.uk, in collaboration with the new National Health Development Agency). Through MAB the Sector provides UK representation on IREFREA (www.irefrea.org), an international research group examining youth hardship, drug demand and demand reduction (funded by the European Commission). Other international research includes EC-funded research on HIV prevention in international sailors and a major study of substance abuse in Thai schools.
Biopsychology
AMA's research has highlighted the importance of working memory skills in language development in children. Previously identified as a deficit in children with specific language impairment (SLI), working memory abilities were also shown to explain a significant proportion of the variance in language skills within children whose language development was not considered disordered. Research arising from an ESRC grant held at the University of Manchester and awarded to AMA and Dr Catherine Willis (appointed to a lectureship at JMU in January 2001) extended this work to additional aspects of language and competing models of the cognitive skills underlying working memory performance. The impetus of such research is to force a reconsideration of the cause of SLI away from a modular, possibly genetic language deficit to difficulties with general processing skills. The implications of this research for the assessment and remediation of language impairment in children has been communicated through publication in the the official journal of the Royal College of Speech and Language Therapists (output 4).
YH's research has focussed upon the importance of sleep relative to cortical function, with particular empasis on the prefrontal cortex of the brain, and has led to the publication of 10 research papers during this RAE period. YH joined JMU in September 1998 but has continued to collaborate closely with Professor James Horne at Loughborough University. Indeed, outputs 2-4 have been generated from a Wellcome Trust grant (£80,000) jointly awarded to YH and Professor Horne and held at Loughborough. This work has led to the development of an innovative model for the effects of sleep deprivation on higher cognitive processes, particularly decision making, speech and memory.
1.4 Promotion of research and developing an active research culture
One of the aims of the Group, identified in the 1996 RAE, was the development of a supportive and collaborative research culture appropriate to applied, health-related research. Regular group meetings on both sites have contributed to this process in a number of ways;
· bringing together researchers with related interests, thus promoting a multidisciplinary research culture and fostering networking both within and outside the University,
· ensuring representation at regional and national meetings on PAMs R&D strategy,
· collating and disseminating knowledge of policy and priorities in potential funding agencies and expertise in applying for external research funding,
· mentoring and discussion, enabling less experienced staff to define and develop research interests,
· discussion of publication strategy, developing awareness of appropriate locations for publication,
· drawing on strong Departmental culture in PSP, HCS, Law, HASS and ESS for post-graduate training and supervision of higher degrees.
Further supporting these developments are the NHS funded Research Fellow in Speech and Language Therapy and the DoH funded Research Assistant in Ethnic Minority Health.
As a consequence of the substantial increases in postgraduate research in PSP, HCS and Law, the University has recognised that it would be timely to establish a multidisciplinary Graduate School for these Departments. Plans are in now progress for dedicated accommodation and CIT facilities to support the growing number of postgraduate research students and build on the existing lively research climate.
1.5 Research Infrastructure
Expenditure on library facilities has exceeded £5m since the 1996 RAE. Additionally the University’s membership of the Consortium of Academic Libraries in Manchester provides access for staff and research students to the total library resources of the four universities in Greater Manchester.
In 1996, the registration and monitoring of research students was organised centrally by the University Research Degrees Committee. However, in 1997 this role was devolved down to Faculty Research Degrees Committees (FRDCs). Several PAMs members have substantial experience on these committees and the Group has benefited from their expertise both in supervision of an expanding number of research students and in developing the supervisory skills of colleagues newer to the role. Mentoring and formal training in higher degree supervision and examining are offered through FRDCs. Since 1996, the number of higher degree completions has risen from 0 to 20. Compulsory modular programmes for research training are run by Departments and Faculties. Through these, research students have access to a wide range of relevant courses in research methodology, seminar programmes, and a highly successful annual postgraduate conference. The Faculty research training programmes, the University staff development programme and specific initiatives at Departmental level are also open to staff wishing to extend their research skills.
PAMs researchers are active in teaching on six research-oriented Masters courses, designed specifically for Health professionals and offered either in Manchester or Alsager. These include MSc (by research) in Practitioner Research (students are eligible for NHS bursaries), MSc in Sports Injury and Therapy (for physiotherapists and podiatrists), MA in Health Promoting Practice (recognised by the Society for Health Education and Promotion Specialists) and MSc (by research) in Clinical Communication (aimed at Speech and Language Therapists). These courses have proved highly successful in preparing professionals in health and related areas to undertake PhD research. They also make a significant contribution to the achievement of current Government policy in developing research capacity in nursing and professions allied to medicine. PAMs members are also responsible for research capability building training for local NHS Trusts from which a number of participants continue on to the MSc Practitioner Research.
1.6 Arrangements for Supporting Interdisciplinary or Collaborative Research
The applied, professional nature of much research within the PAMs group both depends on and contributes to the group’s close relationship with health and other statutory services. As a consequence of our increasing research profile, PAMs members have become partners in significant research collaborations at national and international level. University policy has been supportive of applications for international collaboration under a variety of programmes, in which PAMs members have been highly successful. Devolved funding has been used to support national and international travel for collaborative projects. Heathcote and Prof. Liu (Beijing Normal University) are engaged in collaborative research on the EU’s human rights policy towards China, funded by the EU’s Europe-China Studies programme. Between 1996/9 Skidmore and Wibberley were working with the Universities of Sao Paolo (Brazil), Concepcion (Chile), Murcia (Spain) and La Sapienza (Italy) on EU ALFA research on drug misuse. EU funding has also supported the development of a European module enabling research on comparative issues in health care for vulnerable groups in partnership with the Universities of Lisbon, Murcia, South Dakota, Perugia, TEI Patras and Salo (Finland). Fowler is working with Wit and Trzaskoma (Institute of Sport, Warsaw) on the construction and use of a pendulum swing for lower limb training (RA2 ref.1&2) and with Campbell (Staffordshire) on the efficiency of wheelchair propulsion. Goldbart’s Higher Education Link Project with the Indian Institute on Cerebral Palsy and U. of Wales College of Medicine builds on her evaluation of services for families with children with cerebral palsy (RA2 ref.1&4). Fairhurst’s research (RA2 ref.1&2) on home as the site of health and social care is being extended into European comparisons with Salo, Perugia and Bremen. Heathcote is directing an EU funded project on Empowerment Through Lifeskills with 16 partners in 9 EU Countries.
Birch is working with Gleeson (Bangor) on the influence of oestrogen/progesterone status on tibio-femoral displacement at the knee. Marsden is developing links with opthalmic nursing researchers and practitioners in Jerusalem and Palestine. Goldbart is in discussion with Vlaskamp (Groningen) on the use of materials in RA2 ref.3 in a major evaluation of services for adults with profound disabilities in the Netherlands. Munley is working with Connor (Leeds) and Povey (Staffordshire) on testicular self examination and with Dept. of Urology (Stepping Hill Hospital) on help seeking in prostate problems (RA2 ref.4). Richman is collaborating with Mercer (Liverpool) on forensic psychiatry and special hospitals (RA2 ref.3&4). The work of the Evaluation of Professional Practice group has been enhanced by the appointment of an NHS funded Research Fellow in Speech and Language Therapy (Chadwick), with the Manchester Learning Disability Partnership (MLDP), leading to grant applications in the areas of dysphagia, AAC and communication and challenging behaviour. With Goldbart and Burton (MLDP), Chadwick is researching dysphagia in people with learning disability and attitudes to signing among support staff.
1.7 Relationships with Industry, the Public Sector and other Research Users
Relationships with the public sector are supported by honorary contracts or part time secondments to the NHS held by several PAMs members: Buckley (Clinical Biomechanist, Gait Laboratory, Withington Hospital), Birch (Honorary Research Fellow, Obstetrics and Gynaecology, North Staffs Hospital), Murray (SLT, South Manchester Primary Care Team). In addition to specific projects identified above, the majority of members are actively involved in collaborations with industry, the voluntary sector and community and hospital Trusts. Marsden, Skidmore and Wibberley have undertaken funded evaluations of nurse practitioner practice and the health care assistant pilot project for NHS Trusts in the North West. They are also working with the Dept of Emergency Medicine (Manchester Royal Infirmary) to evaluate a web-based programme on evidence based practice. Robertson is working with Manchester Hospitals NHS Trust to develop research in Parkinson’s Disease. Wright has collaborated with British Aerospace to develop a unique work-based therapy programme for their employees who stammered (RA2 ref.1&2) and is now working with therapists at the City Lit, London, developing innovative research on the involvement of family members in adult stammering therapy. Blatchford and Sons Ltd. provide prosthetic hardware, clinical and technical support and amputee expenses for Buckley’s research on biomechanical and prosthetic parameters of lower-limb amputee running. Munley’s research on Fault Diagnostic Training was presented as an invited address to the Health and Safety Executive’s Industry Management Committee (RA2 ref.2). He is also working with Williams (Nuclear Installations Inspectorate) and Worth (Electrowatt) on computer modelling of emergency evacuation (RA2 ref.1). Loughlin has been in great demand for conferences on key aspects of government policy such as clinical governance, clinical effectiveness and the application of management theory to the organisation of the NHS. This will expand as policies on evidence-based practice come under further scrutiny. New researchers are also encouraged to develop collaborative research. Hackney is working on a self report depression scale for new mothers with colleagues from North Staffs Health Trust. Phillips (with Goldbart) is working with the Mancunian Community Health Care Trust to explore therapists’ and parents’ explanatory models of language delay. Murray is investigating outcome measures in AAC with Lancasterian School.
Research Structure and Environment
Management
Research active staff included in this submission belong to either the Department of Biological Sciences or the School of Pharmacy within the Faculty of Applied Sciences, who thus share a common senior management. The Pro-Vice Chancellor for Research co-ordinates the University's research and it is through this Pro-VC and his committees that the Department and the School were targeted as an area for growth and investment. The Faculty Research Committee co-ordinates strategy and outcomes at the Faculty level. The Faculty Graduate School manages the development and wellbeing of postgraduate research students. Currently there are 122 postgraduate students in the Faculty, of whom 36 are associated with this submission. Four specialist laboratory suites designed primarily for cell culture, molecular biology, microbiology and physico-chemical analysis are available to researchers within the Faculty. The day-to-day planning, direction and scrutiny of outcomes is in the hands of research group leaders. Regular seminars allow those outside an individual research group the opportunity to support and challenge the research effort. Our research strategy is in accord with De Montfort University’s strategic plan, which is to focus its research resources on a limited number of areas that include biomedical and pharmaceutical science, chemistry and nursing, and by so doing to build on its existing strengths in these areas.
Research Groups
Three major research groups are identified within this submission. They are listed below together with the senior scientists associated with each group and a brief description of their major research interests. There is considerable crossover in research activity between the groups.
Cancer and Drug Metabolism : The primary focus of this group is cancer – including detection, regulation, development of natural anticancer compounds and the design and synthesis of novel anticancer drugs, with an emphasis on pro-drugs that are activated through metabolism in cancer cells. A second focus is drug metabolism, particularly those aspects that relate to cancer, including the activities of the cytochrome P450 (CYP) enzymes. Burke, who was appointed Head of the School of Pharmacy in late 1995, has invented a range of fluorimetric assays for CYPs, e.g. the ethoxyresorufin O-deethylase (EROD) assay, that are used world-wide in industry and academia. This work has continued at DMU with new assay substrates, e.g. alkoxyquinolines. Burke and colleagues also discovered that the cytochrome P450 form, CYP1B1, is highly over-expressed in human cancer cells relative to normal cells. At DMU CYP1B1 is being pursued as a tumour marker and a method has been developed, with Stanley, for detecting cancer cells by immunohistochemically visualising their expressed CYP1B1, using anti-CYP1B1 monoclonal antibodies generated here. Stanley has a research background in the differential expression of N-acetyl transferase (NAT) enzymes in cancer relative to healthy tissue, and this is being exploited to improve the cancer detection methodology by adding NAT as a second immunohistochemical target. Burke is co-holder of a Framework 4 grant (supplying expertise on CYP) based in DMU and associated with laboratories in Holland, Spain and Germany set up to investigate the use of plant cell cultures to synthesise complex alkaloids such as podophyllotoxin which may serve as precursors for the production of anti-cancer drugs. Potter is an experienced cancer medicinal chemist who was responsible for the design and synthesis of two important anticancer drugs: abiraterone acetate (Prosterol; licensed to Boehringer Ingelheim), currently in phase II clinical trial for treating prostate cancer; and idoxifene (licensed to GlaxoSmithKline), currently in phase III clinical trial for treating breast cancer and osteoporosis. Moreover, Potter‘s original published proposal that the breast cancer drug, tamoxifen, causes secondary cancers via an alpha-hydroxylation carcinogenic metabolic activation process is now widely accepted. Since arriving at DMU Potter has pursued CYP1B1 as a tumour treatment target by designing and synthesising novel compounds intended to be anticancer prodrugs that are selectively activated through metabolism in cancer cells by CYP1B1. The group’s current drug metabolism research interests also encompass the cancer-preventative properties of natural dietary compounds. Potter has recently discovered that the cancer-preventative properties of the red wine constituent, resveratrol, may be due to its metabolism by CYP1B1 to a known cytostatic compound. Orr, who (under the name Wrigley) has a background of research into benzothiazole anticancer drugs, is currently studying the role of curcumin (turmeric spice) metabolism in this compound’s cancer preventative abilities in collaboration with Professor Gescher of Leicester University. Chaudhuri is a molecular biologist who has developed a cell-based functional genomics technology for identifying novel "anti-apoptotic" genes from any tumour tissue of choice. He has found a specific small molecule inhibitor of Cdk4 that behaves like p16 (the Cdk4-specific inhibitory protein in human cells) in inducing both senescence and apoptosis in tumour cells and which has efficacy in tumour models (J Natl Cancer Inst, in press). Chaudhuri also discovered a novel gene that is highly induced in two astrocytomas; since joining DMU he has shown that this gene is brain-specific and is induced in diverse glioblastomas. Chaudhuri is currently using a yeast system to discover ways in which apoptotic processes can be induced therapeutically in cancer cells. The work of the Cancer and Drug Metabolism group is supported by 2 post-doctoral fellows and 11 graduate research students.
Cellular Mechanisms : Boarder was recently appointed as the new head of Biological Sciences and is also head of the Cell Signalling Laboratory. Together with Webb, they investigate signal transduction of G protein-coupled nucleotide receptors (P2Y receptors) in human vascular proliferative disease, particularly associated with transplantation and balloon angioplasty. This Wellcome Trust funded work, part of a long term collaboration with clinicians in the Departments of Medicine and Surgery at the Leicester Royal Infirmary, involves studying the regulation of proliferative mechanisms in cells grown out from explants taken during bypass surgery. They have just published the exciting finding of a novel antiproliferative response to certain P2Y receptors: PDGF stimulation of both DNA synthesis and cell number are reduced by UTP acting on certain P2Y receptors. Further Wellcome Trust funded studies investigate control of hepatocytes: work to date shows that coexisting subtypes of P2Y receptors exert differential control over signal transduction pathways in hepatocytes, and the next thrust is to understand how this is translated into differential control of glycogen phosphorylase. Webb, who was responsible for the first cloning of P2Y receptors (P2Y1), has developed within the Cell Signalling Laboratory a quantitative RT-PCR method for P2Y receptor mRNA expression, and leads a new initiative on structure-function relationships within these receptors. Piacentini has a record of achievement in the regulation of cardiac muscle cells by G-protein coupled receptors, including cell proliferation in the heart, and is currently studying the role of myocardial fibroblasts in the remodelling which follows an ischaemic episode. Haris employs biophysical techniques for structural analysis of ion-channel proteins; in particular he has studied how peptides and proteins interact with membranes and thereby attain their 3-dimensional structure. Recent published achievements have been on K+ channels and membrane perturbing proteins. Ion channels are also the interest of Cuthbert, who is internationally recognised for his work on epithelial ion channel dysfunction associated with cystic fibrosis. Having recently retired as Head of the Pharmacology Department at Cambridge University, Professor Cuthbert now divides his time between De Montfort University and Cambridge University. His current work at DMU involves studying ways of manipulating the ion channels of transporting epithelia to provide an adjunct or alternative treatment to gene therapy for cystic fibrosis. Hobart applies molecular biology skills to issues of relevance to the cell/molecular biology of disease. His publications have made major contributions to the field of the structure, evolution and defects of the terminal complement components, and he is now working on the application of novel PCR techniques to breakpoints in cancer cells. The control of the cellular mechanisms of immunosuppression is important for organ transplantation and Whiting, using both cell lines and renal tissue, is examining the synergistic and cytotoxic effects of combining novel immunosuppressive drugs. Oldroyd focusses on nephrotoxicity, particularly that associated with radiocontrast media. His principal interest lies with the inhibition of renal fibrosis and is focussed on the use of cytokines and growth factors to inhibit pro-fibrotic cell types. The Cellular Mechanisms group is supported by 3 post doctoral fellows and 18 graduate research students.
Staff submitted to other units of assessment
The Department of Biological Sciences and School of Pharmacy have also contributed personnel to the Agriculture (UoA 15: 4 staff) and Chemistry (UoA 18: 3 staff) RAE submissions within the university.
Promoting an Active Research Culture
The main mechanisms for promoting and vitalising research are: the provision of core funding for new research ventures from within the University; the continuing appointment of new members of staff with a strong research pedigree and maintaining a stream of new PhD students (as detailed below); and the promotion of departmental research seminar series. The seminars comprise formal presentations from visiting speakers and informal progress updates presented mainly by our PhD students and postdoctoral fellows. We also hold an annual update of biomedical research at which all research staff and students present their work to other researchers and academic staff. Half-day and full-day workshops focussed on specific research topics provide for more intensive analysis of research areas and offer the opportunity for novel collaboration across research boundaries within the Faculty. Attendance at external research conferences, particularly involving PhD students, is strongly encouraged. Research-active staff are required to apply for external research grants and to publish their work in leading research journals. Success in research (e.g. PhDs awarded, projects completed and published, major grants obtained, talks given elsewhere) is celebrated in a weekly Faculty Newsletter and a quarterly University magazine distributed to all members of the Faculty. Another stimulus to active research for the staff is that research success is a major criterion of the University for staff promotion.
Infrastructure and Facilities.
Since 1996 the University has invested substantially in materiel support for research. The Biomolecular Research Suite of laboratories, which was built and equipped at a cost of approximately £500,000, includes facilities for tissue culture, molecular biology and biochemistry. Also within this facility is housed the East Midlands Universities’ Biological X-band EPR Spectrometry Facility, funded originally by the MRC in 1994. The culture of yeast for genetic manipulation is carried out in a newly designed laboratory. Last year a new Cell Signalling Laboratory Suite was built and the Drug Biophysical Properties Laboratories were extensively refurbished. These various research groups are well equipped with a wide range of biomedical and physicochemical instrumentation supported by full-time research technicians.
Interdisciplinary Research and Collaborative Research with Industry and Other Institutions
Several interdisciplinary research collaborations exist among the staff submitted here, and also between them and staff in the Department of Chemistry. Through the Faculty, in association with the Department of Chemistry, a wide range of sophisticated chemical and physical analytical instrumentation is provided, plus the relevant skilled operating technicians and expert academics.
The broad objective of the group is to investigate biological processes whereby nutrition and environmental agents affect early development and health. This serves the UNL mission of developing research and meeting the needs of the community. We have established permanent collaborations with complimentary specialists in seven British and 13 overseas research institutions as is reflected in the authorships in the publications. This strategy has enabled young researchers and students to experience the wider body of knowledge and technologies, and has contributed to broadening the scope of the research as a whole, providing a continued vital stimulus.
Research Management
Research growth at the IBCHN is driven by its multi-disciplinary approach, including an increase in both diversity and specialisation, in order to make best use of advances. It is managed by the Director and permanent senior staff supported by an external scientific advisory group chaired by Professor Cedric Hassall, DSc, FRS, previously Director of Research at Roche. The group includes: Dr. Alan Garton FRSE, FRS; Lord Rea of Eskdale, MD, DCH, DObstRCOG, FRGP; and Sir Kenneth Stuart, MD, DSc, FRCP, FFPHM, DTM&H. The committee includes lay people and seeks external expert advice.
An internal steering committee coordinates research activities of both the Institute and the University schools that form this group. It advises on research strategy and funding, monitors research output and staff development. The Committee consists of the Dean of the Faculty of Science, Computing and Engineering, Heads of Schools in the Faculty, the Faculty Research Director and IBCHN Director. It is chaired by Dr. Robert Lister PhD, FIBiol, a former Director of Inveresk Research, GD Searle and currently Chairman of the National Training Research Appraisal Group.
Research Groups and their Activities - Background
There are three main interacting groups: Community and Population, Food Hygiene and Chemistry and Membrane Lipids.
The Community and Population Group focuses on pregnancy because of its singular importance to the unique human brain with its dependence on vascular growth for its nourishment during fetal development. Our findings suggested that maternal nutrition near the time of conception has a profound effect on birth outcome in our high risk population. Interest in fetal nutrition led us to widen research to comparative population studies and the effect of maternal lipid nutrition on intrauterine programming.
Allied to the community health aspect the Food Hygiene and Chemistry Group is concerned with the generation of food composition data which are essential to understand the effect of diet on health. A team of microbiologists under Dr Jane Sutherland recently joined. Their work fits well with food hygiene, chemistry and community health and fills a role understanding the health risks in the community.
The Membrane Lipids Group research was built on the success of our early findings that membrane arachidonic (AA) and docosahexaenoic (DHA) acids were limiting for brain growth, a hypothesis which has now been extensively confirmed. The membrane lipid is altered by diet and environment whereas its proteins are specifically defined. Small alterations in membrane lipids can affect signalling and gene expression. Indeed, reorganization of the plasma membrane is a major step in translating the extracellular signal. From this beginning, the research is now moving into understanding the pivotal roles of rafts, caveolae and protein/lipid domains in the membrane and their implications for immune, neural and vascular function. These systems have certain developmental membrane lipid and receptor characteristics in common.
1. COMMUNITY AND POPULATION: How food affects the cell membrane and health.
Nutrition & pregnancy outcome: (Dr Wendy Doyle with Prof Kate Costeloe, St. Bartholomew's Medical School). In the interpregnancy period of mothers, who had a low birthweight baby and intended to have another, we discovered 78% met <4 of 16 Dietary Reference Values, 56% had serum ferritin <15g/l and were severely deficient in red cell folate (<230g/l). They were also seriously depleted of membrane DHA. This demonstrates a high prevalence of inadequate nutrition in inner-city populations. A pilot intervention study to measure the effect of supplementation on blood nutrients and determine the amount needed in a supplementation trial has been carried out.
National Diet and Nutrition Survey on the elderly: (Doyle). Because of our expertise in community nutrition we were asked to participate in a comprehensive, cross-sectional study of the diet and health status of older people. Two nationally representative samples were drawn from adults aged 65 years and over: one free living (n=1275) and one from institutions (n=412). Doyle was Consultant Survey Nutritionist and co-author of the Report (1998) and funded by the Department of Health and MAFF.
Pregnancy induced depletion of AA and DHA in the mother? (Dr Keb Ghebremeskel with Profs. Joo-Hyun Num & Ahm Kim, Asan Med. School, Univ. Ulsan, South Korea, and Dr Hiramitisu Suzuki, National Food Research Institute, Japan). Our evidence described a specific doubling of the proportion of AA and DHA transferred from maternal to fetal plasma. The task was to test if, regardless of background diets, there was a maternal AA/DHA loss. Comparing pregnant and non-pregnant women in Seoul and London, we found a maternal loss in both locations. With no evidence for placental biosynthesis of AA or DHA we concluded that pregnancy drained maternal stores, this being consistent with the interpregnancy data. We also found that red cell membrane AA correlated with DHA (r=0.81 P<0.0001 n=74) and neonate (r=0.88 P<0.0000) despite their quite different diet sources and precursors. It seems membrane AA /DHA is closely regulated.
Trace elements: (Ghebremenskel, Dr Chris Bax with Dr Ram Reifen, The Hebrew University of Jerusalem and Professor Ovrang Djahanbakhch, Director of Reproductive Medicine, Royal London & Newham Hospitals). Trace elements are vital in anti-oxidant protective enzymes and DNA transcription. This task is followed up by studies on the acquisition of Zn by human fetal endothelial cells and trophoblast by Bax, a new member of the group. The East-end Health Authority is concerned about the high incidence of CHD, diabetes and babies of low head circumference and low-birthweight in British Asians compared to Caucasians or Afro-Caribbean’s. We are studying the differences in Asians with contrasting diets (Bangladeshi Muslim, Pakistani Muslim, Hindu, Sikh and Christians). We find a positive maternal-fetal gradient in Cu, Fe, Li and Zn which is a potential maternal drain in pregnancy as with AA and DHA.
Nutrition/visual impairment in refugee babies (Ghebremeskel with Dr Lilly Dubowitz, Imperial College). Our goal was to test if the transient visual impairment affecting 80% of refugee babies in Thailand, was due to deficiency of DHA, which is essential for photoreceptor function. We found no causative demographic, DHA or other nutritional evidence. The results suggest a pre-natal aetiology, closer to disruption from home. Aid Agencies usually focus on children in refugee crises. Our results draw attention to the mother. This work has been done in collaboration with Dr Francois Nosten (Tropical Medicine, John Radcliffe, Oxford) and Dr Tarathip Kolatat (Faculty for Tropical Medicine, Mahidol University, Bangkok, Thailand) and is Wellcome funded.
Pre and neo-natal cognitive development (Dr Chris Lange-Küttner with Dr Lothar Krappmann, Max Planck Institute for Human Development, Berlin) Word processing abilities in auditory and visual memory in British and German children has been studied to develop a quantitative protocol. The aim is to test the long-term effects of the interventions in pregnancy and preterm infants with a developmental assessment. Related work with infants is developed with Prof. Anne Greenough (King's College Hospital, London) on infants' left spatial field neglect and Professor Jules Davidoff (Goldsmith College, London) on infants' colour perception. Infant work to date has involved the study of infants' spatial perception, in particular locus of propulsion in moving objects (with Dr Margaret Crichton, University of Aberdeen), besides research with older children.
2. FOOD HYGIENE AND CHEMISTRY: The environmental factors operating on membranes & health. Food Chemistry: (Professor Michael Crawford and Doyle). Data on food composition is essential for the study of nutrition in pregnancy or disease. UK data is available from MAFF via the Royal Society for Chemistry (RSC) but fatty acid data is minimal. Our goal is to provide it for all saturated, monounsaturated, cis/trans, positional isomers, parent and long chain, essential fatty acids (EFA) and we developed the software (FOODBASE 2001) for the data base which incorporates all nutrients available from the RSC and our fatty acid data. We included ethnic foods and are adding toxic heavy metals and other elements.
Chronic Disease China: (Crawford with Yiqun Wang, Xi’an Lipid Research Center, China, who has now joined us to study for a PhD). Much of the aetiology of atherosclerosis and some cancers is lipid dependent. We applied FOODBASE and analytical technology to the Lifestyle and Disease Study of 65 Counties in China originally done with Sir Richard Peto. The result was evidence of a protective nature of sea foods and red cell membrane DHA for many chronic diseases as reported for Western countries.
'Numbers And Types Of Starter Bacteria In Fermented Milks in Relation to Claims Concerning Probiotic Properties' (FSA Project) (Sutherland): Cultures of gut-derived bacteria, associated with benefits to health (probiotics), are now part of a health-conscious lifestyle. In response to doubt on quality of such products, the FSA commissioned the development of means of characterising probiotic bacteria. The findings challenge previously held assumptions regarding survival and dynamics of probiotic bacteria. A second FSA project has recently commenced on cross-contamination from the external surface of eggs in relation to risk of exposure to salmonella. We are investigating the role of eggs in the spread of salmonella infection, especially that of S. enterica serotype ENTERIDITIS.
3. MEMBRANE LIPIDS The plasma membrane is where external factors first influence the cell.
A new precursor for Brain Cholesterol Synthesis: (Professor Steven Cunnane, Crawford, with Tom Brenna, Nutritional Sciences, Cornell University, and Suzuki) Formula manufacturers claimed there is no need to add DHA to formulae as
Promoting and Sustaining Research. We have: 1. Appointed Profesor Cunnane as International Research Director. He develops further a North American link and international collaboration. 2. Opened a clinic in East London for community research and to interface laboratory, community workers and mothers. 3. Won a place in the EU, Trondheim Biological Marine Research Station. Their facilities include: super computers, analytical equipment, aquaculture and ocean research vessels. 4. Formed two interactive consortia: (i) Led by Norway with France, Belgium and Cyprus on membrane lipid domains and cell function. (ii) Led by us with Crete, Germany, Hungary, Italy, Israel, South Africa and Slovenia for nutrition, birth outcome and gene expression. 5. Held two international conferences, attended by prominent scientists. 6. Invested £150, 000 for a new PhD programme.
Research Infrastructure, Facilities, Training and Support for Students. Laboratory and office space: 6 laboratories, 3 offices, seminar, various rooms for staff, students and specialised equipment. Instrumentation: Equipment for chemistry, immunology, microbiology and biochemistry: 3 FID Gas Chromatographs, 2 GC-MS, 6 High Performance Liquid Chromatographs, 2 High Speed Centrifuges, 2 Micro Ultracentrifuge, 2 Fluorometers, 2 Infrared and 2 Atomic Absorption spectrometers, Inductively-Coupled Plasma Optical Emission, Nuclear Magnetic Resonance, UV Microscope, Graphite Furnace, X-Ray Diffractometer, BodPod, PCs. Students: are trained on experimental design and if appropriate, are co-supervised by an external scientist. This provides interaction and access to facilities not available locally. We hold regular seminars with students and invited speakers and finance students to present at conferences, e.g. Lyon and Paris (5 students); Japan-Korea (1 student); Brussels (2); Spain (1); Glasgow (5); Edinburgh (2); Brighton (2) and London (3).
Supporting Interdisciplinary or Collaborative Research (see also Links between C staff). The submission is, by the nature of its research, multi-disciplinary and collaborative (see ‘Research Activities’ & ‘Promoting Research’ above). To extend this strength we have employed new staff with diverse backgrounds: Dr. Angela Madden (metabolism), Dr. Kan Kwok (immunology) and Bax (thrombosis) joined the UNL too recently to be included in this RAE. Dr Helen Crawley has been contributing statistical support to the group. Dr Gail Rees is a State Registered Dietician. Dr Ivan Golfetto from Venezuela, is medically qualified as is Ms Zoe Brooks who is a registered nurse. Golfetto and Ms Yoeju Min, a student from the School of Hygiene and Tropical Medicine, will become Research Fellows in 2001. To this, Sutherland adds the microbiological interface with extensive European collaboration. Thus we have a group qualified to interact with clinicians. The international team combines nutritional manipulation of gene expression by White, Reifen and Yavin which links to prenatal vascular programming, prematurity, intrauterine growth restriction (IUGR) and brain growth with Poston and Djahanbakhch. Then Lange-Küttner adds a cognitive assessment dimension for pediatric work with Greenough. Prof. Andrew Nicolaides, Director of the Institute of Genetics and Neurology, Cyprus and leader of the International Union of Angiology Multi-Centre Study contributes vascular expertise for the comparisons of heart disease in Northern and Southern Europe. The vascular, immune and cell signalling aspect is linked to studies on how diet/disease affects the membrane rafts and caveolae and their function by Holmsen and Ghebremeskel. This dovetails with the membrane physics of Bloom, Schmidt, Klösgen and Crawford, with Holmsen, Cunnane and Bligh contributing the NMR. Suzuki works with us on 3 fatty acids, cognition, and the sub cellular and synaptic distribution of DHA. Professor J Parkington, Archaeology, Capetown, Crawford and Broadhurst are participating in a study of nutrition and human evolution. Benade is intervention project leader for the MRC, South Africa and provides for out reach and level 3 containment facilities for Vella’s work on nutrition, immunity and vertical transmission of HIV.
Research Groups
Ten researchers with claims to national/international excellence in Subjects Allied to Medicine are presented for review (names in bold); five other staff whose activities re-inforce this research are described in RA6c. Biomedical Sciences research contains a balance of strategic and applied work, much being collaborative and some being interdisciplinary in nature, and is grouped under two headings: Cell Biology and Pathology and Pharmacology and Toxicology.
B. Pharmacology and Toxicology
MG Darlison, a molecular neurobiologist, is currently re-establishing his group at NTU. He is internationally known for his work on the cloning and expression of
Promotion and support of research
The University allocated £900K for biomedical research over the five years of this RAE period, following endorsement of the Unit's strategic research plan, in 1996. This money has been used to support new initiatives and existing strengths and to limit the teaching and administrative commitments of staff. The average teaching load for research active staff is around 200 contact hours per annum, which is high enough to ensure that research underpins teaching whilst low enough to permit productive research. We achieved the maximum score of 24 points in the 1999-2000 round of teaching assessments in ‘Molecular and Organismal Biosciences’. Monies have also been allocated to postgraduate bursaries, research staff salaries (technicians, research fellow stipends), Dr Dickenson’s salary (first 3 years), laboratory consumables, the provision and refurbishment of equipment and funding to facilitate both national and international collaboration. Funds also enhance library holdings, including the addition of key journals and periodical reviews. Library facilities have been further improved by a £1.5m refurbishment of the Clifton Campus Library (Science, Education and Humanities). The Department provides significant funding for academic and technical staff for specific courses and conference attendance and other staff development activities linked to research. Since 1995 the University has fostered excellence in research and encourages growth and innovation through a Research Enhancement Fund; the Department has secured, for example, part-funding for the appointments of Profs Rees and Darlison and for student bursaries for new staff (Drs Dickenson and Lloyd Mills), a 6-month sabbatical for Dr Forsythe and £200K for capital equipment since January 1996. In accordance with University policy, newly recruited staff have a good research track record and appropriate research plans. They are encouraged to continue research by being provided with (a) reduced teaching contact hours for at least one year, (b) funding for a bursary student, (c) financial/mentoring assistance to establish their research by collaboration with an established researcher, and (d) training in research supervision organised by the University.
Monitoring and management of research
This is undertaken at the University, Faculty and Departmental level via committees with the power to devolve budgets according to the unit’s strategic plan. The Departmental Research Committee, chaired by the Departmental Research Coordinator (Dr Billett) and comprising of senior staff representatives, is responsible for the development of research strategy, resource allocation and the coordination of bids for external/internal funding. Allocation is based mainly on output, income and impact. Since RAE96 the University has created a Graduate School in the Faculty of Science and Mathematics which is responsible for overseeing MSc courses, the registration and transfer of students on MPhil/PhD courses and provides support for researchers to allow integration of research with other activities, notably teaching and learning. Research student progress is formally assessed by the Departmental Research Coordinator and individual supervisors through written and oral reports at the end of the first year and at the end of subsequent years by the Graduate School. A written report is assessed by the Faculty Research Committee when students transfer from MPhil to PhD. Departmental research is monitored internally on an annual basis by the University under the direction of the Dean of Research, with a major review involving external assessors on a three year cycle. A major review of our research was undertaken in 1999, with Prof M Ferguson, University of Manchester, as external assessor.
Research Infrastructure
The Department of Life Sciences has modern laboratory accommodation with instrumentation for analytical, cellular, ultra-structural and molecular research and is serviced by containment level 2 laboratories and Faculty-based facilities (including NMR, GCMS, radioisotope, EM suite, workshop and audiovisual). The equipment is continually upgraded and recent acquisitions include a confocal laser microscope, an electrospray tandem mass spectrometer, a capillary gel electrophoretic system, a flow cytometer, a bench ultra-centrifuge and plate readers. A replacement scanning electron microscope is in the process of being purchased by the Faculty. University funding (ca. £250K) has recently been made available for equipment and staff in support of the appointment of Prof Darlison.
Relationship with industry and the public sector
The Unit has an excellent relationship with local NHS hospitals (eg Queen’s Medical Centre and City Hospital, Nottingham; Sheffield University Teaching Hospitals), and several staff undertake collaborative research with this sector. The MSc in Biomedical Sciences has cemented this close interaction. The Unit also has a very fruitful interaction with a wide range of industries, strengthened by the industrial training component of its sandwich degrees and recruitment of staff from local industries onto our part-time BSc Biological Sciences degree. Since RAE96, funding has been received from industries such as Cantab Pharmaceuticals, Onyvax, Smith and Nephew, Unilever, Molecular Light Technology, etc amounting to over £400K in the last three and a half years. The Unit has involvement in the Teaching Company Scheme (with Lumitech Ltd, resident at the NTU Business Park, and DEVA Processing, Cheshire) and has been awarded two BBSRC LINK grants (one under the Applied Biocatalysis Scheme).
Self-assessment of past research strategy
The Unit has been committed to developing high quality research and funding has been concentrated on biomedical scientists with a proven track record and younger staff with the potential to develop into high calibre researchers. Funding has been used to cover staffing costs, student and travel bursaries, journal subscriptions, equipment and a significant amount (20% of total) on teaching relief. The average external income per annum has increased to over £60K per active researcher during the last 2 years (from an average of £27K /researcher during the previous period), with a large increase in Research Council funding. Many transnational collaborations exist and over 80% of the outputs in RA2 are publised in journals perceived (based on Impact Factor tables) as being in the top 30%. In RAE96 (Unit 14) 6 staff researchers in the biomedical field were entered and now 10 are presented for review. In addition, three new members of staff, Drs C Lloyd Mills, K Hunter (see RA6c) and H Mangiapane (appointed February 2001) are not put forward in RA1, but are part of the Unit's commitment to the growth of its research base.
Research Environment
Promoting and Sustaining Research. The Health Services Research Group’s strategic plan embodies a commitment to group members acting as research advisers to each other. This takes the form of a twice-yearly Group-level review of research achievements as well as internal assessment of draft research grant applications and the usual provision for seminar discussions and information exchange. The University's Professional Development Unit runs regular programmes of advice on research, university procedures on research related activities, grant writing and the use of IT to support research. The Library provides specific support for health services research and instruction in advanced use of relevant databases, both academic and NHS-based.
Research Infrastructure All staff have their own PCs with network links and access to library catalogues and specialist data bases. All accommodation has recently been refurbished. For those whose work is laboratory based there is full well-found provision. Staff have access to capital and revenue funding to support their research activities.
Interdisciplinary and Collaborative Research. As can be seen from RA2 and the summary details in RA5 and RA6, virtually all the research of the Group is of an interdisciplinary nature, either between different members of the Group, or between Group members and health care professionals working within the NHS. There is also extensive collaboration with other Universities. The Group has actively sought such collaboration and pursued links that enable the pursuit of significant research goals within the Group’s areas of expertise. All potential links are evaluated for their potential in Group meetings.
Overview
Organisation and management of research
The Institute of Biomedical and Biomolecular Sciences is one of a number of research centres within the Faculty of Science. Funds specifically earmarked for research are passed from the University Centre to the Faculty. They are then distributed to the research centres by the Dean (Prof. Rogers) against agreed plans made in consultation with the Chairman of the Science Faculty Research Committee (Prof. Kneale).
The Institute is overseen by the IBBS Management Board, comprising the coordinators of the 6 research groups, together with the Dean (Prof. Rogers) and relevant Heads of School, and chaired by the Director of Research (Prof. Kneale). The Board makes recommendations to the Dean for the distribution of research funds within IBBS, including the appointment of Research Fellows and Research Lecturers, the allocation of research studentships and the funding of core facilities. The progress of research fellows is closely monitored and reports are produced annually for consideration by both the IBBS Board and Science Faculty Research Committee.
Research Groups
Research in the Institute is organised into a number of groups, each led by a senior scientist who is responsible for mentoring new staff, advising on the submission of research grant applications and overseeing the supervision of postgraduate research students. There is, however, substantial interaction between groups, and many research projects involve collaboration between them. There has been a major restructuring of the research groups since the Institute was formed, taking account of new scientific collaborations between researchers and new staff appointments that did not fit neatly into the existing group structures.
Biomolecular Structure: (Kneale, Crane-Robinson, Mernagh, McClellan, Read, Conte, Triantafilou).
Knowledge of the molecular structure of key regulatory proteins, and establishing the rules for molecular recognition that determine their specificity in interacting with other macromolecules, is crucial for our understanding of biological mechanisms. The Biomolecular Structure group has as its major theme the structure and interactions between proteins and nucleic acids that play a key role in fundamental cell processes. Current interests are centred on proteins involved in the regulation of gene expression (including DNA methyltransferases, chromosomal proteins, transcription factors, repressors, RNA binding proteins) and a variety of unusual nucleic acid structures (e.g G-tetraplexes, CNG repeats), many of which are of direct biomedical relevance (e.g. in triplet repeat diseases). Use is made of a wide range of biophysical techniques, including analytical ultracentrifugation, fluorescence spectroscopy, circular dichroism, surface plasmon resonance and microcalorimetry, together with biochemical and molecular biological approaches (protein chemistry, DNA footprinting, gene cloning and expression, site-directed mutagenesis). There are strong collaborative links to other groups in the Institute (particularly Genes and Development and Biotechnology), with whom there are a number of joint publications and/or joint research grants.
In the period of assessment, we have been awarded 20 days of beam-time (£160,000) at the European Synchrotron Radiation Facility, Grenoble, in a joint venture with Southampton University for protein crystallography. The award of a £780,000 JREI/Wellcome Trust research grant for setting up a 600MHz NMR facility at Portsmouth confirms this group’s reputation as a leading centre for structural research in protein-nucleic acid interactions. The recruitment of Dr Conte from Imperial College has broadened the research activities of the group to include the structure of retroviral proteins, auto-antigen proteins and RNA, whilst enhancing our expertise in the use of multi-dimensional NMR techniques. The recent appointment of Dr Triantafilou expands the interests of the group to include molecular interactions of cell surface receptors, in particular those involved in the immune response.
Major achievements since RAE 1996 include: Evidence of „base flipping“ by a type I DNA methyltransferase (Mernagh, Kneale). Identification of the interaction of a viral DNA binding protein with G-quadruplexes (Kneale). Identification of the minimal DNA binding domain of the transcription factor AreA (Kneale). Determination of the 3D molecular structure of a retroviral matrix protein by NMR (Conte) . Structural analysis of an RNA binding protein involved in viral RNA translation (Conte). Structure determination of the HMG domains of Sox-5 (Read, Crane-Robinson). Thermodynamics of the interaction of HMG domains with DNA (Crane-Robinson, Read). Developing a new structural model for A + T rich DNA (the U-structure) (McClellan). Showing that DNA gyrase plays a role in the instability of CNG repeats (McClellan). Discovering that Parechovirus 1 utilises integrins
avb1 and avb3 as receptors (Triantafilou). Elucidating the molecular interactions between human MHC antigens (Triantafilou)Genes and Development: (Guille, Crane-Robinson, Thorne, Chandler, Sharpe, Hebbes).
This group has arisen from the increasingly close interaction between chromatin research and molecular embryology, and new appointments that have been made to bridge these two fields. These areas of research are closely linked by a common interest in understanding the molecular events that control the expression of genes, both during development and in the mature organism, and in the application of such knowledge to medical science. There are strong links with the Biomolecular Structure group through a common interest in the structure of DNA-binding proteins and their complexes.
A major goal is to identify the role of specific genes that are important in the embryo, and how these genes are regulated at various stages of development to give rise to tissues and organ systems in the adult. A major research theme concerns the molecular mechanisms that underlie the regulation of transcription factor activity in embryos, currently focussing on the control of GATA–2 and its role in blood formation (Guille). We have recently expanded our molecular embryology research by the recruitment of Dr Sharpe from the University of Cambridge. Dr Sharpe is studying the control mechanisms underlying primary neurone formation in developing embryos and the signalling pathways involved. The appointment of Dr Chandler, from the NIH Laboratory of Molecular Embryology, Bethesda (USA) strengthens existing links between the chromatin and molecular embryology laboratories.
It is becoming increasingly clear that the structure of chromatin (and its modulation at specific gene loci) is a vital component of the cell's transcriptional machinery, with profound effects on the expression of specific genes. Current work in this area concerns the role of histone acetylation in gene expression (Thorne, Crane-Robinson, Hebbes), the role of DNA methylation and methylated DNA binding proteins (Chandler), the interaction of nucleosomes with transcription factors (Thorne), and the structure and role of HMG proteins in chromatin (Crane-Robinson). Work of direct clinical relevance includes the development of molecular methods for identifying metastases in the lymph nodes of breast cancer patients (Crane-Robinson), in collaboration with local hospitals.
Major achievements since RAE 1996 include: Identification of an RNA-binding protein as a component of a transcription factor and the role of RNA binding in its regulation during development (Guille); Identification of NAP-1 as a regulator of blood and neural formation (Guille, Thorne, Sharpe); Establishing the key role of retinoic acid signalling in primary neurone formation in the embryo (Sharpe). Discovering an inverse correlation between DNA methylation and histone acetylation in the genome (Thorne). Identification of two novel histone acetyltransferases (Hebbes). Demonstrating that methyl CpG binding proteins can recognise chromatin (Chandler). Mapping histone acetylation within genes (Thorne, Crane-Robinson). Production of a human genomic DNA library highly enriched in active gene sequences (Thorne, Crane-Robinson). The use of mammaglobin mRNA as a molecular marker for micrometastases in breast cancer patients (Crane-Robinson).
Biotechnology: (Ford, Firman, G.Mills, Whitley, Dutta).
Biotechnology underpins many areas of biomedical science, and the interaction with industrial research laboratories, the health service and other public bodies ensures the relevance of applied research in the biosciences. Research of direct clinical interest includes the analysis of body fluids for complex metabolites, and the relationship between metabolic profiles and genetic disorders (Mills). In collaboration with Imperial College Medical School, this group is pioneering the use of high-field NMR spectroscopy for the identification of biological substances in complex mixtures. QSAR methods are used and developed to identify relationships between molecular structure, drug activity and biological toxicity, in collaboration with major pharmaceutical companies such as Glaxo-Wellcome, SmithKline Beecham, Astra Zeneca and Bayer (Ford, Whitley). Advanced mathematical methods are being developed for the analysis of chemical and biological databases (Whitley, Ford).
Major achievements since RAE 1996 include: The patenting of a „molecular motor“, in collaboration with BTG (Firman); Discovering that type I restriction endonucleases control their function by using alternate subunit assembly pathways (Firman); Development of novel pharmacokinetic methodologies for following the disposition of nicotinoid insecticides following topical and oral application (Ford); Development of analytical techniques for the quantification of endocrine disruptors (Mills); Development of novel methods of studying large chemical & biological databases (Ford, Whitley); Development of topological invariants of conformational shape for use in studies of QSARs, molecular similarity and ligand-receptor binding (Whitley). Discovery of the Ca ionophore properties of the naturally occurring cyclic peptides, the destruxins (Ford).
Molecular Medicine: (Gibbs, Rogers, Brown, Gorecki, J. Mills, Zinkevich)
The Molecular Medicine research group is concerned with unravelling the molecular mechanisms underlying diseases such as the muscular dystrophies, Huntingtons's chorea, fragile X syndrome, irritable bowel syndrome, ulcerative colitis and the immune response to infectious agents and cancer. The group brings together expertise in cell surface recognition, cell signalling, genetic diseases, cytokines and molecular neuroscience. Research in cell surface recognition includes the identification of new lectins (Rogers) and the interaction of interleukins with glycoso-aminoglycans (Gibbs). Dr Brown is well known for his work on the role of nitric oxide in gastro-intestinal physiology and pathophysiology. There are close collaborations with local hospitals, e.g. in molecular analysis of sulphate-reducing bacteria in the human gut (Zinkevich). The appointment of Dr Gorecki from the Royal Free Hospital further strengthens the area of molecular medicine through his work on the molecular basis of neural defects associated with muscular dystrophy. Dr J. Mills, a recent appointment from Imperial College, brings expertise on the molecular mechanisms of carcinogenesis.
Major achievements since RAE 1996 include: Establishing that neurexin 2 is involved in synaptogenesis and synaptic plasticity (Gorecki). Demonstrating that dystrophin mRNA levels are regulated during synaptic remodelling (Gorecki) . Demonstrating that interleukins 2, 7 and 12 bind specifically to heparin and heparan sulphate (Gibbs). Identifying the heparin binding sites on interleukin 2 (Gibbs). Demonstrating that Protein Kinase C plays a pivotal role in mediating colitis (Brown). Establishing an interaction between neutrophils, mast cells and nitric oxide in endotoxin induced damage (Brown). Discovering the role of imprinted genes in carcinogenesis (J.Mills). The development of novel methods for the detection of sulphate-reducing bacteria in the gut (Zinkevich). The use of lectins in ocular drug delivery (Rogers).
Biomaterials and Drug Delivery: (Tsibouklis, Smart, Alexander, Cunliffe, Nevell).
The primary aim of the group is to investigate biomaterials for their potential use in medicine as bioadhesives, therapeutic (and diagnostic) agents, drug carriers, and surgical implants. The group is well known for its work in two main areas: mucoadhesion and non-stick biomaterials. The multidisciplinarity of the group is reflected by the broad range of organisations that fund its research: three research councils (EPSRC, BBSRC, NERC); several industrial companies (SmithKlineBeecham, Pfizer, SCJohnson, Johnson & Johnson, Reckitt Beckinser, BF Goodrich); and the Defence Research Agency. The work on mucoadhesion has lead to a number of industrially held patents and the non-stick biomaterials work has been publicised extensively by the national press on both sides of the Atlantic. The group has been strengthened by the recent recruitment of Drs. Alexander and Cunliffe, who work in the area of biomolecular recognition, in particular, on biomedical applications of polymers and molecular imprinting. Considerable use is made of the in-house Atomic Force Microscope and 400 MHz NMR facilities. The group's scientific achievements were highlighted by the Royal Swedish Academy of Science, in the press release accompanying the announcement of the 2000 Nobel Prize for Chemistry.
Major achievements since RAE 1996 include: Development of the "mucus dehydration theory", widely used to explain the mucoadhesive behaviour of many biopolymers (Smart, Tsibouklis). Identification of film-forming biopolymers with very low surface energies (Tsibouklis, Nevell). A novel approach for inhibition of bacterial colonisation of surfaces (Tsibouklis, Nevell). Identification of the factors influencing bioadhesion of semisolids and liquids (Smart, Tsibouklis). The development of Redox-based colon-specific drug delivery systems (Smart, Tsibouklis). Preparation of selective adsorbants by molecular imprinting (Alexander, Cunliffe). Design of new polymers for steroid modification (Alexander).
Physiology and Pharmacology: (Tipton, Eglin, Ebenezer, Shute, Laight, Mejkavic (0.5)).
The Physiology and Pharmacology Group is a cross-disciplinary integration of researchers, united by the common aim of putting research questions in a whole-body context, and of applying fundamental biomedical and pharmacological research techniques to health-related issues. The breadth of expertise within the group enables a wide spectrum of skills and approaches to be brought to a variety of clinically related physiological and pathophysiological responses.
The research interests of the Group include thermoregulation, nutrition, respiration and endothelial function. Specific research projects include studies of the pharmacology of GABA and Histamine H2 receptors and their role in controlling eating behaviour (Ebenezer); drowning, thermoregulation, cold injury to the peripheral circulation and hyperbaric physiology in humans (Tipton, Eglin, Mejkavic); the cellular and molecular mechanisms of inflammation in respiratory tissue in patients with a variety of inflammatory airway diseases e.g. cystic fibrosis and asthma (Shute); the cardiovascular and metabolic relationships between oxidant stress, NO-mediated endothelial function and insulin resistance in metabolic Syndrome X and type II diabetes mellitus (Laight).
In recent years members of the group have been involved in a variety of international research projects with Universities and research groups in e.g. Norway, Canada, Sweden, Denmark, Australia and Slovenia. Many of the applied projects undertaken have involved transfer of fundamental research findings into practical and commercial applications. Within the UK the group are currently undertaking research projects for the Ministry of Defence, Health & Safety Executive and Home Office and collaborative research has been undertaken with: QA Hospital, Portsmouth; Leicester Royal Infirmary; Southampton General Hospital; St Mary's Hospital, Portsmouth; The Royal Brompton Hospital, London; Great Ormond Street Childrens' Hospital, London; The Institute of Naval Medicine; and the Universities of Leeds and Cambridge.
Major achievements since RAE 1996 include: Construction of the world’s first hyperbaric deep body temperature telemetry system (Mejkavic, Tipton) . Identified the mechanism by which those who have suffered prolonged submersion may survive (Tipton). Identified a possible mechanism for sudden cardiac death on immersion (Tipton, Eglin). Elucidation of the role of cholecystokinin in satiety (Ebenezer). Identified the effects of theophylline and rolipram on leukotriene C4 (LTC4) synthesis (Shute). Discovered that extracellular DNA and actin inhibit IL-8 function in cystic fibrosis sputum (Shute). Discovered the mechanism whereby vascular superoxide anion generation modulates endothelial vasodilator function (Laight). Identified a link between elevated oxidant stress and insulin resistance and its possible role in metabolic Syndrome X (Laight).
Infrastructure
The Institute was successful in the recent HEFCE Refurbishment of Research Laboratories competition with a £285K bid to refurbish the Molecular Biology laboratories, and provide new accommodation for the Centre for Molecular Design. Competitive funding totalling ca. £1m has also been secured from a number of sources (e.g. Wellcome Trust, JREI, Royal Society) for facilities such as a 600 MHz NMR facility, a circular dichroism spectrometer, and a phosphorimaging system. The University has provided an additional £150K to build a laboratory to house the new NMR facility and a new senior lecturer (Dr Conte) was also appointed from strategic funds to expand our expertise in NMR structural analysis of proteins and nucleic acids.
The Institute of Biomedical and Biomolecular Sciences has become the focus of considerable strategic investment of research funds by the University. A £10m purpose built extension to the Biosciences block, including state-of-the art research laboratories, has enabled the research groups to be brought together in one site. Funds were provided to support the infrastructure of the Institute with an allocation of £3m over 5 years. This currently supports a variety of researchers (Research Lectureships, Senior Experimental Officers, Research Studentships) and core facilities in the Institute (such as the Atomic Force Microscope, 600MHz and 400MHz NMR spectrometers, mass spectrometer, BIAcore, and extensive molecular graphics and computational facilities).
Formal training in research methods now forms an important component of our commitment to research students. There is an obligatory induction course for all research students, covering health and safety, research methodology and experimental design, project management, record keeping, report writing, word processing skills and intellectual property rights together with basic technical training (radioactivity, centrifugation, microbiology, microscopy).
All Ph.D students within the Science Faculty receive further training in research methods via a series of taught courses, and on successful completion receive a Postgraduate Certificate in Research Methods (35 credits at Masters level). The course includes a formal programme of lectures and workshops (six hours per week) for one semester, covering the following units: Research tools (bibliographic & library services, email & internet, Web page design, software & data management, statistical & numerical analysis packages), Research methods for lab scientists (legal requirements for lab work, ethical issues, planning research programmes, experimental design, lab management), Presentation & teaching skills (poster preparation, oral presentations, dealing with questions, presentation software packages, project & dissertations planning, research reports) and Writing for research (writing scientific, industrial & consultancy reports, journal articles & academic chapters, research proposals, Ph.D theses & popular writing). Formal assessment is by course work including a literature review, a written research proposal and an oral presentation. Science Faculty Research Degrees Committee requires successful completion of this course prior to transfer from M.Phil to Ph.D.
Supervisors are expected to have informal contact with their students on a daily basis and to hold weekly meetings for their research group where research students and postdoctoral staff discuss their work in detail. Generally, an experienced postdoctoral researcher will provide additional day-to-day guidance on experimental procedures and data interpretation. In addition, there is significant sharing of expertise with neighbouring research groups on an informal basis. Annual postgraduate seminar days provide the opportunity for all staff and research students to broaden their knowledge of the wide spectrum of research conducted in the Institute. All research students attend the training sessions offered by the relevant sponsoring body (e.g. BBSRC, Wellcome Trust), giving a research talk and/or poster when appropriate. Attendance at 1-2 national conferences a year is encouraged, and usually one international conference in the 3 year period. Opportunities to present results at such meetings are encouraged, as is publication in quality journals.
Staffing Policy
As a result of the University-wide early retirement scheme introduced in 1997, there has been a significant influx of younger academic staff, and refocussing of research areas across the University. Of the 34 staff in this submission, only 9 remain from the 24 staff submitted to UoA11 in RAE1996. With the creation of IBBS, a further 6 staff have been recruited from other areas of the Science Faculty, and there have been 19 new staff appointments (8 replacement posts, and 11 new posts created with strategic funds). There are now 5 Professors and 4 Readers in the Institute. This expansion has led to a considerable enhancement of the research culture. All staff are expected to publish in high quality journals and to compete for external research grants, and are given help and encouragement to do so by the group coordinators and by the Director of Research. Teaching and administrative loads for research active staff are kept to the minimum to reflect their contributions to research. The establishment of the IBBS seminar program, including eminent external speakers from the UK and abroad has played an important role in enhancing the research culture within the Institute. The University offers a series of annual Research Skills Development Workshops (including e.g. Writing Research Grant Applications, and Writing for Publication) aimed specifically at younger members of staff; there are also courses aimed at contract research staff (e.g. Career Planning) in accordance with the Concordat.
All new staff appointments are designed to bring in high calibre researchers with a strong research record, who will fit into and expand the capabilities of these groups. It is considered important to achieve a balance between promising younger researchers and staff in mid-career for the future health of the Institute. New staff are allocated to an existing research group where there is sharing of resources, expertise and research culture; in addition, where necessary they are given an experienced mentor to assist in the development of their research. Particular help in writing full project grant applications is deemed to be essential, since this is the mechanism whereby younger staff can build up an independent research profile. It is notable that in the last few months, four of our new appointments (Conte, Chandler, Sharpe, Alexander) have each been awarded their first major research grant (>£170K) as principal investigators.
6 A* staff members have been recruited in the last year. Laight and Shute are strategic appointments in the area of cell and molecular physiology/pharmacology, to complement existing strengths in applied human physiology. The appointment of J. Mills expands our growing interests in the molecular mechanisms of carcinogenesis. The appointment of Hebbes is linked to his application for a Wellcome Trust University Award (a post that is taken over by the University after 5 years), and greatly strengthens the world-class reputation of the chromatin group at Portsmouth. Our most recent appointment, Triantafilou, is a highly promising young researcher with an outstanding track record in molecular immunology (having published 14 papers in leading journals in the last 3 years, the majority as first author).
Self-Assessment
The major strengths of research in the BMRC are (a) the determination of cellular and molecular responses in CIDDs (e.g. arthritis, multiple sclerosis and other autoimmune diseases endometrial disorders, gastrointestinal diseases, ion channelopathies) especially those involving mediation by cytokines, proteases and other inflammatory mediators and the actions of therapeutic agents, and (b) the application of modern chemical analytical technologies (e.g. Maldi-ToF, LC-MS methods) and chemical synthesis designed to enable development of new therapeutic approaches for treatment and the diagnosis of CIDD's based on knowledge of their pathogenesis derived from studies in the BMRC. Noteworthy contributions to the published literature include (a) the roles of cytokines (including chemokines) and metalloproteinases in the cellular pathogenesis of multiple sclerosis (by Woodroofe’s group), joint manifestations in arthritic diseases (by Bunning and colleagues), endometrial inflammation (by Laird’s group) and the immunogenetics of autoimmune conditions (by Blakemore and colleagues); (b) elucidation of the genetic abnormalities in muscular dystrophy and their molecular genetics (see also Gene Therapy, 1999, 6: 1331-5) and the molecular properties of potassium-ion channels (by Strong and colleagues); (c) variations in eicosanoid metabolism in the pathogenesis of gastro-intestinal ulceration from NSAIDs and other ulcerogens and NSAID effects on cartilage integrity (Rainsford’s group); (d) proteases invoved in neurodegenerative diseases (Parkinson and colleagues); (e) role of nicotine and smoking in reproductive disorders (Smith, Laird and colleagues); (f) development of novel bioanalytical techniques for determination of nitric oxide metabolites, pharmaceuticals and environmental contaminants (Clench, Tetler and colleagues); and (g) development of novel synthetic routes for preparing new anti-inflammatory drugs (Hewson and colleagues).
5a.3 No other units of assessment to which related work has been submitted.
5a.4 Mechanisms and practices for promoting research and sustaining vital research culture. Research funding for support of projects from HEFCE is allocated on an anonymous peer-review basis. Staff apply to the BMRC for support for specific projects, equipment and consumables. This support is primarily intended for pilot or "pump-priming" projects so enabling demonstration of initial "proof of principle" for a particular hypothesis or concept and to obtain data for applications for grants to peer-review agencies or industry, or for presentations at international and national conferences. This process enables objective assessment, on the basis that the work should (a) meet national and international standards of excellence and research, (b) show potential for external peer-review funding, and (c) enable assessment of industrial potential or any intellectual property or patent considerations. This review process is intended to be positive so that advice can be provided on development of the project.
A weekly programme of seminars and journal clubs (averaging 40/yr) is supported by and organised by the BMRC to which lectures are given by leading national and international authorities. The weekly journal clubs at which both graduate students and staff contribute topical papers for discussion are an important element in maintaining the group stimulation. The Research Groups also have at least weekly laboratory meetings according to specialist interests and have meetings (1-2/yr) with external advisors from the Research and Policy Advisory Committee.
5a.5 Research Infrastructure, Training and Support for Research Students
Training support and administration of post-graduate research students is the responsibility of the Science, Engineering and Technology (SET) Graduate School. SET was established three years ago to enhance the quality of training of post-graduate students. All postgraduate students are required to pass courses on Research Methods and Research Studies (that are designed to equip students with basic and generic research skills) before transfer from MPhil to PhD. Additionally, each student has a tailored programme of recommended reading, together with a portfolio of contributions to overseas and national conferences. There is annual quality monitoring of all reports and progress reviews of students.
The research laboratories in the BMRC include fully equipped cell culture and molecular biological facilities which as detailed in Section 5a2.3.4 have been recently upgraded. Recently, £85,000 was spent to obtain core laboratory equipment (cell culture cabinets and incubators, PCR, electrophoresis, quantitative light microscopy) to meet the needs of increased numbers of research students and new research activities.
5a.6 Support of Interdisciplinary and Collaborative Research
There is strong emphasis on interdisciplinary and collaborative research in the BMRC and this is supported by 8 of the total of all publications being co-authored among the colleagues within the Centre. There has also been extensive collaboration with medicinal and analytical chemists in the Division of Chemistry which has been invaluable in developing enabling science to set the basis for the discovery and development of new anti-inflammatory drugs with entirely novel structures derived from natural products, as well as synthetic compounds which are directed to newly evolving therapeutic targets (see RA6c and RA6d.1).
An extensive network of regional collaboration exists (resulting in a considerable number of joint publications) with colleagues at the Northern General, Royal Hallamshire and Jessop Hospitals (Drs P Watson, M Hadjivassiliou & S Howell) by Woodroofe (time devoted 20 d/yr); the Royal Hallamshire Hospital and Department of Human Metabolism and Clinical Biochemistry by Bunning (20 d/yr) with Dr David Buttle (both jointly received £105,715 from the Arthritis & Rheumatism Council to Sheffield University) and Prof Graham Russell; the Northern General Hospital by Blakemore (16 d/yr) with Professor Richard Eastell, Bone Metabolism Research Unit), the Jessop Hospital for Women by Laird (45 d/yr) with Mr T C Li, Senior Consultant in Obstetrics & Gynecology (who jointly received £66,005 in 1996-2000 to Jessop Hospital for Women from the Special Trustees of the United Sheffield Hospitals), Department of Biomedical Science, Sheffield University by Parkinson (15 d/yr) working on Alzheimer’s and related dementias with Prof Carl Pearson (who jointly received £163,000 from the Wellcome Trust to Sheffield University during this RAE). Strong is part of the Muscular Dystrophy Campaign on Myotonic Dystrophy Group with Dr Peter Baxter, consultant in paediatric neurology, Sheffield Children's Hospital and Dr Andrew Gibson, Consultant in Neurology at the Royal Hallamshire Hospital and Sheffield University Medical School. Collaborations have also been supported by MPhil/PhD research studentships (jointly funded by both Sheffield Hallam and Sheffield Universities, 6 of which were awarded during this RAE to BMRC staff. Rainsford (10 d/yr) collaborates with Dr KD Bardhan, Rotherham District General Hospital on the regulation of eicosanoid metabolism in gastrointestinal diseases. Bunning (15 d/yr) and Rainsford (15d/yr) have collaborations with Mr Chris Ruddlesden FRCS (Barnsley District Hospital) investigating the effects of novel and established anti-inflammatory and cartilage protective agents on cartilage and synovial metabolism in vitro in osteoarthritis. Thus, BMRC scientists have contributed substantially to the breadth of basic biomedical research in CIDDs being investigated in the South Yorkshire region.
National collaborations include those by Woodroofe (1-2 wk/yr) involving studies on the immunopathogenesis of multiple sclerosis with Prof. Cuzner (Institute of Neurology, University of London (1-2 wk/yr)); Smith (1-2 wk/yr) in collaboration with colleagues at the Radcliffe Hospital, Oxford on the role of smoking and other factors involved in the development of complications during pregnancy; Parkinson (3 wk/yr) with colleagues at the Institute of Animal Health, Pirbright, Surrey, on the abnormal processing of prion proteins in dementias; and Rainsford (2 wk/yr) with Dr Brian Callingham, Pharmacology Department, University of Cambridge on the role of amine oxidase derived oxyradicals in tissue damage in inflammatory conditions.
5a2.4.2 Publications
Long-term International collaborations have been developed including:
Strong’s collaborations with the National University of Singapore (10 wk/yr; include joint grants to that university amounting to £110,000 for 1998-2001), as well as the University of Göttingen, Germany (2 wk/yr) on studies on the mechanisms of the neuro-muscular actions of novel scorpion toxins on K+ ion channel functions. Woodroofe’s post-doc, Dr Julie Simpson, worked for 6 months during 2000 at the Albert Einstein Research Institute in New York on the functions of chemokines and T-cells in the pathogenesis of multiple sclerosis. Parkinson has collaborations with Professor Feinstein at Harvard University Medical School (Boston, MA, USA; 2 wk/yr) investigating mechanisms involved in amyloid processing in Alzheimer’s disease.
Rainsford has collaborations with Prof. Richard Hunt at McMaster University Faculty of Health Sciences, Hamilton, Ontario, Canada (3-4 wk/yr) investigating the mechanisms of action of gastro-ulcerogenic agents in humans (for which grants totalling £80,000 have been received by Prof. Hunt); Dr Michael Whitehouse, Professors Nicholas Bellamy and Michael Roberts at the University of Queensland, Brisbane, Australia (2-3 wk/yr) in studies on the actions of novel and established anti-inflammatory drugs in controlling chronic inflammation and pain in vivo; and, Dr Ausma Kumerova, Medical Academy of Latvia, Riga, Latvia investigating trace metal imbalance and oxidant pathology in Chernobyl workers (see Biol. Trace Met. Res. 2000;77:1-12).
Grants obtained from peer-review agencies to outside collaborators which have been granted directly with staff of the BMRC have totalled £524,720.
5a.7 Relationships with the pharmaceutical and biotechnology industries in the U.K. and overseas include:
Research funding obtained by Rainsford for basic and clinically-related research from Boehringer Ingelheim GmbH and Merckle GmbH, Germany, The Procter & Gamble Company, USA, American Home Products Inc, USA, Whitehall-Robins, USA, Wyeth Laboratories Inc, USA, Helsinn Healthcare, SA, Switzerland, Boots Healthcare International, Nottingham, Glyzinc Pharmaceuticals Ltd and Bellara Medical Products Ltd, Australia) totalling £264,642 to purchase consumables, HPLC equipment and salaries for 4 research assistants. Additionally, there has been support for 2 PhD students. Studies by Rainsford on the regulation of lipoxygenase activity in controlling joint destruction (J. Pharm. Pharmacol., 1996, 48: 46-52) and in contributing to the pathogenesis of NSAID induced gastrointestinal injury (J. Gastroent. Hepat., 1996, 11: 922-7; J. Pharm. Pharmacol., 1999, 51: 331-9) have lead to collaborations with Procter & Gamble (USA) and Merckle (Germany) for development of novel cyclo-oxygenase/lipoxygenase inhibitory NSAIDs. Collaborations with companies have involved exchanges of reagents or publications including those by Woodroofe with British Biotechnology Ltd, UK, and Rainsford with GD Searle & Co, USA; Whitehall Robins, The Procter & Gamble Co, USA, Boots Healthcare International, Nottingham, Helsinn Healthcare SA & BMA Biomedicals AG, Switzerland, and Beagle International Ltd, Australia. Clench obtained gifts for BMRC research of a MALDI-ToF mass spectrometer valued at £150,000 from Roche Pharmaceuticals Ltd (UK) and a Micromass Trio 2000 Quadrupole mass spectrometer valued at £80,000 from Novartis Pharmaceuticals, Horsham, Surrey, which are being used for proteomics studies and analysis of prion-like organisms in collaboration with Parkinson. Blakemore obtained £43,100 from Knoll Pharmaceuticals (UK) for studies on leptins in inflammatory diseases with funding for this from Pfizer Ltd (UK) totalling £17,000 and £5,027 for other analytical research. Tetler (deceased 13 December 2000) was involved with Astra-Zeneca (Macclesfield) on development of capillary electrophoresis and fast atom bombardment mass spectrometric techniques for the analysis of prostaglandins and other small molecules involved in inflammatory diseases and assay methods for drugs (e.g. the H-2 receptor antagonist, cimetidine). He also obtained £4,000 from Castrol plc and £2,000 from HSL for related work. Bunning obtained funding of £4,930 from The European Ceramics Industry Association for studies on the interactions of industrially-important fibres with inflammatory cells.
Since 1998 Parkinson has been the co-ordinator with regional bodies in the South Yorkshire Bioscience Enterprise Network (SYBEN), an Objective 1 EU funded project developing industry to promote job creation in bioscience industries in South Yorkshire in 2000-2007 (see RA6d.3). With funding from the EDRF totalling £22,527 for 1998-2000.
Total direct industry funding for research amounted to £570,699 representing 61% of the total income to the BMRC.
5a2.1 The University is committed to staff development in the broadest sense and procedures for reviewing the activities and performance of its staff. An Investors in People (IiP) award was recently granted to the School of Science and Mathematics (which includes the BMRC) reflecting this commitment. In recognition of extensive teaching commitments of BMRC staff (student/staff ratio 33) he University's Strategic Development Fund gave £210k for 4 part-time temporary lecturers to relieve teaching for researchers and for research in other institutions
5a2.2 Arrangements for Developing Research Young/New Researchers
New staff (e.g. Jordan, Strong) have been supported by mentoring and team development with cognate groups. Newly recruited academic staff or post-doctoral fellows are strongly encouraged to acquire professional and teaching skills and to undertake courses, e.g. PGCE.
5a2.3 Staff Recruitment
Strong, a leading international expert on ion channelopathies and the molecular and cellular aspects of myelopathies, was recruited from Imperial College, London in 1998 enabling a new research focus to be developed in the regulation of ion channels in myopathies and CIDDs. Dr Nikki Jordan an expert on gastro-intestinal mucosal protection was appointed Senior Lecturer from the University of Bradford in 1998. Dr Donna Sellars, a vascular cell biologist and physiologist, was recruited as a Lecturer in December 2000 from the Department of Biomedical Sciences, Sheffield University. Three further lecturer/senior lecturer appointments are being made during mid-2001.
5a2.4 Self-Assessment
There has been major expansion of all research outputs and activities during this RAE with increase in all outputs including a 3-4 fold increase in research (grants and industrial funding) while the numbers of graduating PhD's has more than doubled.
5a2.4.1 Income for Research
In the period of this RAE the total income for research from peer-review granting agencies and industry has totalled £679,818 and that from all other sources was £254.600 giving a total income of £934,418. Given that nine A and one A* researchers are submitted for this RAE, the average income for research per staff member is £93,442. BMRC staff also undertook research funded by grants to outside collaborators totalling £524,720. Overall, research income to staff of the BMRC including that from external participation from all sources has totalled £1,459,138. Income was also obtained from overseas government grants (£14,000 from the Saudi government to Laird; £44,000 from the Egyptian government to Blakemore), consultancies and bespoke or short courses totalling £95,600. The yearly total of research income has also increased from £238,871 in 1997-8 to £512,218 in 1999-2000 thus reflecting both increased research activity and spread of financial support.
During the period of RAE2001 a total of 109 original research publications in peer-review journals, 20 chapters or reviews, 6 books and 61 abstracts have been published by all staff in this submission. This averages 8.3 journal articles, 1.5 chapters or reviews and 4.7 abstracts per staff member. The output of all peer-reviewed articles increased 4 fold since the beginning of this RAE. BMRC Staff were invited to give 22 oral presentations at international or major national meetings and contributed 65 papers thus averaging 6.7 presentations per staff member.
5a2.4.3 Research Students and Post-Doctoral Fellows
Currently, there are 21 M.Phil./Ph.D. research students registered and 5 post-doctoral fellows working in the BMRC. The numbers of post-graduate students has quadrupled since the beginning of this RAE and has doubled in the past two years from grants and University investment (see below).
5a2.4.4 University Investment
Investment in development of the BMRC included expansion of the laboratory area by 460 m2 with construction of a multi-purpose molecular biology/biochemical laboratory costing £38,000 for Strong’s Ion Channels group and £12,000 for a new cell culture facilities in 1998-9. In addition to new staff appointments (see 5a2.3) in 1999, a further investment of £212,000 was made from the University's Strategic Development Fund in 1999-2000 for short-term work in outside institutions, appointment of 2 post-doctoral fellows, 3 PhD students and part-time teaching staff. Building refurbishment has also commenced for new laboratories for the BMRC (502 m2, £1.2 million) and the associated Chemistry Research and Teaching Laboratories (504 m2, £1.0 million), both of which will be ready by November 2001.
Staffing policy and culture
Health and social care practice research focuses on uni-disciplinary and multidisciplinary research that is beneficial to patients, clients and communities. Empowerment of users of health and social services is a common focus of researchers in the School and the Services. We have sought to provide a framework for development of health and social care research, facilitate ‘research mindedness’ and a culture that builds the confidence of new researchers, and promote and support teaching and learning in post-graduate and post-experience areas.
During the assessment period, Anne Parry
’s role has evolved from being an individual researcher with responsibility for research in physiotherapy to responsibilities encompassing all of the professions allied to medicine, postgraduate research provision and management of health and social care research projects. As postgraduate research tutor (PGRT) for the School, she is responsible for the general quality of support for postgraduate degrees by thesis and conducts the annual quality review each summer. She is project director of the Centre for Health and Social Care Research and a member of the University’s Research Degrees and Ethics Committees. She has set up the School's Ethics Sub-committee and is developing mechanisms for monitoring and assuring the quality of admissions procedures for postgraduate research students as well as their progress.Research activity has been promoted through (a) funding of pilot projects and conference presentations, (b) workshops and seminar series and (c) support for staff undertaking PhDs (5) and EdDs (2). There was no dedicated research staff prior to 1997 when two Research Fellows in Nursing were appointed. A Senior Research Fellow for Professions Allied to Medicine was appointed in 1999. We are currently recruiting a research fellow with a specific remit to develop research and evaluation in intermediate care and a Head of Research to lead the strategic development of practice based research over the next five years.
In order to integrate teaching and research, staffing policy includes recruitment of young and promising researchers such as Helen Buri who has recently been appointed to her first lecturing post in occupational therapy from a post as research associate at the University of Northumbria at Newcastle. We are benefiting from our renewed association with Val Reed, a former member of staff. As themed research is developed, his extensive experience will be invaluable to a nascent research group in mental health. Since transfer from MPhil to PhD has been devolved from the Research Degrees Committee (RDC) to Schools, acting as independent assessor of applications, he fulfils a major role in maintaining quality and standards. His proposal Developing Community Living Skills in Offender Groups: a thematic network study is at the contracting stage with the European Commission.
Collaborative research
The Group operates by developing collaborations with clinical and social care departments. Joint bids to the Building Bridges programme and John Mitchell’s work with wheelchair users are examples of relationships being built with the public sector, users of health and social services and other stake holders. Anne Parry’s evaluation of a pilot Orthopaedic Physiotherapy Practitioner service at Northern General Hospital (NGH) Trust illustrates responsiveness to service needs and has generated a multicentre proposal. Collaboration between physiotherapy researchers and orthopaedic surgeons has developed from support for physiotherapists at NGH. Currently, there are four posts jointly funded for teaching and research. A new initiative involving the gait analysis laboratory at NGH is part-funding a new research post and new investment is facilitating research into balance and fostering partnerships with the University’s Centre for Sport and Exercise Science and clinical partners.
Jane Clayton
’s work is an example of the joint research development posts the School is establishing with Trusts. Designated research fellow in nursing, she is funded half time by NGH Trust to work with clinical nurses, nurse managers, allied health professionals and other clinical and non-clinical staff. She represents nurses and allied health professionals on the R&D Merger (of Sheffield Trusts) Group. She teaches on research training sessions at the University and the Trust and supervises dissertations and integrative studies for SHU students on placement at the Trust.Anne Parry is involved in developing a proposal for a multi-agency Community R&D consortium in Sheffield to build on the strengths in the City and ensure high quality, useful research within the health and social care community. She provides academic support for funded clinical projects, such as a joint speech and language therapy/physiotherapy investigation of bronchial auscultation at Doncaster and Montagu Trust and musculoskeletal problems seen in primary care for Chesterfield Primary Care Group. She also follows up invitations to tender for research monies and two interdisciplinary bids were submitted in 2000 with clinical and social service partners.
John Mitchell was a member of the physiotherapy subject group until he retired in 1999 and is now an independent research associate of the Centre. He continues to develop interdisciplinary research proposals that bring together users, charitable organisations, and public sector organisations. Novice researchers are able to make use of his experience in developing partnerships. Successful bids and completed projects since 1996 include the development of the Wheelchair Lifemap for the NHSE (£225K), the Centenary Bed project for the Kings Fund (£220K), user trials of the Wheelchair Lifemap for the DoH (£60K) and piloting the human and economic effects of profiling beds for Essex Rivers NHS Healthcare Trust (£15K). A collaborative bid to the IMI section of the LINK programme to develop a Universal Lifemap and Evidence-base (£1.2M) has been shortlisted.
Postgraduate Students
Since 1996 research student registrations have increased from one to two per year. Current registrants are clinicians or educators in physiotherapy, radiography and podiatry. We have provided a supportive environment in which one MPhil student and three PhD students have completed, two in physiotherapy and one in podiatry.
The particular needs of part time students are catered for with a special induction session and postgraduate seminars held on one evening a month. The seminars engender a feeling of community as well as being opportunities for students to present their on-going work, get used to constructive criticism and support each other. They are open to all staff, with those registered for PhD or EdD at other universities especially encouraged to attend. Priority for presentations is given to students preparing proposals for registration or preparing for examination. In special sessions for candidates applying for transfer from MPhil to PhD, presentations are assessed by a mixed audience of staff and students prior to the independent assessor and PGRT making a recommendation to the RDC.
Between seminars, the PGRT distributes a bulletin by email. All students have an SHU email account and can download to their home computers software to connect to SHU’s intranet server. A room equipped with desks and computers for full-time research students in the Schools of HSC and SSL is also the base for a ‘split PhD’ candidate when he is at the University and a resource for the part time students. Licences for NVivo, the qualitative data analysis software, have recently been purchased for staff and students to add to SPSS and other networked data analysis software.
Postgraduate research training is seen as one of the most important outputs from research in the School. MPhil and PhD proposals incorporate a programme of research training, including taught research modules, and a postgraduate diploma in health and social care research methods will be validated later this year.
Self-assessment
Two people returned in 1996 are included in this submission, one in Category A (Parry) and one in Category C (Mitchell). While 58.5% (22) of eligible staff have engaged in research in education or health care practice during the assessment period, this has not been sustained continuously and the returned category A staff are 8% of eligible staff. The outputs of the named researchers have both national and international relevance. They indicate the range of work and outlets being used, from reports of relevance to users to supervisors publishing with research students and encouraging them to combine literature reviews they have made for their doctoral work with their clinical expertise. It is major disappointment that we could not ensure that conference presentations were written up for publication in peer-reviewed journals and that more staff did not have an average of one published output per annum. Writing workshops are addressing this weakness and a ‘buddy system’ has been set up to encourage novices to write for publication.
Since 1996, the postgraduate research programme has had increasing success. The RDC has marked out both the provision of facilities for students and the progress of part time students for special comment. As a part time PhD takes a minimum of 5 years, only three completions are shown for the assessment period but three other candidates have already transferred from MPhil to PhD. The seminar programme has not only successfully transformed part time students from lone researchers to members of a community but has drawn in academic staff who are not research active.
The Postgraduate Institute For Health (PGIH) was established within the SOH in September 2000 to allow us to focus more sharply on R&D activities, to increase research capacity, within the School and in wider health and social care contexts, and underpin our postgraduate provision. The PGIH has subsumed the activities of the former Centre for Health & Medical Research (CHMR), established 1996, that was funded primarily with a grant of £560,000 over 3 years from Tees Health Authority [Holmes, Kelly] with additional funding of £20,000 per annum from Northern & Yorkshire R&D Directorate [Gray, Howe, Kelly]. Key priorities of the PGIH have been the setting up of a Research Support Team (RST) to encourage, support and develop research activity, and the provision of physical resources to support this strategy. The range of services offered by the RST provide the necessary infrastructure to support an active R&D profile, from information about possible sources of funding, to financial administration of awards and the submission of final reports. The RST personnel are experienced staff with relevant backgrounds in both qualitative and quantitative methods and the management and administration of research. An active PGIH intranet site promotes R&D activity and information and includes an electronic notice board and newsletter to facilitate dissemination and sharing of ideas.
The PGIH has invested substantially in human resources including the appointment of a Director (Howe), a professor, a reader and three principal lecturer posts, in addition to R&D support staff including two medical statisticians, a health economist, a research support officer, a generic research assistant and administrative staff. Physical resources include a dedicated suite of offices for the RST that includes a meeting/training room, photocopying facilities, and a resource room stocked with specialist books and journals and PCs. The latter provides a ‘hot desking’ facility for short term contract staff, research active staff from across the School, and a number of clinical colleagues working on collaborative projects. All full time staff, including research assistants and research students are provided with individual PCs with full internet access and specialist software. Many of the offices of our key research active staff are in close proximity to the RST as is a postgraduate student room This dedicated space with refreshment facilities, PCs, notice boards and a seating area provides an environment for peer support and cross-pollination of ideas. In combination, these human and physical resources provide a vibrant research environment.
A clinically based Rehabilitation Research Unit (RRU) was established in 1998 jointly between the University and a local NHS Trust. It is now part of the Postgraduate Institute for Health and promotes and supports multidisciplinary research among practitioners and academics in the area of rehabilitation at local, national and international levels. A further objective is to provide access for evaluation of therapeutic interventions, analysis of functional performance and development of clinical measurements. It also provides opportunities for research training in rehabilitation, and is also a focus for the review and dissemination of evidence relating to rehabilitation, informing and influencing clinical practice for clinical audit and clinical governance. The physical location of the Unit within an NHS Trust and the collaboration with the clinical departments are central to strengthening the relationship with service delivery in rehabilitation and capitalising on the multidisciplinary nature of PAMs R&D. The Unit is provided with specialist state of the art equipment valued at over £140 K, including video capture and 3D motion analysis, a range of electrogoniometers, torsiometers, and accelerometers, a pressure sensitive walkway, a portable force platform (Kistler), emg systems, ambulatory heart rate monitors, motorised inclination treadmill and cycle ergometer, MULE (Biometrics), grip dynamometers and functional assessment tasks. In addition to many in house custom built devices, a specialist test library consisting of standardised test-batteries for occupational therapy and rehabilitation has been set up (£12 K). A network of high specification PCs with specialist data acquisition and data analysis software are available for all equipment located within the Unit in addition to word processing, spreadsheet, database, presentation, statistical, graphics, video editing, computer programming and web publishing packages. Further evidence of investment is the provision of a full time dedicated research support technician, as a permanent post.
To address the current priorities of the NHS and other health related policy making bodies, the PAMs Group has secured a high level agreement between the University, Tees Health Authority to underpin a new collaboration between research and development in public health and health inequalities. Consequently, much of the research activity involves multiple agencies, with a strong focus on patients, families and carers, for example the Leeds Drug Project.
Our philosophy of developing R&D capacity internally and among the NHS and social care workforce is further demonstrated by a project commissioned by Northern & Yorkshire R&D Directorate, ‘Evaluating R&D training needs of the NHS workforce’ in collaboration with the Nuffield Institute of Health, University of Leeds [Gray, Howe, McDonald]. In addition the PGIH has been Commissioned to provide R&D training to NHS staff within our sub-region, a direct consequence of our investment in R&D support staff and infrastructure.
RESEARCH GROUPS AND ACTIVITY
Our major areas of research activity demonstrate an integrated philosophy spanning the key areas of Rehabilitation and Health Promotion. Each key area has a number of stands within it. Rehabilitation includes measurement, neuromuscular, interventions and psychosocial; and health promotion includes nutrition and physical activity, sexual health and women’s health.
Rehabilitation
The University’s submission under UoA 11 in the 1996 RAE included rehabilitation research as a targeted area of development. Rehabilitation research continues to be strong in Teesside with four main strands to our activity: measurement in clinical settings, optimising muscle rehabilitation, evaluation of therapeutic interventions and psychological aspects of rehabilitation. The RRU is the focal point of much of this activity.
i) Measurement in clinical settings:
The RRU focuses in different ways upon issues of measurement through theory to the development of clinical measures and includes collaboration with clinical staff from Middlesbrough, Durham and Newcastle. Rome’s work in the field of podiatric biomechanics focuses on the foot and ankle and its implication in clinical practice. This has led to the development and evaluation of a measurement system for heel pad thickness and stiffness [with Howe]. Rome is currently collaborating with groups from the University of Salford investigating foot orthotics. Previous work includes vertical ground reaction forces in subjects with unilateral plantar heel pain [Rome & Howe]. More theoretical issues in the area of orthopaedic rehabilitation are explored by Spears & Nabhani (both submitted in UoA26). Spears' important work in the field of hip biomechanics following arthroplasty. He is the sole UK researcher on a project funded by the German Research Council. This project involves dynamic modelling of gait, jogging and other sporting activities to address problems associated with hip-replacement patients and combines the expertise of two of the leading biomechanics institutes in Europe (Technical University of Hamburg-Harburg, Germany and A-O Davos Research Institute, Switzerland). Nabhani’s novel work in joint modelling of the knee, ankle and spine has led to the development of new prosthetic designs in clinical practice. He is currently working with Adidas, Nike and Middlesbrough FC to design and manufacture an orthopaedically correct soccer shin pad. Bettany-Saltikov has a record of research focussing on the spinal and postural aspects of rehabilitation, including work with the Royal National Orthopaedic Hospital. Bettany-Saltikov and van Schaik in collaboration with staff in the Teesside Medical Computing Centre (submitted UoA 25) have developed a portable device to assess back shape. Van Schaik has published important work on human-computer interaction and his recent work on spinal problems has led to the development of software to evaluate the psychological stress levels in people with spinal deformities. Howe has developed a portable motion analyser with Liverpool John Moores University and Alder Hey Childrens’ Hospital, Liverpool for use in laboratories, clinical settings and the home. Internal pump priming money is funding a study investigating the output characteristics of TENS units in collaboration with staff from the School of Science and Technology. Shah’s international research with groups in Italy, Malaysia, Saudi Arabia and Australia has focused on neuromuscular and adaptive recovery measures and outcomes. The measures relate to the improved qualities of functional measurements used in rehabilitation evaluation and research. The outcomes have specifically addressed prediction, stroke and brain trauma rehabilitation efficiency and effectiveness, stroke epidemiology, measurement and improved quality of life. Shah’s work on hand oedema, a major complication following stroke, adds to this area of research.
ii) Optimising muscle rehabilitation
iii) Evaluation of therapeutic interventions
iv) Psychological aspects of rehabilitation
Health Promotion
i) Nutrition and physical activity
The HP research team have also addressed the prevention and treatment of obesity through primary research and randomised controlled trials [Summerbell & Chinn]. Ongoing collaboration with Newcastle University in a NHS-E Northern &Yorkshire Regional R&D funded cluster involves a randomised controlled trial (46 clusters) in the North of England which is designed to assess the effectiveness of a brief training programme in obesity management for primary care teams. A further collaborative project with the University of Newcastle is a FSA [£25K] funded review of methods of estimation of non-milk extrinsic sugars.
In terms of preventing adults' obesity, a study funded from the DoH/MRC nutrition programme [£54K] with the Institute of Child Health, London, has carried out a systematic review of observational studies which assessed childhood characteristics of adult obesity. This review clearly showed that energy intake and physical activity in childhood are important predictors of obesity in adults. Dietary, particularly energy intake, and physical activity in children have been assessed in detail by the HP research team [Holmes, Summerbell, Turner]. Furthermore, Barnes, Batterham & Chinn, have addressed the important issue of barriers to increasing physical activity levels, an area of focus which is much strengthened by the multi-professional nature and approach of the team, which includes dietitians, physiotherapists, epidemiologists and physiologists.
The HP research team is also involved in other nutrition research studies that attempt to address local and regional health care priorities, and by necessity involve important collaborations across multiple agencies and professions. Collaborative research with NHS Trusts within the region is extremely strong, and a number of important research studies are in progress including a systematic review on the effectiveness of feeding patients in ITU. Further collaborations exist with the recently established Nutrition and Food Policy Group within the University (submitted elsewhere).
ii) Sexual Health
iii) Womens Health
A major thrust of the RRU team’s work is the investigation of muscle activation as an indicator of functional performance [Howe and Barnes]. Collaborative work with the University of Manchester has investigated methods of assessment of muscle function and applied this to the evaluation of patterned neuromuscular stimulation in rehabilitation. Two PhD studentships have been funded internally to investigate the activation of the quadriceps during therapeutic exercises in various knee pathologies using electromyographic analysis. Additional studies are ongoing in the post-processing of EMG signals. Further work pursues a link between muscle activation and hand kinematics in the normal, rheumatoid and traumatised hand, in carrying out a range of everyday tasks [Barnes]. A goniometric glove to capture the activity of the intrinsic muscles has been developed in collaboration with the University of Sheffield. The RRU team are involved in a major collaboration with the Manchester School of Physiotherapy and University of Manchester in a prestigious NHS-E Health Technology Assessment project of £200,000 (an RCT comparing interventions in knee osteoarthritis), including Health Economics at York University.
This area of the group's work [Howe and Turner] is central to the modernisation agenda of the NHS and the development of evidence based practice. A programme of research with amputees and claudicants has been funded in collaboration with a local NHS Trust providing two one-year secondments to a research physiotherapy post under the supervision of the RRU. A project evaluating the Bobath concept of physiotherapeutic intervention for patients suffering from neurological insults has been awarded funding of £19,000 (2001) and is in collaboration with two practising physiotherapists. Both these initiatives result from our philosophy of R&D capacity building among the local workforce. Interventions with Parkinson’s Disease patients have been carried out in collaboration with the Manchester School of Physiotherapy and the University of Manchester. Further work has examined the reliability of shoulder joint diagnosis in primary care using Cyriax procedures.
This group [Skilbeck, Shah, Morrissey, Martin & Johnstone] has taken a holistic approach to improving the quality of life for clients by examining the multifaceted issues affecting their performance and include international authorities in neuroscience assessment and rehabilitation. Shah and Skilbeck have focussed on neuroscience issues as they impact on persons with stroke and traumatic brain injury. The group has been instrumental in developing the application of microcomputers in cognitive retraining. Current research has focussed on acute subarachnoid hemorrhage events and cognitive functioning pre and post operatively. The use of the Rey Auditory Learning test in clinical neuropsychology, and the implications and development of a database as a regional resource, will further facilitate focused research for clinical neuropsychology. Shah has recently focussed on cognitive outcomes following traumatic brain injury in collaboration with the University of Durham. Morrissey’s current work concentrates on stress, anxiety, fatigue and coping mechanisms and strategies following one or more significant events in life. Her work has examined assessment of how individuals prepare themselves for an adverse event/s. The psychosocial aspect of care has been approached differently by Martin. He has emphasised the need to empower dying patients and examination of the barriers to empowerment by interpreting health care workers' reflective diaries. He has further developed the subject by evaluating the effects of rituals and routines and how these impact on the work of health care workers with dying patients. Johnstone has investigated the length of hospitalization for those with mental illness and has undertaken a systematic review with a group in Oxford on the effectiveness of planned short hospital stays for mental health.
The PAMs Health Promotion (HP) research team focuses on key lifestyle behaviours (nutrition and physical activity, sexual health) and women’s health. The group often work collaboratively across professional boundaries and occasionally outside the main themes. It aims to deliver a programme of research activity that improves important aspects of the health of individuals and populations at a holistic level. This is achieved by nurturing seam-free and flexible research teams working to one outcome. The regional importance of this area of work is demonstrated by commissions to provide underpinning research and evaluation for the Teesside Health Action Zone and Education Action Zone projects.
Energy intake and physical activity are the primary factors that affect body weight. Obesity is a global, national and regional public health problem of epidemic scale, and is the focus of much of the research activity of the HP research team [Barnes, Batterham, Chinn, Holmes, Summerbell & Turner]. The team is viewed as a national authority on obesity and has an international reputation in conducting systematic reviews of interventions to prevent and treat obesity in both adults and children. It is currently involved in eleven systematic reviews of randomised controlled trials for the Cochrane Collaboration and all of these reviews are in collaboration with a number of other key researchers in the UK, USA and Australia. The funding for these reviews has come from a number of sources, and a significant contribution [20K] was secured through the British Dietetic Association research funds for capacity building for dietitians in this important area of research methodology.
The focus on health promotion research on sexual health is firmly embedded within the HP Group. Those members of the Group that contribute to this research area include Ankomah, Atkinson, and Jamieson. These members provide representation from epidemiology, public health and nursing. These staff have led international multi-centre collaborative studies in the area of reproductive and sexual health, including HIV/AIDS in Botswana. Innovative work on male sex workers has also been conducted in collaboration with groups in Australia [Jamieson]; the group has recently been awarded a grant from the University Research Fund [1.7k] to develop this area further. This focused research group is particularly mindful of the need for a multi-professional and multi-agency approach to research on sexual health. The group [with Summerbell] has recently been involved with a HAZ Fellowship project on crime, drugs and food which involved the Leeds Drug Project. Other work has included costing NHS services for the care and treatment of people infected by HIV, the evaluation of district nursing services for HIV/AIDS patients and an evaluation of ‘Enhanced HIV Testing’ services.
The area of womens health has developed over the last assessment period, and is an important part of the forward plan of the PAMs Group. Those members of the Group who contribute to this research area include Chinn, Gray, McDonald, Odber, Turner, and van Wersch. These members provide respresentation from across the PAMs and other health related disciplines: physiotherapy, health psychology, nursing, epidemiology and medical statistics. Key areas of work include breast cancer, osteoporosis, PMT and pregnancy. Work of McDonald, Gray and van Wersch is associated with breast cancer care including users' views and professionals' perceptions of screening for breast cancer, breast care guidelines, the effect of early discharge, and evaluation of specialist services [22k] of urgent referral clinics (with Breast Screening & Assessment Centre, Gateshead). The activities of Chinn and Turner include important work on screening for osteoporosis in collaboration with Birmingham Childrens’ Hospital and the role of physical activity in the prevention of osteoporosis. Odber has published important work on pre-menstrual syndrome as a physiological model for major depression. A major new area of work includes a number of projects around pregnancy [McDonald], including Tees Health Action Zone funded projects, ‘Taking the Drama out of Teenage Pregnancy’ [134k] and ‘Quit smoking for young pregnant women: training the trainers’ [108k]. A recent award has been secured from Head Teachers from ten Middlesbrough Comprehensive Schools to evaluate the effectiveness of drama for getting across the message about Teenage Pregnancy [6k].
The university’s Academic Staff Development Unit (ASDU) provides a range of R&D training initiatives to support research staff. Staff are able register on a Masters in Research Management programme or attend individual sessions or complete modules from the programme. These range from health & safety in research to the management of large scale research project. Within the School of Health the Research Support Team of the PGIH runs fortnightly R&D support clinics that provide methodological advice and support to staff who need help with research and development work. RST staff are also available to act as collaborators on individual projects or supervise those staff undertaking research degrees. The RST has recently completed an assessment of staff’s R&D training needs. A substantial programme of R&D training is now being delivered to address the needs identified. An R&D forum has been set up to promote multi professional discussion and support for R&D and to share expertise and areas of good practice. The aim is to provide a supportive environment where new researchers are able to become integrated into the R&D culture and where our mentoring scheme can be initiated. In addition we are currently developing a support network for all doctoral level staff (currently 17) to share expertise and areas of good practice.
The School has a postgraduate tutor who is responsible for the admissions process and monitoring of progress of all research students and their supervisory teams. Postgraduate student representation is provided at all meetings of the University Research Policy Committee and on a newly established working group investigating the research environment across the University. The tradition of research collaboration between the Schools of Health and Social Sciences has included a Joint Research Degrees Committee and joint supervision of research students.
An integral part of the strategy to build research capacity in the PAMs area has been to combine experienced internal staff with more junior research contributors. All staff involved in supervisory teams must have completed the University’s research student supervisors training scheme run by ASDU. The PGIH in consultation with research students is currently developing a postgraduate student support forum and the newly established postgraduate student room. The forum involves all research degrees students and School staff (academic, technical and administrative) registered for research degrees in other schools or at other institutions (currently 26 ).
We are cognisant of the transparency and governance agendas of HEFCE, the NHS and social services. The university has established a Research Ethics Committee and research ethics training is provided for all staff and research degree students. The School of Health is in the process of producing a document that outlines our policies and procedures in relation to clinical and research governance.
Our staffing policy to develop the PAMs cluster over the census period has had four main focuses. Firstly to appoint staff with a strong research profile that matches our established research themes; Howe, appointed as a Reader in Physiotherapy & Health Sciences, and Bettany-Saltikov, Shah and Spears are other examples of this. Secondly to appoint staff with a substantial record of research achievement and experience to promote and lead new research themes within PAMs; this includes Summerbell (nutrition), Ankomah & Jamieson (public health). Thirdly to appoint staff that have the potential for developing a strong research profile and that register for a research degree in a specialism that matches one or more of our existing research themes. Fourthly, to replace experienced staff and successful researches who have left the School or who have been promoted into managerial positions with staff of similar standing. In addition, the University has clear policies for the promotion of staff who have been successful in research (through its Readership and Professorial Conferment Committee). During the census period Summerbell has been promoted to Reader and Howe and Shah to Professor, making Shah the first Professor of Occupational Therapy in the country. In addition the School has 5 visiting professors and 13 visiting fellows, experts within their field, that provide support to staff.
Kelly was appointed as a visiting Professor within the School of Health, upon his departure to the Public Health Directorate of Tees Health Authority in 1999, and continues to provide professional mentoring to the medical statisticians within the RST. He has also retained his role as a key member of the supervisory teams of 2 research degree students thus providing mentoring to less experienced staff. The recent departure of Holmes and Batterham, with expertise in nutrition, will be addressed by new appointments in this field and by collaborations with the recently established Nutrition and Food Policy Group within the University. The contribution of Gray in her major role in supporting R&D activities through methodological advice and specialist data analysis has been addressed by the development of the RST and the appointment of two medical statisticians.
1.1 Summary
This submission includes a total of 22.0 category A FTE submitted in comparison with 6.5 FTE returned under the same UoA in 1996. This increase in research-active staff reflects the success of the University in delivering its research strategy during the period, in particular, the steady recruitment of research-active staff (e.g. Avent, Fulford, Hurst, Liossi, McLeod, Purcell) since the last RAE and the active development of staff not returned in the last round (e.g. Lewis, Salisbury). Staff returned in 1996 to UOA14 Biological Sciences have since this time developed their research within this unit descriptor (e.g. Cowell, Greenman, Hancock).
1.2 Research Communities
The two research groups outlined in 1996, Laboratory-based Biomedical Sciences (3.5 FTE) and Psychology (3 FTE), have been strengthened and deepened as planned. These groups are now represented in the University Centre for Research in Biomedicine (15.9 FTE; Centre Director Purcell) and the Health Education, Rehabilitation and Epidemiology Research Unit (6.1 FTE), that includes the University Centre for Appearance and Disfigurement Research (Centre Director Rumsey), a collaborative venture with the charitable trust ‘Changing Faces’. The research communities are sustained and developed through close collaboration and partnerships with stakeholder and user groups in industry and the health professions. The social relevance of our research is thereby maintained and enhanced.
1.3 Links with NHS Trusts
A notable feature of this submission is the development of closer relationships with NHS Trusts. In December 1996 the Department of Pathology at Southmead Hospital, North Bristol NHS Trust was designated an Associate Department of the Faculty of Applied Sciences in recognition of long-standing research links and in order to further develop biomedical research. Three key research leaders in the department are Honorary Research Fellows (Lovering and White are members of the Centre for Research in Biomedicine while Taylor features in the Health Education, Rehabilitation and Epidemiology Research Unit). In 2000, a joint Wellcome Trust JIF bid was submitted (led by Feneley and Purcell) to build a Bio-Med Centre focusing upon academic and clinical research in urology. The bid passed international scientific scrutiny and has attracted £0.75m investment from the John James Foundation and the Pharmacia & Upjohn Corporation.
1.4 Visiting Professors
During the period the University made key additions to its visiting professoriate. Visiting Professor Chris Atterwill (Roche Discovery) is an industrial toxicologist of international standing and supports toxicology and drug discovery research relevant to Hurst, McLeod, Purcell, Salisbury and Xu. Visiting Professor Graham Smith, a consultant haematologist at the Royal United Bath Hospital, provides a direct clinical focus and output for haematology research relevant to McLeod, Pallister and Smith. Visiting Professor Crispian Scully CBE of the Eastman Dental Institute for Oral Health Care Sciences supports the oral microbiology research of Greenman and related work of Lewis, Salisbury and Nelson. Visiting Professor Stuart Butler is Director of the Burden Neurological Institute and an international expert in electroencephalography who supports the work of Alford, Fulford and Hurst. All four Visiting Professors are members of the Scientific Advisory Committee of the Centre for Research in Biomedicine.
1.5 Interdisciplinary Research
Interdisciplinarity in the study of human function and applications to human health and wellness remains a central theme and the growth in research has added new areas of inquiry. Research submitted to UOA11 relies upon collaborations that cross Faculty, Centre and research unit boundaries within the University. Purcell collaborates with the Centre for Complex Co-operative Systems (returned to UOA25) in toxicology bioinformatics; this is linked to CERN, Geneva and led to the appointment of Dosanjh as a Senior Research Fellow in Bioinformatics, now seconded to CERN full-time. Daker-White, Murphy and Rumsey work with the Centre for Research in Applied Social Care & Health (returned to UOA10) in the area of health promotion. Greenman and Feneley work with the Engineering and Medicine Elastomers Research Centre (returned to UOA26) in the area of biomaterials and urology. Cowell and Luxton work closely with Hart and Hawkins (returned to UOA21) in the biomedical applications of biosensors and chemical sensors. Research projects are also undertaken in collaboration with other universities and with stakeholder groups in the pharmaceutical and healthcare industries, healthcare professionals and clients in the NHS and charitable organisations.
Collaborative working across University boundaries is particularly facilitated by the University’s membership of the Western Arc Biosciences platform that includes the universities of Bristol, Bath, Cardiff and the University of Wales College of Medicine and Bristol NHS Trusts. This is a DTI Biotechnology Exploitation Platform that aims to identify and bring to commercialisation complementary intellectual property across the participants and foster interaction with industrial partners. Currently five projects in the unit have arisen as a direct result including links with Cardiff University
in toxicology and Bristol University in neuroscience.
Overall, the research of those submitted to UOA11 covers a spectrum of areas, from furthering our understanding of the pathology of disease to its impact on, and avoidance by, the individual and community. Research projects singly and in combination build on four main themes:
2. RESEARCH STRUCTURE & ENVIRONMENT
Research across the University is largely managed through 30 designated University Research Centres, each led by a Research Director. Research Centre Directors manage the research groups assisted by a Scientific Advisory Committee comprising external members. Each Faculty has its own administrative Research Office and a Research Committee that together support the Dean, Centre Directors and research staff. The Faculty Boards and University Research Committee of Academic Board exercise responsibilities in monitoring the implementation of research policy and promoting and disseminating good practice
. Research in this unit is organised across two main groups:
2.1 Centre for Research in Biomedicine
Staff mapped to the Centre include: Avent, Cowell, Feneley, Fulford, Greenman, Hancock, Hurst, Lewis, Liossi, Lovering, Luxton, McCalley, McLeod, Pallister, Purcell, Salisbury, White and Xu.
The University established the Centre in February 2000 in recognition of long-standing strengths in biomedical sciences. Purcell is the Centre Director. The Centre aims to develop academically and industrially relevant biomedical research by focusing on in vitro modelling of human disease processes and development of diagnostics (sensors) and therapeutic strategies. Of particular importance are user-informed development of robust paradigms for research and development purposes. The Centre harnesses and focuses research efforts of established staff with those newly appointed and overall enhances opportunities for synergy. To date, the personnel strategy identifies recruitment of active researchers with expertise in the biology of disease and in vitro modeling that are key research themes of the Centre. The appointment of Purcell in September 1997 recognised the strategic development of this area and informed the specification of a further 8 academic appointments since 1998.
2.2 Health Education, Rehabilitation & Epidemiology Research Unit
Staff mapped to the unit include: Alford
2.3 Research Areas
Ongoing research in these two substantive groups include the following studies allied to medicine:
2.4 Research Culture
An active and vital research culture is sustained and deepened through research meetings, including the Scientific Advisory Committees of the University Research Centres. The Centre for Research in Biomedicine holds a fortnightly research forum where each group presents and defends their work, and includes a Journal Club. The Faculty produces a weekly ‘Research Matters’ electronic newsletter. These activities serve to share research news, foster new working partnerships and monitor and promote research successes. External research seminar programmes provide intellectual stimulation, where staff are exposed to researchers outside the University. This encourages critical reflection and supports the development of research partnerships. Researchers are actively encouraged to present their findings at national and international conferences and staff development funds are ring-fenced for this purpose.
Following a review and realignment of research staff grades, Avent, Greenman, Hancock, Hurst, Pallister and Rumsey all achieved Reader status in the period and Greenman, Feneley and Purcell were awarded Professorships. These strategies are important in attracting and maintaining active researchers with an established and/or rising reputation. Additional support comes from the Centre for Research, Innovation and Industry which provides research training, supports the preparation of research grant applications and undertakes contractual negotiations with industrial partners.
2.5. Research Training
The University has an extensive training programme for research students, that includes both Faculty and University provision. A broad and comprehensive programme of training is defined with the student's Director of Studies which requires approval by the Faculty Research Degrees Committee before the student can be registered. The Committee monitors student progress on an annual basis and formally at the viva voce examination to transfer from MPhil to PhD. Central training provision includes sessions on student-supervisor relationships, research methods, intellectual property, examination processes and research management. In addition, the University encourages students to access taught postgraduate modules on research methods and related skills. In this UOA students attend sessions on the M-level Research Methods modules within the MSc Biomedical Science and/or Health Psychology awards. A Postgraduate Research Tutor inter alia organises a Postgraduate Research Club where each student delivers a research seminar annually.
2.6. Research Infrastructure
Within the unit, research has flourished through targeted resource allocations, the physical clustering of research resources and significant capital investment totaling £2.4m in the period. State-of-the-art analytical services include an Environmental Scanning Electron Microscope, a high resolution NMR and high-grade HPLC/GC-MS. Recent investment of £345k
2.7 Income per Researcher
The resource demands of the two main groupings differ substantially, being greater in biomedicine. A simple pro-rata division of research income across all researchers in the UOA therefore gives a misleading figure of about £13.5k/FTE/year. We estimate that the income generated by the Centre for Research in Biomedicine is £17k/FTE/year.
2.8 Links with Stakeholders and Users
Great importance is attached to links with industry and the public sector. Much of the research submitted has been undertaken in collaboration with industry, NHS Trusts and client groups. Working with the Centre for Research, Innovation and Industry, the Faculty Research Office provides an interface between academic researchers and industry. National and international networking activities include DTI Clubs, scientific industrial meetings and direct visits to companies. Membership includes the Diagnostics Club, the Biotechnology Club and the BioIndustries Association, facilitating contact with industry over a number of relevant market sectors. The unit is represented at technology transfer brokerage and information events such as the Diagnostics Club Technology Brokerage Event, BioPartnering Europe, Euroconnect and meetings of OST Foresight, EU Framework V and DTI LINK. The University was awarded the maximum allocation from HEROBC funds in recognition of the extent of research activity undertaken in collaboration with business and the community.
3. STAFFING POLICY
There is a full institutional commitment to the Research Concordat. The mechanisms and practices for promoting research and sustaining and developing an active and vital research culture include an active staff development policy, linked to the University Staff Development and Appraisal scheme. All staff have access to dedicated funds to support conference attendance. PhD bursaries are available through a competitive bidding process and each new research-active academic is eligible for a research student bursary in their first year (awards made in the period include Avent, Hurst, Fulford, McLeod, Nelson and Salisbury). The Faculty has also made competitive awards to pump-prime new researchers amounting to £460k since 1996.
Each newly appointed academic is allocated a mentor who supports the establishment of their research activity and inducts them into the University research networks. In appropriate cases, established staff are encouraged to engage in research through the Staff Development and Appraisal system. This policy has enabled Salisbury and Lewis to develop their research careers following a long period supporting teaching and learning.
The departure of staff from the unit, all through retirement, has enabled new research-active appointments to be made, serving to support and energise the research. Those staff recruited are in accord with the research themes and strategy for the unit.
The Director of Biosciences Graduate Centre is responsible for ensuring the quality of research student supervision, training and facilities. The Graduate Centre undertakes an annual audit, including supervisors’ reports and supervision logs, of all research students. Each research student has two academic supervisors. A ‘rapporteur’, independent of the supervisory team, is appointed by Graduate School Board to receive advice and to report back at all key stages of every student’s progress (initial registration, MPhil/PhD transfer, appointment of external examiners). The research student welfare and development is catered for by the comprehensive University system run by the Graduate School Board. All research students within the School of Biosciences are provided with desk space and computers with access to CD-ROM, on-line journals, Internet and E-mail. The Graduate Centre in Biosciences runs courses annually to familiarise students with ‘Laboratory Safety’ and ‘The role of demonstrators in practical classes’‘ with biannual courses in ‘Writing a thesis’, ‘Undergoing a viva’. ‘Writing research papers’ and ‘Preparation of research posters’. All research students participate in a ‘Postgraduate Fair’ each year with oral and poster presentations of their research. Furthermore research students are encouraged to attend at least one Conference during the life of their projects.
SUPPORT FOR INTERDISCIPLINARY AND COLLABORATIVE RESEARCH
The majority of the declared output in RA2 has involved collaborations of the newly recruited staff with colleagues at their previous Institutions. The BMSRG as a whole has maintained these collaborations as most of the staff are given teaching remission equivalent to at least one day a week. Groups national and international current collaborations include the University of Leiden, National Institute of Health USA, Panam Institute Copenhagan, University of Bristol, (Institute of Urology, Wolfson Institute for Biomedical Research, Eastman Dental Institute, Windeyer Institute of Medical Sciences, Centre for Rheumatology (UCL), Imperial College School of Medicine (ICSM), School of Pharmacy (University of London), Imperial Cancer Research Fund (ICRF). These collaborations are strengthened by the fact that Prof.Chowdrey, Dr.Gordge and Dr. Madgwick hold honorary Lecturerships at UCL and in addition Prof. Chowdrey is an honorary Lecturer at University of Bristol.
Dr Eastwood’s current collaborators include Prof. Sir M. Yacoub, Dr S. Allen, National Heart and lung Institute, Dr G. Coulton ICSM, Prof. DA McGrouther and Dr R. Brown, UCL, Prof. C Black and Dr D. Abraham, Royal Free Hospital, and Prof. A. El-Haj, Keele University. Overseas collaborations include Prof. Ioannis Yannas from the MIT Boston, Prof. J.J Tomasek from Oklahoma University Health Science Centre, and Dr D. Herbage University of Lyon.
Prof. Sumar’s ongoing National and International collaborations include; Imperial College, St. George’s Hospital Medical School, St. Helier Hospital, Charing Cross Hospital and Guys Hospital, Sheffield University, Royal Holloway College (University of London), Institutions and governments of Kenya, Egypt, South Africa, Qatar, Brunei, Kuwait, Ghana, Malaysia, Thailand and Syria.
Relationships with Industry and Commerce
The Foresight Programme has emphasised the importance of the competitiveness of British industry and in particular the prosperity of small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) and how academic knowledge and know-how can be transferred to increase competitiveness. In this regard Prof. Chowdrey has a current DTI-Teaching Company Scheme award with an SME (Intersep Ltd). Prof. Sumar had held a DTI-Teaching Company scheme previously with Sam Pam Foods. Academics have developed collaborations with hospital service laboratories, initially through MSc part time students who carry out a substantial research project.
Research in Other Subjects and Professions Allied to Medicine is located within the Biomedical Science Division of the School of Health Sciences, a multidisciplinary unit that also includes health, medical science and psychology. The Division places great emphasis on its role in promoting research collaboration with clinicians and biomedical scientists throughout the Black Country and the wider West Midlands Region. A major programme of investment has provided a high quality laboratory environment for the work of the established research groups and is a clear demonstration of University's strong commitment to the continued development of biomedical science research.
The School Research Committee, which includes eight biomedical science representatives, has responsibility for managing research within the school and provides the link between the strategic and policy making functions of the University Research Committee and the operational management of research at divisional level. Biomedical research is conducted by four research groups, co-ordinated by the divisional research manager (currently Prof. H T Hassan). Each group has dedicated laboratory facilities, technical support and a devolved revenue budget. The groups form a matrix for the development of research and continue to evolve as a consequence of changes in staff, restructuring within the University and collaboration between groups in the development of novel fields of research. They play a significant role in fostering a research ethos through the operation of journal clubs, seminars and discussion groups and the internal review of grant applications, presentations and publications.
2. The Research Groups
The Oncology group includes Professor H T Hassan and Dr J Martin, 1 research assistant, 1 research technician and 1 PhD student. The main research areas are the pre-clinical evaluation of drugs and agents in human breast cancer, leukemia and lymphoma, and the role of cytokines in drug resistance in human leukemia and lymphoma cells.
Professor Hassan has produced 45 research publications in the review period. He is also co-author of six editorial and review articles in refereed journals as well as chapters in four books. Research in collaboration with the University of Hamburg Medical School, Germany, Wayne State University Medical School, USA and the University of Birmingham Clinical Oncology group has led to several findings with therapeutic implications and has made a significant contribution to the field of allogeneic blood stem cell transplantation. His laboratory has established a reputation in studying human normal and leukemia CD34 positive cells, and benefits from high quality technical support provided by a research assistant (Ms N Ahmed) and a research technician (Mrs J Sammons).
Dr. J Martin’s work has produced 11 research publications within the review period. Her principal area of research has focussed on the role of nitric oxide synthase in human breast cancer. Mr. O Alalami, a former PhD student, was involved in the initial identification of inducible nitric oxide synthase (iNOS) in a human breast cancer cell line. Subsequent collaboration with Queen’s University, Belfast (QUB) facilitated the study of endothelial nitric oxide synthase (eNOS) and iNOS in a unique human breast cancer cell line specially developed at QUB. The investigation demonstrated reduced expression of both eNOS and iNOS in this cell line which had been adapted to estrogen independent growth. The clinical importance of NOS in human breast cancer was investigated in collaboration with Dr. K Scott, New Cross Hospital, Wolverhampton. Studies on primary invasive ductal breast carcinomas revealed that eNOS was present in human breast tumours and that its presence negatively correlated with histologic grade and lymph node status. Further work in this area is being carried out by Ms. M Lahiri, a current PhD student, who is investigating the role of NOS isoforms using specific inhibitors.
Dr Martin has also collaborated with Queen’s University, Belfast in the use of synthetic peptide antibodies to probe conformational changes in picornavirus capsid proteins. Immunostructural analyses of closely related strains, in collaboration with the University of Leicester Crystallography Centre, have provided an understanding of the biochemical and structural basis of serotype specificity.
Dr. Martin made a successful application for a one-semester University research sabbatical which had a positive impact on research activity, facilitating the completion of five publications during the sabbatical period.
The Receptor and Cell Signalling group includes Dr J Howl, Dr A Martin, Dr C Brown and Dr G Conde, 2 research assistants and 3 PhD students. The main research areas are the establishment of novel strategies for the design of chimeric hormones and neuropeptides, the role and regulation of phospholipases in normal and cancer cells and the biological roles of purinoceptors in human endothelial cells.
Dr J Howl has produced 21 research publications in the review period. He is the author of three review articles in refereed scientific journals and co-author of chapters in four books. The laboratory has an international reputation in chimeric peptide design and synthesis and has co-ordinated short courses on this technology for industrial delegates. The group has effective collaborations with the School of Biochemistry and the CRC Institute of Cancer Studies, University of Birmingham, the Czech Academy of Sciences, Prague, and Stockholm University, Sweden. The delineation of the functional domains of G protein coupled-receptors (GPCRs) is a multi-partner project with Birmingham and the Czech Republic. These investigations include the synthesis of novel peptides as both selective ligands and molecular probes of GPCR function and distribution. A research assistant, Miss S Jones, is currently using cell-penetrating peptides to delineate the intracellular domains of cannabinoid receptors that regulate G protein activity. The design and application of chimeric peptides is a joint project with Stockholm University. A research student in the final year of her PhD. Miss M Farqhuar has carried out studies to evaluate chimeric peptidyl secretagogues. This work, which has identified a series of differential secretagogues that represent a new class of biological agent with therapeutic potential, was presented at the 26th European Peptide Symposium in Montpelier. Dr Howl has recently been awarded a Wellcome Trust Grant of £86K to support further research on the design and synthesis of chimeric peptides.
Dr A Martin has 10 research publications in high impact factor journals since 1996. He is co-author of five review articles, one of which is published in Trends in Biochemical Sciences (vol 23, pp. 200-204, 1998). He is currently supervising two PhD students studying the role of lipid mediators and phospholipases in human endothelial and malignant cells. His work on peptidomimetics of phospholipase D has recently been supported by a grant of £6K from the Royal Society.
Dr C Brown's research focuses on P2Y receptors and their role in vascular function, and has resulted in 10 publications in the review period. Work with his research assistant (Mrs. J Brown) has focused on the identification and development of novel P2Y receptor subtype selective agonists. A series of mimetic synthetic analogues to the external region of the P2Y2 receptor subtype have been developed. These results were presented at both the American and European Peptide Symposia which led to collaborations with Drs S Ford and K Guerring of Glaxo Smithkline, and Dr Y Dubrovna of the Department of Genetics, University of Leicester. Research with Dr P Nelson (Immunology Group) funded by a small grant (£3K) from the James Beattie Trust has focused on the development of subtype specific antibodies to P2Y receptors and an evaluation of their functional responses. Collaboration with Dr B Alexander of the Liver Sciences Unit, King’s College London, in the joint supervision of a PhD project investigating the effects of cold preservation on vascular function, has resulted in presentations at national and international meetings and the recent successful completion by the student.
Dr G Conde was appointed in January 1999 and brings substantial experience in neurophysiology to the University, in particular the cytokine and hormonal regulation of the nervous system. She is the author of a chapter in the Encyclopedia of Life Sciences entitled: 'Oestrogen, mood and cognition', and has produced 10 research publications and 13 conference abstracts in the assessment period. Those listed in RA2 are examples of the fruits of her collaboration with the University of Bristol, in addition to ongoing collaboration between the University of Wolverhampton and the Max Planck Institute for Psychiatry, Munich, Germany. Her work on cytokines and neuropeptides is complementary to that of Professor Hassan, Dr Howl and Dr Khokher and has significantly enhanced this research area. Additionally, her interest in the role of cytokines in autoimmune disease will complement work currently being undertaken by Dr Nelson (Immunology Group).
The Diabetes group includes Dr M Khokher, Dr C Rea (not submitted; see RA6c) and Dr S Dunmore (not submitted; see RA6c), 1 research technician, 1 research assistant and 3 PhD students (in addition to a further PhD student shared with the Receptor and Cell Signalling group). The two main research areas are complications of diabetes (the effect of ethnicity on diabetic complications; bone metabolism in diabetes and other diseases; the effects of anti-oxidants and protein glycation in vascular complications of diabetes; the effects of vitamins on lipid metabolism in diabetes) and insulin secretion and action (insulin sensitising drugs in type 2 diabetes; mechanisms of glucose toxicity and islet beta-cell destruction in type 2 diabetes). The group has produced 14 research publications and some 25 conference abstracts in the assessment period.
Dr M A Khokher's 7 research publications are the result of collaborations with the University of Cambridge Orthopaedic Research Unit, New Cross Hospital, and the Oncology group. Research with Dr C Rea, Dr Y Wen (a former postdoctoral researcher) and Dr B Singh (Consultant Physician, Diabetes Centre, New Cross Hospital, Wolverhampton) has investigated the effect of ethnicity on antioxidant status and the complications of diabetes. This research was supported by a grant (£24K) from Wolverhampton Diabetes Trust to fund the work of a PhD student. Joint research on cytokines and bone cell metabolism with Prof. Hassan (Oncology group) has produced five research publications since 1998. Dr Khokher also maintains collaborations on bone healing with Prof S P Hughes (RPMS, Imperial College, London) and on lipids and vascular disease (together with Dr Rea) with Mr R Vorha (Consultant Vascular Surgeon, Selly Oak Hospital, Birmingham).
The Immunology group includes Dr P Nelson, Dr S Perera (submitted to UOA 13; see RA6d), Dr G Frampton (not submitted, see RA6c), 1 research assistant, 1 research technician and 2 PhD students. The main areas of research are monoclonal antibody generation, characterisation and assay development, autoimmunity and mucosal immunology.
Dr P N Nelson has produced 15 research publications and 10 conference abstracts in the assessment period. His research with Dr. P Murray, a former colleague, and Prof. L Young (CRC Institute of Cancer Studies, University of Birmingham) has been funded by the Royal Society (£7K) and a NHS LORS grant (£30K), and has developed immunisation strategies, using multiple antigenic peptides, to produce antibodies to the C-terminal region of the Epstein Barr virus LMP-1 protein.
Collaboration with Dr. S Bowman (Consultant Rheumatologist, University of Birmingham) and Prof. F Hay (St. George’s Hospital Medical School) is supported by a research student in her final year (Ms. H Ejtehadi) and has focused on the development of molecular and antibody techniques for identifying Herpes and human endogenous retroviruses together with an assessment of their clinical diagnostic/prognostic applications. In a further study, Ms. H Bull, a former MSc student at the University of Wolverhampton, has continued research with Dr Nelson on the development and characterisation of antibodies to human acid phosphatases.
The research groups and their activities have promoted a strong collegial research environment with extensive sharing of skills and expertise both within and between groups. This has been encouraged by weekly research seminars that provide a forum for the critical appraisal of research methodology and experimental data, allow the sharing of good practice and stimulate individuals to reflect on and evaluate their progress. A monthly programme of visiting speakers brings researchers with cognate interests into the division to enrich the discussions of research groups. The Division has implemented a policy of funding staff who attend national or international conference to present a research paper. The Division's record of successfully bidding for internal funds to support the recruitment of additional research staff and students and the release of staff for sabbatical semesters, free from teaching and administrative responsibilities, has also made a significant impact in sustaining and revitalising research.
3. Research facilities
The school has made a substantial investment in biomedical research laboratory facilities in the period under review. This has been facilitated by the relocation of the Psychology Division and the transfer of most undergraduate teaching to laboratories on a separate site. Each of the research groups now has dedicated laboratory provision with sufficient space to accommodate all research staff and students, provide for visiting researchers and allow for undergraduate and postgraduate project students to work at the bench alongside experienced researchers. New laboratories were created for the Receptor and Cell Signalling Group (1996). Facilities available for tissue culture were considerably expanded and laboratories added to house specialist molecular biology equipment shared by the Immunology and Oncology groups (1998). The laboratory housing the Diabetes group was refurbished, and a further large laboratory made available for the Oncology and Immunology groups (1999). This programme of laboratory expansion and improvement is continuing, and biomedical research will relocate to new, purpose-designed facilities in October 2001, demonstrating the University's ongoing commitment to the development of this research area.
The improvements in accommodation have been matched by ongoing capital investment to meet the needs of the research groups. This has included equipment to support the development of a wide range of molecular immunology techniques (£58K, 1997), a replacement liquid scintillation counter for receptor and cell signalling research (£14K, 1998), cell culture equipment (£45K, 1998) and a mass spectrometer for peptide research (£85K, 2000).
The increase in the space available to the Division has also allowed the provision of office accommodation for researchers and research students linked to significant improvements in their networked computing facilities, providing access to software for statistics and data handling, authoring and presentational systems, reference databases and compilers, citation indices, on-line journals and the internet. Each researcher and research student is allocated a sum from the Division's research budget both for consumable expenses and for attendance at at least one national or international conference. They are required to present their work annually as part of the divisional research seminar programme.
4. Postgraduate research students
In addition to the the support facilities outlined above, research students enjoy full integration into the research group structure. Supervision of research students is distributed widely among staff, in accordance with University policy; each must be supervised by a team, normally comprising two or three supervisors, which includes a level of previous successful supervision. Supervisors without a substantial previous record of completed supervisions are required to complete the University's staff training programme for research degree supervisors, introduced in 1998. New research students are required to attend appropriate modules from the Division's postgraduate portfolio to enhance their subject knowledge and reinforce their understanding of research methodology.
Monitoring of the performance of research students has been increasingly implemented and regulated by the School Research Committee (SRC). Student progress is monitored annually, and decisions on registration, transfer, suspension and extension are taken at SRC and reported to the University Research Committee.
Each research student is invited to join the University postgraduate student society, which meets regularly for both curricular and extracurricular activities.
5. Collaboration
A key part of the strategy for research development has been to encourage collaboration with high quality research units in other universities both nationally and internationally. The success of this strategy is evidenced in the description above of the collaborative activities of each of the research groups.
As staff are appointed and the investigations of the current research groups evolve, new shared interests emerge. For example, a number of the research groups share an interest in cytokines. This has been further complemented by the appointment in 1999 of Dr G Conde whose interests are in the cytokine and hormonal regulation of the nervous system. This effective collaboration between groups has produced six publications on human cytokines, of which three are cited in RA2.
The University has elected a number of clinicians to honorary posts within the School. This has promoted collaboration in the development of research, particularly with the Oncology, Diabetes and Immunology research groups.
6. Staffing Policy
A strategic investment policy to strengthen the research profile allowed the recruitment of new academic staff (2 in 1996, 3 in 1997). A priority was the appointment of staff with a strong research record and the potential to complement and enhance the clinically relevant biomedical science research activities of the Division. This policy has been reflected in the current submission, where just over half of the listed staff have joined the University since the last RAE. This strategy has significantly raised the national and international profile of biomedical research at Wolverhampton.
Research activity is recognised in the annual allocations of staff duties and workloads. New and research-active staff are given lower teaching hours, and supervision of research students is included in this calculation, using a tariff set by the University. Thus non-research active staff support research indirectly, by taking a larger burden of teaching duties than do research active staff. New staff are encouraged to join existing research groups to develop their research interests within a supportive environment. There is a staffing policy of continuing professional development for all staff which includes a promotion pathway for research active staff via readerships and professorships, and a sabbatical and PhD completion scheme which also funds periods of study leave. The Division has encouraged staff that have previously had high teaching loads and significant administrative responsibilities to seek sabbatical leave to re-establish research activity or to publish work previously undertaken. Since the introduction of the scheme in 1998, six staff have been supported for one semester research sabbaticals.
Dr P G Murray was promoted to the post of research manager in 1997 to drive the implementation of the research strategy described above. He made a major contribution to the establishment of research groups, the management of an improvement in the resource base, and the development of effective collaboration with the CRC Institute of Cancer Studies at Birmingham University. Following his transfer to Birmingham (together with his research team), he has maintained active collaboration with Dr P Nelson.
There has been a significant reappraisal of the work of technical staff, which had previously been almost exclusively focussed on the support of undergraduate teaching. Each of the newly formed groups was allocated a technician to support their research work, leaving an adequate but smaller team supporting undergraduate laboratory classes. These staff have developed a high level of research expertise, particularly in support of cell culture and molecular biological techniques, and some have contributed to publications listed in RA2.
The School and University have competitive funding mechanisms to provide research studentships and assistants. The Division has been successful in bidding for these. Research assistants have significantly enhanced the work of the research groups, contributing to twelve publications of which four are included in RA2. They have played a key role in the development and promulgation of new laboratory techniques and assays and have been the vehicle for technology transfer between the research groups and their collaborators in other universities and the NHS. Continuing priority will be given to the development and maintenance of a strong postgraduate community to ensure that each research group has a critical mass of research personnel.
The overall staffing policy during the present assessment period has allowed the development of strong research groups and a vibrant research culture which forms a good platform for continued development.
As a result of the reorganisation, research activity in the Centre of Biomedical Sciences (BMS) has been greatly increased. The expansion has been aided by considerable external and internal funding, the recruitment of 4 new research active academic staff and 2 research support staff and the enrolment of 13 new research students. The research themes outlined in the 1996 RAE submission have now become established research areas within BMS. To further focus and manage the research, the Biomedical Science Enterprise and Research Centre (BSERC) was established in July 2000. This centre has served to consolidate research groups, establish specific research programmes and foster an active research culture. The Centre benefits from strong national and international collaborative links with other academic institutions, medical establishments and industry.
A plan for the improvement of BMS dedicated research facilities was outlined in the RAE 1996 submission and this has subsequently been implemented resulting in the present research infrastructure. The facilities consist of two large dedicated research laboratories, an instrument room, a phlebotomy room and tissue culture and microbiology category B suites. Since the last RAE there has been a significant increase in internal financial investment of £143,600 (1999/2000) and £171,000 (2000/2001). This has contributed to the employment of research active staff, the purchase of dedicated research equipment and the support of honorary readers and research fellows. The Centre is composed of 9 category A researchers (2 honorary readers, 5 academic staff and 2 senior research fellows), 13 research students (9 full-time and 4 part-time) and 2 research technicians. A research committee consisting of senior researchers and headed by the two honorary readers (chairman and secretary) manages the Centre. This committee meets monthly and is responsible for the implementation and development of research practice and policy within BSERC. The Centre organises monthly internal research seminars, which encourage young researchers to present their research findings in an open and supportive environment. The School of Applied Sciences also organises an Annual Postgraduate Day and an Annual School Research Conference.
In order to focus and manage research, the Centre is divided into two main research units as follows:
1. The Microbiology and Infection Unit
2. The Molecular and Cell Biology Unit, sub-divided into:
2a. The Immunology Research Group
2b. The Diabetes and Cardiovascular Disease Research Group
2c. The Cancer and Cell Cycle Research Group
1. The Microbiology and Infection Unit consists of 3 academic staff (Dr R. Cooper, Dr N. Burton, Dr S. Hicks), one M.Phil. research student and two research technicians. Dr Cooper, who heads this Unit, has continued her research into the bacteriology of chronic wounds as outlined in the 1996 RAE submission. Since March 2000, an externally funded research technician has been appointed to investigate the bacterial loading of chronic wounds. This is a joint project between UWIC, the Wound Healing Research Unit, University of Wales College of Medicine (UWCM) and Smith & Nephew. This area of research has been further developed to investigate the therapeutic value of treating chronically infected wounds with honey. This project has generated considerable interest both nationally and internationally, resulting in collaborative links with Wound Healing Research Unit, UWCM and the University of Waikato, New Zealand. Recently, a grant of £9,000 was secured from the European Wound Management Association to fund one M.Phil. student. Dr.Cooper also collaborates on an intra-school, multidisciplinary project with the Food Research and Consultancy Unit (FRCU)
to assess the efficacy of hospital cleaning regimes. This project is funded partly by a grant from the Chief Medical Officer, Welsh Office (£3,250). Dr N. Burton, a part-time lecturer, has continued to pursue his research investigating the identification and distribution of Burkolderia cepcia in the environment. This research has resulted in the successful completion of a Ph.D. in July 1999 and the publication of 3 research papers. Dr S.Hicks, a senior research fellow, is investigating the role of mucins in infection. This project has collaborative links with the Department of Veterinary Science, University of Bristol and has resulted in a number of high-impact factor research publications.2a. The Immunology Research Group, headed by Dr K. Jones, has continued its investigation into the role of pulmonary surfactant in immuno-regulation in the lung, as outlined in the 1996 RAE submission. This research area has been extremely successful, resulting in collaborations with pharmaceutical companies, The Department of Medicine (UWCM), and the Welsh School of Pharmacy at Cardiff University. The group received a quantity of the pulmonary surfactant drug Xosurf (Glaxo Wellcome) worth £2,000 to study the immuno-regulatory properties of this compound within the alveolar space of the lung.
Currently, there are 5 individuals studying full-time for Ph.D.s in this research area and of these, three will be examined in 2001. One of the individuals, Mr K Morris is a member of academic staff who is undertaking a part-time Ph.D. A full-time dedicated research technician also supports the Unit. A new area of research within the group is in the field of allergy, in particular, nut and latex allergy. Recently, a Ph.D student has commenced an investigation into the molecular mechanisms involved in salicylate allergy. Expertise in this area has also led to the creation of the Allergy Consultancy Unit. This enterprise initiative has generated external funding totalling £14,500 , which has been used to underpin research programmes within the Immunology Research Group. To date projects have been set up with industry, the NHS and two housing authorities in the UK. Recently, the Unit has been awarded a SMART Welsh Assembly Award of £58,700 over 12 months to develop a specific allergy testing device. This grant will commence in March 2001 and employ a research technician.The research groups studying diabetes, cardiovascular disease and cancer represent novel research areas within the Faculty of BMS. These programmes have been initiated since the last RAE and have resulted in the recruitment of new research active staff.
2b. The Diabetes and Cardiovascular Disease Research Group. Within this group there are 3 full-time members of academic staff (Dr A. Thomas, Dr R. Adams and Dr S-A Evans ) and 4 research students (2 full-time and 2 part-time). The group has a strong publication track record and numerous collaborative links with research departments in (UWCM) and various other institutions including Cardiff University. These associations are beneficial in providing access to human clinical samples, patient-based studies and animal tissue. Dr A. Thomas’ main research interests lie in the field of type 2 diabetes. He has initiated a number of partnerships with pharmaceutical companies, for example, one of the Ph.D. programmes is studying the anti-inflammatory effects of thiozolidinediones (TZDs), an insulin sensitising drug, marketed by Glaxo Wellcome. That Ph.D. student is funded by internal UWIC funds. Other similar studies involving anti-lipid drugs pravastatin and lovastatin (Bayer Pharmaceuticals) are also in progress. A reagent grant of £1000 has been received from Bayer Pharmaceuticals and support obtained from the UWIC Research Opportunity (URO, £2,900) fund to pump-prime this growing area of innovative research.
.
Dr. R. Adams and Dr. S-A Evans also form part of the Diabetes and Cardiovascular Disease Research Group, and their interests lie within two main fields of vascular biology: (1) measurement of blood cell flow and mechanics (2) leukocyte activation, adhesion and interaction with the vascular endothelium. This work also includes studies of erythrocyte and leukocyte mechanics and adhesiveness in both health and disease, and also the identification of markers of leukocyte activation and endothelial damage in inflammatory disorders and cardiovascular disease. Two Ph.D. students are currently being supervised in these areas of research, one part time, funded jointly by UWIC and the Wales Office of Research & Development for Health and Social care (WORDHS, £5,000), and one full time, funded by the Kuwaiti Government. In 1999, Dr. Adams received an undergraduate research bursary from The Nuffield Foundation (£1,400) for studies on erythrocyte deformability. Current research includes a number of projects which are being carried out in collaboration with other institutions. One involves investigation of the role of soluble adhesion molecules in modulating adhesion of leukocytes to the vascular endothelium during ischaemia and reperfusion. Other collaborations include the investigations of blood rheology with the Department of Physiology, University of Birmingham, and an ongoing association with the Department. of Vascular Surgery at UWCM.
2c. The Cancer and Cell Cycle Research Group. This group is headed by Dr M. Edwards and contains 3 research students (2 full-time and 1 part-time). The group has just secured a three-year research grant from Cancer Research Wales totalling £41,000. The grant commenced on 1st December 2000 and partly funds one of the full-time MPhil/PhD students. The project, which involves two research students, will investigate the role of the ATM gene in the genetic predisposition to malignant disease. It involves a team of collaborators which includes Professor AMR Taylor, Cancer Research Campaign Institute, University of Birmingham, Dr J. Court, Department of Medical Oncology, Velindre Hospital, Cardiff, Prof. V. Thomas, Department of Medicine, UWCM, Cardiff and Professor I D Bowen, Cardiff School of Biosciences, Cardiff University. The research is of international importance and involves investigations into the predisposition of various ethnic groups in Middle Eastern populations to malignant disease. Professor M. Hannan, Dept. of Radiation Biology, King Faisal Specialist Hospital & Research Centre, Saudi Arabia, who is a Honorary Visiting Professor at UWIC, is collaborating on this project. These studies will culminate in the development of a screening programme to identify individuals predisposed to malignant disease. Other research in this group focuses on the molecular mechanisms responsible for the initiation of human autoimmune diseases. The latter research involves collaborations with the Department of Medicine, UWCM and University Hospital Qatar.
As well as an improved infrastructure, BSERC has benefited from investment in research equipment. Recent purchases include a fluorescent activated cell sorter (FACS), a gel analysis system, a coagulometer, a luminometer, a fluorescent microscope, two PCR machines, an anaerobic cabinet and a tissue culture cabinet. There are also dedicated molecular biology areas with RNA and PCR workstations.
Staffing Policy
Since 1996, the Centre of BMS has recruited 4 new academic staff and a research support technician. These individuals have been strategically selected to complement the current research programmes of BSERC.
The provision and maintenance of a research environment, which brings out the best performance from staff and students is of utmost importance, and resources are in place to facilitate this. New research students are required to complete a UWIC Certificate in Research Methods (CRM) and a half-module in Research Methods, which is part of the MSc Biomedical Sciences. This programme provides initial training in research methodology and regular training sessions for supervisors of research degrees. It has been in operation for some time, and leads the way to the national move towards introducing some formal structures into Ph.D. programmes. Postgraduate students are supported financially, in part, by allocated funds within BSERC. They are also actively encouraged to present their work in national and international conferences where appropriate. Allocated institutional funds are available to facilitate such conference attendance when other financial support is not available. All researchers are also encouraged to participate in monthly research seminars in the department, which enable exchange of ideas in a supportive environment. The UWIC Staff Development Programme also provides a comprehensive range of opportunities for all staff to enhance and update their IT, management and personnel skills.
Self-Assessment
Departmental strengths include the quality of publications, external research collaborations, and new research facilities; this combination has resulted in a lively and expanding research environment which is beneficial to staff and students alike (literary and collaborative strengths are discussed in detail in RA6). The current environs of research students and research-led teaching in BMS at UWIC are proving to be a catalyst for the development of high quality research. Many of the postgraduate and undergraduate BMS students either work or participate in work placement schemes in NHS hospitals and industrial laboratories, and this provides a necessary window on external research developments and has opened up many collaborative projects. In fact, it is one of BSERC current objectives to pursue jointly funded projects with the NHS and industrial partners via schemes such as the Teaching Company Scheme (TCS).
We are aware of certain areas of weakness in the department. As a relatively new research centre, the research funding from external sources has been limited and an improvement in this area will be a major objective of BSERC. However, recent awards from external sources, detailed in RA6, amount to £108,000, and this is a direct result of the long-term strategic planning put into place at the time of the last RAE. An increase in the numbers of Ph.D. students enrolled, coupled with the supportive research environment, should lead to an improvement in the completion and submission of Ph.D. projects. To date, one student has successfully obtained a Ph.D., with a further 3 submissions imminent in 2001.
Research-led teaching is desirable and necessary for accreditation of degree schemes by the Institute of Biomedical Sciences. Current policy involves rationalisation of the teaching programme in biomedical sciences, in order to increase efficiency of delivery of courses. This will thus alleviate the teaching demands on research-active staff enabling them to devote more time to R & E activities.
3. Research Groups
Research in the Department is organised on the basis of three core research groups: Developmental Speech Disorders (Group A); Acquired Neurogenic Disorders (Group B); and Experimental Phonetics (Group C). Each group is multidisciplinary and works as a co-operative network in a cognate area, with a range of external collaborative arrangements. Linking the work of the three core groups is the strategic emphasis on telematic applications, which have attracted some £347,000 in research support during the RAE period. All groups benefit from the two major research facilities of the Department, the Scottish Centre for Research into Speech Disability (SCRSD) and the Speech Research Laboratory (SRL). All staff participate in one or more groups to promote and develop their research, and PhD students conduct their research within a group. Comments are included below on infrastructural as well as research grant income to indicate the efforts of the Department to build a significant facility for research of international standard.
3.1. Developmental Speech Disorders (Group A)
This group has 7 academic staff (Beck, Dean, Gibbon, Hardcastle, Hewlett, Stansfield, Waters), 2 Research Fellows (Scobbie funded by ESRC and Peppé), and 6 doctoral students (2 current and 4 completions within the RAE period). More than 20 collaborating institutions are involved in the group’s work, including 13 NHS Trusts throughout Scotland, and universities in Hong Kong and Japan. The research of the group focuses on the diagnosis and treatment of developmental speech and language disorders including phonological disorder, cleft palate and learning disabilities. Specific areas under investigation are: speech motor control; instrumentation in assessment and therapy; efficacy of therapy; metaphonological awareness; and psycholinguistic models of speech development. A major achievement has been the group’s success in attracting an overall total of £710,000 for QMUC in research and infrastructural funding over the RAE period. This amount includes £320,000 from the Scottish Higher Education Funding Council (SHEFC) to set up the SCRSD, and £290,000 for three telematics research projects, which together increased clinical access to specialist instrumental procedures for diagnostic and therapeutic purposes. The group has also initiated pioneering work using electropalatography (EPG, a procedure for dynamically tracking tongue-palate contact) to diagnose and treat developmental speech disorders. In relation to diagnosis, research on undifferentiated lingual gestures and covert contrasts has led to new insights into speech motor deficits in children with phonological disorders. In relation to treatment, the CLEFTNET project established a unique service for EPG therapy throughout Scotland for cleft palate speakers and made it possible to collect rare, detailed articulatory data from a large cohort of such speakers.
3.2. Acquired Neurogenic Disorders (Group B)
There are 3 academic staff (Dean, Hardcastle, Lum) and 3 doctoral students (1 current and 2 completions within the RAE period) in this small, productive group, which focuses on developing cognitive neuropsychological accounts of linguistic dysfunction in acquired neurogenic disorders such as aphasia and apraxia of speech. The group has investigated speech production, auditory processing and the relative contributions of semantics and phonology to the production of familiar speech in speakers with acquired neuropathologies. The group has been successful in attracting £62,000 from the Nuffield Foundation for the consortium-based telematics project PATSy (1998-2000), which is a web-accessible multi-media patient database. The database is a growing research resource of speech and language disordered cases for consultation by researchers and clinicians. PATSy has gained national recognition and is making a significant external contribution to research, with 11 university departments across the UK using it. PATSy’s success has led to further funding to extend the database to childhood dyslexia, medical rehabilitation and neuropsychology with a grant to the consortium of £133,000 from the Nuffield Foundation (2000-02).
3.3. Experimental Phonetics (Group C)
In this group there are 6 academic staff (Beck, Gibbon, Hardcastle, Hewlett, Laver, Mennen), 3 Research Fellows (Scobbie funded by ESRC, Wrench funded by EPSRC, and Peppé), and 8 doctoral students (6 current and 2 completions within the RAE period). A further 20 collaborating institutions are involved in the work of the group, including 16 European universities and speech research laboratories (collaborators on 4 EC-funded projects) and 2 industrial partners (ENSIGMA and ZOT Engineering). The research undertaken by the group focuses on speech motor control and the relationship between the phonetics and phonology of normal spoken language processing by adults and children (monolingual and bilingual), as a foundation for improved understanding of speech pathology. Central to this research has been the development in the SRL of new techniques for investigating dynamic aspects of articulation. An example is the computerised Windows EPG system (WIN_EPG), which was launched in 2000, as a continuation of Hardcastle’s world pioneering role in the development of this technique. Specific areas under investigation are: speech development; articulatory kinematics; speech modelling; coarticulation; prosody; sociophonetic variation; voice quality; speech signal processing; and phonetic informatics. The group has attracted substantial grants in excess of £440,000 for QMUC from UK and EC funding sources within the RAE period. This amount includes a final instalment of infrastructural support of £55,000 from SHEFC to set up an integrated facility for Electromagnetic Articulography (EMA), Electropalatography (EPG) and Electrolaryngography (ELG) in a combined EMA/EPG/ELG system for the simultaneous investigation of articulatory and phonatory aspects of speech production. Research funding for the group included awards of £26,000 from the Royal Society of London and £215,000 from EPSRC for speech technology projects, and £156,000 from ESRC for work on articulatory, acoustic and phonological analysis of Scottish English.
4. Submission to Other Units
This submission is cross-referenced to UoA 56/7 (Linguistics, subsection Phonetics). The motivation for this is that effective research into speech and language disorders and their clinical management has to be firmly grounded in an extensive theoretical understanding of phonetic and linguistic aspects of normal processes of speech production and perception. The understanding of normal processes is also illuminated by data from speech pathology.
5. Promotion of Research Culture
The development and maintenance of research activities are given high priority in the Department. All academic staff seek external funding for research projects, publish in refereed journals and books, present research papers at conferences, and engage in a variety of scholarly activities. Achievable research targets are negotiated for individual staff and monitored within the career review process and the institution-wide Staff Development Scheme. Departmental funding supports a high level of conference attendance – staff and students gave 127 presentations at 67 national and international conferences in the RAE period. The Department also funds away-days to develop research strategy.
5.1. Sustaining research culture
Two chief elements sustain the research culture in the Department. The first is the high rate of applications to funding bodies to ensure continuing success in attracting research grants and contracts in the Department’s strategic research domains. The second is the policy of employing postdoctoral researchers, who also act as facilitators of postgraduate student research. In addition to the 4 current postdoctoral posts in the Department, a further 7 postdoctoral researchers were employed on previous projects during the RAE period. Day-to-day research culture is sustained by a journals club, and by the well-established Departmental weekly research seminars led by internal and external researchers, held throughout the academic year for staff, postgraduate and senior undergraduate students.
6.1. Facilities
Two significant developments in Departmental facilities have taken place in the RAE period that greatly enhance research productivity. First, designing and building the combined EMA/EPG/ELG facility in the SRL, and second establishing the SCRSD. These facilities were set up with more than £460,000 infrastructural support from SHEFC’s competitive research development funds. QMUC gave full support for both developments by providing suitable accommodation and the use of central facilities.
The EMA/EPG/ELG facility and the Speech Research Laboratory (SRL). The major facility within the SRL is the EMA/EPG/ELG joint facility for state-of-the-art analysis of speech production. The centrepiece is a Carstens Electromagnetic Articulograph (EMA), which is used for tracking movements of the lips, tongue and velum. The facility enables EMA data to be recorded simultaneously with EPG and data from a Laryngograph (ELG), which records laryngeal activity. The only one of its type in the UK, the EMA/EPG/ELG facility is a world-class installation that has brought substantial research funding and collaboration opportunities to the Department. The SRL also has excellent computer based audio recording facilities with a Neumann-U89 microphone and extensive software for acoustic analysis.
The Scottish Centre for Research into Speech Disability (SCRSD). The SCRSD is one of four centres in the institution that showcase research carried out at QMUC. Located in the Department, the SCRSD has promoted clinical research activities by providing an extensive suite of clinic rooms, all with audio-visual equipment and instrumentation for assessment and treatment of speech disorders. The SCRSD became fully operational in October 1998. Staff from the SCRSD collaborate with NHS Trusts across Scotland to ensure a rich source of clinical data to underpin research activities. Ten honorary Clinical Tutors with specialist skills conduct clinics in the centre.
The IT facilities in the Department include a Windows NT system, which services 73 workstations for research and teaching. The technical and IT facilities are supported by 3 staff: a Senior Computing Officer; a Senior Experimental Officer; and a Systems Development Officer. The total inventory value of the computer-based equipment in the SRL and SCRSD is in excess of £265,000.
6.2. Training of research students
Research towards a postgraduate qualification (MPhil or PhD) is undertaken in the Department. All current PhD students (except one who is funded by EPSRC under the quota studentship scheme and one who is self-funding) have QMUC funded studentships. In addition to completing a research dissertation, research students participate in a one-semester training programme, which covers general principles of research, quantitative and qualitative research methods, bibliographical and IT skills, report writing, oral presentation skills, research management, and legal and ethical issues.
6.3. Support of research students
The Department provides an attractive research environment for postgraduate students with excellent accommodation and technical and administrative support. Students make use of the video and audio recording studios and speech analysis instrumentation in the SRL and SCRSD. PhD students have access to staff development facilities such as training in the use of computer software. Students are given their own PCs, which have online access to a wide range of electronic search facilities. QMUC offers a high quality library service with support from a subject librarian with expert knowledge of publications in the field of speech and language. The library’s speech science and pathology collection is one of the most extensive in the UK. The students also have an annual allowance for attending and presenting at conferences.
7. Support for Multidisciplinary Research
The development of the EMA/EPG/ELG facility together with SCRSD has promoted multidisciplinary research by bringing together academics, NHS clinicians and industrialists. Collaborators on projects using the EMA/EPG/ELG facility include Professor Noel Nguyen (University of Aix-en-Provence, France), Professor John Local (University of York), Dr Paula West (University of Oxford), Professor Inger Moen and Dr Hanne Simonsen (University of Oslo, Norway). The Research Advisory Committee of the SCRSD has promoted multidisciplinary research further by bringing together distinguished academics from the Universities of Edinburgh, Glasgow and Dundee and Consultants in the fields of Paediatrics, Neurology and Plastic Surgery. A positive outcome from the link has been that the Department is a partner in a major MRC Development Grant recently awarded to the University of Edinburgh. The Development Grant provides opportunities for inter-institutional multidisciplinary research and substantial funding potential for component grant applications in the area of communication disorders associated with learning disabilities. The Department is about to submit such an application to MRC, on communication in Down’s Syndrome.
7.1. Collaborative research
The Department’s strategic emphasis on collaboration is a means of sustaining multidisciplinary research within the Department, and the Department has formal collaborative links with more than 30 European and UK institutions. In the case of clinical research, collaboration is essential in giving researchers access to large-scale clinical data, ensuring clinical relevance and achieving cost effectiveness. In the case of experimental research, collaboration is beneficial, securing economy of scale from sharing facilities and giving access to additional sources of knowledge and networked contacts. The facilities together with staff expertise have been successful in attracting international guest researchers on research leave such as Dr Karen Forrest (University of Indiana, USA), Dr Janet Fletcher (University of Melbourne, Australia) and Dr Ann Tyler (University of Nevada, USA).
8. Relationships with Research Users
Departmental staff promote the outcomes of their research for their wider commercial use and application for the health care benefits to society. A recent publication from Universities Scotland The Home of Innovation highlighted the CLEFTNET project as an example of commercially important research coming out of Scotland. Staff disseminate research findings of particular clinical relevance to speech and language therapists by publishing in international journals, and also nationally by presenting at Special Interest Groups, RCSLT conferences, and publishing in professional journals. Departmental staff who are involved in EPG research support the work of other EPG users from all over the world. The EPG units are marketed from QMUC, and sales in the RAE period amounted to 50+ for EPG units, and 20+ for portable training units. Royalties support research-related travel by staff. The demand for EPG workshops is high, particularly on its clinical application. In relation to public understanding of science, the Department organised an open day in the SRL as part of the 1996 Edinburgh International Science Festival. In addition, a video of the EMA/EPG/ELG facility runs continuously in an audio-visual presentation about human and animal languages in the Wellcome Wing of the Science Museum in London, and will be part of a floor projection in its new gallery about speech and language opening in 2001.
9. Relationships with Government Policy
1.1 Background to the Physical Therapy Research Area
The Physical Therapy Research Area is one of eight active research areas identified by Queen Margaret University College prior to the 1996 RAE. The research carried out in the Physical Therapy Research Area is characterised by the application of scientific principles and methods of measurement to the physical health problems experienced by human beings. As such Physical Therapy is considered to involve physical problems which are evaluated by physical or psychological measures, non physical problems which are evaluated using an element of physical assessment or the study of physical stimuli which effect the human body. The research of the group encompasses basic research into the physical causes of illness and disease, the scientific basis of therapeutic interventions, the clinical effectiveness of professional practice and therapeutic management and the organisation and delivery of patient services. The group is focused on making a substantive contribution to the evidence base related to physical health problems and hence supporting the drive for clinical effectiveness in the professions we represent.
The Physical Therapy Research Area consists of 33 academic staff (FTE 30) and supporting secretarial and technical staff drawn from the departments of Physiotherapy, Podiatry and Radiography and Occupational Therapy. As such the group is multi-disciplinary in nature combining academics with backgrounds in basic sciences (physiology, biomechanics, movement science, bioengineering, and psychology) with those from the physical health care professions (Physiotherapy, Podiatry, Radiography and Occupational Therapy). The group made successful application to the RAE1992 as part of a larger health care grouping and to the RAE1996 as a free standing research area. Many of the staff involved in the group have initial first qualifications in a professional discipline followed by a research qualification undertaken in collaboration with a basic science department. 25 of the 31 staff have either gained a research qualification (15 PhD's and 1 Mphil) or are currently undertaking one (9 PhD's). Five new members of staff were awarded their PhD within the last year but are not included as research active. Four members of staff are likely to complete their PhD within this year. The size, composition and research skills of the staff in the Physical Therapy Research Area allow it to make a substantial contribution to this challenging field and to add to the knowledge base in an area of great social importance. Further the multidisciplinary nature of the group assists staff development and inter-professional communication and hence leads to new initiatives and avenues of research.
1.2 Management within the Physical Therapy Research Area
Research is considered a cornerstone of our academic work and is therefore an integral part of our management, career review and staff development systems. The work of the group is overseen by the Physical Therapy Research Area co-ordinator (Rowe) who is a full-time, senior member of staff with the management responsibility for promoting, developing and co-ordinating research within the area. He is supported in this role by the heads of the relevant departments, named departmental research co-ordinators, the deans of the two faculties involved, the office for research and innovation and the postgraduate registry. This management group sets targets for the Research Area in line with the research strategy of the University College and the research capacity of the group. Heads of department assist in a number of ways including the recruitment of staff with research experience, career review of individual staff including setting personal research targets, providing suitable staff development and by allocating teaching and administration in relation to research commitments.
1.3 Defined Research Themes
The Physical Therapy Research Area is primarily composed of four specific research foci in which we have an established track record and experienced staff. These are Pain, Musculoskeletal, Neurology and Exercise Science. These themes were established following the 1996 RAE in order to focus our research on areas of strength. New staff or staff becoming research active have been encouraged to link with these established topics. All 4 themes have strong internal and external collaborative links. A number of projects draw on the expertise of more than one theme for example "Conservative treatment for patellofemoral pain syndrome" (Musculoskeletal & Pain) or " Treatment of shoulder pain in stroke" (Neurology & Pain). The management strategy is designed to produce focused research themes with a specified research niche and which are capable of developing into internationally recognised research groups. For the purposes of RAE2001, 11 of the staff have been declared research active based on their track record of international journal publication, research student supervision and externally funded research. However the majority of the remaining staff (14 out of 22) are currently engaged in research (i.e. studying for their own research degree, publishing research and/or supervising an externally funded project). They also contribute to the work of the 4 groups but have not met the research active status set for inclusion in this RAE2001 submission and hence are not classified as research active. Staff usually belong to one research foci but may contribute expertise to others or collaborate on joint projects. On average the groups consist of 7 academic staff of which 3 have been declared research active for RAE2001.
1.4 Promoting Research Culture
Clear recognition of the importance of research activities is given to staff by the inclusion of personal research plans and research targets in the career review and staff development process leading to planned research activity. The group recognise the value of external research collaboration and staff are encourage to attend and contribute to national and international conferences, to visit other research active centres and to participate in external research committees and grant awarding bodies. The group actively support research development for PAMs within the NHS and have introduced a number of initiatives to facilitate this. These include jointly funded PhD studentships with NHS Trusts (2 to date), co-applications for funding (6 to date) and our own research development grants employing local clinicians (3 to date). The staff in the area take an active interest in the training of research students and in the support of both students and supervisors. The research culture is supported by regular and ad-hoc research meetings including presentations by staff and research students, visiting researchers and the area research co-ordinator.
1.6 Interdisciplinary or Collaborative research
The work undertaken by the Physical Therapy Research Area is of necessity Interdisciplinary involving as it does the application of basic sciences to the physical problems associated with health. The multi-professional nature of the group and the variety of subject disciplines represented by staff in the group are a considerable asset. A team-based approach allows suitable and complementary supervision to be available for projects which address multidimensional health issues.
The Physical Therapy research area collaborates with high quality researchers in the field. We are involved in a number of collaborative external research programs including joint grant holding with other academic institutions (e.g. Univ. of Edinburgh, Univ. of Stirling, Univ. of York, Caledonian University, Oxford University, Univ. of Strathclyde, Glasgow School of Art and Design) and joint planning, management and implementation of research projects with clinical partners (e.g. Lothian University NHS Trust, Fife Acute NHS Trust, Lothian Primary Care NHS Trust), patient groups (e.g. Chest Heart and Stroke Scotland, Pain Association) and industrial partners (e.g. BUPA, Depuy International, Scholl). Collaborative studentship supervision is also encouraged including external supervisors on QMUC research programs (e.g. Univ. of Strathclyde, Univ. of Edinburgh, Univ. of Ulster, Univ. of Glasgow, Univ. of St Andrews) and QMUC staff supervising external studentships (e.g. York University, Univ. of Strathclyde, Univ. of Edinburgh, Univ. of Glasgow).
1.7 Relationships with research users
Much of the work undertaken by the group is of direct relevance to the professions allied to medicine and the staff are committed to disseminating the outcomes of their research so as to influence both clinical practice and educational provision. Staff disseminate their research through both formal publications (journal papers & conference presentations) and informal mechanisms (in-service training, clinical networks, newsletters etc.). The group have established relationships both with the local NHS providers in acute and primary care and with patient organisations such as the Pain Association, Age Concern and Chest, Heart and Stroke. We recognise that a good relationship with these groups is required to fulfil our aim of producing applied research of relevance to people, which investigates the effectiveness of the therapy professions and which is implemented in practice.
1.8 Coherence with Government Policy
The research of the group and our plans for future development have been constructed with reference to government policy. The UK strategy for science, innovation, technology and design (Foresight) is focused on improving quality of life and identifies "Healthcare", "The ageing population" and "Education, Skills & Training" as key issues all of which are directly related to the work of this group. The SHEFC policy document "University Research in Scotland" indicates that institutions should identify areas of research strength and prioritise, organise and monitor them. Institutions should also motivate staff, foster collaboration and partnership, manage research effectively and seek new income streams for research. These are core objectives of both the QMUC and the Physical Therapy Area research strategies. Finally the Scottish Executives research policy for the NHS in Scotland encourages collaboration between trusts & university departments and identifies many priority areas to which work undertaken by this group has contributed including mental health, coronary heart disease, stroke, cancer, alcohol abuse, improving health, primary care, reshaping hospital services and fostering research skills. The government objectives listed here are central to our research strategy and encourage us to believe that we can maintain and expand our research portfolio.
Within the new Faculty structure research activity is supported through a series of interlinked mechanisms which match research development activity with potential research funds, support and co-ordinate preparation of research proposals, and monitor the progress of research. Key to these processes are the roles of the Faculty Research Facilitator, Research Co-ordinators located in each of the departments, and the Research and Innovation Office. In combination this team ensure that staff are encouraged and supported in all types of research activity.
The Faculty Research Facilitator is employed to monitor new research opportunities and liaise with the Research Co-ordinators, as well as to provide staff with project related support. Sites which are currently systematically monitored include REFUND, ESRC, JRF, Chief Scientist Office-Scotland, RCN, Department of Health, European Commission and WHO. Through this mechanism grant applications have been submitted to Department of Health, WHO, and CSO, Scotland. During this period the research facilitator has been actively involved in directly supporting over 15 funded projects.
Research Co-ordinators from each of the departments meet regularly to exchange information and agree research strategy and activity. The scope for cross discipline and cross departmental working is assessed early in the process of project preparation. The cross-departmental focus is further supported by the provision of joint training seminars and workshops and theme-specific cross-departmental research interest meetings, a recent example being a seminar for research related to older persons.
The Research and Innovation Office provides assistance in the costing and preparation of grant applications. The contractual elements of the relationship between researchers and external clients are standardised and co-ordinated. Monthly statements are issued to principal grantholders to facilitate sound financial management.
A regular series of research seminars are organised within the Faculty of Social Sciences and Health Care. These comprise a mix of internal speakers discussing on-going or recently completed research projects, such as "Overseas recruitment of nurses: a policy research study" and external speakers on specific research topics, such as "Successful ageing: from certainty to uncertainty", and methodologies, such as "Focus groups: rhetoric versus reality" and "Exploring the complexity of collaborative research". This year we have focused on the policy making process, and speakers are attending from the Scottish Office, local authorities and campaigning and voluntary sector organisations
. All staff and research students within the Faculty are invited to these seminars. Invitations are also extended to external academics and health professionals.The seminar series is complemented by research interest meetings, organised by smaller groups of staff and research students, to discuss specific pieces of work. Recent examples include workshops on Sudden Infant Death Syndrome and the Scottish Breast Cancer Campaign. This allows individual staff to discuss research ideas and possibilities for funding in an informal environment prior to generating full proposals and pursuing specific research interests. The Centre for International Health Studies additionally arranges a postgraduate research seminar series each spring. Such research seminars provide excellent networking opportunities for ‘new’ researchers.
Research active staff submitted under RAE Unit of Assessment 11C are drawn from all of the departments which make up the Faculty of Social Sciences and Health Care. The definition of ‘research active’ which has been adopted for this submission reflects the range of high quality and policy responsive research outputs within the contributory disciplines. These can take the form of influential reports to national health professional statutory training authorities as well as articles from high quality international academic and policy journals (e.g. Social Science and Medicine, Psychological Health, International Journal of Nursing Studies, Medical Care). Within the submitted material there are examples of research reports which have had a significant influence on health care practice and health care education (e.g. two recent publications for the NBS, "Employers’ needs and the skills of newly qualified Project 2000 staff nurses", "Newly qualified RNs – core skills and competencies"). Indeed it is characteristic of the research grouping that researchers contribute to such policy development in addition to submission to refereed journals (note for example the work of Buchan regarding health care planning, and Pavis regarding social exclusion and rural youth, and deliberate self-harm in deprived communities). The appointment of Profesor Michael Deighan of Dearden Scotland as Honorary Professor of Health Governance with CIHS provides further evidence of this committment to policy-informing research.
Research in the area of nutrition is carried out under the aegis of the Centre for Nutrition Research (CNFR), which draws on expertise in nutritional, biomedical and social sciences. As such, the research carried out by the CNFR is multi-disciplinary in nature and is aimed at establishing sound evidence on which to base practices and strategies for improving nutritional health, in the contexts of both treatment and prevention. The Centre was established using funding from Scottish Higher Education Funding Council (SHEFC) in 1994 and has been successful in focussing research activity in this strategic area as judged from the progression in RAE rating from 2 (1992) to 3a (1996).
The strategic development and maintenance of research activities is the responsibility of the peer elected Director of the CNFR who facilitates new research goals. Strategic research objectives which parallel the institutional research aims are determined by the CNFR. These are implemented through the staff development and career review process. Achievable research targets are negotiated for each member of staff which are reviewed biannually, and members have undertaken higher degrees (1 MSc, 1 PhD). Support is given to staff to enable them to meet targets such as blocking of timetables to free research time, financial support for attending congresses and training workshops related to areas such as Managing Research Contract Staff and European Research Funding. There is broader support from QMUC management with information on new research initiatives and funding sources (Dean of Faculty with responsibility for research across QMUC) and help with costing of research proposals (Research and Innovations Office).
1.2 Defined Research Groups
There are three defined groups of research activity within the CNFR. Each group has a core of experienced researchers with an established track record in their field (the staff named below as research active), affiliated PhD students and research contract staff. New staff or staff becoming research active, are encouraged to link with these strands in order to promote their research. These strands and appropriate subgroups are given below where (PhD) denotes work undertaken as part of a PhD studentship.
· Food choice and Public Health Nutrition
Community-based intervention studies are on-going to identify effective approaches to increasing consumption of starchy food in adolescent school boys (PhD) and to evaluate the impact of introducing breakfast clubs on diet quality, cognitive performance and growth in primary school children (PhD). Collaborative work on the childhood origins of obesity, the aetiology and prevention of iron deficiency in post weaning children (with Department of Child, Life and Health, Edinburgh, PhD), the suitability of criteria for assessing obesity in children (PhD) is also on-going. A 3-centred trial has been completed which investigated the role of sucrose containing foods in adherence to low fat, energy restricted diets where dietary restraint and quality of life was also assessed (de Looy and Drummond).
This group have developed a unique capability in carrying out long term intervention studies in community and workplace settings. This puts the group in a prime position to spearhead research in public health nutrition. SHEFC funding supported the initial salaries of 5 contract staff. This combined research has generated £400,000 in industrial funding and current collaboration with two international centres, five academic nutrition departments and various work place settings is on-going (see section 1.5).
· Clinical Nutrition and Metabolism
This research group comprises basic science research attempting to elucidate the effects of dietary (ingested) components on the development of specific diseases and applied research with the aim of developing nutritional strategies to reduce risk and the progression of existing disease. Membership of this strand comprises (Armstrong, Davidson, McBean, McKenzie & Richardson, 2 non selected staff) and 12 PhD students (2 external), 1 senior technical officer and 3 research assistants. There are three key areas of investigation in this group, firstly, investigation of the effect of different dietary fatty acids on cells (platelets, leucocytes) and pathways integral to the pathology of cardiovascular and inflammatory diseases (Armstrong). Secondly, assessment of alterations in gastrointestinal sensory mechanisms eliciting changes in ingestive behaviour, energy intake and nutritional status in disease (Davidson & Richardson) which is complemented by research on amino acid metabolism in relation to amino acid and protein needs (Mackenzie). Thirdly assessing long-term consequences of ecstasy abuse on cerebral function (glucose utilisation) and cerebral blood flow in the brain (McBean). This work is complemented by de Looy investigating nutritional status of long term drug users (CSO grant).
Significant achievements of this group relate to the diversity of funding secured. These include the EC (3 centre trial with the University of Edinburgh) and BHF (PhD) for novel research into the implications of dietary trans polyunsaturates in cardiovascular disease. In addition significant funding (£176,524) through the Teaching Company Scheme has been secured (Armstrong). Industrial sponsorship is also provided by Bioforce (PhD) Nutricia (£32,500 externally administered), Allergan and Scotia Pharmaceuticals. A collaborative Wellcome grant (£166,000) administered by partners at the Western General, Edinburgh has also been secured (McBean). Totalling £968,457 in research income. Collaboration is key to all researchers in this group and currently four international centres and departments from six NHS Trusts are involved in various joint research projects (see section 1.5).
· Microbiology and Immunology
This group evaluates the anti-microbial and anti-inflammatory properties of natural products and investigates the interactions of food pathogens with food. Membership of this strand comprises Fyfe (selected research staff), 1 non-selected, two contract researchers and 4 PhD students.
The ability of natural products, such as plant oils and spices, to reduce the number and attenuate bacterial pathogens is being investigated. Fyfe is also studying the effect of the food environment on the expression and biological properties of pathogenic factors of bacterial food pathogens (PhD). The anti-inflammatory properties of dietary components are also being investigated (PhD) with the structure and bioactivity of bacterial molecules (lipopolysaccharide, LPS) and immune cells of particular interest. This group works closely with the Department of Medical Microbiology at the University of Edinburgh.
Significant achievements of this group have been realised from the research undertaken which has resulted in an international patent and has initiated the first spin-off company (Bactokil, Ltd) at QMUC. The research has progressed and commercialisation is being undertaken with the support of the Scottish Office and has been recognised in the form of a SMART (1) award. Funding is currently being sought from SMART (2) venture capitalists and industry. This group are also investigating the possibility of developing private laboratories at Roslin.
1.3 Promoting and Sustaining an active and vital Research Culture
Research is given a high priority by the University College, as evidenced by its mission statement. This is manifested by selected relief from teaching for research active staff to enable them to pursue their research targets as determined by the staff development and career review process. All new staff are recruited on the basis of their research profile to enhance the research capability of the defined research groups. Existing staff are encouraged to become research active by collaborating with experienced research staff (e.g. through joint supervision of PhD students), by encouraging them to undertake higher degrees and by facilitating appropriate collaborative links for making joint applications for funding of research projects. The CNFR provides support for research design and statistical analysis of data as well as providing a regular seminar programme to encourage systematic and critical investigatory skills to be developed. Visiting international and national speakers are invited to speak at the research seminars. Research students, final year undergraduates and staff all regularly attend these. A key feature is the use made of these seminars for staff and postgraduate students to present their own work thus adding to the research dissemination and enabling collaboration between the research groups. In addition, the nutrition group has been active in professional activities, which strengthen the research culture and increase peer esteem, e.g. membership of learned societies, editorial work, refereeing for research journals and grant awarding bodies and PhD examining (see RA6).
Staff are strongly encouraged to raise the profile of the CNFR nationally and internationally. To this end, individuals are given support to attend national (at least 2 p.a.) and international conferences (at least 1 p.a.) in order to disseminate their research findings, present plenary lectures and chair sessions. Staff are also encouraged to organise and host conferences at QMUC. These activities facilitate networking with groups from other institutions who have complementary research capabilities. This has led to the forging of strategic collaborative alliances (section 1.5).
1.4 The research infrastructure, facilities, training and support
Facilities
There are eight laboratories, four of which have dedicated space for CNFR research. Specialised facilities enable safe research to be conducted in microbiology, tissue culture and functional/ biochemical studies with human blood cells and tissues. One laboratory is being equipped to carry out research to ‘good laboratory practice (GLP)’ standards. In addition there are clean facilities for phlebotomy and conducting human volunteer trials. Food preparation facilities are also available.
Our research infrastructure is greatly enhanced by strategic alliances with other institutions with complementary research capabilities (see section 1.5). Collaboration is not only important for the practical aspects of carrying out research projects, but also to provide an extension of the expertise base available to staff and PhD students within the CNFR.
The University College has a library with an extensive range of journals in the area of nutritional science and a central IT resource. A statistical advisory service, an office for research and commercial services, a post-graduate registry and funding for research studentships, small projects and a competitive fund for capital equipment.
Training and support for research students
The University College provides a formal training programme for new postgraduate students which introduces the general principles of research in qualitative and quantitative methods; the use of databases for collection, collation and analysis of data and research management. Within the strategic area all postgraduate students are accommodated in a common room with IT and office facilities provided, allowing access to electronic journals etc provided by the library. In addition a dedicated librarian has been identified to support this strategic area.
1.5 Collaborative Research
Collaboration is a key feature in all defined groups which fosters a multdisciplinary approach to research.
Public Health Nutrition Research Group;
The aims of this group are facilitated by collaboration with other institutions providing the population base for implementation of public health strategies and the use of facilities that are not available at QMUC. These include: Cardiovascular Epidemiology Unit, Dundee University (large scale epidemiological data analysis, eating frequency); formerly Centre of Applied Nutrition Research, Dundee University (increasing consumption of starchy-foods); University Department of Human Nutrition, Yorkhill Hospital, Glasgow (obesity in children); Department of Child Life and Health, University of Edinburgh (obesity in children, prevention of iron deficiency in the post-weaning period measurement of iron status); Rowett Research Institute (measurements requiring equipment and analysis unavailable at QMUC (whole body calorimetry); University of Stellenbosch, South Africa (nutrition in 1-9 year olds across South Africa), National Nutritional Institute of India (PhD).
Clinical Nutrition and Metabolism Research Group
To fulfil the aims of this group patient populations are required and these are provided with the collaborative support of Department of Clinical and Surgical Sciences, University of Edinburgh (liver transplant patients); Department of Cardiac Surgery, Glasgow RI (cardiopulmonary bypass), Gastrointestinal Laboratories WGH (Crohn’s patients); Clinical Biochemistry RIE (hyperlipidaemic patients) and Department of Human Biology, University of Maastricht/ INRA-Unite de Nutrition Lipidique, Dijon, (transLinE study). In addition, specialist analysis is provided by collaborating partners: Wellcome Trust Clinical Research Facility WGH; Cardiovascular Research Unit, Edinburgh (measurement of apoptosis through flow cytometry, measurement of haemostatic factors) and ETH, Zurich (measurement of metabolic parameters and hormonal mediators).
Microbiology and Immunology Research Group
Medical Microbiology, University of Edinburgh provides access to facilities for all PhD students The spin-off company Bactokil Ltd conducts research in collaboration with Roslin Nutrition.
1.6 Relationship with industry, public sector and others
The University manages research through a series of inter-relating structures. Research strategy is overseen by an Assistant Principal (Research) who convenes the University's Research Committee. At Faculty and School level there are research co-ordinators and there is a research sub-committee of Faculty Board. This infrastructure provides strategic guidance and planning for research activity.
The University is part of Aberdeen Research Consortium (ARC) which involves the Macaulay Land Use Research Institute, the Rowett Institute, Aberdeen University and the Scottish Agricultural College-Aberdeen. The nutrition research group, in particular, has established extensive and lasting links under this umbrella organization and has a number of shared grants and studentships, predominantly with the Rowett Research Institute (the largest nutrition research institute in the UK).
The University has identified priority areas for development of specific research interests and these include the areas of food and health. The nutrition research group's work contributes to both of these strategic sectors and there is interaction between the group and the Food Science and Technology Research Centre which has been highly successful in attracting contracts of commercial importance.
The nutrition research group draws its membership from two schools, namely the School of Applied Sciences and the School of Health Sciences and it is co-ordinated by a professor who also deals with the research budgets. The group covers aspects of basic, strategic and applied research that underpins the undergraduate courses in nutrition, dietetics, biosciences and biomedical science and promotes appropriate scholarly activity for academic staff. The groups themes (identified in RA5c) address priority areas for public health in the United Kingdom as identified by government agencies such as the Food Standards Agency (for example in the document: Research Requirements 2001-2002), Scottish Executive (for example in the paper: NHS Scotland - Our National Health, a plan for action, a plan for change) and the Department of Health. These areas include diet and chronic disease (large bowel cancer), obesity and the effectiveness of nutritional information in empowering individuals to make changes to lifestyle associated with reduced risk of disease.
Postgraduate students act as a focus for research activity and some funding from the RAE1996 has been directed specifically to support them. There has been an increase in the number of students registered for MPhil/PhD with the group and over the assessment period this has led to an increase in the number of research degrees awarded. Further continuity of activity has been provided by the inputs of externally funded research fellows/assistants and an honorary research fellow (Dr Henderson). Dr Henderson, formerly a full-time member of academic staff until the end of the 1996-97 session, has remained active with the group as a research fellow, supervising research students and contributing to new developments in the analytical capability of the group. Apart from local supervision of research students, the University provides courses and seminars for researchers, there is a postgraduate student association and there are two staff, assistant registrar-research and research support officer, with the remit of supporting research activity. There is an annual two-day induction event for new postgraduates. Registration of postgraduate research projects is subject to internal peer review. Researchers have dedicated office space in close proximity to academic supervisors to facilitate the maintenance of the research culture.
Theme 3 has been fruitful in producing a commercial spinoff in the form of a computer program for dietary analysis named 'Windiets' (formerly known as 'Diet5 for Windows') which has an extensive nutritional database and is designed to be used as a research tool for preparing tailored food-frequency questionnaires. Staff share supervision of postgraduate students and there are regular meetings to monitor progress and engender a research culture. The culture extends into the broader environment of nutritional research in Aberdeen with staff and postgraduate students attending seminars and meetings in collaborating establishments within ARC.
Staffing policy
The staffing policy seeks to recruit and support staff who can contribute actively to the strategic themes of the nutrition research group. When Dr Henderson took early retirement, this policy was implemented in the wording of the recruitment advertisements and applicants were required to demonstrate their potential for contributing to the group's research and the interview process required shortlisted candidates to give a seminar presentation to this effect. The research aspirations of staff are identified through the University's scheme of 'Staff Development and Career Review' and ringfenced funds are used to support attendance at research conferences. Staff timetables are planned to maximise opportunities for effective research activity. Furthermore, the University funds courses for developing skills in research such as 'Writing for Publication' and 'Winning Grant Funding'. Dr McGaw, who left the University late in 2000, will be replaced by a member of staff with similar expertise and the potential to contribute to the work of the research group. Two members of staff who have not been active in research during the census period are being drawn into the culture through shared supervision of a PhD student and attendance at research conferences. The University's system for supervising postgraduates encourages staff to develop their skills by joining a supervisory team with more experienced members so that they can develop their skills before becoming first supervisors (Director of Studies). There is also an internal training course on supervisory skills and significant documentary guidance.
Self assessment
Most of the activity of the nutrition research group is of national excellence as evidenced by the publication of work in national and international journals and the extent of collaboration outside the academic environment of the University. The evidence of esteem details the activity of three members of the group who have demonstrated work of international excellence as recognised by invitations to international conferences and workshops and participation in programmes within the European Community. The group uses international conferences as the primary outlet for research findings to expedite interactions and discussion in the broader scientific arena and this is evidenced by some of the publications returned in this submission and the range of co-authors from outside the University.
The Biomedical Sciences Unit is interdisciplinary, with input from the Faculty of Health and Social Care, School of Applied Sciences (Kong). Research is organised into two groups that are distinct although there are key complementary areas that have emerged that will consolidate the development of future research programmes. The groups are multi-disciplinary thus strengthening the thrust of the research and they have defined links with other Universities, organisations and industry that allow for the extension of the work. The Biomedical Sciences unit is divided as follows;
Regulation of cell growth
The aim of this group is to investigate the molecular mechanisms of cell growth in disease states with particular reference to cancer, diabetes and drug resistant micro-organism infection. Knott is extending her work on the effects of nutrients on cell growth with particular emphasis on angiogenic mechanisms in relation to diabetes (proliferative diabetic retinopathy and wound healing). The development of this work in the area of angiogenesis per se and its relation to cancer biology and the effect of nutrient balance on specific transcription factors is currently being developed for which external funds have been secured (Grampian University Hospital Trust). A recent publication [Knott1] reported the development of an in vitro model of human retinal angiogenesis for which there is significant application for the development of biological systems for the examination of disease mechanisms. The investigation of the role of growth factors in cell proliferation is ongoing [Knott 2-4] with application to both diabetes and cancer biology. Support has been obtained for this work from The Wellcome Trust, The Royal National Institute for the Blind, The Biochemical Society, and the Grampian University Hospital Trust. These monies were obtained prior to Knott taking up her present position and therefore cannot be included in this submission. Knott has secured funding from the Grampian University Hospitals Trust since taking up her present position.
Kong has identified new compounds that have been shown to be DNA binding and therefore potentially of therapeutic use as anti-cancer [Bioorganic and Medicinal Chemistry Letters, 2000, 10, 1609-1612] and anti-parasitic agents. Support has been obtained from the Royal Society of Chemistry for the last two years on this project to study the DNA sequence specificity of these compounds (collaboration has been set up with the School of Chemistry, UMIST to carry out high field NMR of drug-DNA interaction). Another group of novel compounds (oxa-polyamines) have also been discovered with demonstrable anticancer activities [Kong 1-2]. Recent data has demonstrated that these compounds are capable of inducing apoptosis (programmed cell death). The most active compound is currently undergoing in vivo testing. Further investigation of the mechanism of action of these compounds at the biochemical and molecular level is an ongoing activity in external collaborations. These represent an exciting platform for paving the way to the characterization of the molecular basis of novel anti-cancer therapy (a patent had been filed for these discoveries, Anti-Cancer Polyamides Compounds. British Patent Application No. 0003140.1 Filed on 12/2/2000). Kong was awarded a Royal Society/NATO Postdoctoral Fellowship to elucidate the mode of action of these drugs. In a recent publication, Kong reported for the first time the synthesis and characterization of a novel azamacrocyclic system [Kong3]. The potential application of this system as a biosensor is recognised and Kong has received a grant from the British Council to initiate collaboration with the University of Porto.
Research ethos
There is a supportive network for post-graduate research students with a 2-day induction course, an annual weekend retreat and a variety of training courses provided to facilitate their research training. There is a Research methods course, literature review seminars, advice on planning work and career-planning workshops in conjunction with an active research student association. Research students are provided with at least two internal supervisors and external supervision is encouraged for all students. There is good research student activity, with 5 overseas distance learners (Supervisor Taylor, University of Thailand) with an excellent throughput of awarded research degrees.
An annual Research Away Day is held for all staff at a local hotel. These retreats have been instrumental in formulating the existing research groups and in developing our forward research strategy.
The laboratory accommodation has been upgraded, reallocated and re-designed to support a research infrastructure. Equipment has been purchased for the laboratories by an internal investment capital allocation of approximately £100K. The year 2000 saw the opening of a Molecular Biology Laboratory, a Drug Analysis Unit and an extension to the Microbiology Research Laboratory. A dedicated cell culture suite is currently being built and will be opened in summer 2001. The latter was made possible with the receipt of £50K funding from the Educational Development Trust of the Robert Gordon University. The additional infra-structure will facilitate the development of the unit and will provide an important link between the identification of lead compounds and the characterization of prokaryotic and eukaryotic mechanisms of cell growth. The Department is moving increasingly towards underpinning all scholarly activity with a research emphasis, which is evidenced by the increased infrastructure to support research with Honours projects being directly linked into existing research programmes to facilitate the ongoing research of the respective groups.
.
Research Management
A Faculty Research Committee is responsible for facilitating joint initiatives and raising the awareness of various sources of external funds. Dr Rachel M Knott was appointed as the Biomedical Sciences Unit co-ordinator in 2000 with responsibility for the communication and future direction of the group. There are weekly meetings which include either Research presentations by Staff or research students, an invited speaker from a relevant area of research or a group meeting to discuss issues relating to research infrastructure, funding targets and research development.
The Biomedical Science Unit is further divided into two groups, the Molecular characterisation of novel bioactive compounds and the Regulation of cell growth each with their own group leader, namely Dr Philip Cox and Dr Rachel M Knott respectively. Each group leader is responsible for the co-ordination of the research area and to identify key themes for further development. The key themes are now being used to focus the future direction of the research.
The potential for commercial partnerships will be identified for key compounds and the process developed via the Professional Advisory Group that has representation from a number of major Pharmaceutical companies including Quintiles, Glaxo and Pfizer and is chaired by Professor Philip Woodhead (Quintiles, Edinburgh). The University has also appointed a commercial manager (Mrs Helen Mill) who is currently negotiating contracts for patents that are lodged by Research groups and to ensure the suitable commercialisation of the products.
Group philosophy and remit We seek to promote an international, interdisciplinary research community underpinned by a core philosophy. This is to achieve improved care and services for patients and clients through high quality research, based on the successful integration of research and practice across professionals and joint working between health and social care practitioners and researchers. It is particularly encouraging that recent government policy (for example, Designed to Care 1997 and Our National Health : A plan for action, a plan for change 2000) has reinforced early guiding principles within the HSRG. Indeed, Chesson, during the 1990s, established a track record regarding multidisciplinary team working and user involvement (Sutherland and Chesson, British Journal of Occupational Therapy 1994; Bisset et al, The Lancet, 1996; Joy et al, British Journal of Occupational Therapy, 1998; Reid and Chesson, Physiotherapy, 1998). Currently, the main remit of the P&HSRG is: to carry out research relevant to health, and health care needs in the 21st Century; to work with patients and carers and user groups; to collaborate with health professionals in identifying research needs and investigating priority areas; to contribute to the development of the research strategies of professional bodies and health and social care organisations; to help establish evidence-based practice and to provide for the research education and training of practitioners, thus contributing to research capacity building in the NHS and social care sector.
Research Themes The main research themes reflect both national and local priorities viz (i) user involvement; (ii) user informational needs and education; (iii) multi-disciplinary and interagency working; and (iv) assessment of outcome.
Research Management
Vertical Integration and Group Facilities Chesson (Faculty Reader), as Group leader, liases closely with Mackie, who chairs the Faculty Research Committee (FRC) and is a member of the University’s Research Committee. The FRC is the main mechanism through which the Group interacts with other researchers within the Faculty. The fact that the Group occupies accommodation (a suite of rooms) adjacent to the Dean’s office ensures frequent contact with the senior management team and provides for excellent communication. It enables the Dean, moreover, to be fully conversant and up-to-date with research developments within the Group. It has, for example, helped to ensure that multi-disciplinary and interagency working is highlighted within the Faculty’s Academic Plan, and reflected within curricula developments.
Research partnerships and collaborative working
1. Formal organisational alliances. Chesson and Mackie have well-established relationships with local NHS Trusts (Grampian University Hospitals Trust and Grampian Primary Care Trust) as well as with other Scottish Trusts (Dumfries and Galloway, Forth Valley, Greater Glasgow and Tayside). Relationships have been fostered through (a) funded research (Mackie); (b) joint projects (Chesson); (c) secondments (currently the P&HSRG has 4 secondments - Mathers’ salary is paid by GUHT, although she is based in the Group and for over 10 months of the year she focuses exclusively on research); research links with clinicians; (d) payment of postgraduate fees by trusts applicable in the case of Stephenson and Young (both occupational therapists) and funded by GUHT and GPCT respectively.
Staffing policy
Research students are incorporated into the above arrangements and they also have access to the university-wide postgraduate research training annual programme. The Faculty Research Committee monitors the progress of all MPhil/PhD students and we aim to identify difficulties at an early stage.
2. Research partnerships. Albyn Medical Practice has established its Research and Development Unit with Chesson and Mackie and accommodation is provided on practice premises. It has also funded four projects in the assessment period. Welsh, based at Ardach Health Centre, Buckie, Morayshire, has a close association with Chesson and a poster, co-authored on GP referral for exercise scheme, was presented at the UKPHA’s 9th Annual Conference in 2001.
4. Project development with ‘new’ stakeholders. Strong linkages have been established with Moray Leisure Centre, Elgin following completion of an evaluation of their GP referral for exercise scheme. From this, the Group is a partner applicant in the Leisure Centre’s bid (£1 million) to establish a Healthy Living Centre (evaluation to be undertaken by P&HSRG). Recognition of the Group’s expertise is reflected in the invited presentation at the UK National Seminar on GP Referral Schemes in November 2000.
5. The Carers Research Partnership. This brings together carers, a wide range of carer organisations and statutory agencies (local trusts and social work departments). The primary aim of the group is to establish a research programme which is relevant to both the needs of carers and care providers.
6. Collaboration with Aberdeen University. There are longstanding links between the P&HSRG and Aberdeen University. We contribute to seminars run by the Department of General Practice and Primary Care, and the Department of Public Health We have recently been successful as a co-applicant with Aberdeen University on a Scottish Office Chief Scientist Office project on patient decision making in primary care (£59,000 to start summer 2001).
Our policy is to recruit staff who will enable our current mix of staff to be sustained. Namely, lecturing staff (clinically qualified) with research commitments; health and social care practitioners attached to specific projects (occupational therapists, pharmacists and physiotherapists); health professionals on secondment; full-time researchers, assistants and fellows (including those with a clinical background and social scientists trained in health service research). In particular, we need to appoint more experienced researchers (research fellows/senior research fellows). However, because of the national shortage of health researchers, we recognise that we may have to appoint at the assistant level, but will aim to select those close to promotion to fellow. For instance, Garcia, appointed this year, will complete her PhD in 2001 and has four years experience as a research assistant. She will be made up to a fellow on the award of her doctorate.
We are also working to strengthen links with other researchers nationally and internationally. An appointment was from Madrid University and Chesson was recently invited to supervise a PhD to be jointly undertaken at the University of Sydney, Australia and The Robert Gordon University. She has worked with Hillman (lecturer, Department of Occupational Therapy) in previous years.
In 1998 Dr Lockhart joined the Department and began to work with existing staff while retaining his links with the University of Glasgow. This led to the establishment of the Neurovascular Inflammation Group (NIG) and began a collaborative venture between Paisley and the Centre for Rheumatic Diseases (CRD) in the Department of Medicine at the University of Glasgow. It has a primary focus on neurovascular regulatory mechanisms, their disturbance during disease processes such as rheumatoid arthritis and the development and evaluation of anti-inflammatory drugs. Dr Cardosi was integrated into the group for his expertise in electrochemical biosensors, this being relevant for measurement of nitric oxide as a pro-inflammatory mediator.
The collective aim of NIG and ACTG is to adopt a holistic approach to the understanding and treatment of neurovascular disorders. The groups have web sites (www-biol.paisley.ac.uk/neuro and www-biol.paisley.ac.uk/ACTG) which promote their research activities, and publicity brochures to facilitate securing links with industry.
Dr Cardosi is a Reader who supervises 2 research students and is currently developing electrochemical methods for measuring NO2 and NO3 levels in tissue fluids. He has produced and is now validating a real-time electrochemical system for measuring nitric oxide generation.
Drs McLean and Hettle provide the molecular expertise for the research. Dr McLean co-supervises 3 PhD students and adopts a multidisciplinary approach to the evaluation of novel anti-inflammatory therapeutic strategies, including the investigation of differential cyclooxygenase expression in arthritis. Dr Lockhart supervises 2 PhD students and as a Vascular Physiologist has expertise in assessing the hyperaemic component of joint inflammation using advanced laser Doppler imaging technology.
Ø Dr Robin Plevin (University of Strathclyde) and Prof Bob Ramage (University of Edinburgh) – elucidation of the putative role of novel pro-inflammatory mechanisms in joint inflammation.
International links include Dr Hamid Najafipour (University of Kerman, Iran) and Dr Francis Lam (Chinese University of Hong Kong), both of whom have visited Scotland and worked with the group.
Dr Lockhart and Dr Ferrell jointly manage NIG and hold monthly journal club meetings and regular collaborative meetings with CRD. Research students are expected to make annual presentations of their research and the group contributes to a formal seminar programme within Biological Sciences. The doctoral students submitted from this group are all internally funded, demonstrating the University’s commitment to biomedical research. All undergo a mandatory induction course at the start of their research programme, and transfer to the degree of PhD by means of a formal oral exam at the end of their first year. Their programme includes regular presentations to the Division, and each year the University organises a poster competition for the students to present their results. Students are also financially supported to present papers at national and international conferences.
RESEARCH STRUCTURE AND ENVIRONMENT
Research groupings
Four research groupings have been established within the Department to make the best use of the RAE funds. Three groups (Anterior Eye, Visual Development and Ocular motor Function) were identified in the 1992 RAE. They have shown sustained activity with a strong record of successful PhD supervision and publication. The fourth group (Visual Psychophysics) was initiated during the 1996 RAE period and has been subsequently developed following the appointments of Dr W Simpson and Dr V Manahilov. They bring considerable expertise to the area, with Dr Manahilov providing additional impetus to the Visual Development group. The research groupings outlined below represent the major activities of the research active staff. The inclusion of staff in more than one group indicates the collaborations which represent a significant strength of the Department.
Anterior Segment (research group A)
Senior Investigators: Prof Tomlinson; Prof Doughty
Current Associates: Dr Button; Dr Murphy; Dr Oliver; Dr Walsh; Dr Mitchell; Dr Pearce; Dr Christie; T Beattie.
Publications: 65 Peer-reviewed publications
Postgraduates: Total enrolment: 13; 5 at census date. 6 PhDs awarded; 1 MPhil awarded during RAE period
External finance £122,338 (RAE reported), £1,600 other income
Primary topics: Corneal and conjunctival anatomy; corneal and conjunctival metabolism, corneal topography and sensitivity; normal and abnormal tear film physiology; physiological impact of contact lenses; characteristics and clinical assessment of ophthalmic pharmaceuticals; mechanisms of corneal infection; refractive surgery and visual performance; physiological effects of ophthalmic materials.
This research group has shown increases in all the measures of research activity since the 1996 RAE. There has been an increase in external funding which has allowed the employment of two new associates (T Beattie and Dr Christie).
Visual Development (research group B)
Senior Investigators: Dr McCulloch (reader)
Current Associates: Dr Manahilov; Dr Shahani; Dr Gray, Dr R Mackie
Visiting Professor Dutton (Yorkhill Hospital NHS Trust)
Publications: 25 peer-reviewed publications (excluding Prof Dutton’s publications)
Postgraduates: Total enrolment: 6; 1 at census date. 4 PhDs awarded during RAE period
External finance £219,051(RAE reported), £1,060 other income
Primary topics: Visual development (maturation) in premature infants; impact of maternal lipid nutrition on early visual development visual/electrophysiological assessment in children with neurological impairment, including Rhett’s Syndrome; optic nerve hypoplasia and phenylketonuria; maturation of magnocellular and parvocellular pathways, physiological correlates of face perception in children and spatio temporal thresholds in infants.
The group as a whole has consolidated its position as an area of excellence within the Department, maintaining a substantial level of publication and PhD student throughput. Dr. D McCulloch was promoted to Reader as a result of her substantial research contributions. An increase in external funding has been achieved in the present RAE period. The strategic appointments of Dr V Manahilov and Dr U Shahani have brought additional expertise to the group.
Ocular Motor Function (research group C)
Senior Investigator: Dr Gray
Current Associates: Dr Bowers; Dr Heron; Dr Murphy; Prof Tomlinson; Dr Cleary; N Northway; Prof Doughty
Publications: 28 peer-reviewed publications
Postgraduates: Total enrolment: 9; 4 at census date. 3 PhDs awarded during RAE period.
External finance £14,118 (RAE reported), £12,700 other income
Primary topics: Ocular motor function in ageing, virtual reality and the development of myopia, accommodative dysfunction in amblyopia and dyslexia; eye movements in premature and term infants, and in patients with low vision and dyslexia.
A substantial increase in the number of publications has been achieved by this group while maintaining external funding and numbers of PhD students at significant levels. The group has recently benefited from the award of a £32,000 PhD studentship which is not reported in Table 3. Also unreported in the research students above is Dr Weir, an ophthalmologist, who carried out work at Glasgow Caledonian University on eye movements in amblyopia for submission for an MD thesis at Glasgow University.
Visual Psychophysics (research group D)
Senior Investigators: Dr Simpson; Dr V Manahilov
Current Associates: Dr Orbach; Dr Walsh; Prof Doughty; Dr Gray;J Ross
Publications: 20 peer-reviewed publications
Postgraduates: Total enrolment: 10; 5 at census date. 4 PhDs awarded during RAE period
External finance £1,900 (RAE reported), £6,200 other income
Primary topics: Motion perception; pattern recognition; image processing; visual functions and testing in degenerative eye diseases. Assessment of clinical instrumentation in eye disease and the developing visual system. Impact of optical correction on visual function and quality of life
There has been a major change in direction in the visual psychophysics area in this reporting period. The Department wishes to integrate its work on visual development (group B above) and to develop methodologies in spatial vision for the assessment of visual function in ocular disease. This refocus, with its practical clinical emphasis has been strengthened with the appointment of two new senior members of staff (Drs Simpson and Manahilov) who have overseen this change and attracted recent funding of £55,000 from EPSRC and £80,000 from the BBSRC (not reported on RA4).
Research Culture
New and junior staff are supported in their research development by a policy in which senior staff act as mentors. This strategy includes a phased introduction to postgraduate supervision with the mentor as role model and then as co-supervisor and allows junior staff to complete their understanding of the research process including the design and supervision of research and the writing of papers and grant submissions. The policy’s success has been shown by the number of young researchers who have gone on to more senior positions at GCU and other universities and by a number of recent successes in obtaining grants which are not fully reported in RA4 (c.£120,000 from Chief Scientists Office Scottish Executive, to Dr McCulloch; c.£80,000 from BBSRC to Drs Simpson and Manahilov; £55,000 from EPSRC to Dr. Simpson, c.£32,000 from Carnegie Trust to Dr Gray.)
The strategy outlined above has been extremely successful in developing researchers of high calibre, some of whom were not research active when they were recruited. These staff all became research active whilst in the Department, their achievements allowing them to take appointments at other institutions during the period of this RAE, (Dr Simmons to the University of Glasgow; Dr Saunders to the University of Ulster, Dr Woods to the Schepens Eye Institute of Harvard Medical School, Dr Knox to the University of Liverpool). While these staff cannot be included in this RAE return, they developed their current research profile substantially during their time in Vision Sciences at GCU. The effect of these departures upon Departmental research has been minimised by the research group structure and a number of new key appointments. Further staff have been promoted to senior positions within this institution, at least in part because of their current research output, (Dr McCulloch, Dr Walsh, and Dr Gray to senior lecturer).
Collaboration with researchers at other institutions, both nationally and internationally, is a central feature of Departmental research strategy. A fund (£9,000 per annum) is available to support collaborative research by our staff at other institutions and to support visiting fellowships for collaborators with the Department. Access to this fund is competitive and is based on published research output. The strong collaborative links with Yorkhill NHS Trust have resulted in two, three-year funded projects to study the impact of prematurity and of maternal lipid nutrition on visual development. Further NHS collaborations aimed at improving the quality of life through enhanced visual function include amelioration of reading disability in low vision patients and improved management for corneal dessication in patients with Sjögren’s Syndrome. The Department has also had considerable success in developing both contractual research and consulting activities with industry; with support totalling £98,255 in this Exercise period. The development of research partnerships with pharmaceutical and contact lens industries have funded a range of projects on available and future products. The Department has developed new techniques for use in research in optometry and clinical medicine. For example, the Department has supported the development of a new non-contact corneal aesthesiometer to assess sensory nerve function on the anterior ocular surface. The instrument has been adopted as the standard research tool for studies by other major eye research centres in the UK, Canada and New Zealand.
Management of research
Departmental management of research is devolved from two University Committees: the Research Committee (policy and fiscal control) and the Research Degrees Committee (student registration and progression). The Department has formed two committees to ensure effective local promotion and monitoring of research; these are the Departmental Research and Ethics Committees. The activities of the Departmental Research Committee include recruitment, support and review of postgraduate students. The Departmental Ethics Committee oversees the ethical implications of all projects within the Department and where appropriate, refers projects to the Faculty or University Ethics Committees. An annual research report that monitors activities of all postgraduate students, research associates and staff is published and distributed both internally and externally, and is available on the Departmental web site.
A transparent framework for time management (Staff Workload Model) is employed to ensure each academic member of staff has a balanced load with sufficient time for research, postgraduate supervision and grant writing. This model places research centrally within departmental activities and is applied to all staff. Those who are not research active are integral to the research environment by carrying greater loads in administration and teaching.
Research Infrastructure
Research in the School underpins the undergraduate and postgraduate programmes in Biomedical Sciences, Applied Biosciences, Nutrition, Dietetics and Food Science. It also supports the School's contribution to undergraduate programmes for seven PAMS across other units in the Faculty of Health. This breadth in the School's contribution to taught programmes has brought together researchers with varied expertise and this in turn has allowed natural core themes to be forged into cohesive research groupings as presented in section 2.2. Our strategy over the next five years is to promote and develop these research groupings with the aim of consolidating the position of SBBS as a major research centre within the United Kingdom.
2. Research Structure and Environment
2.1. Management
Since the 1996 RAE, all research activities, including food science and nutrition, have been brought together into refurbished laboratories that are integrated with the teaching facilities in one building. Research is managed by a research governance group of professors and readers (chaired by the Head of the School). The University returns 95% of the RAE income (circa £650k since 1996) and 70% of overhead costs on grants to earners. The School has used the returned RAE money primarily to consolidate the postgraduate school by giving it a "critical mass" of students (see 2.5). Bids from staff for studentships (20 awarded) were reviewed by a panel of senior researchers. The RAE money has also supported research technicians and provided teaching relief for researchers and pump-priming funding for promising projects.
The University has a campus-wide Research and Commercialisation Committee formed from senior university managers and representatives from research active departments. The committee monitors research and communicates to the University's Executive Committee and to other stakeholder bodies (e.g. SHEFC). There is also a University Research Degrees Committee which monitors and oversees the supervision, resourcing and training of postgraduate research students.
The research themes in the 1996 RAE submission have been brought together into natural research groups of Molecular Biomedicine, Physiology and Pharmacology, and Food Science and Microbiology. Each research group has its own dedicated research facility and the number in each provides a cohort of researchers of shared interests. This in turn leads to efficient day-to-day management of the research facilities and funds as well as providing a forum for individual researchers to present new findings, novel ideas and major developments in allied research fields. The separate groups are brought together on a regular basis through a School Research Committee open to all research-active staff. The committee examines the research enterprise as a whole with an emphasis on team building across disciplines.
2.2. Research Groups
2.2.1. Research Group 1:- Molecular Biomedicine
Principal Investigators
1. Dr C. Bartholomew; Transcriptional factors in leukaemia progression
2. Dr J. Conner; Viral infections that affect the nervous system
3. Professor J. Craft; Mechanisms of chemically-induced carcinogenesis
4. Professor M. Finbow; Cell-cell communication, papillomaviral transformation and proton pumps
5. Dr A Kilbey; Megakaryocyte differentiation in leukemia
6. Dr A.Pierotti; Processing of neuro- and testicular peptides
7. Dr C. Woodall; Persistent viral infection in the CNS; development of adenoviral based delivery vectors
Activity of group
The theme that underpins the activities of this research group is the molecular basis of disease. The foundation in cancer coming from Professor Craft (and Dr R. Fulton see RA6d) has been built upon by two senior appointments, Dr Bartholomew to a readership and Professor Finbow to a research chair, both previously at the Beatson Institute for Cancer Research. These two researchers also have interests in virology that overlap with Dr Conner and this area has been further strengthened by the appointment of Dr Woodall.
Dr Bartholomew (funded by CRC, LRF & AICR; £340k) brings a research fellow, Dr A. Kilbey, (Kay Kendall Leukemia Fund) and together these two researchers are analysing the mechanism of action of oncogenes in leukaemia, in particular transcriptional factors that act as positive regulators or repressors of gene expression. This research forms a major theme of their future plans and integrates with an extensive network of related research in other local universities and research institutes. Dr Batholomew's research has attracted collaborations with J Ihle (Memphis,, USA) and M Mucenski (Cincinatti, USA). He has also initiated collaborations with J Frampton (Oxford), M Crossley (Sydney, Australia) and J.-P Brouillet (Montpellier, France).
Dr Pierotti (funded by Wellcome Trust and Sir Jules Thorn Trust; £108k) also has interests in transcriptional regulation investigating the expression of metalloproteinases. His interest in protein processing and molecular endocrinology has initiated collaboration with Drs Corbett and MacDonald (research group 2) as well as J Roberts and M Glucksmann (New York, USA) and C Pineau and B Gou (Rennes, France). Professor Craft (funded by MAFF, NERC & Department of the Environment, Transport and Regions; £560k) continued his work in chemical carcinogenesis and opened new areas investigating tumour clonality (J Going, Glasgow) and oncogenes in human and teleosts (collaboration with J Chipman, Birmingham). His expertise in molecular biology has made a major contribution to the success of a UK-wide, environmental toxicology consortium (P Matthiessen, CEH Windermere; RM Stagg, Aberdeen; A Scott, Weymouth) investigating feminization of fish populations.
Professor Finbow was appointed to bridge many different research aspects across the School. His interests in tumour progression (funded by CRC; £1.4 million), particularly by papillomaviruses, overlap with those mentioned above. Additionally, he has an extensive background in membrane protein structure and transport (funded by BBSRC; £130k) as well as cell-cell communication, all of which provides a point of interaction with many of the physiology and pharmacology research group. His expertise in membrane biochemistry has been recognised, becoming recently a contractor of an EU Framework V Programme alongside J Findlay (Leeds) and D Marsh (Gottingen, Germany). Professor Finbow's work on papillomaviruses also resulted in collaborations with A Alonso (DKFZ, Heidelberg) and S Campo (Glasgow) and his work on gap junctions led to a collaboration with S John (UCLA, USA).
Dr Conner (funded by the Wellcome Trust ;£180k) has an acknowledged expertise in the Herpes virus field which has resulted in collaborations with B Clements (Glasgow), H Willison (Glasgow) and J Plomb (Leiden, Holland). He is currently investigating signal transduction pathways disturbed by various viral proteins. Dr Conner's work on recombinant antibodies as novel therapeutic agents has attracted commercial links (Viragen; £50k). The molecular virology work has been strengthened by the appointment of Dr Woodall (funded by Motor Neurone Disease Association; £65k) who has a long term research interest on enteroviral infection in neuronal tissue. He was part of an EU Framework IV team (including Universities of Torino, Pisa, Zargosa and Edinburgh and Immogenetics of Belgium) investigating lentivirus in sheep, as well as a European collaboration on enteroviral infection (which includes B Lina, Lyon, France). Dr Woodall has also been investigating adenoviral delivery systems to combat pulmonary emphysema.
2.2.2. Research Group 2- Physiology and Pharmacology
Principal Investigators
1. Dr D. Bovell; Physiology of human epithelial cells in sweat glands and colonic epithelia
2. Dr A. Corbett; Neuropeptides in health and disease
3. Dr C. Hillier; Vascular physiology in health and disease
4. Dr A MacDonald; Mechanisms of autonomic regulation, pharmacology of adrenoceptors
5. Dr J. Nally; Role of spasmogens in asthma
6. Dr A Shaw; Regulation of pulmonary vascular resistance
7. Dr I Wilkie; Comparative biology of connective tissue
Activity of Group
Physiology and Pharmacology research forms a cohesive unit within the biomedical research portfolio and there are several related research activities, a major one being the physiology of smooth muscle (e.g. blood vessels, lung bronchioles, intestine) in health and disease.
The work on vascular physiology has been greatly strengthened by the appointment of Dr C. Hillier (funded by Royal College of Obstetrics and Gynaecology, British Heart Foundation, Wellcome Trust, Bristol Myers Squibb; £489k). His research has been to examine the physiology of human resistance arteries in a variety of diseased and clinical states, particularly pregnancy, peripheral vascular disease and heart failure. This has led to contract research opportunities and the development of novel medical devices and tools for drug discovery both with potential patent and spin-off opportunities- Vascan BioTech- (see 2.6) and resulted in the Logie Baird West of Scotland regional award in 2000. Dr Hillier had extensive clinical collaborations in Glasgow and elsewhere including H Thurston (Leicester) and C Gonzalez (Madrid, Spain). His high productivity has been demonstrated by the acceptance of 10 journal articles in early 2001.
A main interest of Dr MacDonald is in the pharmacology and physiology of adrenoceptors, particularly in the properties and physiological roles of atypical
b-adrenoceptors in gastrointestinal and vascular smooth muscle. Part of this work is in collaboration with Dr Pierotti and R Summers (Monash, Australia) to examine the expression of receptor sub-types using molecular biological techniques. Dr MacDonald also collaborates with Dr Hillier examining the pharmacology of alpha-adrenoceptors in human resistance arteries, particularly with reference to chronic ischaemia.
Dr Shaw is currently examining pharmacological regulation of blood flow in the pulmonary vasculature, particularly identifying the receptor sub-types for 5-hydroxtryptamime which is also of interest to Dr MacDonald and has clinical implications in pulmonary hypertension. Dr Wilkie is collaborating with Dr Shaw in the study of the structure of a musculo-elastic valve at the origin of pulmonary supernumerary arteries. This uses Dr Wilkie's EM expertise and knowledge of connective tissue. Dr Wilkie has continued his comparative studies on mechanically adaptable connective tissues and on tissue detachment mechanisms which has resulted in annual collaborative visits to the laboratories of M Candia Carnevelia and F Bonasaro (Milan, Italy) and G Bavestrello and C Cerrano (Ancona, Italy). It might be considered appropriate to draw the echinoderm connective tissue aspect of Dr Wilkie's work to the attention of the panel for UOA14.
The pharmacology of smooth muscle in health and disease continued as the major research focus of Drs Corbett and Dr Nally. Dr Corbett has been examining the activity of opioid peptides and other neuropeptides in the regulation of smooth muscle activity in the intestinal tract, in particular how this changes in inflammatory diseased states. This has led to an examination of gene expression in the inflammatory state with Drs Conner & Pierotti as well as collaborations with E Weihe (Marburg, Germany), A McKnight (Pfizer, UK) and G Murray (Aberdeen, UK). Dr Nally's research (funded by National Asthma Campaign £105.5k) has been investigating the pharmacology of broncho-constriction and how this changes in asthma. Investigation of the long-term structural changes has led to a project (funded by Tenovus, Scotland, £19k) examining the effect of glycosaminoglycans on remodelling of airways and the consequential effect on protease activity. In addition, her work has been extended to characterise the intracellular pathways involved in broncho-constriction and the role of protein kinases and potassium channel activity.
The activity of transporting epithelia is a main focus of Dr Bovell (funded by Unilever plc, £210k). This work entails a detailed examination of human eccrine and apocrine sweat glands in health and disease and Dr Bovell has had a number collaborations on this project which include WK Ko (Hong Kong, China), H Elder (Glasgow) and E Roussa (Homburg-Saar, Germany). The research into the cellular physiology of normal sweat glands resulted in industrial sponsorship and the identification of an important proton pump. The expertise of Dr Bovell has led to a collaborations with Dr Corbett to examine the effects that inflammatory bowel disease has on the epithelium of human colon.
2.2.3. Research Group 3- Food Science and Microbiology
Activity of group
Carbohydrate research is also the interest of Dr Buchanan who investigates the mechanism of plant cell wall degradation by intestinal microbial flora in collaboration with W Mitchell (Heriot-Watt, Edinburgh). This work links with the research of Drs Aidoo and Logan (funded by a French diagnostic company and British Council; £60k), both of whom have been examining methods to detect and identify microbiological contaminants and pathogens in various food, dairy products and clinical specimens. In addition, Dr Logan's expertise in microbial flora has been extended to examining bacterial disinfection of contact lenses, providing collaboration across the Faculty of Health. He also has a recognised reputation in bacterial taxonomy which has led to European collaborations with P De Vos (Gent, Belgium) and M Heyndrickx (Belgium) and to joining an Italian team on an Antarctic survey to identify novel bacterial species (in collaboration with D Wynn-Davis of the British Antarctic Survey). It might be considered appropriate to draw the bacillus taxonomy aspect of Dr Logan's work to the attention of the panel for UOA14.
2.3. Research Facilities
Technical backup is continuously available for routine aspects of laboratory supplies and maintenance (e.g. medium preparation, disposal of contaminated waste, etc). In addition to the four full time research technicians (see section 3), many technicians support researchers outside of teaching semesters.
2.4. Research Climate
There is a vibrant biomedical research community in the West of Scotland in which researchers from the School are active members, with each having at least one collaborative project with other scientists in Glasgow or Strathclyde Universities and/or research active hospital departments.
2.5 Research Post-Graduate School
A senior member of the School Research Governance Group carries out the supervision and day-to-day running of the graduate school. Selected graduate students (2.1 B.Sc. Hons) are stipended at current research council rates and initially registered for an M.Phil. They are assigned a supervisor and a second supervisor, one of whom must have a track record of PhD supervision. There are University and School training programmes at the start of first year and throughout the academic years there are a variety of courses on IT and related topics run by the University. In addition, graduate students have the opportunity to be (paid) laboratory demonstrators and lead tutorials (up to 6 hours per week). Teaching duties are supported by a training programme. Students present their work orally at the end of first year to the whole School and also throughout the three years to their respective research groups. They transfer from M.Phil. to Ph.D. 9 to 15 months after registration. At the end of second year students write a report of progress and proposed work and this forms the basis for a mock-viva examination. Students are expected to attend all research seminars within the School and encouraged to attend the extensive research seminar programme throughout the Glasgow area. Of the 20 full time students who graduated over the RAE period, 3 have become university lecturers, 8 are in academic research, 7 are in industrial research and 1 is in teacher training (and 1 unknown).
Principal Investigators
1. Dr K Aidoo; Fungal contamination, fungal and bacterial toxins and fermentation of foods
2. Dr C. Buchanan; Microbial digestion of plant cell walls.
3. Dr N. Logan; Identification of food-borne bacterial contaminants
4. Dr R Tester; Biosynthesis, structure and properties of plant carbohydrates
The research of the food science group covers the structure and function of carbohydrates, and food and clinical microbiology. Dr Tester (funded principally by MAFF and the EU; £471k) has continued his research on the biosynthesis, structure and property of plant carbohydrates and collaborations with H Davies and R Ellis (SCRI, Dundee) and with A Schulman (Helsinki, Finland). These studies have led to the development of a specialist drug delivery company- Glycologic (see 2.6)- which uses novel carbohydrate based coatings to target drug release. Dr Aidoo (funded by the Scottish Office; £83k) has been examining ethnic foods retailed in the West of Scotland for mycotoxins and food borne pathogens. Drs Aidoo and Tester have developed a food quality monitoring system and the possibility of a startup company- Temp-tell- is being explored. This venture won the regional Logie Baird prize and came second in Scotland.
Since 1996, all research has been brought together into one site increasing dedicated research space by 64% over this RAE period. Each research group has open plan laboratories which together gives a total research area of 719 m
A major emphasis in developing a fertile research climate is team building, within and across research groups as well as collegiate groups (i.e. research active staff, postdoctoral fellows and postgraduate students). This is achieved in a number of ways.
1. There is a School Research Committee comprising all active research staff that oversees much of the management and resourcing of research.
2. There is an external research seminar programme that crosses the research group boundaries and invited speakers are encouraged to embrace this multi-disciplinary approach.
3. There is a new inter-research group initiative for regular multidisciplinary internal presentations.
4. Each research group has its own internal regular meeting for individual presentations. Such meetings provide a critical forum for analysing research progress and novel projects of individuals (research staff, postdoctoral research fellows and research students). It also allows a forum to discuss day-to-day issues of running research facilities including best uses of resources and safety matters.
5. There are communal office spaces and resource centres for postgraduate students and postdoctoral fellows.
6. Provision of small grants from a staff development fund to provide support for staff to attend national and international conferences and pump priming projects.
Over the period of assessment, there have been a total of 45 new research studentships. Of these, 12 have been externally funded, 6 funded from the University, 7 funded from School funds and 19 (plus 1 M.Phil.) funded by RAE money returned to the School. Thus, over the RAE period, the School has been able to develop a graduate school of 20-30 students from 1997 onwards, so providing a collegiate group. All new research appointed staff have had an assigned studentship and thereafter studentships are assigned by internal peer review. Research active staff applying for studentships are encouraged to submit joint applications with other members of staff.
2.6 Commercialisation
These three enterprises are presently located in SBBS and space is currently being considered to re-locate them in purpose built facilities. In addition, the laboratories of K. Aidoo and R. Tester carry out general contract analysis of food/non-food samples for the food and pharmaceutical industry and they are presently applying for recognition by United Kingdom Accreditation Services.
2.7 Self-Assessment
In this RAE, 17 category A staff are presented, the same number as in the 1996 RAE. However, the selection criterion for inclusion has been increased (i.e. minimum of four journal articles, except for JAC, see RA6b). The present RAE period has shown that the research output has been sustained by staff appointed in the 92-96 RAE period and, importantly, has attracted substantial outside funding and senior level appointments (CB and MF). Of the seven staff in the 1996 RAE submission not included in this RAE, three have left, three are research active but have not met the inclusion criterion, and one is the head of the School who due to increased administration has withdrawn from active research. Of particular note is the high number of submitted staff who remain active bench scientists.
3. Staffing Policy
All new appointments have been given the opportunity, resources and climate to pursue their research by having light teaching loads, assigned studentships and startup funds (totalling £55k) providing for specialised equipment not already on site and some consumables. There is one Category C staff member, Dr A Kilbey, who has a personal fellowship and her research is linked closely to that of Dr C. Bartholomew. She and other postdoctoral fellows are given the opportunity for CPD through postgraduate certificates in Tertiary Level Teaching Methods and other courses offered across the university. They are also encouraged to co-supervise honours and postgraduate students.
Existing research active staff have been given lighter teaching loads by deployment of senior staff to administrative roles and appointment of dedicated teaching staff (4 since 1996). The funding provided by RAE together with financial support from the University, has allowed the deployment of four full time technicians to highly active research staff.
Several staff members in the three research groups have commercial contacts and 9 patent applications have been made. Formal links have been made with Scottish Enterprise and regional enterprise agencies and these have led to the establishment of three startup support and spin-out ventures located within the School. These are:
· Temp-tell- (R. Tester & K. Aidoo; £44k funded by business angel and private individuals) a joint university/industry startup venture to develop time temperature indicators for food and non-food products. This development came second in the John Logie Baird contest for SMEs in Scotland in 1999 and a startup company is currently under consideration.
· Glycologic- (R. Tester & J. Karkalas; promised funding of £600k from private investors and investment funds) a University based spin out venture for the development of drug delivery systems using carbohydrate carriers.
· Vascan BioTech (C. Hillier; received Jan 2001 proof-of-concept funding of £121.5k from Scottish Enterprise) a University based spin-out venture for the development of the technology to examine pressure assisted gene therapy into blood vessels.
Since the 1992 RAE, research in SBBS has undergone a major expansion. From 7 researchers in the 1992 RAE, there are now 23 category A staff who have had at least one journal article during the present RAE period. This has been matched by successive increases in income (from £97k in 96/67 to £676k in 99/00, see RA4), much coming from the highly competitive charity sector. The earned income has resulted during this RAE period in the appointment of 14 postdoctoral fellows in the School (9 still present at the census date) who have provided an important body of expertise unavailable in early 1990s. The research enterprise has thus established the School as a centre for biomedical research.
Continuing from the 1992 policy, vacancies created by retirements or departures have been filled with active researchers selected on the basis of academic performance and area of research. Five have been appointed (CB, CJB, MF, CW, & CH) since 1996 to complement and strengthen research groups of molecular biomedicine (CB, MF, CW), physiology and pharmacology (CH) and food science and microbiology (CJB). To overarch all the research activities within the expanding research portfolio, one of these positions was at a professorial level (MF), the appointment being made on the basis of a broad background in research in biomedicine and the life sciences and to promote and co-ordinate research across the School. This appointment, together with earlier appointments, provides each research group with scientists of international standing.
Biomedicine Research Group (BRG)
(http://www.lifesciences.napier.ac.uk/research/Biomedicine/bimedres.htm)General
In the census period for RAE2001 the BRG has produced more than 80 peer-reviewed papers, and 30 book chapters and Proceedings papers; 12 PhD students have graduated and significant funding has been secured in research funding from various bodies. Major grants secured, either solely or collaboratively with the ELEGI research group, have included funding from MRC, 5th European Framework, Colt Foundation, DETR and British Lung Foundation.
In addition to the staff listed as research active in RA1, Drs L. Proudfoot, J. MacCallum, P.H. Beswick and C.G. Mitchell supervise PhD students, make a significant contribution to research and have together published about 20 peer-reviewed papers since RAE 1996. However, the majority of their time is currently taken up with teaching and administration, and for this reason they are not named in RA1. However, their activities are essential to the BRG, for example, in ensuring that teaching is delivered in a well-organised fashion, and in a research-informed environment.
Operation of the group.
Professor Donaldson and Dr Keith Guy (Depute Director) both have more than 20 years experience of research. They have extensive experience of supervision of postgraduate students. Dr Guy has responsibility for day to day running of the BRG Laboratory. Professor Donaldson and Dr Guy have management meetings every few weeks to discuss the direction of the group and progress of research and of students. The members of the research group meet for seminars and discussions every 2 weeks throughout the year and every academic member of staff meets with his or her PhD students at least every 1-2 weeks. The two experienced postdoctoral scientists are an additional source of help and advice for students.
Staffing.
The University has given us full support to employ academic researchers whose expertise complements and extends that of the group. Of 3 new appointments since RAE1996, Dr Guy (now a Reader) joined the BRG when appointed to a Senior Lectureship at Napier University in 1997, having previously worked for 5 years in a permanent position as a lecturer in the 5*-rated Department of Immunology at the University of Strathclyde. Dr Stone, now a lecturer (appointed 1999) was initially employed as a post-doctoral scientist on a Colt grant. Dr Clouter (appointed 1997) previously worked as a scientist in the prestigious MRC Toxicology Unit, Leicester, on particle toxicology.
Environment.
The objective of the NRI is to advance significantly our understanding of both the neurophysiology and neuropsychology of health and disease. Research activity spans four research groups: Ophthalmic and Physiological Optics, Clinical Neurophysiology, Psychophysics and Psychology. The first three groups formed the basis of the RAE 1996 submission (awarded 4A). The number of HEFCE-funded staff in the 2001 submission has doubled (to 24, including A* category) and represents a critical mass and resource base which has generated opportunities to investigate sensory systems across a range of disciplines. The outcome has been significant research achievements since 1996:
RESEARCH PUBLICATIONS AND INCOME:
The achievements summarised above demonstrate fulfilment of the research plans submitted in RAE 1996 and have established the NRI as a distinctive international focus for research in neurosciences allied to medicine.
RESEARCH GROUPS
The essence of the NRI’s strategy for achieving excellence is to integrate the wide range of expertise and resources within the four research groups to create composite and innovative solutions to research issues. In addition, an important feature of the NRI’s strategic approach is to develop investigative procedures that have wide application in optometry and neurosciences. Of special note in this regard are, for example, the unique opportunities afforded by the Wellcome Trust Laboratory for MEG Studies (Clinical Neurophysiology research group); the special cognitive and psychophysical analysis techniques derived by the Psychophysics and Psychology research groups; and the new methods for remote continuous and simultaneous measures of oculomotor function recently developed by the Ophthalmic and Physiological Optics research group. The profile of activity for each area demonstrates, therefore, that certain ocular diseases and sensory and cognitive dysfunctions figure within and between different research groups e.g. glaucoma, macular disease, amblyopia, myopia, epilepsy, brain lesions, dyslexia, apraxias, agnosias. A selection of future research work is outlined below. Virtually all of the plans put forward in RAE 1996 have been successfully completed (annotated by [RAE 96] in following text).
OPHTHALMIC AND PHYSIOLOGICAL OPTICS
MEMBERSHIP: Armstrong; Dunne; Fowler; Gilmartin (convener); Hosking; Petre (0.5); Siderov (A*out); Wild (A*out); Wolffsohn.
OBJECTIVE: To understand further the development, use, preservation and restoration of vision by research on clinical and applied matters relevant to optometry and ophthalmology.
OPERATION: The group has a complete suite of individual, self-contained, laboratories designed for clinical investigations
PRIME ACTIVITIES
CLINICAL NEUROPHYSIOLOGY
MEMBERSHIP: Harding (Director, NRI), Anderson (0.5, convener), Furlong, Holliday, Fylan (0.5), Singh (A* in).
OBJECTIVE: To develop a detailed understanding of the functional neuroanatomy of cognitive and sensory processes and to provide a clinical evaluation of cortical changes in disease.
OPERATION: The group has extensive facilities for conducting both clinical and basic research on the human brain using electroencephalography (EEG), magneto-encephalography (MEG) and neuropsychology. These include a 151-channel, whole-head MEG system, EEG brain mapping systems, ambulatory monitors and a multifocal electroretinogram (VERIS) system, plus recording suites to measure both spontaneous and event-related (visual, auditory and somatosensory) activity. The multi-channel MEG system is the only one of its kind in the UK and was established following a £1.5M Wellcome award (Jan. 1999) to the Clinical Neurophysiology group in recognition of its international status in the area. The MEG laboratory includes computing facilities (eight UNIX work stations) devoted to data analysis and new analysis techniques for human neuroimaging. The group has access to Functional Magnetic Resonance Imaging (fMRI) facilities at Liverpool and Nottingham Universities.
PRIME ACTIVITIES
PSYCHOPHYSICS
MEMBERSHIP: Juttner (convener); Anderson (0.5); Petre (0.5); Meese; Waugh (A*out).
OBJECTIVE: To understand the operating principles and computational demands of human vision.
OPERATION: The group has three large laboratory suites, including the full range of computer facilities required by a modern psychophysics laboratory (e.g. CRS VSG2/3 & 2/5 boards, stimulus display monitors, Sun workstations) and associated instrumentation such as photometric and spectroradiometric devices.
PRIME ACTIVITIES
PSYCHOLOGY
MEMBERSHIP:Rippon (convener), Davies, Forde, Fylan (0.5), Green, Grunfeld, Westerman (A* out).
OBJECTIVE: To understand further the developmental and applied aspects of cognitive neuroscience, human performance and health psychology.
OPERATION: The group has four laboratories purpose built for assessments of perceptual and sensory systems, developmental dyslexia, human performance, as well as full access to the MEG/EEG imaging facilities. The laboratories contain an advanced driving simulator, virtual reality systems and specialised multiway video sound and camera observer systems for remote assessment of task behaviour.
PRIME ACTIVITIES
EFFECT OF A* (OUT), B AND C CATEGORY STAFF ON RESEARCH ENVIRONMENT
Seven of the 10 members of staff comprising categories A* (out) and B have taken more senior positions in other HEFCE Institutions (four to Professor/Reader). The ethos of co-operative work within the NRI has, however, meant that the majority of staff that have left continue to contribute to current projects within the NRI. The expertise of Dr Smith in the history and philosophy of neuroscience and the biology of sensory systems provides valuable scholastic support for the whole of the NRI.
1.2 Management of Research Research in the School of Life Sciences is co-ordinated via the School’s Research Committee; this includes Departmental representatives, the School’s Research Student Co-ordinator, Research Director and Dean. The Research Committee reports to the School Board and Management Committee and its Chair, the School Research Director (Prof Randall), is also on the University Research Strategy Committee linking Life Sciences research to University policy. Within this framework Biomedical Sciences Research is managed by the Research Steering Group, with members from the 3 Research Groups: Skin and Hair Follicle Biology; Cancer Research; Physiological and Pathological Mechanisms. The Research Steering Group meets monthly to determine future priorities, promote an active research culture and monitor achievements; intergroup collaboration is actively encouraged. Members also hold regular meetings with research staff, student and technical representatives (Research Staff and Student Liaison Committee). Research activities and plans are also reviewed by the Department’s Advisory Board, the CRC Scientific Committee and the YCR Scientific Advisory Committee involving scientists from academia, research institutions and industry; CRC and YCR reviews include site visits involving overseas scientists.
1.3 Research Culture The Research Steering Group actively promotes a strong research culture; its Chair, the Research Co-ordinator, or the School Research Director are involved in recruitment to all academic posts and a strong, relevant research record is essential. Research is also an important element in the Career Development Plans of new staff and in promotions. Activity is regularly monitored. Staff must report their publications, published annually by the University, and provide copies for display and binding for the archive. They also complete a proforma annually detailing their grant applications, conference invitations and external responsibilities. Research activity is stimulated by fortnightly Postgraduate Research Seminars, Biomedical Sciences Society Seminars and monthly Research Forums. Novel research from the various multidisciplinary fields are presented in these long-standing schemes, promoting inter-Group collaboration. The open-ended, evening Forums provide opportunities for informal discussions of novel ideas, methods, results etc. in a more social atmosphere. These measures have developed a vibrant, research-based atmosphere and ensured that all academic staff are committed to research (see RA6c).
1.4 Research Student Training and Support Students attend the training programmes run by the University Graduate School; this has a dedicated complex giving research student education a high profile focus and providing excellent support facilities. Courses cover many areas (e.g. literature searching, health and safety, thesis preparation, viva techniques); students may also join Staff Development programmes. They are required to attend our Seminars and Forums and to present their research; feedback is given by the Research Steering Group and supervisors. Training in written and oral communication is offered by the University and supervisors provide individual support; specific Forum sessions on methodology are also designed primarily for students. They are encouraged to present their research at national and international conferences and finance is usually made available. Student progress is monitored by the Research Steering Group, the School Research Student Co-ordinators Sub-Committee and the Graduate School. After initial MPhil registration, students submit a written report and undergo viva voce examination prior to PhD registration. These measures and our research infrastructure (1.5) provide a high quality training.
1.5 Research Infrastructure This has improved significantly since ‘96. The containment level 2 laboratories have expanded in size and in significant equipment e.g. confocal microscope, FACS analyser, laser Raman spectroscope, mass spectrometer. Three new laboratories (skin x2, vascular research), with 3 more human cell culture facilities, were established in ‘98/9 due to success in the HEFCE Refurbishment of Research Laboratories Initiative (£356K). The YCR Laboratory of Drug Design was built in ‘99/00 (£310K) and further cancer space in ‘00/1 (CRC £400K; University £550K) enabling the molecular biology, biochemistry and chemistry laboratories for anticancer drug design and assessment. The University is also building a new central analytical suite, initially for mass spectrometry, using £395K from Capital Allocations for Research Infrastructure funds. More office space for academics, research staff and students and Seminar Rooms have also led to a higher quality environment. All academic individual offices, research staff and student areas have good computer facilities with access to the University network and internet, supported by our Computer Officer, enabling at-desk literature searching and facilitating our many external collaborations.
1.6 Collaborative/Interdisciplinary Research Collaboration is strongly encouraged by: our internal programmes; the School Research Committee e.g. organising annual Poster Days for all School staff and research students to enable them to see research and techniques in use elsewhere; financially supporting staff to attend international conferences and to follow up contacts resulting from their publications; and regularly providing facilities and, if necessary, consumables for visiting researchers. This has produced joint projects and publications and many long-term visiting international scientists supported by various sources including research charities (e.g. Leverhulme and Wellcome Trusts) and industry (e.g. Pharmacia-Upjohn).
1.7 Research Users We have close relationships with industry and other research users. Prof Schallreuter’s Chair is endowed by Stiefel Laboratories and about a third of our funding is industrial as we research areas close to treatment development. This relevance is seen by the 10 patents filed, 2 BBSRC Case Studentships and a BBSRC ROPA award. Seven staff have consulted for international companies and 2 are Honorary NHS Consultants in Oncology. Research has also been brought directly to patients. Prof Schallreuter hosted the 1st Vitiligo Patient Workshop here and also published a book for patients, "Damned White Spots", to help them understand their disease.
Overall, the well-established research structures and high quality environment produce a high profile for research and promote an active and vital research culture.
2. RESEARCH GROUPS
Research is primarily organised into 3 Groups, but there is extensive inter-group collaboration shown by many staff belonging to more than one Group. Research in all areas is strengthened by the multi-disciplinary nature of our staff with expertise and experience ranging from clinical medicine to chemistry; there is significant cross-fertilisation of ideas and techniques.
2.1 Skin and Hair Follicle Biology
Prof TG Baker, Prof MLG Gardner, Dr AM Graham, Prof VA Randall, Prof KU Schallreuter, Dr AM Snelling, Prof AJ Thody, Prof JM Wood, Dr MJ Thornton, Dr DJ Tobin.
This Group investigates several areas of cutaneous function in health and disease including: skin and hair pigmentation; endocrine regulation of melanocytes and hair follicles; photobiology and antioxidant mechanisms in skin; non-invasive skin imaging; microbial and hormonal aspects of acne; the bioarcheology of skin and hair. It has expanded since 1.1.96, recruiting Prof Thody and Drs Tobin, Thornton and Snelling from well-known cutaneous research departments. With Prof Thody’s appointment, 3 of the 5 Stiefel International Pigment Cell Consortium are here (from Newcastle, Germany and USA); Prof Schallreuter holds the endowed Herbert A Stiefel Chair of Clinical and Experimental Dermatology (c £4 million). The Group also benefits from close contacts with local clinicians including Bradford plastic surgeons, Mr D Sharpe OBE, (Honorary Professor and former President, British Association of Aesthetic Plastic Surgeons) and Mr M Timmons, and dermatologists, Prof W Cunliffe (Leeds), Drs S Macdonald Hull (Pontefract), and A Messenger (Sheffield).
· continuously attracting externally funded overseas scientists e.g. Dr Yukitake, Dr Magerl;
2.2 Cancer Research
Prof D Anderson, Dr JRP Arnold, Prof TG Baker, Prof MC Bibby, Dr MH Brinkworth, Prof JA Double, Prof TC Jenkins, Dr PM Loadman, Dr SM Parkin, Dr PJ Perry, Dr RM Phillips, Dr SM Picksley.
This Group has focussed for many years on the development of new anticancer agents. It has expanded dramatically to involve 12 A/A* staff (2 also in other Groups) compared to 4 in 1.1.96. Its infrastructure has also increased extensively with major investment in new laboratories, office space and state-of-the-art equipment. These developments have been supported by both external and HEFCE funds. The range of expertise has also greatly expanded to include:
2.3 Pathological and Physiological Mechanisms
Prof G Alderson, Prof TG Baker, Dr JN Fletcher, Prof MLG Gardner, Dr AM Graham, Dr DJ Harrington, Dr KM Naseem, Dr IN Okeke, Dr SM Parkin, Dr AM Snelling.
This Group concentrates on understanding the molecular basis of disease processes particularly in gastrointestinal, microbial and vascular disorders. Areas include: physiological and microbial aspects of GI tract disorders, including the pathogenicity of E.coli; probiotic strategies to protect hospital patients from infection; immune mechanisms of inflammation in reperfusion injury; the role of endothelial cells, leucocytes and platelets in vascular disease states. Although this Group was affected by the promotion of Prof Alderson to Senior University Management and the difficult personal circumstances of another member of staff (see 6b), the enthusiasm of the new appointees has infused it with new dynamism. Expertise in pathogenesis of E.coli (Dr Fletcher; Dr Okeke, Career Development Lecturer, University of Maryland, USA), antibiotic resistance (Dr Snelling), Gram positive pathogens (Dr Harrington), cell signalling (Dr Graham) and platelet biology (Dr Naseem) have increased the focus on microbiological and vascular areas. These staff also frequently contribute to other Groups.
Achievements include:
3. STAFFING POLICY
3.1 Development and Support of Staff Many mechanisms support and develop staff in their research. Workload calculations inform wider School duty allocation and research achievements and goals are important aspects of the Staff Development and Appraisal Scheme for established staff. Intellectual and practical support is provided by Group members and cross-Group/discipline exchanges via the regular programmes. Staff can bring any matters to the Research Steering Group and are regularly invited to submit equipment requests etc. Experienced staff offer individual assistance with grant preparation etc.; Postgraduate Tutors provide support with student supervision. There is an active University Staff Development Programme, e.g. Research Supervision Workshops, and the Research Office assists with funding sources, costings and contractual aspects of grant applications. Staff are encouraged to present their research at conferences; time, and usually financial support, are made available. General laboratory and computer technical support, plus some for specific small projects, are provided from HEFCE funds. Some PhD studentships are offered on a competitive basis by the University/School and consumable costs are also available.
3.3 Role of Category A*/Departure of Category A*, B Staff Our new A* staff will have a strong impact on our research; the loss of 2 staff had minimal effect (1B, 1A*). Dr Arnold, holder of 2 Wellcome Trust Senior Fellowships at Leeds University, will strongly support anti-cancer drug development with his chemical and nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) expertise. Dr Harrington, previously a Lecturer at Sunderland University, who has also held grants of about £200K e.g. Wellcome Trust New Lecturer Award, will provide leadership in microbial aspects of disease.
4. SELF ASSESSMENT
RA1 The School of Life Sciences is very active in the Biomedical Sciences area with 25.8 out of 29.4 FTE entered; the others all contribute actively (RA6c). RA0 shows that Biomedical Sciences, particularly Cancer Research, has good research support (23.5 FTE); in addition to research assistants allocated in RA1, a further 17 FTE experimental officers and technicians are employed on research contracts, 3.5 technicians on general funds and there are two Honorary Visiting International Research Fellows. Biomedical Sciences Research has grown extensively since 1.1.96 with 17 staff recruited from prestigious institutions in Britain and overseas. Recruitment at all levels from a Professor from Newcastle Medical School to young post-docs taking up their first appointment has produced a very healthy age and experience profile, extending our expertise and increasing the vibrancy of our research culture. The high research standing of many staff can be seen by 11 having attained Professorial status. Our strong research culture is also apparent in the number of academics employed on external funds i.e. full time researchers.
RA2 Staff publish actively in high quality, peer reviewed journals with an international readership. These include prestigious general journals such as Science, The Lancet or the foremost specialist journals e.g. Journal of Investigative Dermatology, British Journal of Dermatology, Oncogene, Cancer Research, British Journal of Cancer, Journal of American Chemical Society, Mutation Research, Journal of Clinical Microbiology or Infection and Immunity. The mean impact factor for the refereed papers in RA2 is 4. Three staff have included full papers published in conference proceedings due to their difficult personal circumstances (RA6b). Our papers regularly receive international attention resulting in frequent invitations to present the research at international conferences, to edit or contribute to research books etc. (RA6a).
RA3 Staff are actively engaged in developing new scientists by research student supervision. Funding comes from a range of sources, e.g. the BBSRC, Wellcome Trust Prize Studentship scheme, research charities and industry; several overseas students are also funding themselves. Our students frequently gain post-docs in international research groups e.g. Harvard and Louisana State Medical Schools, ICRF Laboratories, Oxford. Many staff have not yet had time to obtain students here, but 6 staff have supervised 9 students registered in other institutions.
RA4 We are also highly successful at attracting substantial research income (total spend over £5.75 million). This shows significant trends to increase in line with staff expansion. Research has been funded by project and programme grants from peer-reviewed, competitive sources such as the Research Councils and Research Charities, e.g. the Wellcome Trust; our cancer research has been recognised by the prestigious awards of the YCR Chair in Drug Design and a major CRC programme grant. In addition, our applied research is extensively funded by British and international industry. About a third of our funding is from overseas demonstrating the international recognition of our research.
Research Structure and Environment
Research Groups
Two mutually compatible sub-areas form the research portfolio of the Department. The Visual Neuroscience group represents a direct extension of the activities of the Clinical Visual Psychophysics group returned in the 1996 RAE. The Optics and Ageing research group reflects the common interests shared by the previous research groups Optics and Binocular Vision and Investigative Optometry. The primary activities and achievements of each research group are summarised below.
Visual Neuroscience
Academic Staff: Professor D Whitaker, Dr BT Barrett, Dr M Bloj, Dr DRT Keeble, Dr W McIlhagga, Dr D McKeefry, Dr I Pacey, Dr S Tripathy; Wellcome Trust Career Development Fellow: Dr PV McGraw.
The aim of the Visual Neuroscience group is to understand the spatial and temporal properties of human visual processing and the neural mechanisms which underpin this behaviour. While neuroscience investigations can take many forms, the Visual Neuroscience group relies upon the tools of visual psychophysics and electrophysiology in its study of human visual brain function.
The group has made a significant impact on furthering our understanding of visual processing, as evidenced by continuing support from prestigious funding bodies. Professor Whitaker has acted as sponsor throughout the period to Dr McGraw, initially as a 3-year Wellcome Trust Vision Research Training Fellow (£78K) and subsequently as the recipient of a prestigious 4-year Wellcome Trust Research Career Development Fellowship (£190K). Their work has focused on understanding the mechanisms by which the visual system encodes the relative position of objects in the visual world. They have also had considerable success in the investigation of visual illusions as a means of elucidating neural processing. An International Collaborative Grant from the Wellcome Trust (£12K) has secured a formal collaborative link between Professor Whitaker, Dr McGraw and Professor Dennis Levi from University of Houston, USA. Several reciprocal visits have been completed under the terms of the grant. Professor Dennis Levi is an Honorary Visiting Professor, and during a recent visit to Bradford he presented a Prestige Lecture to a large audience drawn from vision laboratories around the UK. Professor David Badcock (University of Western Australia) has also spent some time working in the laboratory of Professor Whitaker and Dr McGraw, investigating interactions between 1st- and 2nd-order visual processing. Collaborative research has also been funded with Professor Robert Hess (McGill University, Canada) and Professor Charles Gilbert (Neurobiology, Rockefeller University, New York) through the terms of the Wellcome Trust Career Development Fellowship. The laboratory has also hosted younger visiting researchers looking to enrich their research experience and form collaborative links with members of staff. Dr Susana Chung (Indiana, USA) obtained a Burroughs-Wellcome travel scholarship to support her visit, whilst Dr Ariella Popple (University College London) was supported by the Wellcome Trust Collaborative Grant scheme.
Dr Barrett shares an interest in the visual mechanisms of positional acuity with other members of the group, but is most well-known for his research into perceptual deficits associated with amblyopia. This work is funded in part through a Research Development grant from the Wellcome Trust (£30K) and is based upon psychophysical quantification of the visual deficits associated with abnormal visual experience early in life. Based upon this information, inferences can be made regarding neural organisation within the visual system. Dr Barrett has acted as host to separate visits from Professors Arthur Bradley and Larry Thibos (Indiana University, USA). These visits are funded via a continuing Development Grant from the Neurosciences Panel of the Wellcome Trust. Dr Anita Simmers (University College London) will benefit from spending an extended period in Dr Barrett's laboratory through the terms of a Medical Research Council Fellowship. Dr Keeble also uses psychophysical methods to shed light upon the processes involved in normal vision, and has developed a particular reputation for his work on human texture perception, funded by the EPSRC (£50K). Dr Keeble hosted the visits of Professor Fred Kingdom (McGill University, Canada) and Dr Shinýa Nishida (NTT, Japan) for collaborative research on their joint interests in texture, and continues his collaboration with Professor Robert Hess (McGill University, Canada) and Dr Eric Castet (CNRS, France) with funding from the British Council. Dr Tripathy has an outstanding record of high quality research publication through collaborative links with other internationally recognised vision laboratories. Established collaborators include Professor Horace Barlow FRS (Physiology, Cambridge), Dr Gordon Plant (Neurology, London) and Professor Patrick Cavanagh (Psychology, Harvard). His work is currently supported by the Wellcome Trust (£36K).
More recent staff appointments to the Visual Neuroscience group include Dr McIlhagga who brings with him considerable experience in visual psychophysics, computational vision, statistical analysis and image processing following postdoctoral positions in Canada and Denmark. Dr Pacey recently obtained his PhD from Aston University where he investigated the statistical and psychophysical nature of current algorithms for visual field testing. He shares an interest, and published output, with Professor Whitaker, Dr Barrett and Dr McGraw in the mechanisms of visual localisation. Dr Bloj also joins us following recent completion of her doctoral studies investigating psychophysical interactions between shape and colour perception. This work has already generated published output in the journal Nature, with other output in preparation and experimental work currently in progress in a newly refurbished laboratory. Dr McKeefry adds further expertise in colour vision to the Visual Neuroscience group and, in particular, provides the group with the opportunity to expand its investigation of neural organisation of the human brain using electrophysiological techniques within a new, purpose-built laboratory.
The Visual Neuroscience group published 63 refereed full papers in international journals within the reporting period.
Optics and Ageing
Academic Staff: Professor B Winn, Dr MJ Cox, Dr WA Douthwaite, Dr DB Elliott, Dr S Pardhan, Dr BK Pierscionek, Dr N Strang.
The aim of the Optics and Ageing group is to improve understanding of the processes involved in developmental and senescent changes of the visual system with particular emphasis on the introduction of improved optical correction or strategic modes of intervention that will impact on quality of life. Research interests encompass laboratory-based studies of ocular tissue, measures of retinal image quality and accommodation control through to clinical investigations of 'real-world' vision and mobility-orientation.
The group possesses a unique combination of research facilities in support of its efforts. Major instrumentation is available for measurement of corneal topography, ocular wavefront aberrations, dynamic and static accommodation, eye movements and mobility. Funding has been attracted from a variety of sources in support of this range of research interests.
Professor Winn and Dr Strang continue to investigate the development of refractive error with respect to the innervational properties of the ciliary muscle. The link between the development of myopia and the adaptational properties of the oculomotor system are of specific interest. Studies into the contribution of sympathetic innervation of ciliary muscle as a predisposing factor in the development of adult-onset myopia has resulted in publications in high impact journals. The work, linked to the optical quality of the human eye, has attracted external funding from EPSRC (£50K), Northern and Yorkshire Health (£45K) and the College of Optometrists (£30K). Professor Winn and Dr Strang have long standing external collaborations with Professor Gilmartin (Aston) and Professor Bradley (Indiana, USA) and have developed more recent links with Professor Atchison (Queensland, Australia).
The group also benefits from investigations of monochromatic ocular aberrations of the normal and ageing human eye using wavefront sensor apparatus and crossed-cylinder aberroscope systems. This unique instrumentation has been designed and constructed within the research group by Dr Cox. The novel analytical methods developed by Dr Cox have attracted interest from Australia, USA and Spain. Formal collaborators on the project include Professor David Atchison (Queensland, Australia) and Professor George Smith (Melbourne, Australia) through a sabbatical visit to Bradford. Dr Cox has been the recipient of a competitive QUT Fellowship which funded his three-month visit to Brisbane in 1999.
The optical and structural characteristics of the human ocular lens and cornea have been investigated during the period by Dr Pierscionek and Dr Douthwaite respectively. Dr Pierscionek, in particular, has enjoyed considerable success in attracting funding for her studies of the dynamic optical properties of the lens and its implications for loss of accommodation with increasing age (EPSRC, £116K). She is also investigating the issue of age-related cataract through the development of imaging methods for use in accurate cataract simulations (EPSRC, £158K). Collaborators include Professor Robert Weale (King's College, London) who has been a regular visitor to the Department in his capacity as Honorary Visiting Professor, and Professor Anthony Bron (Oxford).
Dr Elliott is well known for his research in the assessment of vision in cataract. This has recently involved objective measurements of 'real-world' vision such as face perception, reading speed and mobility-orientation to determine the usefulness of second-eye cataract surgery, allied to the use of quality-of-life questionnaires. Ongoing work concerns the potential benefits of cataract surgery in patients with accompanying eye disease such as age-related macular degeneration. As a lead collaborator with academic staff from the Departments of Medical Engineering and Physiotherapy, Dr Elliott is also investigating the mechanisms of balance control and obstacle avoidance in elderly patients with low vision, and is assisted by Dr Konrad Pesudovs, an Australian NHMRC research fellow. Dr Pardhan contributes to the group through her interests in distinguishing between optical and neural changes in vision with age, as well as sharing an interest with Dr Douthwaite in corneal topography.
The Optics and Ageing group published 68 refereed full papers in international journals within the reporting period.
Research Culture
Research Infrastructure
Collaborative Research
Policy-led Research
Post-doctoral activity
Development and Support of Staff
The RAE period has seen several academic staff rewarded through the internal promotion process. Specifically, Drs Barrett, Cox and Pardhan have been promoted to Senior Lecturer, Dr Elliott to Reader, Professor Whitaker firstly to Reader and then to a Chair in Vision Science, and Professor Winn to Dean of School of Life Sciences. The Department is swift to recognise and reward contributions of staff in the area of research, a policy which serves to encourage all staff in their research efforts and has enabled an excellent level of staff retention and development of a strong team spirit.
The University has an active Staff Development programme through which both new and existing staff are encouraged to broaden or refresh their research knowledge. Examples of courses include Project Management, Presentation Skills and training for Research Supervision of postgraduate students. The University Research Office assist academic staff by providing guidance in obtaining research funds from the Research Councils, European Union, Charities and other funding bodies, as well as advice on putting together research bids and on contractual matters.
The genuine commitment and enthusiasm for research held by members of staff serves to promote a vibrant research culture. This culture is enhanced by a high quality research environment consisting of state-of-the-art laboratory facilities. The policy of developing multi-user core research facilities has helped to create an atmosphere of teamwork and encourage collaboration, evidenced by shared published output. The culture is sustained through a policy of attracting and supporting high calibre academic staff, postoctoral researchers and postgraduate research students in support of core research areas. Staff Development programmes and appropriate rewards for quality output in the form of teaching relief, allocation of research students and travel funding help to maintain and advance research culture at an individual level. At a Departmental level, the vitality of the research environment is furthered by the input of both junior and senior visiting staff through collaborative research, as well as an active departmental seminar series, in addition to a formal collaborative 'White Rose' seminar series with vision scientists from the neighbouring institutions of York and Sheffield. The 'White Rose' series was initiated by staff from Bradford.
Research infrastructure continues to benefit from the injection of central resources, most recently in the form of a successful £230K hefce Capital Allocation grant to refurbish and equip laboratories for visual neuroscience and mobility in low vision research. Postgraduate students benefit from the recent addition of a Learning Resources Centre within the Department - a suite of 24 PCs offering internet access, printing, scanning and slidemaking facilities. At a University level, the development of the Graduate School allows for delivery of generic training in research methods. A £350K investment has created a dedicated complex which gives graduate education at Bradford a high profile focus and provides excellent support facilities for postgraduate students. The University Graduate School offers a comprehensive programme of short courses for postgraduate research students. These begin with an induction programme, followed by courses in information retrieval, manuscript preparation, presentation techniques, thesis preparation and submission, and tutoring for the PhD Viva.
In addition to collaboration amongst the academic staff of the Department, a major strength is the extensive and varied range of collaborative ventures with researchers from the UK and overseas, as outlined above within the research group activities. The Department strongly encourages collaboration through internal pump-priming, anticipating that continued partnerships will be supported through external funding. This policy has resulted in two collaborative grants from the Wellcome Trust and one from the British Council. As a result, some of the world's most respected vision scientists have visited the Department to carry out experimental work (e.g. Badcock, Bradley, Levi, Kingdom, Smith, Thibos, Weale). The Department has also hosted several younger researchers seeking to enrich their research experience (e.g. Chung, Latham, Popple, Simmers). Interdisciplinary collaboration within the institution is also increasing, partly through the institutional re-organisation into Schools. The closer links between research groups in the new School of Life Sciences offers considerable potential for further interdisciplinary research.
The research portfolio of the Department has been partly shaped in response to UK and worldwide research policy initiatives. Neuroscience research has been identified as a priority area by the UK government's Foresight Panel on Health and Life Sciences and by the Wellcome Trust, the world's largest medical charity. The Optics and Ageing research group involves staff who share an interest in vision within the ageing population. This is consonant with a thematic initiative from the UK Government Foresight Panel and with changes in worldwide human demographics.
The advances in research culture during the period are reflected by the increased number of postdoctoral researchers. Five externally funded post-doctoral researchers are presently working in the Department. Dr Paul McGraw originally joined the Department in 1996 and obtained a 3-year Wellcome Trust Vision Research Training Fellowship beginning September 1997 under the sponsorship of Professor Whitaker. In September 2000 he was awarded a prestigious 4-year Wellcome Trust Research Career Development Fellowship. As part of a distinguished 4-year Neil Hamilton Fairley Australian NHMRC Fellowship, Dr Konrad Pesudovs has chosen to spend half of the tenure of the Fellowship at Bradford in the laboratory of Dr Elliott. A Wellcome Trust award to Dr Tripathy is currently funding the Russian Professor Yuri Shelepin as a Research Assistant. The EPSRC currently support Dr Charlotte Hazel, Dr Belaidi and Paul Morrill (Research Assistants) in the laboratories of Dr Strang, Dr Pierscionek and Dr Keeble respectively.
Throughout the period the Department has been consistent in adopting the policy that research excellence should be developed and maintained from within its existing staff cohort and through the appointment and nurturing of young, promising academic staff. We have had a healthy influx of new staff, strategically introduced to support existing research strengths. This new staff cohort has added significantly to the vitality of the Department. As a result of this policy, we have attracted a talented group of staff who have considerable experience in a range of research environments which has helped develop further the network of international collaborators. The current staff profile forms the basis for continued development in research over the next RAE period and has the benefit of not being affected by attrition through retirement.
The research of individual staff members is overseen by Research Group leaders via regular group meetings, and by the Head of Department through the academic staff appraisal system. Information is fed from Research Group leaders to the Departmental Research Committee. In this way, strategic initiatives may be put in place to provide support for individual staff members, or for the Research Group as a whole.
Staff are encouraged to attend and present at International Conferences, with associated funding from Departmental resources if required. National conference attendance is also funded, with postgraduate involvement particularly encouraged.
Specific Support for Young/New Staff
In the early years, administrative and teaching duties are kept to a minimum in order to allow the individual to develop a research profile within their chosen Research Group. The Research Group leader and more senior colleagues within the group are expected to play a major role in encouraging and nurturing new staff within a supportive and helpful research environment. Following the initial period of mentorship, staff support continues in the form of regular appraisal and the identification of personal research objectives.
Category A* Staff
The Department places particular emphasis on support of our many young/new staff. All new staff within the Department are assigned to an experienced member of staff who then acts as their Mentor. Where possible, the Mentor will be from the Research Group within which the new member of staff is likely to work. New members of staff are required to attend a general Induction Course, and a Professional Development Plan is drawn up in consultation with the Mentor and Head of Department. The plan is monitored at a University level by a probationary committee. Laboratory space and 'start-up' financial support to purchase equipment and undertake travel to research conferences are assigned according to the research requirements of the individual. The accumulation of credits towards the Postgraduate Certificate in Education (Higher Education) is welcomed. The Research Supervision Workshop forms part of the PGCE(HE), and the Department of Optometry now considers attendance at this course compulsory before new staff are assigned to supervise postgraduate research students for the first time, in collaboration with a more experienced supervisor.
We have just a single A* staff member, Dr McKeefry, who has joined us from the University of Ulster. Through his interest in the mechanisms of sensory analysis he has fitted neatly into the Visual Neuroscience group and, in addition, has added another facet to the group in terms of his expertise in the electrophysiological assessment of visual brain function. He has already developed an active laboratory with the assistance of the 'support for new staff' outlined above.
Physical Disability research has made significant contributions with regard to research into the assessment, measurement and classification of patients with neurological and spinal pain conditions. Findings have advanced patient care and service delivery (e.g. stroke services and vocational rehabilitation). Health and Environment research has made major advances in the field of women’s and infants’ health which have influenced national and local health policies (e.g. smoking in pregnancy). The third group (four staff), submitted to UoA 68, have contributed significantly to health promotion, health education and practitioner-led learning and teaching research (e.g. sexual health promotion, the development of client-based services). The research themes have been fostered and continue to flourish with cross departmental and external research links that have gained in strength during the PoA.
In relation to publication output within the last two years, the seeds of the new strategy are now bearing fruit. This impetus is set to continue, most particularly in relation to the further strategic building of consumer and user involvement into the research of the Department, i.e. the expansion of collaborative projects. In Physical Disability, the Department will continue to contribute to the evidence base of practice; in Health and Environment research, future contributions will be made to the agenda for healthy lifestyles, led by regional and national needs, and further development of all three themes will be practice-orientated
Collaborations with clinical centres of excellence and consumer groups ensure that research reflects clinical reality and is of use to the community. In doing so, the developing research culture encompasses involvement with both relevant practitioners and public 'communities' linking all staff into the growing research agenda and firmly basing research activity in the wealth of clinical experience of both research active and teaching focussed staff. Research activity is now stronger and more deeply embedded in the culture of the Department than at the start of the PoA. Many new staff are actively engaged in the research agenda, and are building new external collaborations with clinical centres of excellence. These activities feed into a growing research culture, promoting the genesis and cross fertilisation of research ideas and the promotion of new research collaborations.
This submission demonstrates a strong growth in external research support and in published output. Research active staff submitted to UoA 11 have published a total of 83 peer reviewed journal articles and 12 edited books and book chapters during the PoA. We have an active strategy to publish in journals which are the most relevant for the research outputs and which reach a readership most likely to implement the research findings. The selected outputs demonstrate that the research adopts both professional and consumer focused perspectives and underlines our strong research links with clinicians and the users of health services.
Research and Impact
Research activity focuses on the identification and management of health issues in order to advance the diagnosis, treatment of, and advice to, patients and other people. The research themes take both professional and consumer focussed approaches to investigation and span the bridge between experimental and applied research. Therefore, the research has output across biomedical, clinical and psychosocial journals, the majority of which are of international standing. Research outputs have clear clinical utility - a factor acknowledged as important by our funding bodies.
There are two research themes – one concentrating on research into physical disability (De Souza, Tyson, Maskill, Oldreive, Strike, Frank) and one concentrating on health and the environment (Farrow, Reynolds, Gissane, Haslam, Frost). The two research themes link and overlap, and are integrated through the research work of De Souza and Frank (work handicap; Frank RA2, paper 1, vocational rehabilitation; Frank RA2, paper 3), Reynolds (RA2, paper 3) (women with disabilities), and Gissane (RA2, papers 1,2) and Oldreive (RA2, paper 4) (sports injuries and their management). For both themes, strong and effective research links exist with healthcare providers and users and with clinically-based researchers through external collaborative partnerships. This has ensured that the work reflects clinical reality and produces research that meets the needs of the community.
Physical Disability Research
Brunel Health Studies has established a track record of research into the development of methods and techniques to identify and assess physical disability, including the perspectives of those who live with disabilities. Consumers and users have been involved in research investigating self-care strategies and consumers' views of their health and healthcare services (De Souza, Frank, Tyson). Findings have revealed the discordance between the views of consumers'/users' and professionals' approaches to clinical problems. For example, the subjective experience of back pain from the sufferers' descriptions has limited commonalities with formal assessments widely used to diagnose types of pain, such as the McGill Pain Questionnaire and visual analogue scales (Frank, paper 4).
User views have also contributed to research identifying the benefits and risks of electric wheelchair provision for very severely disabled people and their carers. The research revealed a high rate of component failure and frequency of avoidable accidents. Findings have already resulted in changes to service provision (Frank paper 2). The NHS Region, as funders of the research, and on the basis of our report, empowered the managers to change the contract for approved repairers for the electric wheelchair service. The revised contract includes improved response to technical failures and better value for money through attention to quality assurance. Our work with chair users and their carers has been a productive partnership with the Regional Disablement Centre, Royal National Orthopaedic Hospital, Stanmore, and is continuing with new studies into the quality of life of chair users and their carers.
Research into services for stroke patients elicited views from both patients and professional health carers (Tyson papers 2, 3). Findings reveal important gaps in provision, with poor communication and lack of appropriate information identified as shortcomings. While hospital staff saw limited need for patient follow-up after discharge, the patients themselves and their general practitioners regarded follow-up as an important priority. This finding has implications for the development of a 'seamless service', and reveals the tensions between primary and secondary care of stroke patients.
Studies involving both patient and non-patient groups are aimed at identifying the main features of normal and abnormal profiles of clinical importance to the management of physical disabilities. This research aims to bridge the gap between the physiological or biomechanical features and the clinical picture as a basis for development of assessment methods (Maskill, De Souza, Tyson, Strike).
Development in the use of transcranial magnetic stimulation (TMS) as a method for investigating the function of the long motor pathways of the central nervous system has led to advances in both the sensitivity and range of applications of the technique (Maskill paper 3). Further studies addressed the ongoing problem of response amplitude variability seen with TMS and postulated theories as to why this might occur (Maskill 1). The research on spinal cord injury patients (Maskill 2) has not only demonstrated the physiological changes seen in these patients, but has also led to work on the application of this technique in other areas such as schizophrenia, Parkinson's Disease and persistent vegetative state. Neurotransmitter changes in both recent and recovered spinal cord injury patients were investigated using proton magnetic resonance spectroscopy to confirm the physiological findings of the TMS research. The finding that certain neurotransmitters do not return to normal levels post-recovery has clinical implications for the management of patients with spinal cord injury (Maskill 4). Collaborative research on normal subjects and patients with spinal injury using TMS and magnetic resonance spectroscopy has involved the Division of Neuroscience and Psychological Medicine at Imperial College, the Hammersmith and Charing Cross Hospitals in London, and the National Spinal Injuries Centre at Stoke Mandeville. Future research will build on this foundation and new studies are planned to investigate motor actions and behaviours using these techniques.
Human movement studies have focussed on actions that are commonly included in functional rehabilitation of neurological patients. The kinematic and electromyographic (EMG) patterns of moving from sitting to standing and back down to sitting were researched in normal subjects. Findings established consistent EMG patterns for these movements, but suggested the existence of other patterns considered to be normal. Results confirm the importance of gluteus maximus activation and deactivation, thus adding to evidence that the hip is a key point of movement control in these patterns (De Souza paper 4). Kinematic studies on stroke patients walking with mobility aids have challenged assumptions that some walking aids increase weight bearing through the arm and limit trunk mobility (Tyson 1, 2). Findings indicate that neither weight bearing, nor trunk movements, were adversely affected by the type of walking aid used. Results established that the relationship between lateral trunk movement and mobility is important.
Important research on the design of prostheses for amputees has been completed (Strike papers 1, 2). Kinematic studies on trans-tibial amputees have identified the impact on the gait cycle (particularly cadence and single support phase) of different mass and moment of inertia of prostheses. Optimum designs have been suggested which take into account both the biomechanical findings and patient preferences. The kinematic and EMG studies have clinical value in providing evidence for focussing the rehabilitation efforts of clinicians and patients on features of movement and function where the greatest benefit to patients may be gained.
This aim is also central to research that has developed clinically useful tools of assessment for specific use in multiple sclerosis patients for whom none previously existed. The focus has been on motor function and mobility disability (De Souza papers 1, 2). Validated tools with protocols that do not require specialised equipment have been developed, and these are now being used by clinicians. Our own active contact with clinicians has facilitated the dissemination of tools and protocols, and requests for details have been received and responded to. Further research on the mobility disability tool is being carried out with patients as users to develop it into a self-assessment tool. People with multiple sclerosis have informed research design and participated in studies through their national organisations - the Federation of Multiple Sclerosis Centres and the Multiple Sclerosis Society branches. Results of studies have been disseminated, not only through peer reviewed journal publications, but also to people with MS and their carers through the voluntary organisations. Future research is planned, and external funding already gained, to investigate the needs of carers of people with multiple sclerosis.
Results from back pain research have advanced methods of classifying abnormalities for diagnostic and assessment purposes (Frank, Oldreive). Clinically focussed research has investigated the effects of specific interventions and service provision for back pain patients. Studies have included profiling of clinical signs and symptoms to identify the important factors for management and rehabilitation, and sub-groups of patients requiring special attention have been identified. For example, in a chronic back pain population referred from primary care, it was found that those with radiating pain or neurological deficits were significantly more disabled and depressed than those without and that those unable to work were more likely to have co-morbidities (Frank paper 1). The results identify the features of a work-handicapped group of chronic back pain patients in the UK for the first time, and notes that such complex patients are often excluded from formal trials evaluating treatments for back pain. This research has been carried out in collaboration with Northwick Park Hospital, the Institute for Medical Research, and with Central Middlesex Hospital Physiotherapy services. The work on vocational rehabilitation (British Society of Rehabilitation Medicine Report, Frank 3) is already exerting national impact, with a forthcoming conference organised for invited opinion formers from within and outside (e.g. Trade Union Congress) Government. Department of Health interest has been sparked by the report, with an informal briefing invited within the remit of the 'Welfare to Work' Programme.
Research into sacroiliac joint (SIJ) syndromes reveals that there is, as yet, no agreement on what movements the joint is capable of. Controversy is apparent due to different terminologies being used and their lack of clarity (Oldreive paper 1). Research has attempted to establish a classification of SIJ syndromes and develop a taxonomy (Oldreive 2). This research has been cited within the specialist field, and progressed to identifying the wide variety of treatments recommended (Oldreive 3). Findings underline the complexity of SIJ syndromes and the lack of a common approach to their classification. This limits both accurate diagnosis of patients' problems and appropriate treatment. The initial work on SIJ was awarded the Manual Therapy Award 1996.
Health and the Environment
The abuse of women by their male partners has been investigated through the practice experience of health visitors, who have been expected to respond to domestic violence at both an individual client level and at a public policy level. Results showed that the majority of health visitors were involved with families where domestic violence occurred, and also identified the specific training needs of these professionals to enable them to be proactive in their work with abused women and children (Frost papers 1, 2). A further important research area concerns the widely recognised methodological issue of recall bias. Our research is unique in that this issue has not previously been examined with a reproductive outcome. A case-controlled study identified that, unexpectedly, there was a tendency to report less frequent use of products such as aerosols, disinfectant, bleach and cleaning fluids, after miscarriage. Therefore, recall bias was more likely to be found in women with an adverse outcome (miscarriage) compared to controls (Farrow 4). The health of pregnant working women has been studied to identify relationships between mothers' occupation and birthweight of term infants (Farrow paper 2). Although no significant relationships were found, it was noted that women in jobs such as the textile trades, metal working, and electric or electronic work, tended to have lower birthweight infants than with those in professional occupations. These results have important implications for pregnant working women. Infants' health has been investigated for the impact of nitrogen dioxide (given off by non-ventilated combustion such as gas cookers, paraffin heaters and cigarette smoke) on babies (Farrow 1). Although no association was found for respiratory problems, significant association was found with diarrhoea. The findings have important implications for the advice given to mothers with infants suffering from gastrointestinal problems where no direct medical explanation can be found.
Reduction in maternal smoking is high on the 'Health of the Nation' agenda. Our research has indicated that more specific interventions, targeted at members of the whole family unit, is more appropriate than general input aimed solely at mothers (Haslam RA2, papers 1, 2). These results have already influenced leaders within the NHS Clinical Governance Team, and future work will expand this area of study. Research on environmental and occupational issues affecting parents and infants has been undertaken in collaboration with the Department of Child Health, Bristol University, and the Departments of Foetal and Maternal Medicine, and Epidemiology and Public Health at the University of Leicester. New consumer-focussed research is planned to develop self-help tools for mothers.
In the case of professional sports people, the work place is their playing environment. Our research identifying the high prevalence of injuries in rugby league players has not been previously reported in prospective, long-term studies (Gissane paper 1). Significant differences were found between players in forward and back positions, with forwards sustaining higher prevalence of injuries and more haematomas and lacerations (Gissane 2). Comparisons between winter and summer playing seasons found higher rates of injury ( e.g. fractures, dislocations, haematomas) during the summer (Gissane 4) and environmental issues in summer, such as hard pitches, higher temperatures (causing dehydration), use of lighter kit and inappropriate boots have been implicated as causes. The findings have influenced management of players through changes in coaching and results have been used by the club to control and prevent injuries through shifting the emphasis from rehabilitation to prevention in sports medicine and physiotherapy practice. Collaboration with players and the Sports Medicine and Physiotherapy services at the London Bronco's Rugby League Football Club has been productive in researching players' injuries. Joint work between our Department and Sports Studies will continue to grow in the future.
Research Culture and Quality Infrastructure
Research focuses on the health of individuals and the family in domestic, work and leisure environments. It involves people in the community living and working on a daily basis with challenges to their health either due to life events or due to their environments. Studies on the health of women and infants continues to be particularly productive (Reynolds, Frost, Farrow, Haslam) and our research into health in the workplace is growing (Farrow, Gissane, Reynolds). The research into menopausal hot flushes (MHF) is unique and breaks new ground. MHF is a "hidden" health issue for large numbers of women who cannot, or do not choose to, take hormone replacement therapy. The research has developed both quantitative and qualitative methods to explore the issue. This is the first research in the field that has quantified the impact of MHF on women (Reynolds RA2, paper 1). Findings demonstrate that distress during flush episodes is more closely related to perceived control (a cognitive belief) than to factors such as flush frequency and chronicity. Women with high perceived control report more numerous coping strategies than those with low perceived control (Reynolds paper 2). However, the qualitative research findings reveal the complexity of the interrelationships between distress, perceived control and coping with the added dimension of environment and context of MHF (e.g. home or work) having an instrumental effect on coping behaviours (Reynolds 4). Research into menopause is a key area specified in 'Health of the Nation'.
A new, positive research culture emerged as a result of a redirection of priority research themes and a reaffirmation of the centrality of user and consumer involvement. Research collaborations have been a key feature of our achievements during the PoA and several productive partnerships have been established. Collaborations are sustained and nurtured through individual and team exchanges including workshops, seminars, presentations and discussion groups. Research facilities are now of very high quality. The programme of refurbishment initiated in the last PoA has been advanced. The research infrastructure includes a Human Movement Laboratory (including two CODA kinematic machines, infra-red telemetry EMG, a Kistler force platform, and a balance platform), and a Biomechanics Laboratory (including a KinCom, electrogoniometers, and Biopack). Each major piece of equipment has dedicated 'on-line' IT processing. The laboratories have full-time technical backup from a technician with Masters level expertise. Two more technicians provide additional support. Researchers also have access to specialist equipment and expertise through close collaborative partnerships with hospital clinicians and researchers (e.g. TMS, proton MRI). Our clinician partners also provide access to patient groups and support research as joint applicants to research ethics committees, co-applicants for research grants, and providing honorary contracts in their NHS services for Brunel researchers.
The department has two committees that meet termly to manage research issues. Firstly the Research Steering Group, chaired by the Research Tutor meets to support staff research and develop new areas for research. The group has input from both therapy and diagnostic clinical site managers to promote clinical relevance. There is also input and advice from more experienced research colleagues from the University’s Medical Informatics research group. This committee does not have direct funding capabilities but works to ‘brainstorm’ ideas for funding from other bodies. The Research Student Group, chaired by the Research Tutor, meets to manage recruitment and retention of research students and also acts as a support group for current students. This group vets applications for research degrees before passing them on to the University’s research degrees committee.
Departmental research groups have been developed around areas of interest. The structure has enabled the development of a supportive environment and enabled the development of less experienced researchers.
The Science Group includes members who are involved in the work carried out in the Radiation Physics Laboratory. Under the leadership of Dr Farquharson (staff ref no. 1), supported by 4 research students, this team is currently carrying out work on:
Every year a small number (3-5) of third year undergraduate students carry out research projects in the laboratory, working on one of these major projects. Members of this group (Staff ref no 1 and 2 research students) have recently been granted access to the European Synchrotron Facility at Grenoble to collect data on breast tissue samples. Others (Staff ref no 1 and 1 research student) have taken part in an exchange with staff and research students at the University of Rio de Janeiro, where there is a smaller synchrotron.
The Radiotherapy Group has six members and includes David Flinton (staff ref no. 2). They support a wide range of research projects and also work with undergraduate students in their third year projects. Typical pieces of research from this group include the study of:
A Social Sciences group has been formed by three staff, under the leadership of Pam Cherry, with the intention of carrying out a major review of media representations of cancer, especially from the ‘popular press’. This group also acts as a catalyst for projects for third year undergraduate students.
The MUSE group is working on the Medical Ultrasound Simulator Evaluation project funded by HEFCE. Led by Dr Benwell (staff ref no. 3), this group of three staff has evaluated the UltraSim simulator in a number of ways including studying the realism of the unit and the effect it has on student sonographer learning outcomes. The research has shown that simulators are equally as effective as real patients in enabling students to gain early scanning skills.
Roger Hicks has initiated collaborative research with the National Maritime Museum, imaging 18th century ship models. A bid has been submitted to the Arts and Humanities Research Board for further computed tomography and endoscopy study on these models. This study is unique and a world ‘first’.
The department now has a growing number of research students working in the Radiation Physics Laboratory and on projects outside of the laboratory. Research students attend for a University introductory training programme and are invited to attend postgraduate lectures, especially those in Research Methods and Statistics which is a core module for all students undertaking Masters Degrees in the Department of Radiography. All full time research students have a personal computer and Internet access. They are required to make an annual written report on their progress and their satisfaction with departmental and supervisor support.
The department is part of the Institute of Health Sciences which is a unifying structure for all health related activity at City University. This provides opportunities for interdisciplinary research projects. Examples include a joint bid from Radiography, Nursing and Optometry to a London Education Consortium to investigate the Evidence Based Practice CPD activity of PAMs in East London. Although recently established, and still developing its role, the IHS seeks to develop:
‘ synergies between clinical, organisational, technological and behavioural approaches to healthcare, creating cross-disciplinary … research programmes relevant to contemporary policy and practice.’
We have had early successes with attracting funding. We have also been applauded with Alpha+ ratings for four major bids to EPSRC and NERC which would have totalled over £250,000 for research in XRF in the radiation laboratory, but just missed out on funding. As the department develops a research track record and becomes known to more funding agencies, success will follow.
Research Strategy
The University Research Strategy starts from the premise that ‘research lies at the heart of University activity’ and aims to develop and enhance research which has acknowledged standards of excellence. Led by a Pro Vice Chancellor for Research, the University provides a supportive environment for research. This includes the return of a high proportion of research overheads to Departments, an enhanced pump priming fund for research initiatives, and the creation of new University Research Fellowships which have been awarded on the basis of university wide, open competition.
The Department of Radiography has embraced the institutional strategy and has made several applications for research funding. Recent successes have been awards totalling £11,850 from the University Pump Priming funds for research into the effects of physical activity on fatigue in cancer patients and quantifying elements in tumour tissue enabling earlier identification of malignancy.
Radiography as an academic profession is in its infancy with regards to research. Until 1990 students studied at diploma level with no research component. It is the degree students of the last ten years who see research as part of radiography and it is only in the last 4 to 5 years that degree qualified radiographers have completed Masters programmes with a substantial research component. This ‘new wave’ of radiographers sees research as a vital part of their education and will take research forward in the next decade. As these radiographers progress and some take up teaching posts the research ethos within the profession will develop. We have witnessed this already at City University.
The department now has six research students in post. This large increase in research students is beginning to act as a catalyst, as are the funds for research from charities, HEFCE and other grant making bodies which over the period of this assessment total just over £245,000. Currently there are bids in place to various funding agencies amounting to over £600,000.
The research infrastructure of the department has been steadily developing over the last five years. The Radiation Physics Laboratory has been funded and developed by the Department of Radiography and is used by our research students and those from other departments who require such facilities. This is a major capital project costing in excess of £180,000 and is unique among Radiography Departments in the UK. This facility has produced a lot of research activity within the department which is detailed under the activities of the Science group in Research Structure and Management.
There is a functioning practical suite in the department that is available for staff and student research. The department also has a wide range of phantoms and facilities for thermo luminescent dosimetry.
The department has also purchased, and updated, an UltraSim medical ultrasound simulator. This was the first UltraSim unit to be installed in the UK and has been used in the HEFCE funded MUSE evaluation project (see Research Structure and Management) and by students in research projects.
The department has a dedicated, up to date, on-site radiotherapy planning suite which is used in research led by David Flinton (staff ref no. 2) comparing the accuracy of various tumour outlining
techniques. This represents a capital outlay in excess of £20,000.
Our library is regularly updated with additions to sections on research methods and statistics; we also currently subscribe to 40 journals. The library has computers for students to conduct online and CD-ROM literature searches. There is a librarian in attendance every day to assist with research matters.
We believe that we are now one of the best-equipped radiography centres in Higher Education and this enables and facilitates our research efforts.
All students must complete a research project in their 3rd year and therefore have access to e-mail and the Internet for research purposes as well as specialised software packages such as radiation databases and statistical programmes. This compulsory project has had the effect of encouraging a research ethos in the department and in our graduates who increasingly are returning to study at postgraduate level and continue in their own research activities.
Staffing Policy
Research active staff are given lighter teaching loads and given time from teaching and other duties to complete research activities. This usually amounts to one day a week for research activities.
Future Plans
Although the MUSE project is due to finish in 2001 the MUSE consortium has agreed that it will continue to research the Ultrasim unit. We have been approached by Dr Flanagan from the Simulation Centre, Monash University, Australia to carry out some collaborative work on simulators.
Future plans involve Dr Benwell (staff ref no 3) collaborating with South Bank University and the University of the West of England to investigate recruitment, retention and career progression in the Allied Healthcare Professions. A proposal for funding has gone to the Department of Health.
The department is planning a new course for pre registration students that will have some links with the nursing school and this is already providing material for a joint research project on inter-professional education between the Department of Radiography and the School of Nursing and Midwifery. This research will develop as the students progress through the course.
Self-Assessment
Also, the recruitment of a physicist with a good research track record onto the staff has had a ‘knock on’ effect with other staff and this has improved the motivation to undertake research.
We have attracted over £245,000 of research funding in a field that is still not a priority for funders. We have raised the profile of research in the department through the presence of research students.
This describes where we stand at present. We have now been in the Higher Education sector for five years and we now feel that we have made excellent progress from a standing start. Much of our initial progress has been in building physical infrastructure and on staff development. We do not, however, feel that this position fulfils our aims and goals for research in the department. With a record of early success in attracting funding we will build on this. We propose to employ a Research Assistant in the next year and will also be applying for funding for a Research Fellow in the next year to work in the Radiation Physics Laboratory using the University Research Fellowship scheme.
We do attempt to attract new staff with research backgrounds who will be able to contribute to the existing projects or who are able to initiate new projects. An example is a member of staff employed in September 2000 who has expertise in cross sectional imaging (CT and MRI) and digital imaging. He will be starting research activities in these fields which will be an expansion of our research profile. This same member of staff is already in discussions with Greenwich Medical Media to produce a book on an ‘IT in Radiography’ topic.
The department will continue to support the Radiation Physics Laboratory and plans to employ another Research Assistant. As research students complete their studies we will replace them. We have an excellent relationship with the Medical Physics Department at Surrey University who have provided such recruits and we now have our own graduates taking up research student posts.
Although the numbers of research active staff are still small the numbers of research students have increased greatly and the quality of research carried out by the research active staff is, we believe, of a higher and more consistent quality and is more likely to be funded than was the case previously.
1. Research Structure and Environment
Management of Research: MIM, a City University Research Centre, undertakes international-level research, central to the University’s objectives (see below), at the interface of information and communications technologies (ICT) and the medical and health-related application domain. MIM is a department of the School of Informatics, its technological base, and is closely associated with City’s Institute of Health Sciences (IHS) to ensure that its research is fully integrated into the totality of City’s health-related activity. Research policy is developed within MIM for subsequent ratification by the School of Informatics’ Management Board. It is implemented by Dr Hovorka (Senior Tutor - Research), who has overall responsibility for the MIM research student cohort. The strategic dimension of research management, identifying and formulating research initiatives, is the responsibility primarily of Prof Carson (MIM Director) in consultation with other MIM staff.
Research Groups: MIM carries out a programme of interdisciplinary research involving the application of advanced ICT (based on modelling, control and systems science) to problems in medical research and decision making. Research focuses on three distinct, but strongly-interrelated, themes: (1) physiological dynamics and modelling [metabolic modelling, PK/PD modelling, risk modelling of decompression data, modelling and interpretation of EEG and ECG signals]; (2) decision support technology [advisory and educational systems for diabetic management; information management and decision support systems for the patient in the operating theatre or ICU]; (3) healthcare technology [evaluation methodology and its application in telematic systems for home haemodialysis and diabetic management; modelling to support clinical prediction and resource allocation]. DIABSTYLE, IBIS and HOMER-D are examples of EU-funded successfully completed projects in themes 1, 2 & 3 respectively. These themes are strongly inter-related, e.g. decision support systems incorporating models of physiological dynamics; and much healthcare technology evaluation focusing on decision support technology. All category A MIM staff have expertise in at least two of the three themes: Prof Carson, Drs Roudsari & Weller (themes 1,2,3); Drs Hennessy & Hovorka (1,2); and Prof Cramp (2,3).
Promotion of Research: Staff and research students participate in regular workshops to identify and prioritise new opportunities. The vitality of the MIM research culture is promoted through:
- fortnightly seminars (both MIM, and external speakers of national and international standing);
- an annual Open Day disseminating research achievement and providing feedback. This attracts
MIM alumni; other leading researchers of City University; current and potential research partners
in industry, health-related and academic organisations; and potential funding agencies;
- an Annual Research Report (in both printed and web formats) which is widely distributed;
- encouragement of conference participation (with Departmental financial support) by academic
and research staff and research students (who also benefit from financial support from the
School of Informatics, e.g. in relation to the 2000 International Federation for Automatic Control
(IFAC) Symposium on Modelling and Control in Biomedical Systems); MIM (principally Profs
Carson and Cramp) also organises international research conferences at City on behalf of the
IHS on "Advances in the Delivery of Care" (1997, 1999, 2001) with strong ICT emphases;
- organising international workshops (Drs Hennessy and Hovorka) on: SAAM II modelling package
(with the SAAM Institute, Seattle, 1996 & 1997); Minimal Modelling of Glucose Kinetics (1998);
- bidding for University research funding (Research Fellowship for Dr Weller - now MIM lecturer).
Research Infrastructure: MIM provides its staff and students with well found informatics laboratory facilities (including relevant software and databases); access to relevant training courses (e.g. MSc modules on research methods and University courses on writing skills); and encouragement and financial support for participation in conferences of international standing.
Interdisciplinary Research: All research involves collaboration with medical (e.g. diabetologists, intensivists, anaesthetists) or health-related personnel, of high international standing in the UK (e.g. St Bartholomew’s, the Royal Brompton and St Thomas’ Hospitals) and the rest of Europe (e.g. Kuopio, Munich, Padova, Perugia and Madrid), providing access to the necessary clinical and health-related resources. Visiting Professorial (5) and Senior/Visiting Fellow (9) members of MIM bring extensive clinical and health-related expertise. Four of the five MIM academics have held visiting posts in internationally-prestigious London Medical Schools during the past 5 years (see RA6). MIM engages in joint research with internationally recognised investigators in other Departments within the City IHS, including Nursing (diabetic decision support), Optometry (guidelines for diabetic retinopathy) and Radiography (ultrasound simulation, bone measurement/modelling).
External Relations: MIM is a member of the South East Regional Focal Institute of the UK Institute of Health Informatics, established at the DTI’s behest to promote research interaction between industrial, academic and clinical institutions. MIM has benefited since 1996 from: (i) industrial support: Glaxo-Wellcome research studentships and pump-priming of metabolic modelling research; support from the pharmaceutical (e.g. Roche) and medical informatics (e.g. Datex, ERGO) industries in EU-funded projects; (ii) other pharmaceutical industry interaction, including invited contributions by Dr Hovorka to Novartis research seminars in Basel and joint supervision of two research students with Glaxo-Wellcome Italy and UK; (iii) NHS R & D funding and research input/cooperation from NHS provider organisations (e.g. successful completion of evaluation of point of care biochemical testing). Active research cooperation is in place with leading academic, clinical and industrial partners in 12 European countries and at the Mitre Corporation (USA).
2. Research Strategy
Institutional Strategy: City’s research strategy starts from the premise that "research lies at the heart of University activity" and aims to develop and enhance research having acknowledged standards of excellence. Actions, led by a Pro Vice Chancellor for Research, ensure that the University continues to provide a supportive research environment. These include the return of a high proportion of research overheads to Departments, an enhanced pump priming fund for research initiatives, and the creation of new University Research Fellowships, awarded in open competition. All academic staff have access to the internet including email, the world wide web and the Athens service from their desk. MIM activity supports and reinforces the University’s high priority given to health-related, collaborative (inter-professional) research. Importance is attached to engaging in collaborative research in the London area, but primarily to developing strong international linkage. City University is promoting its IHS as the vehicle for developing and expanding clinical and health-related collaborative research. The IHS, led by Prof Carson from 1993-99 as an umbrella for the totality of health-related activity, is currently being transformed to a fully-integrated "super-School" structure. MIM has just completed a business plan to expand the totality of the University’s health informatics provision, where this will be research-led by MIM.
Objectives and Activities: MIM research will be based on the interrelated themes defined above. Modelling, widely applied across the spectrum from physiology to healthcare organisation and delivery, a core strength of MIM, will continue to be central to all 3 themes. Specific plans include:
1. Physiological dynamics and modelling and signal processing:
(i) modelling metabolic dynamics (from cellular to whole-body levels) to enhance understanding of control mechanism dynamics and predict outcome (e.g. in response to drug therapy or lifestyle changes); (ii) application of stochastic modelling techniques in physiological applications; (iii) developing and applying new advanced methods for EEG and ECG processing and interpretation.
2. Decision support technology:
(i) improved methods for supporting clinical decisions in patient management, emphasising the physiologically-based patient-specific model as the foundation of the decision support facility; (ii) ongoing application of such methods in managing chronic disease (e.g. diabetes, hypertension, asthma) and in high dependency medicine (surgery, intensive care); (iii) delivering chronic disease decision support via the Internet, enabling the range of beneficiaries to be extended to embrace the patient and carers as well as the clinical professionals.
3. Healthcare technology:
(i) development, assessment and evaluation of web-based telematic services to manage chronic disease; (ii) development of modelling frameworks to support healthcare resource allocation (e.g. in the high dependency environment where the patient moves between several medical and surgical units); (iii) development of integrated policy models to evaluate the adoption of ICT as a vehicle for enhancing public healthcare. These plans will be realised by: (i) continuing to secure major funding (e.g. EU, NHS and Research Council sources); (ii) enhancing and expanding clinical cooperation with teams of international standing in the UK and across the rest of Europe; (iii) disseminating the results in prestigious peer-reviewed journals and in the major international conference fora appropriate to MIM’s interdisciplinary research.
Evaluation of Earlier Plans:
3. Staffing Policy
Development & Support: Annual staff appraisal enables research achievement to be monitored, targets set and training needs identified resulting in visits to other centres of excellence (e.g. Padova, Copenhagen, Eindhoven, Lille) to learn new methods of clinical data analysis and interpretation.
New/Younger Researchers: For these staff, development also includes a mentoring scheme and the provision of MIM financial support to facilitate conference attendance and short visits to other European research laboratories (e.g. recently to Tampere, Madrid). This can facilitate/enhance international cooperation, e.g. following such a visit by Dr Rees to Aalborg (see also 4 below).
Visiting Staff: Visiting staff (referred to above) add research expertise from major collaborating London hospitals (including St. Thomas’ and the Royal Brompton), and from partner institutions in wider European research (e.g. Aalborg University and Semmelweis University, Budapest).
4. Self Assessment
RA1: MIM strengths have been recognised by City University in the promotion in 1998 of Dr Hovorka to Reader and Dr Roudsari to Senior Lecturer, based largely on the quality of their internationally focused research activities (and in the appointment of Dr Summers, MIM Senior Lecturer, to a Chair at Loughborough University in 1998). Dr Hovorka has received recognition from the international pharmacokinetic/pharmacodynamic modelling community on the PK/PD mailing list for best non-commercial deconvolution software. The employment of significant numbers of Research Assistants benefits MIM research directly and also enables MIM to play a key role in developing research skills and knowledge in highly qualified young professionals (e.g. Dr SE Rees, now at Aalborg University). [For specific measures of esteem - see RA6]
RA2: MIM strengths are recognised in their members (e.g. Carson, Cramp, Hovorka) being regularly invited to edit key research monographs, conference proceedings (e.g. IFAC) and journal thematic issues (on EU projects and major international conferences, e.g. Computers in Diabetes) [see RA6], as well as the normal production of high-quality research output.
RA3: MIM attracts research students supported by a broad range of agencies (e.g. in 2000 from Research Councils, industry & the WHO). Organisations employing recent graduates (11 PhDs, 2 MPhils since 1996) include leading international pharmaceutical and telemedicine companies, the King’s Fund (Senior Fellow) and leading European universities from Aalborg to Thessaloniki. Most recently, one PhD graduate of 1998, Justin Keen, has been appointed to a Chair in Health Management at Leeds University.
RA4: As most MIM activity focuses on applying ICT to clinical and health-related problems, much of its external funding is obtained from the EU and the NHS as major funding agencies in this connection. MIM is regularly invited to participate as a major partner by consortia seeking EU funding, e.g. in successfully completed projects (IMPROVE, IBIS - high dependency medicine; HOMER-D - chronic disease) and in current FP5-IST projects relating to diabetes (ADICOL, m2dm). The FP4 project DIABSTYLE, successfully led by MIM, was one of a small number of projects invited to participate in a major EU research dissemination conference (Warsaw, 1997).
Self assessment 1996-2001
The period since the 1996 RAE has been one of growth and development in terms of numbers of research active staff (2.7 fold increase from 5.3 WTE category A staff submitted in 1996 to 14.34 WTE category A/A* in 2000 (see RA1)), research expenditure (2.8 fold increase from £280K in the year 1996/7 to almost £800K for the year 1999/2000 - see RA 4), and research students (almost 2 fold increase 1996 – 2000 – see RA3a). There are now six substantive Chairs within the submission – Pearce (Clinical and Health Psychology), Blaxter (Medical Sociology), Mugford (Health Economics), Harvey (Epidemiology and Public Health), Salter (Health Services Research) and Leinster (Medical Education), five of them created since the 1996 RAE. Honorary Chairs have also been awarded in Musculoskeletal Disorders (Scott) and in Nutrition and Health (Fairweather-Tait and Johnson). This growth has been facilitated by selective university investment (£120K in the period 1997 – 2000).
Research groups
The School enjoys a high profile in the areas of its three research groups:
By grouping research around these clear themes involving the full range of cognate disciplines, an exciting blend of social and clinical science is brought to bear on the development of innovative research in each area. Thus for example within chronic illness, clinical and social scientists work in collaboration to advance understanding of the pattern and origins of musculoskeletal disorders and of their impact upon individual well-being and health service resource utilisation. Similarly there is an integration of clinical psychology, community paediatrics and health economics that allows us to consider the health of children and their parents within the psychological, social and economic contexts in which they live. Though many staff are only recently appointed (see RA1) the strategic fit of these staff within the three research groups is excellent.
Chronic Illness: (Group members: Pearce, Harvey, Hart, Koutantji, Reynolds, Fowler, Shepstone, Mugford, Leinster, Adams, Scott, Harrison, Johnson, Fairweather-Tait)
Chronic Physical Illness:
Attention here is focused on selected chronic physical health problems that are economically, physically, and psychologically debilitating for individuals and which have a significant impact on overall public health. Research into musculoskeletal disease brings together researchers from the disciplines of clinical and health psychology (Pearce, Koutantji), statistics and image analysis (Shepstone), clinical rheumatological epidemiology (Scott), and health economics (Mugford). Achievements of this group include important research into the psychological mechanisms modulating pain perception and the maintenance of chronic pain in rheumatoid arthritis and vasculitis, innovative descriptive accounts of the patterns of resource utilisation among sufferers from early inflammatory polyarthritis, and the descriptive and aetiological study of both rheumatoid arthritis and the vasculitides. Epidemiological advances have been facilitated through the collaborative development with the Manchester – based ARC Research Unit of a unique primary-care originated disease register, NOAR (the Norfolk Arthritis Register), which takes full advantage of the stable local population (Scott). Shepstone is developing new statistical approaches to the quantitative characterisation and analysis of joint morphology and its role in the origins of osteoarthrosis, involving collaboration with groups in both the UK and USA.
Harvey has undertaken both evaluative and aetiological research into common causes of morbidity (serous otitis media and skin cancer) which have been published in the Lancet and British Journal of Cancer. With Holland (see RA6c, recently awarded a MRC Health Services Research Training Fellowship) he is further developing evaluative research into methods to enhance medication concordance among the frail elderly.
Other key areas of research activity include severe asthma, and lower gastrointestinal disease (cancer and inflammatory bowel disease). The collaboration of physicians and psychologists has identified psychosocial risk factors for poor control (Adams) and hospital admission in asthma. Currently funded research (£180K from the British Lung Foundation) is evaluating the cost effectiveness of an innovative, nurse-led package to develop coping skills in such patients (Harrison, Koutantji, Mugford, Shepstone). Hart’s research has focussed upon compliance and other issues concerning screening for large bowel cancer. He has already secured further funding to investigate, in collaboration with the EPIC cohort research group in Cambridge, the influence of dietary factors upon the incidence of both colorectal cancers and gall bladder disease. Johnson’s research has provided important knowledge about the possible effect of dietary factors (iron, polyunsaturated fatty acids) upon large bowel biochemistry and pathology. The recent appointment of Leinster (moving from the Dept of Surgery at Liverpool University) significantly extends the University’s research interest in the psychosocial aspects of disease into the areas of breast cancer and the effect on patient outcomes of new strategies for student learning.
Mental health:
This activity encompasses the main areas outlined in the 1999 National Service Framework for mental health. Our research includes innovative research relevant to mental health promotion at work (Reynolds) and mental health concerns of vulnerable and socially excluded people (Henwood). Reynold’s work in this area has demonstrated that brief counselling is more effective than organisational change in terms of improving mental health at work. Henwood has demonstrated that relational well being at work can usefully be informed by psycho-social theories of difference (such as gender theory). Harvey’s publications in the BMJ and British Journal of General Practice describe the results of randomised trials of a number of interventions for mental health in primary care. His research indicates that counselling for mental health problems in primary care - commonly advocated as a superior alternative to medical care for a wide range of problems - is no more effective than usual GP care, though fractionally cheaper.
Within secondary care, Fowler is a pioneer in the area of severe mental illness, especially the evaluation of cognitive behavioural interventions in psychosis. His collaborative work with colleagues in London has resulted in important evidence of the efficacy of cognitive therapy for psychosis. This research has recently been furthered by an award of £1.5 million from the Wellcome Trust to develop a multicentre trial of cognitive therapy for people with chronic schizophrenia. Reynolds’ randomised controlled trial of psychotherapy for depression demonstrates a clear dose-effect relationship between treatment duration and therapeutic effect in psychotherapy and an important interaction between severity of depression and treatment duration.
Family and Child: (Mugford, Reading, Fairweather-Tait, Mastroyannopoulou, Koutantji, Hipwell)
Health Policy: (Blaxter, Salter, Smith, Cookson, Henwood)
Variations in health:
There is a range of innovative research activity in relation to socio-economic and other sources of variations in health. Blaxter’s outputs in particular reflect her international reputation for her work in this area and for her promotion of multiple methodologies. She is conducting both theoretical and empirical research on the relationship between the concept of social capital and population health (£50K from the Health Development Agency). Blaxter’s contribution is complemented by Henwood’s research on the usefulness of qualitative methods in psychology and ways of addressing social exclusion in relation to race and gender. Smith has researched the effects of physical disability upon social exclusion whilst Cookson has focussed especially upon issues of equity in health. He is also co-founder of the UK Health Equity Network (500 members) which is financially supported by the Nuffield Trust and King’s Fund.
Decision making in health:
The contribution of the social sciences to understanding of decision making in relation to health is a critical element of research within the School. This research operates at a number of different levels. For example, Salter has made important contributions to the understanding of the politics of health and in particular to issues of governance and public trust in health services. He has recently secured £150K from the ESRC to further this research and extend it into the arena of public health genetics.
Researchers with backgrounds in health economics have contributed to theoretical and methodological advances in our understanding of how the public and health professional value different health care states and interventions (Smith). Cookson has developed new methods for setting economic values on life and health in different policy contexts and undertaken innovative research on the differences between public views on priority setting in health care before and after focus group discussion. He has recently been involved in ASTEC, a major EU funded project comparing evidence-based health care policy across EU member states. Henwood has undertaken research that has clearly identified the amplification of health risks in scientist – public communication as a major issue in contemporary health risk research. This issue now represents a significant strand of forthcoming research on public understanding of science and risk to be undertaken within UEA’s Centre for Environmental Risk, in which Henwood is collaborating. The Centre has recently secured a major grant worth £1.3M from the Leverhulme Trust.
Promoting an active research culture
The School’s structure and administrative arrangements have been developed to support our rapidly growing research activities. We have set out to attract top calibre staff with the capacity to contribute both to the development of their own discipline, and to the complex, multi-disciplinary needs of health systems internationally. Staff are encouraged to maintain active research collaborations with external researchers.
Within the School all staff are supported within one of four administrative groups, broadly based on academic discipline (Clinical and Health Psychology, Population Health Sciences, Health Economics and Biomedical Sciences). This provides peer professional support within a critical mass and helps promote a disciplinary awareness of the School across the wider academic community nationally and internationally. Category C staff are fully integrated into this structure. Adams (Dean of the School), Scott, Harrison and Reading are NHS employed staff who all have dedicated research time within the School. Johnson and Fairweather-Tait are employed by the BBSRC funded Institute of Food Research which is located on the Norwich Research Park adjacent to the University. They collaborate with, and hold some of their research income within the School.
Research activity is promoted, supported and monitored, by the School Research Committee (Chair: Harvey), which sets targets for and reviews research income, studentship numbers, research outputs and research training needs. The Research Committee is efficiently supported by a Research Coordinator (Southon), whose role is to identify research funding opportunities and assist staff in identifying collaborators and developing bids. There is also excellent computing (Sahota) and statistical expertise (Shepstone, Humphries). We provide a supportive and stimulating environment for young, talented researchers and have been particularly successful in supporting new members of academic staff (Charlesworth, Holland (see RA6c), Shepstone, Koutantji and Mastroyannopolou) in advancing their careers through publishing and attracting grant income. We encourage exchange of research ideas at all levels and support this with a successful Health Seminar programme, a programme of regular informal research meetings (at which PhD students and Research Associates are encouraged to present), and with several focused research groups, in particular the Musculoskeletal (Shepstone) and Respiratory (Harrison with Jones from School of Environmental Science) Research Groups which hold 3 monthly research colloquia.
The School invests in obtaining funding for and supervising higher degree students. The School hosts the Regional Doctoral Programme in Clinical Psychology on which 60 students are currently registered and which leads to the award of the research degree of ClinPsyD. In addition there is a growing number of PhD and MD students. Our MSc in Health Sciences provides over 30 modules from which higher degree students can select those appropriate to their research training needs. The School also hosts two important research advisory functions – the Research and Development Support Group (RDSG) for NHS and university staff and the Suffolk and Norfolk Primary Care Research Network (SuNet), each of which has a full time research advisor. These researchers, funded by the NHS R&D programme, facilitate important links with NHS staff throughout the Region enabling HPP staff to encourage those wishing to embark upon a higher degree programme or develop as autonomous researchers. Our policies have already brought significant rewards. Two of our staff were trained on the Clinical Psychology Doctoral Programme (Hipwell, Charlesworth (see RA6c)), and four staff previously working in the NHS have joined us having obtained highly competitive research training Fellowships (1 from MRC, 1 from the National NHS Primary Care Award Scheme and two from Regional R&D).
External relations with users of research
Relations with the NHS as research end-users are close. Members of the School are represented on NHS Trust Research Governance Committees (Scott, Harvey, Shepstone, Reading, Reynolds, Adams), Norfolk Health Authority (Pearce, non-executive member 1995-8), Eastern Region NHS R&D Research Advisory Committee (Pearce, Scott) and National Institute of Clinical Excellence (NICE) appraisal committee (Mugford). Researchers are actively aware of new Policy Initiatives, a process facilitated by honorary and substantive appointments held with strategic health bodies (e.g. Harvey, Honorary Consultant, Norfolk Health Authority; Scott, Director of R&D and Director of CPD, Norfolk and Norwich Acute Trust).
Staffing Policy
Two key principles facilitate the development and support of individual research staff. The first of these is the value we place on individual career development. All staff have a regular formative appraisal programme that aims to identify individual needs and integrate individual ambitions with those of the School. All new academic staff have an academic mentor as well as a line manager. The School has adopted the MRC/HEFCE concordat on the employment of contract research staff. We encourage all pre-doctoral staff to register for higher degrees.
The second key principle is to distinguish clearly between staff with a primary role in teaching and those who are expected to undertake both teaching and research. Selective appointments of teaching-only staff on non-academic scales have accordingly been made in order to support major teaching programmes and relieve teaching load on staff who are expected to be research active.
The integration of Category C staff (Scott, Harrison, Reading, Adams, Fairweather-Tait, Johnson) is achieved by the provision of shared facilities, the appointment of shared posts and the instigation of joint research. Adams indeed is the current Dean of the School. Two research training fellows, three research associates and 6 MD students are jointly supervised by Category A and C staff. Office space is made available for category C staff in the University and for University staff in both the IFR and the N&N Trust.
A number of staff have been promoted to posts elsewhere during the period since the last RAE. Appleby left in December 1998 to become Director of the Health Systems Programme at the Kings Fund in London and Langford to become Senior Research Associate in the School of Environmental Sciences at UEA. Croxson was appointed to a Research Fellowship in health economics at the Institute of Child Health, London. Successful appointments to a Chair and two senior lectureships in Health Economics (Mugford, Smith, Cookson) mean that health economics has been substantially strengthened in HPP despite these departures. Salter, with a background in political science, appointed to a Chair in Health Services Research, has significantly augmented the Health Policy research group. Likewise appointments to a Chair in Epidemiology and Public Health (Harvey), Clinical Senior Lectureship in Epidemiology of Digestive Disease (Hart) and a lectureship in Biostatistics (Shepstone) have strengthened Population Health Sciences despite the departure of Langford. The appointments of Blaxter (Chair in Medical Sociology) and Henwood (Senior lectureship in clinical and health psychology) have added significantly to the qualitative research capacity within HPP. Leinster (Cat A* appointed Jan 2001) will contribute to research at the interface between surgical breast disease and psychological factors.
The School’s research mission is to produce high quality research which supports the clinical effectiveness of occupational therapy and physiotherapy and the promotion of health and well-being. The research programme is categorized in terms of three theme groups addressing aspects of our mission: Evidence Based Practice; Neuro-Musculo-Skeletal Therapy; and The Development of Practice in Health. The interdisciplinary culture of the University as well as in OPT has been exploited to promote our research themes.
Since the 1996 RAE there has been substantial growth and development. Research expenditure has seen a ninety-fold increase from £838 in the year 1996/97 to nearly £80K for the year 1999/2000 (see RA4) when £246K of new research grants was secured. Research students have increased from one to ten (1996-2000 – see RA3a) and a fivefold increase in levels of publication has also been achieved. The School’s achievements have been facilitated by selective university investment, carefully planned strategic direction and appointments, productive partnership with other UEA Schools, external academic and professional colleagues and by close collaborations with local NHS institutions.
1.a. Research Groupings
Evidence Based Practice: (core members: Chia, Howard, Lambert and Stewart) This group aims to develop, analyse and evaluate applications of clinical concepts, instrumentation and practice. Stewart, who coordinates the group, was commissioned in 1997 by Havering SSD to evaluate the effectiveness of their occupational therapy service for families of disabled children. This led to her 1999 success in winning the first occupational therapy-led DoH invited competitive tender for a community-based randomised controlled trial (RCT) to compare initial assessment of older people by occupational therapists and by social workers in Cambridgeshire (the "CAMELOT" project). Stewart leads a multidisciplinary team on this with Poland, Harvey and Mugford (both HPP). In the mental health field, Lambert has gained an Eastern Region NHS Research and Development Programme Award and an NHS R&D National Primary Care Researcher Development Award, totalling over £235,000, to develop an RCT of the effectiveness of an occupational therapy lifestyle intervention on panic disorder. Howard’s work on paediatric occupational therapy clinical practice has generated her national study on the conceptual framework of British paediatric occupational therapy. It won the first Joncare Research Award from the National Association for Paediatric Occupational Therapy to support her doctoral studies. Chia is leading clinician and student collaborations to explore the assessment of disability, especially learning disability, and the functional potential of multi-sensory environments. This group now works with three postgraduate research students and two new researchers.
Neuro-musculo-skeletal Therapy: (core members: Jerosch-Herold, Stephenson and Watson) This group is exploring concepts in pain, sensibility and motor behaviour which are increasingly recognised as important to understand, assess and address clinical and functional aspects of disability prevention and rehabilitation. It is coordinated by Watson whose innovative output on patterns of recovery in neurotrauma supports his doctoral studies and builds on collaboration with colleagues from his earlier MRC research at the University of Southampton. Jerosch-Herold is continuing her research on clinical methods for assessing hand sensation after nerve injury with support from the Elizabeth Casson Trust for occupational therapists. She has established two joint research projects, the first to assess the responsiveness of the Shape Texture Identification
TM test and the second, with Rosen, Lundborg and Dahlin (University of Lund), to assess the use of a grating orientation test in measuring outcomes after carpal tunnel release. Stephenson’s exploration of applications of neuroplasticity and concepts of pain in physiotherapy underpins his doctoral studies. With OPT colleagues, he is assessing the use of interferential equipment to treat pain and, with clinical colleagues, the significance of the incidence of alexithymia. This group has now attracted three new researchers and four postgraduate research students who are already presenting at international conferences and gaining research funding.The Development of Practice in Health: (core members: Poland, Richardson, Spalding and Steward) This group brings together research efforts to examine influences on the development of practice across a range of health interests. The group is coordinated by Richardson. She has gained widespread recognition for her research on physiotherapy paradigms and professional knowledge development as well as in the applied ergonomics of back care. She leads an OPT team working with Lindquist and colleagues at the Karolinska Institute, Stockholm, on a longitudinal cohort study of the socialisation of physiotherapy and occupational therapy students. Howard has published on the early progression of therapy students with non-traditional academic experience. Steward, and Atkinson (OPT until May 2000) are undertaking a ten year longitudinal study of new practitioners and also have a research project on the fieldwork triad of student, clinician and tutor. Spalding’s ongoing doctoral research explores the development of patient-centred pre-operative information; and her longitudinal study of the post-qualification learning experiences of occupational therapy students has already led to publications. Spalding and Chia have led collaborations on the development and delivery of Continuing Professional Development initiatives, which have included Lambert’s work on the uses of information technology to build therapy evidence bases from clinical findings. Jerosch-Herold’s links with German occupational therapists have led to an edited book series with Springer-Verlag which is having a continuing impact on the development of empirical literature in occupational therapy in German-speaking countries. Poland came to UEA in 1998 with a sociology background in care-enabling work and in research practices. From 1996, while at the University of Wales, Bangor, she completed funded research projects exploring multi-disciplinary, multi-sector joint working in health, especially in the community care of older people. She led research teams mapping influences on national professional progression including library and information occupations, health care professions and an evaluation of the role of the Welsh National Board for Nursing and Midwifery. She supervised the successful doctoral thesis of Kent (University of Wales, Bangor) which explored professional roles in organ and tissue donation and which was funded by the Welsh Office NHS R&D programme. At UEA she has collaborated on a national research study of pharmacists’ training needs, and on a study of reflective practices in multidisciplinary rehabilitation. She also leads an evaluation of a project on managing the multidisciplinary demands on the orthopaedic services in Suffolk. With Blaxter (HPP) she was commissioned by the HEA/HDA to study older peoples' understandings of social capital and health. Steward’s completed DoH-funded doctoral research on the implications of teleworking for health has generated wider research collaborations in occupational health. One is with Spinks (Science University of Tokyo) and the other, on disabled employment opportunities in virtual workplaces, is with the Association of Occupational Therapists in Japan and Bellaby (Institute of Public Health, University of Salford). Lambert has completed an interdisciplinary paper on organisational anxiety, with Baruch (MGT). This group has attracted three postgraduate research students and three new researchers.
1.b. Promoting Research
The development of research is integral to the activities of the School. Lecturers are expected to engage in research and to promote the School’s lead in specialisms in therapies research. The School's research activities are monitored through the Dean’s annual meetings with each member of faculty, through the annual appraisal process and through theme group reports to the School's Research Committee. The activities are managed by the School Research Committee (which maintains a strategic overview) and by the Senior Lecturer in Therapy Research who directs the research programme. Teaching workloads are arranged to allow staff weekly research time and more extended periods of study leave for research training. In 1999 these arrangements enabled Steward to complete her doctorate. Research project development teams are set up drawing on interdisciplinary and inter-School expertise to design projects and pursue external funding. This takes advantage of the School’s membership of the University’s Health and Professional Group of Schools which has an active policy, supported by top-sliced funds, of encouraging collaborative research between its profession-based Schools.
Research support resources are provided to support the research activities of faculty. For example, research assistant support was secured to pump prime seven pilot research projects in 1999-2000. Staff and students have access to specialist research support staff to help seek resources for study leave, research training or project development. A Research Programme Secretary has been appointed in the School and a Health Research Coordinator has been appointed jointly with HPP, NAM and EDU. The latter post combines University and School strategic investment to generate funded research, especially interdisciplinary research. The School is jointly establishing a medical statistics post with HPP to support research funding proposals and projects. School funding is available for regular contacts with well-recognised researchers to promote collaborative research such as Jerosch-Herold’s links with researchers in hand surgery at the University of Lund.
Research training is provided year-round through MSc modules, inter-School seminars and workshops series and occasional School workshops. New staff are encouraged to register for higher degrees or to attend research methods classes as visiting students.
1.c. Research Infrastructure
The School has excellent physical resources including its award-winning, purpose-built base in The Queen’s Building. Faculty have office-based IT facilities. Research students have a dedicated room with desk-space and computer facilities. Staff and students have access to a computer laboratory and 11 dedicated practical rooms with a wide range of specialist equipment and clinical facilities. The School has two full-time technician posts – one a computer technician and the other supporting audiovisual aids and anatomy and supervised by Shutt who has nationally-recognised expertise in therapies-related IT. Students and staff have access to the University’s computing facilities and to courses on computer-assisted data management and information retrieval. The School has a Resource Room with specialist physical and on-line access to both clinical and research resources for occupational therapy and physiotherapy. Specialist research equipment includes a multi-sensory environment; Kin-Com for measuring movement resistance; electromyograph for measuring electrical activity in muscles; and a spinal mobilisation simulator.
Research Training:
Collaborations:
Dissemination and Training:
In addition staff are encouraged to disseminate their work in fields other than health. This enriches our understanding and promotion of interdisciplinary knowledge building and multidisciplinary clinical practice. For example, Richardson has presented her work on developing professional knowledge at the British Educational Research Association Annual (BERA) Conference in 1996 and 1997, her attendance supported through the Churchill Livingstone Fund. Spalding presented at the BERA Annual Conference in 1998. Faculty have also presented papers at the Annual Conferences of the British Sociological Association Medical Sociology Group in 1996 (Poland), 1997 and 1998 (Poland and Steward); the National Association for Special Education 1999 (Chia); the Dyspraxia Foundation 1999 (Chia); and the ESRC Conference Virtual Society? Get Real! at Brunel University in 2000 (Steward). Lambert presented a joint paper applying a concept of organizational anxiety in organization theory with Baruch (MGT) to the 4
The School has laid good foundations for developing its research student programme. This is based on a fourfold strategy of establishing a system of joint supervisory support, expanding research supervision capacity, securing University and School investment in studentships and undertaking wide-ranging student recruitment.
Joint supervisory support: Eight faculty are now involved in the co-supervision of MPhil and PhD degree students with an innovatory combination of individual, panel and seminar-based interdisciplinary supervision. This system draws on expertise in the other Health Schools where appropriate and provides support both for the students and for new supervisors. In addition, Richardson, who coordinates the postgraduate research programme, gained a UEA Teaching and Learning Fellowship with Neil Cooper (NAM) to develop a web-based interactive support network for postgraduate research students.
Expanding research supervision capacity: Three faculty now have doctorates, with two more due to complete by Dec 2001. Three more have registered for doctorates and a further six are developing projects for doctoral programmes. Research training is enhanced by research methods modules.
Investment in studentships: University investment has provided a full-time research studentship and a clinician-supportive part-time studentship, both in occupational therapy. School funds have been used to support two research studentships in partnership with external NHS development funding at James Paget Hospital (current) and at Papworth Hospital (2001-02).
Postgraduate student recruitment: There are now ten PhD students, including two full time students. One has now completed and three more are on course to complete in the 2000-01 academic year.
The School contributes to a fortnightly inter-disciplinary, programme of health research seminars, both formal and informal, across the Health Schools. Faculty are prominent in organising and participating in programmes of research development events in clinicians’ special interest groups including primary care, mental health and neuro-rehabilitation. For instance, the successful UEA-based regional Musculoskeletal Research Group built on School faculty research development with clinicians. School members have had access to the interdisciplinary Summer Schools at the University of Wales, Bangor on advanced research publishing.
The quality of research students’ work is reflected in their early success in gaining external funding and competitive awards to support their studies and in research posts: Mohseni-Bandpei has gained a post-doctoral research post within the School; and Rhys-Williams is Research Director at Oxford Brookes University.
The School’s approach to research development is integrated with the clinical and professional needs of therapists and of the services in which they work. Most School research projects, including postgraduate work, have been grounded in cooperation with public health and social care services, voluntary and self-help groups, health professional special interest groups and health care technology businesses. Examples include Stewart's work with Havering Social Services Department to evaluate the effectiveness of paediatric occupational therapy services; Richardson’s leadership of a trial of physiotherapy assessment in the Norfolk and Norwich Hospital Accident and Emergency service; and Lambert’s trial of occupational therapy-led lifestyle treatment of panic disorder. The latter is particularly notable for the breadth of its collaboration, which involves OPT, HPP, two community Health Trusts in Norfolk and Suffolk, a GP practice in Ipswich and Barking and Havering Health Authority. Howard has conducted a research-based review of the paediatric service of a community health NHS Trust. Poland’s participative community-based research continues with evaluations of two pilot projects on disseminating research information to disadvantaged community groups, UK-wide and in London, undertaken in conjunction with the Association for Research in the Voluntary and Community Sector. Stewart’s partnership with the Great Yarmouth Joint Occupational Therapists project involves clinicians in Norfolk Social Services and three NHS organisations in an evaluation of an occupational therapy initiative to address community needs. Richardson’s published research on the risk assessment of manual handling in the workplace arose from joint work with occupational health physiotherapists and physicians (AR Jones and A Cockcroft) at the Royal Free Hospital. Poland is supervising the doctoral project of Anne Squire at the University of Wales, Bangor, which addresses the community health promotion needs of older people in Romania with Help Age International. Watson’s work on recovery in neurotrauma has generated links with the School of Physiotherapy, University of Sydney. Chia is undertaking a comparative validation of paediatric occupational therapy assessment in UK and Hong Kong populations with Chow (Polytechnic University of Hong Kong). Richardson is working on a five year longitudinal extension to her doctoral study of physiotherapy students’ understanding of their profession, with Arbrant (University of Linköping, Sweden). With Higgs (University of Sydney) she is developing the epistemology of practice.
The School is committed to developing a professional evidence base within the wider community of clinical practitioners. Faculty, new researchers and postgraduate research students have been prominent, often by invitation, at health professional research conferences, including all the Annual Conferences of the College of Occupational Therapists and all the Annual Congresses of the Chartered Society for Physiotherapy between 1996 and 2000. Other conferences attended include: the regular conferences of health professional specialist groups such as the Occupational Therapy Special Interest Group - Learning Disabilities, 1997 (Chia); the National Conference on Mental Health Innovations, London 1997 (Lambert); the Neuropharmacology Conference for the Forum of European Neuroscience in Berlin 1998 (Stephenson); the National Association of Paediatric Occupational Therapists in 1996 and 1998 (Chia) 1999 (Howard); the British Association of Hand Therapists and the British Society for Surgery of the Hand, 1999 (Jerosch-Herold); and four staff and student papers (including Watson) at the Annual Congress, 2000 of the Chartered Society for Physiotherapy.
Faculty regularly facilitate regional practitioner research training workshops, often leading to new research projects. For example, Watson has linked a sequence of clinician training events with a series of clinically-based single case experimental designs to investigate the effectiveness of lycra pressure garments for remediating movement disorders in adults with brain injury, with resources from a manufacturer (Camp).
The School disseminates news of ongoing and completed research activities through its newsletter OPTions and on the website home pages of research theme leaders.
Staffing Policy:
All new faculty are supported in obtaining MAs and PhDs and in gaining experience of research and conference presentations. This programme of research development is overseen by the Research Committee and underpinned by the appraisal process. Younger or more inexperienced researchers are mentored by a senior member of faculty, are supported through the relevant theme groups to ensure that their research is not undertaken in isolation and are prioritised in accessing School financial support to attend conferences. The benefits of this were highlighted in comments by the recent QAA Subject Review panel which, in rating the School’s teaching at 23/24, noted how research strengths informed learning at all levels. New members of faculty appointed since 1996 are now demonstrating their research potential. Lambert, a specialist in Community Mental Health Occupational Therapy, and Stewart, a specialist in community settings, have both generated funded national research projects.
Additional Observations
Since 1996 the School has secured 22 external research-related grants, a number of which are based on interdisciplinary collaborations with well-established research partners such as UEA colleagues in HPP or EDU. These grants have confirmed the quality and relevance of our research themes; and the collaborations have ensured growing success in securing competitively allocated funding, including national research programmes, limited tender bids, NHS R&D funding, peer-reviewed professional body funding and funding from the medical research charities, including the Arthritis Research Council and the Wellcome Trust. Research funding has also been obtained from individual health trusts, local authorities, professional special interest groups and voluntary organisations.
Such funding success confirms the rapid development of the School’s research profile since its foundation in 1990 at a time when the therapy professions nationally were taking their first steps into a research culture. Starting with a small core of research-experienced faculty in 1990, the School has now established strong research leadership in all theme domains with expertise in both qualitative and quantitative methodologies. The growing team of new researchers will have further impact on the field in the next five years.
1) Pathobiological Sciences
RESEARCH OUTPUT
Staff published over 200 peer reviewed journal articles (including Nature, Nature Genetics, Trends in Genetics and Clinical Microbiology Reviews), 34 invited reviews or leading articles and 20 book chapters. Research was disseminated through 31 national and 114 international invited conference presentations and over 70 national and 250 international conference abstracts.
Funding from charities, research councils, UK government, EU and industry resulted in 70 grants greater than 50k, with a total spend of 5.7M. Income increased by 50% during the period, with significant increases in EU and UK government funding. Grants worth more than 2.5M have been awarded since 1/1/00, with significant increases in research council and Wellcome Trust funding.
Included in 25 recent awards are a Wellcome Trust Programme grant to Thomas (655k with Phillips, UoA14), Wellcome Trust grants to Adams (120k) and Gawler (140k with Wray, UoA7) the first EPSRC Platform grant (348k) and a Depuy Technology Partnership Award (408k) to Ingham (with Fisher, UoA30) and 3 JREI awards.
An MRC Link grant (720k; 50% from industry) was awarded to Killington (with GlaxoSmithKline, Imperial and Rowlands, UoA14), an MRC Co-operative award to Kerr (250k with UoAs 4&14) and a NERC grant to Smith (189k with Dunn, UoA14). Nineteen members will hold at least one award of more than 50k on the census date.An extensive network of collaborators includes scientists/clinicians from 21 national institutes and 19 international institutes in 15 countries (eg. CDC Atlanta, Yale, Max Planck, Cologne, Federal Universade de Rio). Members hold 24 industrial consultancies, edit 18 journals, reviewed 390 journal manuscripts in over 75 journals and sit on 14 national and 11 international scientific committees. They advise UK government, EU legislative and international agencies and contributed to public awareness of science via workshops, lectures, open days and TV programmes.
RESEARCH GROUPS, THEIR ACTIVITIES AND ACHIEVEMENTS
1) Pathobiological Sciences
Members: Adams (DA), Agnew (AA), Cove (JC), Eady (AE), Evans (GE), Gawler (DG), Heritage (JH), Holland (KH), Hollingdale (MH), Ingham (EI), Kerr (KK), Killington (RK), McConkey (GM), Shaw (MS), Smith (JS), Thomas (CT), Wood (EW).
Associates: UoA1, UoA2, UoA3, UoA4, UoA7, UoA14, UoA28, UoA30.
Prime activities of the group and how it operates.
Research Highlights During the RAE Period
Disease susceptibility and cellular responses. Cell differentiation, activation and proliferation in health and disease is a central theme underlying studies on chronic inflammatory and autoimmune diseases, tissue engineering and oncogenesis. Ingham and Shaw study chronic inflammatory processes. Ingham with Fisher (UoA30) identified processes involved in inflammation mediated by TNF
Molecular epidemiology and Infection. Research centres on the generation and use of molecular probes for population level studies, on the genetic basis of disease and on parallel evaluation of mechanisms of colonisation, transmission and virulence. Studies on nosocomial infections are pursued through direct involvement with diagnostic services and interaction with clinicians, while an international network of collaborations supports studies of parasitic disease. Evans studies the epidemiology of fungal infections in normal and immunocompromised hosts. With Jackson (Aberystwyth), he developed a novel molecular method for strain identification of Trichophyton rubrum (the commonest cause of human dermatophyte infections, GE3&4) and with Hay (St Thomas’) a serodiagnostic method for Penicillium marneffei infections in AIDS patients (GE2). Heritage has one of the few laboratories with expertise in Acinetobacter spp despite the growing importance of these organisms as multiply resistant nosocomial pathogens. With Hawkey (UoA14) he discovered that Acinetobacter spp withstand desiccation; this is highly unusual for Gram-negative bacteria, with
implications for survival in the hospital environment (JH2&4). He used REP-PCR to identify reservoirs of an epidemic strain during an outbreak of infection in an adult intensive care unit (JH3). With Forbes (UoA14) he revealed that an antibiotic resistance marker present in genetically modified (GM) maize could survive intact in ovine saliva, rumen fluid and silage effluent (JH1). This relates to his role on UK and EU advisory committees on GM food and feed biosafety. Kerr used molecular epidemiological approaches to reveal that water (including non-carbonated bottled water) is a major vehicle in the transmission of Stenotrophomonas maltophilia, a multiply resistant Gram-negative bacterium producing infections in children with cystic fibrosis (KK1). He also demonstrated that Acanthamoeba polyphaga was an important reservoir host for Burkholderia cepacia (KK2) suggesting that endamoebic persistence is an important link in the transmission of these opportunistic pathogens via contaminated water. Holland showed that lipases are major colonisation factors for staphylococci and propionibacteria, the dominant resident species on human skin (KH1&2). He further characterised factors involved in virulence (heat shock proteins) and its regulation (KH3&4). His results question the pivotal role of quorum sensing in Staphylococcus aureus virulence regulation and emphasise the importance of shift-down of growth rate in triggering production of key pathogenic determinants. Ingham (with Foster, Sheffield) demonstrated the importance of sigma B in the regulation of virulence in S.aureus (EI1). Eady’s studies on propionibacteria and her experience of systematic reviewing (AE2), led to a re-evaluation of the role of these organisms in acne pathogenesis (AE3). Smith elucidated the mechanism of cytoplasmic inheritance in microsporidian parasites and proposed that vertical transmission is an ancestral transmission route possibly of ubiquitous importance within this parasite phylum (JS1&2). High rates of transplacental transmission have also been noted with Toxoplasma gondii, identifying the need for wider re-evaluation of the importance of vertical transmission. In vitro studies of parasite growth and differentiation have resulted in description of the acute virulence phenotype in Toxoplasma and analysis of antigenic polymorphism between strains (JS4). This led to the development of a novel technique, MGE:PCR, which allows discrimination of strains directly from infected tissue (Int J Parasit, 2001). Shaw reported on genetic control of susceptibility to intracellular macrophage pathogens, including visceral leishmaniaisis, through large-scale family studies in Brazil, using segregation analysis, and linkage and association approaches (MS3). Studies of cutaneous leishmaniasis in Venezuala, Peru and Bolivia are characterising cellular immune responses (MS1&2) and genetic susceptibility. Through studies of schistosomiasis in Kenya, Agnew (with Butterworth, Cambridge and colleagues in Brazil, Columbia, Denmark, Netherlands and Kenya) was the first to demonstrate that adult worms were susceptible to immunological control (AA1). This led to the identification of functionally important molecules in the adult worm including DNA binding proteins (AA4), anticoagulants, ‘tegumental’ acetylcholinesterase and the related ACh receptor (AA2), which may be important determinants of parasite survival.
2) Reproductive Biomedicine
Members: Handyside (AH), Joyce (IJ), Kendall (EK)
Associates: UoA1, UoA14.
Prime activities of the group and how it operates. This is a new group combining expertise in preimplantation genetics (AH), genomics (EK) and ovarian biology (IJ) which utilises genomic approaches to identify and study the function of genes important in mammalian reproduction and early development, in human and model species. Handyside collaborates with the Assisted Conception Unit, Leeds General Infirmary giving access to human gametes and embryos for research. As co-director of the Leeds PGD Centre, he provides specialised expertise and laboratory facilities for single cell genetic analysis. The group has close links to Gosden’s group (UoA1) and is developing collaborations with Animal Sciences (Forbes, UoA14), postgenomics (Hope, Coates, UoA14) and Paediatrics (Bonthron, UoA1).
Research Highlights During the RAE period.
Handyside (with Delhanty, UCL and Winston, Imperial) identified a high incidence of postzygotic nuclear and chromosomal defects in cleavage stage human embryos, indicating that cell cycle checkpoints do not operate at these stages (AH2&3). To investigate these further, comparative genomic hybridisation and other methods were developed for molecular cytogenetic analysis at the single cell level (AH1). Gene expression studies in early human embryos included demonstrating non-imprinted expression of XIST in both male and female human blastocysts (AH4). Clinical developments in PGD and single cell genetics include use of a novel strategy to detect chromosome imbalance in embryos from translocation carriers. Also development of PCR strategies to detect mutations in spinal muscular atrophy (Mol. Hum. Reprod, 2001) and a rare genodermatosis (with McGrath, St Thomas’, Prenat. Diagnosis, 2000) resulted in several pregnancies confirmed as unaffected at birth. Joyce (with Eppig, Jackson Labs, Maine) established that the oocyte promotes the functional heterogeneity of granulosa cells, that this oocyte function is developmentally regulated (IJ2) and identified GDF-9 as a candidate mediator of this action (IJ3). He also examined the potential for manipulating the metabolic axis to improve ovarian superstimulatory protocols (IJ1&4). Kendall, (with others at UMDS, London) cloned and sequenced 16Mb of human Xq22 and identified several disease associated and other genes. These included a family of mitochondrial import proteins (EK3), one of which is mutated in families with progressive sensorineural deafness (EK1), a novel dystrophin homologue (EK2) and a human homologue of a rat follicle stimulating hormone primary response gene. Large genomic rearrangements were identified, in particular duplications involved in Pelizaeus-Merzbacher disease (EK4) and premature ovarian failure.
RESEARCH POLICY, PROMOTION AND MANAGEMENT
In 1998 the FBS was established as a single resource centre to integrate 7 previously autonomous Departments into 3 Schools. Subsequent reorganisation of research groupings cut across traditional disciplinary boundaries in order to maximise interactions both within and outside FBS. Biomedicine was formed to provide a multidisciplinary basis for interacting with Medicine and Engineering and research within UoAs 7 and 14. Pathobiological Sciences, led by Ingham and Reproductive Biomedicine led by Handyside are the primary organisational units driving research initiatives, collaborations, meetings and seminar programmes. These link to the Faculty Research Committee, chaired by the Research Dean, which oversees and manages research, with responsibilities for strategic development, infrastructure applications, identifying funding opportunities and stimulating, supporting and co-ordinating responses to these. This in turn is linked to the University Research Board which formulates and co-ordinates the University’s response to major external opportunities. Underpinning this is a matrix of practical support for implementation and administration provided locally by Schools and centrally by the Research Support Unit.
RESEARCH ENVIRONMENT AND INFRASTRUCTURE
The 10 year plan for FBS, funded by HEFCE and the University, has been to house all research groupings in conjoined buildings. This will be achieved in 2002 when all the remaining members of Pathobiological Sciences are relocated, thus fulfilling the vision of contiguous laboratory space for researchers working on whole organisms through to single molecules, promoting even further opportunities for multidisciplinary research. These buildings, which include the Medical School, are adjacent to Leeds General Infirmary, which with St. James’ Hospital, is the UK’s largest NHS Acute Trust. This optimises and enhances our interaction with clinicians in a wide range of disciplines, facilitates access to patients and clinical material and ensures that medical need is one major driver of our research agenda. Our research operates bidirectionally, with our clinical colleagues benefiting from the cutting edge facilities within FBS. Recent additions to these include; the Astbury Structural Biology Centre and adjacent NMR facility; a new EM suite; a computer graphics modelling cluster; a bioinformatics suite and level 3 containment facilities. Our research also benefits from expertise in X-ray crystallography, deconvolution microscopy, cell micro-injection and sorting, proteomics and large scale fermentation. Laboratories newly furnished for the Reproductive Biomedicine group provide specialised facilities for embryo culture, micromanipulation, single cell genetics and molecular biology. They have also been equipped for molecular cytogenetics, including in situ hybridisation, comparative genomic hybridisation and automated DNA fragment and sequence analysis.
RELATIONSHIPS WITH RESEARCH USERS
Beneficiaries of research in Biomedicine include: WHO, EU and UK government bodies, NHS, clinicians, international healthcare and orthopaedic industry and patients. Members have responded to government initiatives in the areas of food safety, control of infection and orthopaedic biomaterials and have been recipients of 15 central government funded grants. They work alongside the healthcare and orthopaedic industry with 30 industrially funded grants and numerous consultancies, including several longstanding partnerships (Holland with Unilever, Eady with Galderma, Evans with Novartis). Evans has extensive international links (China, India, South America) and has done more than perhaps any other leading mycologist to ensure that the third world is not denied access to research driven diagnostic mycology services by technology transfer. Smith has advised the WHO on toxoplasmosis. Through his membership of UK and EU Committees relating to GM Food and Feed, Heritage has a lead role in formulating national and European policy and advises the Food Standards Agency on public consultations in this controversial area. Kerr influences policy related to the control of nosocomial and food-borne infections via membership of various committees (see Esteem). A significant part of the work of Eady is driven by clinical need and with Holland she carries out extensive national and international pre-clinical testing and clinical trials of dermatological therapies on behalf of the pharmaceutical industry, many in conjunction with the Dermatology Clinical Trials Unit (LGI).
Research Management and Support In September 1996, two departments (Radiodiagnosis and Diagnostic Radiography) were amalgamated to form the Department of Medical Imaging (MI). This was followed in 1999 by the amalgamation of four previously independent departments (Physiotherapy, Occupational Therapy, Orthoptics and Radiotherapy) to form the Department of Allied Health Professions (AHP). Links between AHP and MI were strengthened through an inter-departmental research committee which has fostered the development of a research culture through multidisciplinary research seminar and common staff development programmes and by identifying strategic research links and opportunities. A Senior Research Fellow was appointed to support individual members of staff, identify research opportunities, help less experienced staff in applying for and securing external funding and to advise the Heads of AHP and MI on research strategy. The collaborative and interdisciplinary approach to research has provided effective support and mentoring for staff developing new research programmes. Further support has been provided through the development of strong collaborative links with experienced researchers elsewhere in the School of Health Sciences, School of Biological Sciences and the Faculty of Medicine. The management of research projects rests with grant holders who report through the interdepartmental research committee (or departmental research committees) to Heads of Department who are in turn responsible to the Dean of the Faculty of Medicine for overall strategy in this area.
Research Groups: Profiles, activities and achievements.
A. Health Care & Professional Practice: Staff are drawn from the disciplines of health psychology, public health, gerontology, occupational therapy and medical sociology. Work has focused on cardiac rehabilitation, risk factor identification, ageing, the evaluation of service delivery and professional education and development. Total external grant income (including directly administered, NHS administered and collaborative funding) during the review period was £1,469,234.
Bogg and Bundred in collaboration with the Department of Psychology (E. Thornton) have highlighted the importance of psycho-social factors in cardiac rehabilitation. With funding from the NHS Executive North West (£10,000), they demonstrated the importance of gender in understanding interactions between psycho-social and physical responses and patient perceptions of their disorder (Brit. J. Therapy Rehab. 1998
The research of Gosney, Sixsmith and Green relates to ageing. Gosney has investigated the impact of disease in the elderly. Building on previous research on cancer treatment in the elderly (Age & Ageing 27:417-419, 1998; Geriatric Medicine 28:67-69, 1998), in collaboration with colleagues in the University of Southampton and supported by the NHS funding (£54,369), a systematic review of colorectal cancer treatment demonstrated that surgery should not be denied on the basis of age alone and that chemotherapy was an effective treatment option even in advanced disease (Lancet, 2000; BMJ, 2000). These findings are important given the new national focus on services for the elderly and concerns over ageism and treatment in the NHS. Studies on levels of influenza vaccination in Merseyside, which showed that even when available it was being declined (J. Adv. Nursing, 2000), lead to a randomised placebo-controlled trial to study the cost-effectiveness of flu vaccine in fit healthy 65-74 year olds with funding from the Health Technology Assessment (£212,257) and NHS Executive Northwest R&D (£40,000). Results led to a further study in collaboration with colleagues in the Department of Clinical Chemistry on immunocompromised older patients supported by the NHS Executive North West R&D (£31,500) and Royal Liverpool and Broadgreen University Hospitals NHS Trust (RLBUH, £31,500). Funding was also obtained from the NHS (£76,500) to investigate the management of stroke. Sixsmith’s research on planning care for the elderly
is part of a cross-European collaborative initiative supported by EU funding (Total 1.5m Euros; Liverpool share £227,000). An intelligent system to support health care managers in planning and implementing service delivery for older people was developed and evaluated, attracting international interest in the fields of health care and gerontology (in Gerontechnology, 1998; see also Sixsmith et al, 1997, In Heumann, L and Miller, S. eds. Managing Care, Risk and Responsibility Chicago: Systed 97:65-69). With support from the Anchor Trust (£16,000) and the UK Medlink programme (£30,000), and in collaboration with Manchester University and Irsisys Ltd., novel community alarms and intelligent monitoring systems for older residents in sheltered housing schemes were developed and tested in field trials. This resulted in the development of a ‘smart sensor’ for detecting falls (J.Telemed.Telecare, 2000). Green and Sixsmith have addressed the issue of technology transfer, flagging the importance of professional and lay attitudes and needs to the adoption of novel technological solutions in health care (Brit. J. Therapy Rehab, 1998). They have also applied their expertise in this area to technological innovations in professional education and development. Thus EU funds (£190,000) have been secured to support comparative evaluation of technology-led occupational therapy training (J. Telemed. Telecare, 2000). Similarly, a development grant (£11,254) enabled a new system for fieldwork educators to be researched (Brit. J. Occ. Ther, 1996). Results have been presented at various international conferences (e.g. 10th International Conference on Database and Expert System Applications, Florence, 1999; International Federation on Ageing Conference, Buenos Aires, 2000).Frith’s research focuses on ethical issues in clinical research and practice. Funding awarded prior to the review period supported a collaborative systematic review of socio-cultural issues relating to randomised controlled trials (Health Technology Assessment, 1997; Health Service Research Methods: A guide to best practice, BMJ Books, pp108-116, 1998). Related work has flagged implications of evidence-based medicine for general practice (General Practice and Ethics, 1999), purchasing and priority setting (Health Care Analysis, 1999), the ethical dimensions of health policy and practice in relation to risk management (‘Clinical risk management and ethics’ in Clinical Risk Management, Butterwork Heinneman, 1999) and patient choice (‘Evidence-based health, patient consent and consumerism’ in The evidence-based primary care handbook, The Royal Society of Medicine Press pp79-89, 1999). Recent work has addressed issues raised by reproductive technology and reproductive health care (e.g. Midwifery Ethics, 1996; Ethics & Community Edward Arnold pp115-124, 1998). Results were presented both nationally and internationally (BMA International Conference on Priorities in Health Care, 1998; International Association of Bioethics 5
th World Congress, 2000). Future work will investigate the ethics of confidentiality as applied to research.Stanistreet’s research on public health strategies for the reduction of violent deaths, supported by funding from the NHS Executive North West (total £110,000), informed regional public health policy (e.g. a report to the Regional Director of Public Health published as: ‘Suicide and deliberate self harm in young people’ in The Health of the North West of England, 1998), and revealed the scale of the problem of mortality resulting from self-injury and self-poisoning in young men. With support from the Wirral Health Authority (£15,000) this work led to the development of an appropriate model for a suicide audit mechanism as standard audit procedures based on coroner’s reports concealed the full extent of deaths resulting from suicide. This area has been flagged as a national priority in health care. The results have been presented at various international conferences (e.g. 16
th World Conference on Health Promotion and Health Education Puerto Rico, 1998; 7th European symposium on suicide and suicidal behaviour, Belgium, 1998). Future research in this area will move on to examine male attitudes towards, and access to, health services. In collaboration with colleagues from the Department of Public Health (Bruce) and Department of Education (Taylor), Stanistreet has also contributed to research into postgraduate education in public health, investigating how courses can be enhanced using distance learning paradigms in place of high levels of classroom contact (e.g. Eur. J. Pub. Health, 2000) and on planning pan-European public health education (e.g. 2nd International Conference of Health: Precariousness and Vulnerability in Europe).The effects of the introduction of new treatment strategies in primary care have been investigated by Gabbay. He demonstrated that shared care improved outcomes, efficiency and patient satisfaction in the treatment of drug abuse (Addiction Research 7:129-147, 1999). In a randomised, controlled trial, cognitive behaviour therapy and non-directive counselling were demonstrated to be more clinically and cost effective over the short term than standard GP care for the treatment of depression (BMJ, 2000).
B. Neurological Systems & Processes: Staff in this research group are drawn primarily from Orthoptics and Medical Imaging. Research has focused on behavioural and structural approaches to neural function in human subjects. Total external grant income during the review period was £176,000.
Knox obtained funding from the Wellcome Trust (£72,000), Royal Society (£10,000) and Pace Fund (£8,000) for work on oculomotor and visuomotor control. His work on the initiation of smooth pursuit eye movement demonstrated a key role for cognitive processing, suggesting that theories which regard this class of eye movements as a simple visuomotor reflex are inadequate (Neuroreport 1996, 1998; Vision Research 39:3459-3464, 1999). Support from the Chief Scientist’s Office, Scotland (£67,000) allowed hypotheses developed in animal work (e.g. Exp. Brain Res. 116:510-518, 1997; Vision Research 40:1001-1010, 2000) to be applied to human oculomotor control (IOVS, 2000). The results have implications for the understanding and treatment of squint (Brit. J. Ophthalmol 84, 1071-1074, 2000). Results were presented at a number of international and national meetings and invited seminars (e.g. US Society for Neuroscience 1998 & 2000; ECVP 1998; European Conference on Eye Movements 1997,1999; Physiological Society 1996, 1997, 1999; Jules Stein Eye Centre, UCLA, 1998; Mississippi Medical Centre, Jackson MS, 2000). Exploiting expertise gained in the clinical setting working with children and their parents (Br. J. Ophthalmol 84:257-962) this group, in collaboration with the Institute of Child Health (D. Cook), are also examining visuomotor control in children born prematurely. At the other end of the age range, funding was obtained (Institute of Human Ageing, £15,000) to investigate the effect of ageing on visuomotor control. Clinical aspects of oculomotor control and dysfunction have also been investigated. Funding from the Wellcome Trust (£4,000) supported pilot experiments on smooth eye movement performance in schizophrenia (Neuroreport, 1999), which are now the subject of a full study in collaboration with Department of Psychiatry (R. Morriss). Rowe investigated oculomotor control in a range of conditions including idiopathic intracranial hypertension (Int. J. Obesity, 1999) convergence insufficiency and infantile esotropia (Strabismus, 2000). In a new collaboration with colleagues from Clinical Engineering and the RLBUH, the expertise of this group in visual field testing and assessment (Eye, 1998; British Orthoptic Journal 55:57-65, 1998) has been used to develop a modification of a standard clinical instrument to allow the measurement of modified attentional visual fields.
Sluming, in collaboration with colleagues from the Magnetic Resonance and Imaging Research Centre (MARIARC; N. Roberts, Q. Gong) and Gosney (e.g. J. Am. Geriatrics Soc. 1997), is developing a new programme of research on plasticity and specificity in neurological development across the lifespan. University funds (£18,554) supported pilot studies investigating the relationship between neuropsychological test performance and regional brain volume and between regional brain volume, test performance and occupational specialisation. This research has provided evidence of use-dependent development of grey matter in the left pre-frontal cortex of musicians.
In the immediate future, behavioural, structural and clinical approaches will be combined to investigate the effects of ageing on the nervous system bringing together the work of Sluming, Knox and Gosney, supported in part by recently secured NHS funds (£22,000). Future work by the group will also address the clinical assessment of neurological impairment with funding from the Sensory Integration Network UK & Ireland (£5,779) and the NHS Executive North West (£27,643).
Ling, in collaboration with colleagues from the Department of Obstetrics and Gynaecology, the Health & Community Care Research Unit (HaCCRU) and the University of Manchester, with funding from the North West Regional Health Authority (£94,000) has addressed the importance of client centred care in relation to women’s reproductive health. She has focussed on maternity care and in the context of general practice referrals for menorrhagia (Reproductive Health Matters, 1997; Ethnicity and Health, 1998). Collaborative research carried out by Ling and Frith, addressed the impact on clinical practice of the Department of Health’s ‘Changing Childbirth’ initiative and demonstrated the need for ongoing audit to ensure that guidelines relating to client-centred maternity care are adopted in practice. Results have been disseminated at a number of major meetings (20
th International Conference on Qualitative Health Research, Bournemouth 1996; 25th Annual Scientific Meeting, Association of University Departments of General Practice, Newcastle 1996; 28th Annual Conference of the British Sociological Association, Edinburgh 1996.)Gabbay’s research has focussed on methods of contraception. The influence of lubrication and brand on condom failure was investigated in a cohort study (Contraception, 1996; Brit. J. Family Planning, 1997). Subsequently, funding was obtained from the NHS Executive North West (£60,000) for a randomised controlled trial on the effects of additional lubrication on condom failure. Commercial funding from London International Group (£10,000) allowed a qualitative study to be linked to the trial, in which subjects’ willingness to participate and attitudes to condoms were examined.
Scutt and Walton are developing a programme of research on predictors of human fertility. Initial work carried out in collaboration with colleagues from the Department of Biological Sciences, used imaging techniques to monitor changes in female symmetry across the menstrual cycle (e.g. Walton, Ethology and Sociobiology, 1996). Subsequent work focussed on predicting ovulation (Scutt, Human Reproduction, 1996) and the success of the studies on female fertility initiated further work relating symmetry in males to hormonal variation. Work undertaken at the Reproductive Medicine Unit at Liverpool Women’s Hospital on couples presenting with fertility problems demonstrated significant relationships between male asymmetry and reduced male fertility. (Human Reproduction, 1998; Evolution and Human Behaviour 19:273-282, 1998; 21:163-183, 2000). On the basis of these studies, an exploration of circadian and infradian hormonal rhythms in males has been undertaken in collaboration with the Department of Clinical Chemistry, Royal Liverpool University Hospital Trust supported by a Wellcome Trust Award for Innovative Research (£45,541). Work on breast asymmetry also led to a programme of research addressing the risk of breast cancer (Brit. J. Radiology, 1997) attracting funding from the Royal College of Radiologists (£5,000). A new development, building on Walton’s expertise in ultrasonography (e.g. Brit. J. Urol, 1996; Brit. J. Sports Med., 1997) involves the use of this technique to investigate the relationships between developmental stability, miscarriage and assisted conception, and also the assessment of foetal breast asymmetry.
Mechanisms and practices for promoting research: A key element in establishing, sustaining and developing a vital research culture has been our multidisciplinary seminar programme, designed to bring staff together across traditional boundaries, to expose them to new issues, ideas, techniques and opportunities. The programme has allowed staff to present their own research (or where it was at an early stage of development their ideas for research) in a supportive environment, and also brought in external speakers. To further develop the research culture, research groups have been encouraged to meet informally with colleagues from across the University who have similar interests (e.g. the Vision Forum, which brings together researchers in vision from Psychology, Orthoptics and Ophthalmology). Internally, University criteria for promotion reflect the significance both the University and Departments place on research. The University supports new research through competitive bidding pump-priming funds and research studentships. All of the groups in this submission have received pump-priming support within the census period (total £30,000) and four University postgraduate studentships were allocated to staff in AHP and MI. To promote research externally, information about research in progress and new projects (including news of research funding and job and studentship opportunities) is provided on the Departmental Web Site. Research contacts have been encouraged within the School of Health Sciences through the School research forum and joint research interest days. The success of these strategies is illustrated by shared grants and projects in each of the three groups.
Research Infrastructure and research student training: AHP and MI are housed in a single, centrally placed building, shared with the Health & Community Care Research Unit, in close proximity to related departments such as Clinical Psychology and Primary Care. Staff have dedicated, networked PCs with on-site support. Specialist research facilities are available on site (e.g. oculomotor and neuropsychological laboratories) and at associated research and clinical departments (e.g. MRI scanner in MARIARC; gait analysis laboratory at Alder Hey). Clinical practice rooms for research involving human subjects and rooms with full AVA and multimedia equipment are also available. Access to a number of specialist data sets offers valuable opportunities for analysis (e.g. ongoing projects involve the analysis of 14,000 mammograms held in MI as part of the Liverpool Breast Cancer Risk Factor study). Postgraduate student training and support is provided through the University Graduate School system, the University’s Centre for Careers and Academic Practice and the University staff development programme. Supervisory teams link less with more experienced research supervisors and there is an annual procedure for monitoring research student progress. Part-time registration of clinical colleagues has been encouraged.
Interdisciplinary and collaborative research: The research profile indicates the extent of interdisciplinary collaboration. Honorary clinical appointments have been used strategically to encourage further clinical links. All research groups have a well established and developing network of national and international collaborators (e.g. Gosney with the University of Southampton, Knox with the Centre for Neuroscience, Edinburgh; Green and Bundred with McMaster University, Ontario, Canada; Sixsmith with Free University of Amsterdam, National Institute for Health and Welfare, Finland and University of Heidelberg, Germany). Senior staff from both AHP and MI sit on a range of academic and research committees within the University and associated Hospital Trusts, and are thus well place to identify emerging opportunities for collaboration within the University and more widely.
Relationships with industry, the public sector and other research users: Active research links have been promoted with a number of companies. Funding and other support for research during the census period was provided by: Advanced Technology Laboratories, Acuson UK, Western Psychological Services, Manchester United Football Club, Prodrive Subbaru Rally Driving Team, 3M Healthcare, Carl Zeiss Ltd, Irsisys Ltd, British Telecom, Anchor Housing, Cambridge Pharma Company and On Lok Senior Health Services. The research programme is responsive to both local and national priorities (e.g. Saving Lives: Our Healthier Nation 1999a; Meeting the Challenge: A strategy for the Allied Health Professions, 2000). Staff are informed about the needs of consumers and clients by direct interaction.
Staffing policy: University policy with respect to staffing makes clear that no appointment can be made to an academic post without a clear demonstration of research ability and/or potential. This is a particular challenge in certain subject areas where the pool of trained researchers from which the University recruits is small. Specific attention has therefore been paid to the research training needs of staff. Within the census period six members of staff were awarded MSc’s; two (Scutt and Rowe) completed PhD’s. Another PhD was obtained after the census period and a further eleven members of staff are registered for higher degrees. Staff with clinical commitments are encouraged to align these with their research interests and collaborate with clinical colleagues. New staff are assigned a research mentor, and at an early stage are encouraged to participate in both the interdepartmental research seminar programme and informal meetings at the group level. The contribution of staff to the research agenda is monitored and research training needs identified from portfolios of activity which are reviewed regularly by Heads of Department and the Dean of the Faculty. Research skills training is provided both proactively and by workshop-based Research Clinics run on a responsive basis; provision has also been made for staff to attend appropriate external courses. Further training, support and advice is provided by the Senior Research Fellow, the interdepartmental research committee and the School of Health Sciences Research Forum.
Self-assessment: The achievements of the three research groups have been nationally competitive, and in each case there is evidence of international excellence. Thus each group has attracted significant external funds to support their research from UK funding agencies employing the most rigorous levels of peer-review. In addition each group has publications in journals with international as well as national profiles, and there are collaborative links with overseas colleagues of high standing. Research results have been widely disseminated including through international conference presentations and have informed health policy in areas identified as a national priority.
Following the overall improvement in the quality ratings of Goldsmiths College units of assessment in the 1996 RAE, the College has sought to consolidate and invest further in its research culture. The College has become a member of the ‘94’ Group’. The Human Resources strategy prioritizes research through appointments, probation, staff development, travel and conference allowances, and promotion. Postgraduate research students are a large and growing section of the College population. In addition to departmental specific ICT and repro facilities provided, there are dedicated PGR hot-desk facilities in our research precinct and the College is currently developing a further large property, as a dedicated PGR Centre with a relocated Research Office, meeting rooms, common rooms and further ICT facilities (completion September 2001).
Unit of Psychotherapeutic Studies (UPS)
UPS is situated within Professional and Community Education (PACE) This is a new entity within the College, formed following major reorganisation in 1997-8. The rationale for creating UPS was to consolidate the work of specialists within the broad area of psychotherapy, counselling, group psychotherapy and art psychotherapy, to give opportunities for cross-disciplinary teaching and research, and to enable staff and students to participate in the wider debates concerning psychotherapy, counselling and the arts therapies as disciplines and professions. The Unit’s programmes include: art psychotherapy, counselling (both psychodynamic and humanistic), group psychotherapy, intercultural therapy, psychotherapy and society, psychoanalytic studies, cognitive and rational emotive behavioural therapy - all at postgraduate level. We have a growing number of PGR students. A number of Continuing Professional Development courses, conferences and seminars open to staff, professionals and the public are held regularly. These aim to develop the discourses within and between the disciplines and to address specialist areas of clinical practice. Through these means a potentially diverse range of disciplinary expertise is brought together in practice/research clusters. This enables the exploration of a diversity of approaches to mental health care that covers a spectrum of clinical practices: from therapeutic work that embraces the visual arts to highly structured cognitive interventions. Common concerns are to relate theory and research closely to clinical practice and to ensure that the teaching and research within the Unit is culturally sensitive. The research output from the Unit includes work which explores issues of gender, culture, race and ethnicity; the development of professions within differing cultural contexts, evaluations of different therapeutic interventions with specific client groups and analysis of the relationship of the disciplines to current cultural, political and social phenomena.
Developments in the Institutional Strategy since the last RAE
The UPS was established in 1997 with an improved research base. Relocating programmes in cognitive counselling and REBT from Psychology to UPS has provided a network for colleagues and supported the already flourishing research output of the Professor of Counselling Psychology. Relocating psychodynamic studies and the inclusion of new MAs in Psychoanalytic Studies and Psychotherapy and Society has led to the development of a discrete area of psychodynamic studies, which shares with art psychotherapy and group psychotherapy an emphasis on the social and cultural context in which we practise. By consolidating visiting tutor hours young staff with research potential have been appointed to half-time established posts.
The Institute is a budget-holding cost centre. Each funded research project is managed by a senior member of staff; larger projects have an advisory committee as well as regular project meetings. Senior staff expertise covers laboratory-based research, all the social science research methods, and advanced statistical analysis. Our Board of Management meets twice a year to advise on research direction and strategy; it is chaired jointly by the College Principal and Director of Age Concern England (the latter exerts no restriction on academic research freedom).
Research groups
The three research groups reported in 1996 (demography and social epidemiology; social policy and sociology; physiology and bio-gerontology) have developed as planned, within the strategy developed under the new leadership of Askham (see below).
(i) Demography and Social Epidemiology
The aim of this group is to relate findings about population change to issues of care and support in later life. The project on household transitions and intergenerational relationships is now complete; it attracted a visiting collaborator from the USA (Prof. John Henretta), and led to an ESRC-sponsored international research seminar held here in 1997. The study of national trends in mortality and morbidity, which made a major contribution to our understanding of the onset and progress of later life disability, is also finished and Dr. Emily Grundy has left. However, Dr. Karen Glaser - who worked with Grundy - has joined the academic staff and further developed research on intergenerational relations, with a particular interest in provision of family care and a wider European focus. Comparative research on living arrangements of older people in Britain and Southern Europe led to funding for Glaser to present findings at an international conference in Switzerland. A study of Britain and Italy showing factors associated with the proximity of elderly women to their children was carried out jointly with Dr. Cecilia Tomassini, a demographer at the Max Planck Institute in Germany (now manager of our Gerontology Data Service; see below); findings have been presented in New York & Los Angeles.
(ii) Social Policy and Sociology
The aim is to examine differential social circumstances, expectations and behaviour and relate them to age-related public policy issues. The three sub-areas identified in 1996 (financial circumstances, housing and health/social care of older people) have continued and have been joined by a fourth area: family roles. Work on finances and housing has involved seven projects examining the benefits and burdens of home ownership in later life (funded by Joseph Rowntree Foundation and others). Findings include the limited potential for income generation in later life from the home and the often-problematic implications of home ownership when someone requires long-term care. Other housing research identified the reasons why sheltered housing may be difficult to let (which caused much interest among housing providers). An expanding housing-related interest is the potential of assistive technology in the home to contribute to the care of older frail or disabled people (a current EPSRC-funded study with Rehabilitation Engineers at King’s Medical School and Reading University examines the extent to which existing homes can be adapted). This builds on two earlier EPSRC-funded studies, of a device for navigating complex indoor environments, and of assistance for indoor mobility. On social care needs and services our focus on care at home has continued. Our research for The Royal Commission on Long Term Care for Elderly People, on alternatives to institutional care, (published with its report) influenced its recommendations, and has been the subject of several conference presentations (eg. Tinker, Australian Association of Gerontology, Sydney). We have studied factors enabling very old people to remain at home (to be published by the Anchor Trust). We have identified family-carer issues: the needs of carers of people with Alzheimer’s (commissioned and published by the Alzheimer’s Society), support requirements of carers (presented as an invited symposium by Askham at the World Congress of Gerontology, Adelaide) and the similarities between home and institutional care (research using an innovative observational method, funded by NHS Executive, & presented by Askham as an invited participant at the Gerontological Society of America conference, Washington DC). We have also studied institutional care; for example, through our Research Fellow, Fay Wright’s work on the effects on carers when a relative enters a care home (Joseph Rowntree Foundation), and the financial liability of relatives. Since the appointment of Evandrou in 1998, health and minority ethnic groups have received greater emphasis: Evandrou is examining health, socio-economic position and access to services of minority ethnic elders in Britain (using a complex dataset derived from national surveys). Another more concerted research focus is on family roles and relationships. One new study concerns marriage in later life, focusing on age gaps between marital partners (with Leicester University, Nuffield Foundation-funded). Evandrou and Glaser are working on an ESRC-funded study (part of the government’s EQUAL initiative) on multiple social roles in mid-life, and how they may affect quality of life in old age. Work continues on elder abuse; a survey of GPs demonstrated a clear need for training on this issue, and funding has just been received to assess implementation of new governmental guidance to local authorities on adult protection systems (with Keele University and Christchurch Canterbury University College, Nuffield Foundation-funded).
General contributions to the disciplines have been made through (a) the 4th edition of Tinker’s Older People in Modern Society and Askham’s chapter on the ‘sociology of ageing’ for the 3rd edition of Psychiatry in the Elderly, (b) requests for general advice (eg. Tinker is an OECD consultant, Askham to the Mexican Institute for Social Security), and (c) wide-ranging research programmes: Evandrou is Co-Director – with colleagues at the London School of Economics – of a five year ESRC Research Group, examining social policy implications of an ageing population over the next 20 years. This programme, which uses a dynamic micro-simulation model, is a key plank in the ESRC’s contribution to the EQUAL Initiative.
(iii) Physiology and Bio-gerontology
Work continues on the ageing brain (within the Centre for Neurosciences) and the ageing eye. Four studies on ageing of the blood-brain barriers and formation of cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) have been funded. Topics
Mechanisms and practices for promoting and sustaining research
Plans, progress, techniques and facilities are discussed at quarterly meetings of all research-active staff. Findings and methodological issues are presented at staff seminars. Staff have taken periods of sabbatical leave to develop new proposals; they are encouraged to be active in their home disciplines (through society meetings, conferences and workshops), and actively seek collaborations.
The research infrastructure
The department runs the Gerontology Data Service, with expert staff and access to datasets of the main national surveys from 1975 onwards. As well as its frequent use by departmental staff, the GDS carries out commissioned and self-initiated research. The department’s other facilities include an on-site laboratory and support staff with computing, data management, collection and analysis skills.
A significant development has been the consolidation of the School of Health and Life Sciences on one campus, following an investment of over £200,000,000 in the College’s estate, which has ensured first class research facilities for staff and students and facilitated collaborative work. The Division of Health Sciences (which includes Gerontology) combines the study of socio-economic and biological aspects of health in a manner unique in UK universities. Since 1996 our first 3 PhDs have been awarded (two already in academic posts), and current research students benefit from improved accommodation and the enhanced School training and support structure.
Supporting interdisciplinary and collaborative research
Relationships with research users
As a multi-disciplinary institute, collaboration is integral to our work. Both teaching and research involve increasing links with departments such as Nursing, Nutrition, the Institute of Psychiatry and the Medical School. As well as the Division and School Research Committees, a number of cross-disciplinary research interest groups have been started in the College, and Gerontology staff are involved in e.g. the Institute for Public Policy Research in the School of Education and the interdisciplinary group on Neurodegenerative Diseases. Most significantly the department coordinates the King’s Collaborative Group on Ageing, which brings together all departments in KCL with a focus on ageing to foster joint work in the area.
Our relationship with Age Concern England alerts us to areas of research need and ensures that our results are fed back to user groups. We have taken into account the priorities of ageing and multi-disciplinary work recommended by Technology Foresight. We have carried out projects under the Office of Science & Technology’s EQUAL initiative on extending the quality of life in old age (and Askham is the specialist adviser to the House of Commons Science & Technology Committee in its Inquiry into EQUAL ). Our findings have directly influenced public policy bodies such as the Royal Commission on Long Term Care. We actively encourage the involvement of older people and other users of research at all stages.
Research groupings
Nutrition & Metabolism describes activities concerned with mechanisms by which diet influences physiological processes important to health. Public Health Nutrition describes the nutritional and dietary assessment of populations and interventions to prevent diet related diseases and disorders. Dietetic Practice describes the development and evaluation of dietary interventions in the therapeutic context. In practice staff contribute to more than one of these groupings.
RESEARCH ACHIEVEMENTS
1. Nutrition and Metabolism
a) Diet and cardiovascular health. This research focuses on the effects of dietary modification on lipid and carbohydrate metabolism in relation to risk of cardiovascular disease.
i) Dietary lipids, lipoproteins and haemostasis. Sanders (ref. 1) working with colleagues at the MRC Epidemiology and Medical Care Unit (QMW) and National Heart & Lung Institute (ICL) has shown that long-chain n-3 fatty acids have different effects from linoleic acid on postprandial lipid metabolism and haemostatic risk factors for CHD. The n-3 fatty acids decreased postprandial lipaemia and plasma fibrinogen concentration but paradoxically led to increased factor VII coagulant activity. Sanders (ref. 4) undertook the first study to show clearly that the procoagulant activity of saturated fatty acids is influenced by fatty acid chain length. Sanders (ref 2.) working with S.Humphries (UCL) and GJ Miller (MRC) showed that carriers of the Q allele of the factor VII R353Q polymorphism had lower factor VII coagulant activity than RR homozygotes and although the pattern of postprandial response to a high oleate meal was similar the absolute postprandial increases in factor VII activated concentration was greater in RR homozygotes. Studies into the mechanism of postprandial activation of factor VII have shown that this is not mediated via factor XII (Oakley et al, Am J Clin Nutr 1998; 68:1202-1207) and the recent observation by Sanders working with colleagues at the Heart & Lung Institute (ICL) that endothelial function is impaired following an oleate meal (Ong et al, Lancet 1999, 354:2134) suggests the involvement of tissue factor. An important implication of this research is that that oleic acid is not neutral with regard to its effects on factor VII activity and high intakes may have adverse consequences in populations with established atherosclerosis
ii) Free-radicals and antioxidants. An important finding has been that high intakes of dietary antioxidants such as tocopherol and quercetin do not necessarily decrease oxidative damage in vivo (Wiseman ref. 4, Geissler ref. 4, Preedy ref. 4). Sanders has shown that long-chain n-3 fatty acids increase susceptibility of LDL to oxidation and that this can be reversed by high but not low intakes of vitamin E (MAFF project AN0 220). Wiseman and Sanders have shown (Wiseman refs. 1 and 3) that soy isoflavones, which are poor antioxidants in in vitro test systems, decrease lipid oxidation in vivo as evidenced by increased resistance of LDL to oxidation and decreased plasma concentrations of F2-isoprostanes (a biomarker of in vivo lipid peroxidation). These compounds also increased plasma apolipoprotein A1 and HDL concentrations in a similar manner to oestradiol. More recently, a collaborative study with the Centre for Cardiovascular Biology & Medicine at KCL has found that genistein but not daidzein has a similar effect to oestradiol on endothelial function (Walker et al, Circulation 2001;103:258-262).
iii) The Glycaemic index. Judd working with Ellis in the biopolymers group in Life Sciences (KCL), has identified compounds present in plant foods (Judd ref.3 ) that retard glucose absorption and insulin release. Leeds in collaboration with colleagues at the Hammersmith hospital (ICL) has shown that lowering the glycaemic index of the diet improves insulin sensitivity (Leeds ref.1-3) and that the glycaemic index of the overall diet is inversely related to HDL cholesterol concentrations (Leeds ref.4).
b) Protein Metabolism. This research focuses on the metabolic response to injury. Preedy (ref. 3) has been developing methodology using NMR spectroscopy and electrophoresis to measure total mRNA, tRNA and rRNA in the whole body and mRNA for individual proteins in order to differentiate effects on specific muscle proteins. Using alcohol as a model for tissue injury, Preedy has shown that alcohol results in myopathy and that this is accompanied by decreased protein synthesis (Preedy refs 1-2). In collaboration with Adachi (Japan; Preedy ref.4.), lipid oxidation has been shown to contribute to muscle wasting and dysfunction in alcohol induced injury but is not prevented by vitamin E. Emery has shown that surgical injury and cancer cachexia decrease protein synthesis. In cancer cachexia there is also increased postprandial hepatic glycogen synthesis via the indirect pathway, leading to reduced appetite and increased energy expenditure. The main substrates for this increased indirect pathway activity are amino acids and glycerol (Emery refs.2-3). The main finding in relation to surgical injury has been that malnutrition attenuates the increases in energy expenditure and urinary nitrogen excretion that characterise the metabolic response to injury (Emery ref.4).
c) Mineral Metabolism. The main research focus in this area has been concerned with iron. However, following the appointment of Powell this area has expanded to two further areas concerned with microparticles and silicon.
i) Iron. A major aim of the Nutrition Food & Health Research Centre was to focus on the factors determining iron absorption. Successful grant applications in this area led by Nelson (MRC) and Geissler & Thompson (FSA grant N05017 1999-2001) with colleagues from Clinical Biochemistry and Pharmacy helped pave the way to establish the Iron Metabolism Interdisciplinary Research Group and the successful MRC cooperative award (G9901437) in August 2000. The key findings from Nelson’s research are the adverse influence of poor iron status on cognitive function in adolescent girls. Geissler has shown that iron absorption is influenced by certain peptides (Geissler ref.3) and together with Powell, Hider (Pharmacy) & Thompson a model has been developed and is being used to assess the bioavailability of iron from different foodstuffs. Powell & Thompson have demonstrated the importance of mucus in determining the absorption of tri-valent metal ions (Thompson ref. 2) and have shown that iron tri-maltol corrects iron deficiency anaemia in patients with inflammatory bowel disease who are intolerant of other iron therapies (Thompson ref. 1). A key achievement of the Iron Metabolism Interdisciplinary Research Group has been the identification of proteins that regulate iron absorption and an understanding of the genes controlling iron absorption (see McKie et al, Science 2001; 291:1755-9) and this will facilitate future research on determining individual variation in iron absorption.
ii) Microparticles and inflammatory bowel disease.
Powell and Thompson discovered that mineral microparticles originating from
2. Public Health Nutrition
This research is concerned with assessing the extent and context of nutritional problems and developing appropriate interventions. Nelson developed new methods for assessing dietary intake using food photographs (now widely used throughout the UK see Nelson ref.1) and short food frequency questionnaires for the assessment of specific nutrients such as calcium (Nelson ref. 3) in relation to assessing risk of osteopaenia. Nelson has been a partner in an EU initiative EURO-DAFNE II (Data Food Networking) to develop methodology to monitor dietary patterns in Europe. The results of this work are being adopted by EUROSTAT (official statistics for Europe published by the European Commission). The methodology can be used to evaluate the impact of interventions to increase fruit and vegetable consumption in populations (Nelson ref.4). Geissler (ref. 2), in collaborative research with the Cornell University and the National Institute of Nutrition and Food Hygiene, Beijing, evaluated a new method for determining the vitamin A status in 6500 subjects in the People’s Republic of China using a combination of dietary and biochemical indices. This study showed that plasma carotene concentrations are much lower in Chinese subjects compared with subjects in developed countries despite relatively high dietary intakes. Sanders (ref. 2) is concerned with the evaluation of lipid biomarkers for chronic disease and has shown that UK vegetarian women of Indian descent, who are known to have a lower risk of colorectal cancer, have a markedly different pattern of bile acid excretion compared to white omnivores, which appeared to be related to a lower faecal pH, presumably a consequence of fermentation reactions generating short chain fatty acids. Thomas (refs. 2,3,4) has conducted research on factors influencing food choice and health related behaviour in UK Asians and changes in the food habits of migrants. This has informed health promotion activities relating to perinatal care, oral health and CHD prevention in UK Asians. Nelson’s research on the effects of low income on food choice and intake (funded by the Joseph Rowntree Trust and the Family Budget Unit) has led to the development of Low cost but acceptable food budget standards, which are having a significant impact on government policy relating to children and the elderly.
3. Dietetic Practice
Collaboration
Research users
Research Management
Research Environment
Postgraduate Research Training
Staffing policy
Dietetics is one of the Allied Health Professions where there is a requirement for research to underpin the need for evidence-based practice (Meeting the Challenge - a strategy for the Allied Health Professions. NHS November 2000). Hence, a major aim is to increase research to support dietetic practice. There are relatively few dietitians in the UK who hold PhDs and we has been proactive in encouraging dietitians in undertaking practice based research. This research involves collaborations with clinicians and individuals with expertise in the design of randomised controlled trials (e.g. GJ Miller MRC Epidemiology and Medical Care Unit see Sanders refs 1,3,4). Sanders has played a major role within the UK of evaluating the effect of different fatty acids on the dietary management of hyperlipidaemia (e.g. Sanders & Lynas, British Hyperlipidaemia Association/Royal College of Physicians Report on Hyperlipidaemia in Childhood and Sanders -Health Education Authority Briefing Paper on Dietary Fats 1999). In work supported by NHS Trusts, Powell & Thompson have shown that exclusion of such microparticles from the diet markedly reduces disease activity in patients with ileal Crohn’s disease (Eur J Gastr Hepatol 2001:13(2)101-106). The importance of oral nutritional support in surgical patients has been demonstrated (Emery ref. 1) and Judd & Leeds have shown that diets with a low glycaemic index are of value in the practical management of Type II Diabetes Mellitus (Judd ref. 1) and patients with CHD (Leeds refs. 1-3). Research on the food habits and diet of UK Asians identified the need for a reliable food database which culminated in the publication of The Composition and Nutrient Content of Foods Commonly Consumed by South Asians in the UK (Thomas ref.1) which should be of great practical value in dietetic practice.
There are numerous collaborations with research groups within KCL as mentioned in the text. There is also extensive external collaboration both at national (e.g. MRC Epidemiology and Medical Care Unit; the Centre for the Genetics of Cardiovascular Disease, UCL; ICL; Universities of Leicester, Surrey & Ulster) and at an international level (EU funded projects, Japan and USA), the food and pharmaceutical industries (e.g. Unilever, Nestle, Merck Darmstadt, Kelloggs, Danisco) and with government Departments eg MAFF, Department of Health and the Food Standards Agency.
The research conducted reflects some of the current priorities with regard to food and health highlighted by the MRC-BBSRC Foresight Associate Programme in Human Nutrition Research (e.g. diet and cardiovascular disease; diet-gene interactions) as well as social inequalities in health (e.g. research on diet and low income). The Food Industry and the Food Standards Agency are major users of the research output as are NHS Trusts and the Department of Health. The research also reflects current priorities within the food sector with regard to the development of functional food ingredients (e.g. foods with an altered glycaemic index or foods containing long-chain n-3 polyunsaturated fatty acids). Research is also used by charities such as the Family Heart Foundation and the Joseph Rowntree Trust.
Research and teaching at King’s College is organised within ten Schools. At the College level, the College Research Committee fosters interdisciplinary research between schools and coordinates bids for strategic funding initiatives. KCL Enterprises Ltd, which disseminates information on research opportunities and assists staff in the preparation of research grants, supports the strategic objectives. A School Executive manages the School of Health and Life Sciences. The School Research Committee, which reports to the School Executive, co-ordinates research objectives and encourages the development of a strong and well-balanced research programme and interdisciplinary research. The School Research Committee allocates funds to support research studentships and travel bursaries for PhDs and postdoctoral staff to attend conferences or visit other laboratories to learn techniques and recommends strategic investments in research to the School Executive. The constituent cost centres within the School are the Drug Control Centre, Gerontology, Life Sciences, Nutrition and Dietetics and Pharmacy.
The Nutrition Food & Health Research Centre is managed by Sanders (Head of the Department of Nutrition & Dietetics) and includes all staff in this return. This group has specific expertise in the design of studies to assess food intake and nutritional status and the design of randomized controlled trials of dietary intervention and interacts with other research groupings both within and outside KCL. Four staff are also members of the recently formed Iron Metabolism Interdisciplinary Research Group, which is managed by an executive committee (on which Powell and Thompson serve and which is chaired by Professor Hider from Pharmacy). This is based in the School of Health & Life Sciences but also includes staff from the KCL School of Medicine. The Iron Metabolism Interdisciplinary Research Group brings together expertise in chemistry, gastroenterology, haematology, nutrition, molecular biology and medicine. Research progress is regularly monitored by the Nutrition Food & Health Research Centre and the Iron Metabolism Interdisciplinary Research Group and both are required to present their research strategies to the School Research Committee and the School Executive for approval and these are modified as appropriate. In response to feedback the Nutrition Food & Health Research Centre has sharpened its research focus and the School has facilitated the transfer of Preedy from Clinical Biochemistry and supported a successful MRC JREI bid by Powell.
In August 1999, the Department of Nutrition & Dietetics moved from Kensington to the Franklin Wilkins Building, Waterloo Campus, in easy reach of the Strand Campus and Guy’s, King’s and St Thomas’ Hospitals. This consolidation was brought about following an investment of over £200 million in the College’s estate, which has ensured first class research facilities. The Franklin Wilkins Building has purpose built facilities, state of the art laboratories including a radioisotope suite, a Biological Services Unit, an electron microscopy unit, an excellent library and IT facilities. This has created new opportunites for collaborative research by the consolidation of Health & Life Sciences within a single building. The Department of Nutrition & Dietetics has a purpose built metabolic unit designed for controlled metabolic feeding studies and laboratories well equipped with ultracentrifuge, HPLC, GLC, GLC/EIMS, ICP-OES and ICP-mass spectrometry equipment. Successful joint equipment bids by Powell have led to the purchase of a WAVE HPLC system to identify gene polymorphisms (Wellcome Trust) and an ICP-MS spectrometer (MRC-JREI 2001). The Gastrointestinal Laboratory of the Rayne Institute at St Thomas’ has a clean air room for microparticle and mineral analyses, cell-culture facilities and a whole-body gamma counter.
Postgraduate education is managed and monitored both at School and Departmental level. All students attend a School based induction programme, which is followed by a training programme. Sessions focus on broader transferable skills including demonstrating, teaching and presentation, which complement the College’s teaching assistants training programme, which is available to PhDs and postdoctoral staff. Within the Department, research student progress and training is managed by the postgraduate research tutor (Powell), who organises a programme of study skills such as manuscript writing and a journal club. A fortnightly seminar programme with contributions from national and international experts runs throughout the academic year. Students are also required to make an annual presentation to their peers in a weekly seminar programme designed to provide training in presentational skills and to facilitate dissemination of information across all groups within the Department. Students are examined at the end of their first year of study, with a view to transfer from a MPhil to PhD. A report is prepared and the student undergoes a viva voce examination with two independent academic members of staff. Attendance at the various elements of the training programme is reviewed at that examination. Students may be denied transfer or transfer might be delayed if attendance or performance is unsatisfactory.
All new academic staff have a line manager who is responsible for ensuring the appointee is properly inducted to the College in accordance with agreed procedures, and for integrating them into their research group and its culture. Each also has a mentor, an experienced member of staff within the host department, who is responsible for providing informal guidance and advice on research, teaching and other matters. All academic staff undergo annual appraisal of their work and an agreed set of objectives and training needs are identified. The College provides a comprehensive training programme which includes sessions on, inter alia: costing research proposals, writing effective research proposals, leading a research team, writing for publication, career planning for contract and research staff. Dr Preedy was transferred from Clinical Biochemistry into the Department of Nutrition & Dietetics in September 1999 to strengthen research on protein metabolism and has specific skills in proteomics. Dr Powell was recruited in February 2000 for his expertise in mineral metabolism and analysis and to cement pre-exisiting links between the Gastrointestinal Laboratory at the Rayne Institute, St Thomas’s and the Department of Nutrition & Dietetics. Dr Powell also brings molecular genetic skills to the Department. Dr Thompson is Director of the Gastrointestinal Laboratory of the Rayne Institute and is a member of the Iron Metabolism Interdisciplinary Research Group. He holds several research grants with members of the Department of Nutrition & Dietetics (Geissler, Powell). Dr Thompson also works in close collaboration with Dr Powell and co-supervises PhD students. Dr M Taylor left the Department in December 2000. She had been developing practice based research in dietetics. We intend to replace her with a research active dietitian who will continue to foster evidence-based practice research.
Development. This work involves cellular and in vitro studies of growth and development primarily in nerve and muscle. Tonge showed that certain neurotrophic factors and extracellular matrix molecules have strong effects on the growth of adult sensory axons in vitro and regeneration blastomas of amphibian limbs are a source of potential novel axonal growth factors (with Edstrom, Lund). White showed adult motoneurones (MN) die when subjected to repeated stimuli for axonal growth. Work with Vrbova (Anatomy, UCL) and Greensmith (Institute of Neurology) confirmed that adult MNs recapitulate their developmental phenotype and may become vulnerable to cell death. Ca2+ entry into nerve terminals helps regulate synaptic contacts and its prevention increases muscle force output after partial denervation. Wigley has identified the phenotypic subpopulation of ensheathing cells with greatest neurite outgrowth-promoting function and shown that support for neurite outgrowth depends on the activity of ensheathing cell signalling pathways. Rowlerson (with Veggetti, Bologna; Mascarello & Radaelli, Padua) demonstrated that regeneration is possible even in small fish with limited muscle growth. Type-mismatched contacts are lost early in mammal development and result in the definitive innervation pattern (with Ridge, Bristol) and energy status affects postnatal fibre type development (with Sciote, Pittsburgh & Dauncey, BBSRC). The fibre type composition of masseter muscle in craniofacial skeletal disorders in man may reflect discrepancies in jaw alignment (with MacDonald, KCL Dentistry) and Ferri (Maxillofacial Surgery, Lille). Linden’s work on trigeminal nerve development demonstrated that innervation is species specific, supporting the hypothesis that deciduous dentition is a key factor in determining mesencephalic target field innervation. Ageing. This work aims to increase knowledge of mechanisms involved in age related changes and optimising function in cellular, biochemical and human studies. Biochemical studies by Hipkiss on the anti-ageing roles of carnosine have shown that, in addition to anti-oxidant activity, it can act as a naturally occurring anti-glycating agent, reacts with aged proteins and also protects brain endothelial cells against the most toxic fragment of the peptide that accumulates in Alzheimer's disease. Human studies have shown a progressive decrease with age in proprioception and postural sway that may be related to function decline and increased fall risk (Hurley & Newham). Rutherford conducted a long term trial of high impact exercise which reversed the age related loss of bone and muscle (with Skelton, UCL). A community-based trial of tailored exercises reduced the incidence of injurious falls in elderly women. Elderly people who fall frequently showed increased muscular unsteadiness and asymmetry of strength and power – these might be normalised by specific training regimes and impact on the incidence of injurious falls. Kitchen developed and tested new tools to assess the effect of functional exercise on an elderly rural population which improved function and life quality while reducing medication (with Askham, KCL Gerontology).
iii. Rehabilitation Research represents a programme of studies that aim to identify the effect of current therapeutic interventions and lead to the development and evaluation of interventions based rationally on current knowledge. It focuses on clinical conditions with high impact and relates closely to musculo-skeletal, cardio-vascular and structure and function research activity. Hurley’s work on osteoarthritis (OA) has shown that a brief and clinically practicable exercise programme improved muscle strength, function, proprioception and reduced disability for at least six months. A systematic review (with Dieppe, Bristol and other international rheumatologists) of total knee replacement in OA showed that the lack of comparative studies with conservative interventions, treatment guidelines and sensitive outcome measures - combined with negative attitudes, limited the use of surgery. Morrissey studied the effectiveness of rehabilitation in traumatic orthopaedic injuries and found high velocity resistance training to be more effective, except in the early post-operative period - probably due to pain. The currently practiced physiotherapy regimen in knee injury rehabilitation was found to be ineffective in a full-scale clinical trial. Changes in knee laxity during rehabilitation appear to related more to the initial degree of laxity, rather than the exercises performed during training (with McDermott, UEL; Ratcliffe, Health Economics Research Group, Brunel; Snijders, Erasmus University, NL & King, Royal London Hospital). Kitchen showed that ultrahigh frequency ultrasound improved recovery of fatigued muscles with restricted circulation, which may explain the clinical effect of ultrasound on swollen/painful muscles (with Woledge, UCL). Work on the expectations of, and satisfaction with, physiotherapy treatment in acute and chronic conditions lead to the development and validation of a tool that is being applied nationally (with Norman, Nursing Studies, KCL). Newham’s work with stroke patients showed that increased resistance to passive movement is not the result of excessive activity of muscles being stretched, as commonly believed (with Mayston, UCL). Reduced movement speed was related to decreased muscle strength and correlated with gait velocity. Bilateral muscle weakness and voluntary activation failure soon after stroke suggested a primary affect on muscle. A tool for recording patient position in hospital has been developed and shown to be highly reliable (with Wilson-Barnett, KCL Nursing Studies) in studies which showed the knowledge and attitude of nurses to stroke to be poor. A teaching package improved knowledge and attitudes only in some grades of nurses (with Kalra, KCL Medicine & Wilson-Barnett). Phillips’s work on Primary Ciliary Dyskinesia (with the Paediatric Respiratory Department, Royal Brompton) showed that bronchodilation enhances airway clearance and can be achieved through exercise, rather than requiring drug inhalation. A UK multi-centre trial into the role of inhaled steroids in children with Cystic Fibrosis (CF) commenced this year. Studies on the active cycle of breathing technique in children with CF showed marked improvements in lung function, sputum clearance, treatment adherence and quality of life.
iv. Structure and function. These related studies use a range of techniques to establish the structure of tissues and systems with a view to increasing knowledge of the effects of mechanical influences and the development and evaluation of interventions. All have direct applied and clinical relevance. Studies of bone & connective tissue concentrate on the head, neck and dento-skeletal tissues. Early post-natal physical stresses have been shown by Ellis to play a major part in sutural morphology of the wormian bones of the skull, he has also published the first review of the medico-legal consequences of post-operative intra-abdominal lesions. Berkovitz has demonstrated a change of connective tissue with age. Work on oral cytokeratins indicated their possible significance in health and disease (with Becker, UCL). 3D reconstruction techniques have shown gap junction proteins in the long processes of fibroblasts (with Barrett, Eastman Dental Inst). Linden’s work on pulpal angiogenesis has shown that diffusible angiogenic growth factors are released when small forces are applied to teeth. Work on erectile smooth muscle has investigated the mechanisms controlling the function of erectile smooth muscle and has provided greater understanding of the abnormalities underlying sexual dysfunction. Gibson and McFadzean, having identified that NO is the prime relaxant transmitter of erectile tissue, have demonstrated the crucial role played by physiological anti-oxidants in protecting neurally-released NO and maintaining neurotransmission during oxidative stress. Particularly important is the observation that ascorbic acid release in erectile tissue is enhanced during nerve activation. A novel cation current has been identified which provides the calcium necessary for sustained contraction. Current work is mapping the structure of the ion channel (with Duty, KCL Wolfson Centre), and identifying drugs which may be of therapeutic potential in sexual dysfunction. Smith performed novel studies of the human vas deferens, investigating its neural activation with the aim of understanding contractile and other functions. Work on vasectomy sections has shown that some drugs, known to lower fertility, selectively inhibit longitudinal muscle. Work on inflammation and pain is focussed on increasing knowledge and understanding of the mechanisms involved in pain transmission and modulation. Lidierth works on central pain mechanisms (with Wall, emeritus, KCL Neuroscience) and has identified spinal interneurones mediating pre-synaptic inhibition. An inherent oscillatory mechanism has been identified that synchronises interneurones intersegmentally via the Lissauer tract. Electrical microstimulation of this tract may lead to improvements of current methods of chronic pain relief using dorsal column stimulation. Paterson has focused on the characterisation of the nociceptin/ORL1 receptor system and its interaction with the opioid system. In collaboration with Corbett (Glasgow Caledonian) he has studied possible changes in levels of neuropeptides and their receptors in people with inflammatory bowel disease and ulcerative colitis. Ward has shown that local anaesthetic creams impair many sensory modalities but paradoxically increase heat pain. Work with McMahon (KCL Neuroscience) showed iontophoresis of ATP to cause vasodilatation and pain in normal human skin that was dependent on capsaicin-sensitive neurones. Work on possible antidotes to Amitriptyline has identified a plasma product potent in reversing toxicity and cardiac arrhythmias (with Henry, Guy’s Medical Toxicology & Bio-Products Ltd). Ward’s work for the RAF/MoD, aimed to provide solutions to the problem of in-flight urination in fast jet aircrew and evaluated means of reducing urine output (with Forsling, KCL Neuroscience & Ferring, Sweden). It is also relevant to understanding pre-menstrual symptoms. Studies in functional pharmacology by Hoult centred on mechanisms underlying inflammation and identification of potential therapeutic anti-inflammatory agents. He has studied the interaction of inflammatory cells with vascular endothelium and their ingress into sites of dermal injury (with Page, KCL Randall Institute & Brain, KCL Cardiovascular Biology). The potential anti-inflammatory activity of various herbal remedies used in traditional medicines, plant extracts and claimed to be effective in man has been characterised (with Houghton, KCL Pharmacy; Williams, Reading; de las Heras, Madrid & de la Puerta, Seville). Hart has investigated plants used in Africa that are thought to contribute to the spread of HIV. Plant extracts have been shown to have pharmacological actions on uterine and intestinal smooth muscle. Essential oils used in aromatherapy have been shown to relax smooth muscle and the active components are being identified (with Lis-Balchin, South Bank).
During the current assessment period the quality and quantity of research conducted by the Group has been considerably enhanced by:
Evidence of the improvements include:
Davies and Jones provide joint strategic leadership for the BPSRG, and Davies is the research
co-ordinator. The recruitment of Jones in 1998 from King's College London (KCL) resulted in the merger of the original BSRG with a group of pharmaceutical scientists to give the existing research team. Another major development was the joint investment by KU and SGHMS in 1999 that established a laboratory (the Joint Laboratory) on the St. George's site, for research in the area of haematology and oncology. The current BPSRG comprises five professors, five readers, 14 additional Category A staff, two more Category C staff, four postdoctoral workers, over 30 research students, and support staff. The team aims to contribute substantially to knowledge of non-infectious and infectious diseases in humans and animal models, and applies the molecular understanding of organic chemistry to these processes and their treatment.
Research sub-areas within the BPSRG
The research strengths of the BPSRG in Therapy, Parasitology and Pharmaceutical Sciences form the basis of the interactive and complementary sub-areas:
A. THERAPY – H. Ahmed,
[ ], [ ] (C), Fielder, Garrod, [ ], Jewell, [ ], McGuckin, [ ], [ ] (C), Opara, Palmer, [ ] and [ ]This sub-area has 15 members, five of whom (H. Ahmed, [ ], Garrod, [ ], Opara) hold joint KU/SGHMS appointments (see RA1). Research in this sub-area is focused into four main themes, with collaboration between members of themes (i) and (iii), and with the Parasitology and Pharmaceutical Sciences sub-areas. [ ] leads the Therapy sub-area. Her research concerns the biology of haemopoietic stem cells, the investigation of cellular and sub-cellular events to improve lymphoma diagnosis and treatment, and the role of viruses in lymphoma. Treatment of HIV-related and non-Hodgkin’s lymphoma are among her main research interests and she is currently principal investigator in seven international clinical trials. She uses her expertise to conduct collaborative work with a number of external researchers, and with colleagues in the Joint Laboratory and SGHMS.
(i) Haematology and immunology -
[ ], [ ], Jewell, McGuckin, [ ] and [ ]. [ ] works closely with McGuckin, supervising three research students and a postdoctoral worker in the Joint Laboratory. Their research, which also involves the Medical Research Council (MRC) Institute of Molecular Medicine, University of Oxford, entails the selection of rare populations of haematopoietic progenitor cells for clinical use. McGuckin has played a major role in establishing the Joint Laboratory at SGHMS and acts as its research director. His work in haematology concentrates on developing protocols for acquiring stem cells through labelling and imaging techniques. Since the Joint Laboratory was established, [ ] and McGuckin have also enlisted the experience of Davies (Parasitology sub-area) in immuno-ultrastructural aspects of their research programme, which has led to conference presentations and published abstracts (URL http://www.kingston.ac.uk/bpsrg). [ ] and [ ] are concerned with mechanisms of autoimmune rheumatic disease, and the role of N-acetylglucosamine and galactose components of antigens in the aetiology of the disease processes. [ ] has funding from the South Thames Regional Health Authority, Oxford Glycosciences, the British Medical Association, Lupus UK, and the European Union (EU), and his investigations of neuropsychiatric lupus using MR spectroscopy have demonstrated clinical utility, which will be the subject of a multi-centre trial. [ ]’s reputation in immunochemistry has led to involvement in joint research with workers in Vancouver, Brest, Birmingham and University College London (UCL). Jewell investigates induction of apoptosis in chronic lymphocytic leukaemia. His work with researchers from the Departments of Immunology and Haematology at UCL is funded by the Leukaemia Research Fund, the Nuffield Foundation and a number of pharmaceutical companies. [ ]’s research focuses on colorectal cancer cell metastases and thymus innervation in immunodeficient mouse models. He has productive collaborations in histopathology with workers at the universities of Southampton and Hamburg.(ii) Respiratory function, fatigue and exercise - Garrod, Palmer and
[ ](iii) Alimentary tract, gut flora and nutrition – H. Ahmed, Fielder,
[ ] and Opara(iv) Medical physics - Briers,
[ ] and [ ]In addition to three postdoctoral researchers, there are currently 16 research students within Therapy with a further 11 having completed during the assessment period. Since RAE 1996 members of the sub-group have produced over 140 refereed papers, 116 poster/paper conference presentations, and 27 invited lectures.
B. PARASITOLOGY- Daszak (C), Davies, Kirk, Pittilo, Smit and Walker.
This sub-area has six members, one of whom (Pittilo) has a joint KU/SGHMS appointment (see RA1). The sub-area is led by Davies. She has several long-established national and international research links, and is much respected for her research on blood and tissue-infecting protozoa. In recognition of her work on apicomplexans, a parasite was recently named in her honour (see RA6a), and over the last two RAE periods Davies has been sole or senior author on three substantial articles in the highly regarded Advances in Parasitology. Her research has been recently funded by Centro de Ciência e Tecnologia, Madeira, The Zoological Society of London, The Canon Collins Educational Trust for Southern Africa, The Royal Society and the National Research Foundation of South Africa. Davies has been instrumental in the development of this sub-area, which has two main themes of research.
(i) Parasite transmission and the role of vectors – Daszak, Davies, Kirk, Smit and Walker
(ii) Intracellular parasites, migration, and control – Daszak, Davies and Pittilo
There are currently five research students within Parasitology, with five having recently completed. Davies and Daszak also jointly supervise five research students in other UK institutions and overseas. Since RAE 1996 members of Parasitology have produced over 50 refereed papers, 46 poster/paper conference presentations, three keynote and 31 invited lectures.
C. PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES- S. Ahmed, Barker, Jones, Storey and Tyrrell
Research in this sub-area spans the interaction of chemistry with biosciences and medicine. One core research strength is organic chemistry, supplied particularly by Jones, Storey and Tyrrell. This sub-area is led by Jones. He is recognised for his work across the broad area of heterocyclic chemistry and natural products. He has over 50 refereed publications in the last 10 years and has both organised and given plenary lectures at a number of international meetings. Two areas of his research have recently led to patents, one on the luminescent molecule coelenterazine (used for the measurement of calcium ion concentration in cells) and one on novel anthelmintic molecules. The latter arose through research with parasitologists at KCL, and is developing into collaboration with the Parasitology sub-area. In addition, he has an on-going collaboration with clinicians at St. Thomas’ Hospital that is targeted towards identifying a molecule which may predispose towards hypertension in mammals. This has led to a joint publication in the Lancet. Tyrrell is well known for her work on the use of organometallic chemistry in the synthesis of heterocycles which she has presented at international meetings (eg. 213th American Chemical Society National Meeting, April 1997). Jones and Tyrrell have collaborated extensively with bioscience companies (e.g. SmithKlineBeecham/GlaxoSmithKline, Glaxo-Wellcome, Aventis, Schering-Plough, Maybridge and Zeneca Agrochemicals) and much of their chemistry is directed towards molecules with biological activity or potential medical applications. They currently have several collaborations with clinicians (eg. at St. Thomas’: sodium pump hormones and iron chelators), life scientists (KCL: anthelmintics) and life science companies (Pharmagene and Maybridge: bioactive molecules). Storey was appointed in 1998 having previously been a Research Fellow at the Australian National University for three years. He has considerable expertise and recognition in the area of free-radical chemistry. He is also engaged in collaborative research with Fielder (Therapy sub-area) on the antimicrobial properties of plant extracts. Barker was appointed in 1999 having previously worked at the Centre for European Nuclear Research (CERN). His research focuses on the use of mass spectrometry in biomedical research and the discovery of new bioactive compounds from plants. He was one of the co-founders of Accelerator Mass Spectroscopy (AMS) and its biomedical applications. AMS is now widely used by pharmaceutical companies. He jointly supervises research students at the University of Greenwich (three PhD completions, one in progress) and collaborates with CERN and the Jodrell Laboratory at Kew. S. Ahmed was appointed in 1997 and is active in the area of medicinal chemistry with a growing reputation in the field of cancer chemotherapy. His work involves computer-modelling of enzyme active sites in steroid biosynthesis pathways and the subsequent synthesis of novel inhibitors for the treatment of hormone-dependent cancers.
Pharmaceutical Sciences has one postdoctoral researcher and 16 current research students with nine completions. Jones also has eight PhD completions since 1996 at KCL. Since 1996, the work of this sub-area has resulted in over 50 refereed publications, 50 poster/paper conference presentations, five plenary and 13 invited lectures, and 17 patent applications of which two are licensed.
Management of Research
Research Infrastructure
This research focus uses a variety of host-parasite models to study aspects of parasite transmission and development. Davies and Smit examine the identity and role of arthropods in the vector transmission of blood-inhabiting apicomplexans. Smit is a young researcher from South Africa who gained his PhD in 2000 and is working at KU as a Research Fellow. He is already senior author on six peer-reviewed publications in which he has examined blood parasites and their potential vectors, several of which were previously undescribed. Walker and Kirk investigate the biochemical basis of intermediate host cellular immune responses and how they may be modified by parasite invasion. Walker, appointed to a lectureship in 1999, is skilled in many aspects of molluscan biochemistry, and through his work at Manchester University has specialised in cell signalling. The expertise of Kirk, a recently appointed Research Fellow with a background in helminthology and nematology from Royal Holloway College complement those of Walker and are important in the development of this research, for which funding has been awarded by The Royal Society. Daszak, who left KU in 1998 and moved to the University of Georgia, USA, remains a valued member of the Group through close collaboration in research with Davies and Pittilo (see RA2). Daszak’s recent paper in the journal Science has stimulated international debate concerning the risk to human health of pathogens transmitted from wildlife reservoir hosts.
This theme examines intracellular stages of apicomplexans and flagellates, their migration within the host and adaptation to host defences, and drug responses. The main focus of these studies is ultrastructural research using cell culture, animal models and known drug treatments. The recent research of Jones (Pharmaceutical Sciences sub-area) on the design and synthesis of anti-parasitic compounds is now being developed by Davies and Jones in a study of the effects of these molecules on trypanosomes. Pittilo is a long-established member of the Parasitology sub-area and Dean of the Joint Faculty. He has a particular interest in apicomplexans and studies their morphology and drug responses. All members of this theme, by virtue of their skills in electron microscopy (EM) and disease processes, also undertake research that links closely with the Therapy sub-area. Davies’ knowledge of blood cells, immunogold-transmission electron microscopy (TEM) and scanning electron microscopy (SEM), and her co-supervision of a postdoctoral researcher in the Joint Laboratory, is crucial to studies into cellular communication in the progenitor cell research of McGuckin and
The BPSRG is one of two joint KU/SGHMS research groups (UoA 10 and UoA 11) targeted for support to foster research excellence across both institutions. Within the joint research infrastructure, Davies and Jones work with the Pro Vice-Chancellor for Research (KU), the Dean of Research and Development (SGHMS), and a number of committees, including the BPSRG Management Committee. The BPSRG leaders identify research objectives, new initiatives and priorities for the Group. Information is disseminated to the membership regularly by electronic mail, but also through frequent informal meetings, and more formal termly meetings or away-days. The research progress of individuals and the BPSRG as a whole are closely monitored, and annual targets for the Group, and its sub-groups, are set by the Management Committee. Regular reports are discussed at Faculty and at Joint Executive levels (KU and SGHMS), and outcomes are fed back to the BPSRG for consideration and action. The staff appraisal system monitors individual research contributions and sets goals for core members of the Group.
Mechanisms and practices for promoting research
The allocation of significant finance to the Research Investment Fund at KU has ensured resources to support strategic development in research. Competitive bids by the BPSRG to this Investment Fund, for additional funding through Faculties and Schools/Departments, and for research funds at SGHMS, have provided the Group with resources well in excess of £400 K for this assessment period. These funds have permitted support for pump-priming, postdoctoral fellows, research studentships and the purchase of equipment. Generous staff development funds have also allowed frequent conference participation by BPSRG members. In addition to funding, strategic use has been made of sabbatical leave. Individuals in all sub-areas and emerging members of the BPSRG have been granted leave of one year or one semester. In several instances increased external research income resulted from grant applications prepared during sabbatical leave (eg. Storey and Joy, see RA6a and RA6c). Fortnightly seminars, with an outside speakers' programme, also foster the research culture of the Group (URL http://www.kingston.ac.uk/bpsrg). Additional examples of practices that promote research are recorded in the descriptions of interdisciplinary and collaborative research below.
Specialist equipment and facilities for Research
The Joint Laboratory at SGHMS allows BPSRG workers and their research students access to microscopy, cell and molecular biology facilities. Confocal microscopy, polymerase chain reaction (PCR) systems that include real-time PCR, flow-cytometry, and a fluorescence activated cell sorter (FACS) with full sterile capabilities are available. Other SGHMS and SGH staff within the BPSRG are housed in a research block with access to imaging (TEM, SEM, further laser scanning confocal microscopy and conventional light microscopy, all with digital imaging and data transfer systems), cell sorting, cell culture and functional genomics facilities. Individual staff at SGHMS and SGH also have their own specialist equipment. For example,
The New Science Block at KU was opened in 1995. In this Block, BPSRG researchers and their research students have access to well-equipped laboratories with specialist facilities in biochemistry, cell culture, histology, immunology, microbiology, microscopy and molecular biology. Researchers also have use of further biochemistry and microscopy laboratories, including a modern electron microscopy unit with one Philips transmission and two Jeol scanning electron microscopes with X-ray analysers and spectrometers. Extensive sports physiology and exercise equipment and a new heat chamber are housed in a refurbished area. Construction of further buildings at KU later in 2001 will provide new and improved laboratories dedicated to research, with state-of-the-art instrumentation and a Category 3 microbiology laboratory.
Training and Support of Research Students
Arrangements for supporting interdisciplinary or collaborative research
Relationships with industry
STAFFING POLICY
It is BPSRG policy to recruit new/younger academic staff (eg. Barker, Fielder, Garrod, McGuckin, Opara, Palmer, Smit, Storey, Walker) from highly rated research departments and institutions, and both KU and SGHMS appoint staff on the basis of their research record and potential. These factors are also important at SGH where appointment panels have representation from both SGH and SGHMS. The Group encourages younger and established staff to expand their research and generate new work through sabbaticals, and research excellence has had an impact on promotion to more senior positions (eg. S. Ahmed, Davies, McGuckin). Recruitment of senior staff, with established research reputations and clear leadership qualities (eg. Jones), is another key element in the area of staffing the BPSRG. It is also BPSRG policy to ensure that when staff are first appointed they are integrated into an appropriate sub-area and provided with a mentor, who is an established researcher. New appointees are given research space and start-up equipment at both KU and SGHMS. Research progress is subsequently monitored, especially by Davies and Jones, but also through staff appraisal schemes (KU and SGHMS), and Heads of Department in conjunction with the Dean of Science (KU) and the Dean of Research and Development (SGHMS). Training courses and workshops at KU help young researchers prepare for funding bids. Researchers are encouraged by the Group leaders to bid for funds from internal sources, but there is an expectation among BPSRG members that their research should be externally funded. Grant proposals and other bids from all staff are internally peer-reviewed before submission. The experience and contacts of Category C staff play a key role in promoting research collaboration both within the Group and externally.
SELF-ASSESSMENT
Organic chemistry facilities at KU include a newly refurbished laboratory for 10 researchers. This was provided in 1998 for the arrival of Jones. Spectroscopic facilities for structure determination and analysis include highfield multi-nuclear NMR, gas chromatography-mass spectrometry, liquid chromatography-mass spectrometry, and standard spectroscopic facilities. The spectrometers are housed in a purpose-designed spectroscopy laboratory. An ultra-high sensitivity ICP-MS instrument was purchased in July 1999. Excellent analytical facilities, including high pressure liquid chromatography and capillary zone electrophoresis, are housed in a purpose- designed laboratory. A radiochemical suite with scintillation counting facilities is fully equipped to handle 14C and 3H and is used for bioassay work.
Since 1996, KU has increased spending on IT provision and the library by 60%. Researchers have access to databases such as Mimas, Beilstein/Crossfire, Medline, Biosis and Cambridge Scientific Abstracts. At SGHMS, the intranet system has been updated so that all staff have access to a variety of national and international networks and databases. The main science library at KU has undergone rapid expansion, especially in terms of book and journal provision (including on-line journals), reflecting the main interests in research. The SGHMS library, with its extensive collection of medical journals, complements the main science library at KU. Staff and researchers within the BPSRG also have ready access to specialist libraries in the London area.
All research students within the BPSRG undergo an assessed formal research training programme, in which research methods, ethics, and the use of libraries and databases are introduced. Later, they benefit from instruction on thesis preparation and careers advice. They are members of the University Graduate School at KU under the guidance of a Director of Graduate Studies and have access to the newly completed Graduate Centre with areas for personal study, extensive computer networks, a resources room, seminar rooms and extended social space.
At a local level, progress of research students is the concern of their immediate supervisors, but they also have independent staff mentors. Their progress in research is closely monitored by their supervisors, and recorded formally in an annual monitoring report that is subject to scrutiny at School/Department, Faculty and University levels. Research students also have their own representatives on research committees at both Faculty and University levels, and on Faculty Board (KU). Individual groups of researchers hold weekly informal meetings, at which students and staff discuss relevant literature and students present their results. Staff also use these meetings to give short courses on advanced topics to students and postdoctoral researchers. Fortnightly seminars provide postgraduate students with experience of formal research presentation and allow interaction between Kingston and St. George's students. An active colloquium programme exposes students to a range of lectures by internal and external speakers. All research students are expected to attend and to present material at national and international conferences through the provision of personal development funds.
This joint submission between KU and SGHMS, the Joint Laboratory, and the appointment of staff to the Joint Faculty, are powerful indicators of the approaches adopted to promote collaborative, interdisciplinary research within the BPSRG. As a result, biomedical researchers have close links with the teaching hospital that shares the SGHMS site, name, and many facilities, which allows them ready access to clinical samples. The stem cell research in the Joint Laboratory, in particular, benefits greatly from this arrangement. Interdisciplinary research and collaboration are also encouraged by open research seminar programmes and colloquia, at KU, in the Joint Faculty and at SGHMS. Collaboration with researchers at other institutions is promoted by publication of research in both peer-reviewed journals and, importantly, at conferences. Examples of successful collaborations are demonstrated by joint publications in RA2 and in the above descriptions of the sub-groups.
The BPSRG is well placed to contribute to and benefit from industry by virtue of the breadth of its research interests.
Language and Communication Development (D on RA1): Donlan, Goulandris, Stackhouse, Wells: Key internal links to Campbell & Rosen. New staff: Chiat, Nathan, Swettenham, van der Lely.
Resources: Grant income 96-00 = £482k. Funded research staff = 12 person years, currently 2 FTE. PhD Students 96-00 = 12 (2 with Institute of Child Health, UCL).
Child Language: Stackhouse led work in this area until her departure (9/00). Stackhouse and Wells’s book [St2] presented a developmental psycholinguistic framework for speech and language disorders that has had a wide impact on clinical practice and stimulated a resurgence of interest in developmental language modelling. It has led to new descriptions of the child's perceptual development for accent and prosody from Nathan and Wells [N3]. Nathan, appointed at an early stage in her career, has already proved a very productive researcher. Two new senior appointments, Chiat and van der Lely, are both internationally recognised. Chiat’s work, exemplified by her monograph [Ch2], brings to child language development insights from a psycholinguistic perspective. van der Lely has sought to explain subtypes of specific language impairment in terms of current syntactic theory, with a new focus on the development of specialised cognitive systems [V1, V2]. She has had a productive collaboration with Rosen [R2] prior to her 2001 appointment. She has had extensive grant support (£479k) during this period, including a Wellcome Career Development fellowship.
Literacy and numeracy: The mastery of reading in the normally and abnormally developing child continues to be a fruitful and important area of research. Goulandris’ work (with Snowling, York) has explored the time course of developmental dyslexia, demonstrating the persistence of severe phonological and spelling difficulties [G1, G4]. It has also shown that orthoptic assessments are not effective as a routine practice for children with reading difficulties [G2], while the comparison of the spoken and written language skills of children diagnosed as dyslexic or SLI raises important issues about eventual outcomes [G3]. Stackhouse, Goulandris, Donlan, Wells and Nathan have all contributed to investigations of the impact of developmental language disorder on language and cognitive abilities, especially in relation to literacy [e.g. D1, D3, D4, N4, St1, We2]. Campbell’s work on deaf reading and spelling (e.g. Dowker, Sutcliffe & Campbell, JDSDE, 1999) complements this. Donlan is one of a small number of researchers who, by clarifying the component skills of numeracy, have made the topic experimentally tractable, generating international interest in this aspect of cognitive development. Landmarks were his edited volume [D2], and two international conferences hosted by him at HCS (1996,1999). With Fazio (USA), he has developed a conceptual framework for exploring the relationships between numeracy, learning and language delay. This work will have important implications for curriculum planning in special needs and mainstream education.
Social Cognition: The underlying psychological deficit(s) in people with autism are still poorly understood. Swettenham, with ESRC funding, has shown that people with autism do not automatically follow the direction of gaze of another face. This novel work, based on his observations of infants who later develop autism, follows his identification of selective attentional deficits in autism [Sw1, Sw4] and is making a major impact on understanding the disorder, with exciting possibilities for treatment [Sw2]. Swettenham and Baird (Guys Hospital), Charman (ICH), Plaisted and Baron-Cohen (Cambridge) have produced a widely-used diagnostic test for autistic disorder in infants [Sw3]. This work has been recognised by invited presentations to prestigious meetings, and has close links with Campbell’s work on ‘face readings’.
Research student achievements are notable in clinical and basic science. Publications in the period include: new insights into the auditory processing deficit in early acquired receptive language disorder (Vance, Dry and Rosen, Neurocase, 1999); the child’s understanding of word boundaries (Newton & Wells, in Maasen & Gronen Pathologies of Speech and Language, 1999), child deafness and working memory (MacSweeney et al., JDSDE 1996; ANPEDA, 1999; work arising from her ESRC research studentship), the role of turn taking in the development of syntax (Corrin, Tarplee & Wells: Couper-Kuhlen & Selting’s Studies in Interactional Linguistics, in press), developing conversation supported by technology (Clarke et al, IJLCD 2001), and cross linguistic literacy (Szczerbinski and Nikolopoulos, chapters in Goulandris, Developmental Dyslexia in Different Languages, in press). Vance was recently a keynote speaker at an international conference and has contributed chapters to several books. International conference proceedings have included regular contributions from students as first or co-authors to; the annual Child Language Conference (6 since 1995); Cognitive Neuroscience (3); British Dyslexia Association (4 since 1997).
Speech and Hearing Science (C on RA1): Faulkner, Hazan, Rosen. New staff: Iverson, Scott: Key internal links with Campbell and van der Lely.
Resources: Grant income 96-00 = £1023k. Grant-funded Post-Doctoral Researchers = 17 person years, currently 3 FTE. Grant-funded RAs = 5.2 person years. PhD students 96-00 = 5.
This is the largest group of speech scientists in the UK and has a strong record of Research Council, EU, and other grant support. It has been strengthened further by the appointment of Iverson (from the US) from 2000, and Scott's choice of the group as the base for her Wellcome Trust Advanced Training Fellowship (with Rosen as named collaborator).
Rosen's widely cited psychoacoustic work [e.g. R1] has made important advances in the modelling of the non-linearity of auditory frequency selectivity in normal and impaired hearing. It has been supported by MRC and Wellcome Trust project grants. Faulkner has co-ordinated a major EU R&D activity (OSCAR: TP1217, 750kECU) to develop and evaluate a wearable neural-net based speechreading aid for profoundly hearing-impaired people [F1]. In a series of studies supported by the Wellcome Trust, Faulkner and Rosen have been concerned with the acoustic patterns that underlie speech perception and whose nature is a key to improving hearing prostheses such as cochlear implants. These studies have defined the information carried by purely temporal acoustic cues [F2], demonstrated that voice pitch information contributes minimally to speech intelligibility when spectral cues are present [F4], and shown a remarkable adaptability to an upward spectral shifting of speech that is analogous to a relatively basal placement of cochlear implant electrode arrays [F3].
The contribution of minimal acoustic cues to speech has also been a basis of Scott's PET studies with Rosen [e.g., R3] which are revealing neural pathways of activation that appear to be structured according to the degree of speech intelligibility. Scott’s perceptual work on prosodic structuring in perception [Sc2] has been an important precursor to the high-impact cortical activation studies that have led to her Wellcome Fellowship.
Iverson brings to the group complementary expertise in the modelling of the representational processes underlying the perception of speech sound contrasts [I3, I4] and the development of these representations in language learning [I1, I2]. His recent activity, for which he holds a NIH project grant at the University of Iowa that cannot be shown in RA4, applies such models to cochlear implant users.
Both Rosen [R2; Rosen & Manganari, JSLHR in press] and Hazan [H1] have published important results challenging the view that auditory and speech processing deficits are widely seen in children with SLI and dyslexia. Rosen has been a co-investigator on Wellcome Trust funding to van der Lely and a collaborator with Howell (UCL Psychology) in auditory processing linked to dysfluency [R4]. Hazan and Faulkner co-supervise with Goswami (ICH) a PhD project that is opening up an important new area of investigation - the impact of cochlear implantation on the development of deaf children's sound and spelling representations.
Research student achievements during the period include a study of auditory processing in phonological dyslexia (Adlard and Hazan: H1), and refereed outputs by Vickers (with Faulkner, Br. J. Audiol. 1999; Psychoacoustics, Speech and Hearing Aids, ed. B. Kollmeier, World Scientific, Singapore, 1996, pp. 25-28).
Language, Health and Disability (A on RA1): Bryan, Maxim, Wilkinson, Whurr. New Staff: Smith, Best, Chiat.
Resources: Grant income 96-00 = £282k. Funded RAs: 11 person years, currently 2 FTE. Current PhD students = 6.
This group investigates speech, language and communication in adult populations. It has been awarded 8 grants (ESRC, Stroke Association, Tavistock Trust, National Lotteries Board) in this RAE period. The Centre for Language and Health (CLH) was launched in 1999, with Bryan as Director, as a focus for clinical research and training. Highlights have included Wilkinson’s application of conversation analysis to aphasia and intervention [Wi1, Wi2, Wi3, Wi4]. New descriptions of prosodic variation in normal and abnormal populations (M1; Peppé, Maxim & Wells, Language and Speech, 2000) have informed clinical assessment. Maxim and Bryan have proposed a new theory of systematic access dissolution in Alzheimer’s disease [Br4, M3]. Bryan's research into right hemisphere damage has included the first application of Relevance Theory [Br2]. Whurr’s work on botulinum toxin with dysphonia [Wh2, Wh3] and dysphagia [Wh4] has explored these important areas of clinical research with implications for practice. She has also contributed to the Cochrane Library Database on aphasia and speech movement disorders.
Of the new appointments, Chiat has used psycholinguistic theory to elucidate the complex nature of verb impairments and to develop applications to aphasia treatment (e.g. Aphasiology, 1997). She is a core member of the CLH Verb Processing Group (with Marshall: City) which is continuing its unique clinical linguistic explorations of verb and action analysis. Best has investigated the nature of linguistic breakdown in anomia and treatments for adults with word retrieval deficits in acquired aphasia, resulting in 8 journal papers over the review period [e.g. Be1, Be2]. Her new PPP fellowship extends this work to children with language impairments. Recently she has proposed a modified model of semantic memory to account for the patterns of breakdown seen in category-specific semantic disorders. Analysis and remediation of oral function including swallowing are important aspects of clinical practice, requiring grounding in basic science. Smith’s work has involved international collaborators (Colangelo and Logemann, NorthWestern University) both in the study of aspiration [Sm1, Sm2] and in the novel use of sophisticated psychophysical techniques to investigate the oral perception of viscosity [Sm4]. She is now continuing work in this field in collaboration with the Institute of Neurology (Brown).
Research student achievements. Publications include: Beeke et al, 2001, Clin Ling & Phon (Turns in talk); Kramer et al, IJLCD, 1998 (language disorder in mental illness; 2 papers); Lock et al 2001 Coping with Communication: Winslow Press; Wells & Peppé, 1996, in Couper-Kuhlen & Selting Prosody in Conversation, 1996. Conference presentations include Int. Symp. Psychotherapy in Schizophrenia 1998 (Kramer); Br. Aphasiol. Soc.1999 (Dipper; Beeke, Lock); ASHA 1999 (Lock); Int. Clin. Ling. Phonet. Assoc. 1998,1999 (Peppe, Beeke); Int. Acad. Aphasia 2000 (Sherratt), Euresco: Linguistics 2000.
.
Neuroscience of Communication (B on RA1): Campbell, Scott. Key internal links with Swettenham, Rosen.
Resources: Grant income 96-00 = £170k. Funded RAs 3.5 FT years, current PhD students = 1.
Specific projects exploring brain bases of communication include fMRI and ERP studies of sign and seen speech in deaf and hearing populations (Campbell and colleagues; MRC funded); PET studies of auditory cortex activation for speech and near-speech (Scott, with Rosen). Collaborations are with leading neurophysiology and neuroimaging teams and clinicians (Institute of Psychiatry, Wellcome Functional Imaging Labs, Hammersmith Hospital, FMRIB-Oxford University). Highlights include Scott et al’s demonstration of the conditions for left-lateralisation in cortical imaging of auditory speech processing [R3] and Campbell and colleagues’ work defining the neural bases of speechreading in hearing people [C3, C4, C1]. MacSweeney et al’s report (with Campbell, Neuroreport, 2000, as MRC project grant supported researcher) is the first to show differential fMRI activation by speechreading in the brains of hearing and deaf people. MacSweeney has been awarded a Wellcome Trust postdoctoral training fellowship (2001-2004) following her work as researcher on this project.
Scott et al [Sc4 – Nature] have extended the understanding of the neural bases of emotion by showing that the role of the amygdala in categorising fear extends to classifications of acoustic tokens, as well as facial expressions. Reading the face for speech has been a longstanding interest of Campbell and colleagues (Campbell, Dodd & Burnham Hearing by Eye II, 1998) recently extended into other aspects of non-vocal communication (Messing & Campbell - Sign, Speech, Gesture, OUP, 1999). Campbell’s work on psychological and neuropsychological aspects of face processing continues to make an international impact, with a variety of experimental studies of face reading, leading to 12 international reviewed journal publications since 1996 (e.g., C2, and most recently Lyons, Campbell et al, Proc. Roy. Soc. Lond. B, 2000). Four of these addressed the extent to which different face processing tasks make use of separate cognitive resources, work that is now being extended to deafness and to groups with congenital anomalies including Williams and Turner syndrome. The work on faces led to a visit to and collaborations with ATR (Japan).
PhD student contributions to much of this work have been considerable. Of currently registered students, Elgar (also ICH) with Campbell has publications on the neuroscience of face recognition development (JCCP, Infant and Child Development, in press). Coleman co-authored four peer-reviewed papers with Campbell on face-reading during his PhD registration period (Visual Cognition, 1999, Proc Roy Soc Lond, 1997, 2000, Perception, 1999).
Relationships with research users
Many unit staff are active as consultants to government and non-governmental organisations and in the development of test materials, interventions and products. Examples are:
Department of Health: Bryan: Hospital Advisory Service 2000 report "Not Because They are Old", DoH/NHS Executive National Service Framework for Older People (member: Mental Health task group). Maxim: DoH/NHS Executive National Service Framework for Older People (Chair: Stroke Task Group, External Reference Group member) (http://www.doh.gov.uk/nsf/olderpeople.htm).
DfEE: Donlan: consultant to the National Numeracy Strategy for Special Needs.
Science Education Outreach: van der Lely has a permanent exhibit on specific language impairment at the Science Museum, London.
Industry: Faulkner & Rosen have information-exchange links to Advanced Bionics Corp (US Cochlear Implant mfr), who have recently donated research equipment worth £10k and employ 4 researchers previously with the group. Hazan & Rosen have long-standing links with Laryngograph Ltd (mfr of equipment for speech analysis and speech audiometry).
Europe: With EU DG XIII funding, Faulkner has worked with Oticon AB (in OSCAR: TP1217: co-ordinated by Faulkner) and with the European Federation of Audiological Societies in the NATASHA consortium (DE4302), initiated by Faulkner and Verschuure (Erasmus University Rotterdam). This project involved audiologists and researchers from 23 European states, surveyed assessments of hearing ability in Europe, and proposed a set of harmonised assessment methods (http://www.phon.ucl.ac.uk/home/andyf/natasha).
Research infrastructure
The unit has upgraded research facilities by renovating existing space and updating technology. A Research Technology Support group has a remit to develop synergy across both sites. A clinical suite at HCS was opened in 1998 to support research and teaching. An experimental laboratory for the study of visual aspects of communication was established in 1996. The library on the HCS site (also the National Information Centre for SLT) has a high-bandwidth digital data link to the main UCL library. Substantial facilities utilised across the unit and by outside collaborators are provided by the SHS group, who are excellently equipped for acoustic and computational research in speech and hearing sciences. Unit-wide, a network of 90 PCs linked to five Unix Servers/Workstations provides a shared remote-access resource. At SHS, further facilities include an anechoic chamber of international standard, equipped for multi-channel digital recording; a digital video recording and editing suite installed in 2000; four sound-isolated rooms for perceptual research and speech recording; and a further 10 listening cubicles. Four highly qualified technical staff supervise these facilities. A full time Experimental Research Officer (ERO) post for HCS was established in 1999. The postholder (Coleman, PhD 2000) is involved in collaborative and individual research and has a special responsibility to develop software for behavioural experiments. He is supported by a full time computer and audiovisual technician.
Each of HBS’s four groups is led by a professor of international standing; all of whom actively promote the application of soundly researched biomedical science to practical health issues, involving interactive collaborations with external agencies concerned with health, wellbeing and safety (e.g. the NHS, HSE, DETR). In addition to the initiative in Gerontology Research, four other new staff have joined HBS in the last four years. Three have been attracted from abroad (Netherlands, Australia and South Africa), and this further reflects the international nature and standing of research in HBS. HBS has as its focus ‘whole humans’ and in this respect also comprises interdisciplinary associations between the fields of psychology, ergonomics and human biology, that are reflected by the Department of Human Sciences as a whole. Each of HBS's component groups consists of staff from at least two of these disciplines.
Management of Research
Research in the Department of Human Sciences is overseen by a Research Manager together with the Head of Department (Professor Parsons), who set clear research aims and objectives. A strategy committee of senior researchers advises them and reviews and updates the Department’s research strategy document. This is discussed, endorsed and acted upon by the rest of the Department. To enable the deployment of these research strategies, each of the groups within HBS has: dedicated research space, technical support, offices and bench space for research staff and research students, and substantive equipment (e.g. thermal chambers, water bath, mass spectrometer, heated thermal manikin, bedrooms and associated electrophysiological recording facilities for sleep, a state of the art full-size interactive car simulator for assessing driver sleepiness, equipment to measure whole body impedance and bone densitometry, and a well-equipped human genetics laboratory). Members of individual groups interact on a day-to-day basis but also meet formally once a month to discuss management of the laboratories and research and review progress and future initiatives.
To enhance the research culture and ensure that our staff are exposed to the best research minds, the Department holds fortnightly research seminars by external speakers with national and international reputations. To facilitate the securing of quality research grants through external sources, there are pump-priming "Development Funds" from the University to enable feasibility studies and other initiatives. There are further "start-up" funding opportunities for new academic staff, from the Faculty and Department. Incentives for generating research income are provided by return of up to 50% of research overheads to the research group concerned. These resources are also used to invest in facilities and future research initiatives.
Research Students are closely monitored by their Supervisor, a Director of Research, and a Departmental panel that reviews yearly progress and presents a report on each student that is seen by the student and used to facilitate his or her progress. Students give a 20 minute seminar on their latest work, annually, to the Department. In their initial year they attend compulsory research training courses. The Research Student Manager holds funds for student travel, conference fees, computers etc. The University monitors PhD completion rates and sanctions departments who do not achieve targets for completion within four years. In the last five years, 80% of the Department’s research students have successfully obtained their PhDs within four years of starting.
Human Thermal Environments Laboratory is an internationally known research centre with leading initiatives in the study of thermal comfort and human responses to heat and cold stress. It is led by Professor Parsons who founded the Laboratory. He is now joined by Dr Havenith, moving from the TNO in his native Netherlands, and from where he was an established researcher who published widely. It is the UK’s leading laboratory for basic and applied research into human responses to thermal environments. 1.5 RAs and 5 Research Students presently work here. Research areas cover: health, wellbeing and performance in heat and cold; thermal comfort and the conditions that provide for acceptable thermal environments; human thermoregulation; metabolic heat production and its distribution and dissipation. The Laboratory has pioneered UK research in the development of computer models of human thermoregulation.
The Laboratory has undertaken the most extensive study into thermal comfort requirements for people with physical disabilities (EPSRC £200k). Other EPSRC research has included an investigation into the thermal properties of clothing (£65k). The success of the Laboratory has stimulated co-operative EPSRC research with the Department of Civil and Building Engineering (£160k for "Thermal comfort requirements for displacement ventilation and chilled ceiling environments", £200k for "Heat transfer coefficients for the human body and thermal comfort", and £128k for a "Thermal manikin for measurement of thermal comfort responses and air quality"). The manikin will be the first of its type in the UK. European funding has included awards from: Brite Euram III (£107k for "Thermal comfort and solar radiation"), BIOMED II (£47k for "Evaluation and control of hot working conditions") and Measurement and Testing (£46k to determine skin reaction to contact with cold materials). Other sponsors have included the Defence Evaluation Research Agency (£100k "Thermal modelling and clothing" - a heat stress study), and HSE (£134k,"Heat stress assessment method for British industry"). Doctoral research has included the evaluation of heat stress methods for use in industrially developing countries, sponsored by the UK Overseas Development Agency with practical work in Ghana and the development of a model of human water balance and drinking requirements for work in hot conditions. Methods developed by the Laboratory for determining heat stress in industrial workplaces are currently used by the HSE and the Fire and rescue service. Several British, European and International Standards are based on the results of this work (e.g ISO TS 14415 Thermal comfort Requirements for people with special requirements). Evidence of the Laboratory's international reputation is shown by its regular involvement in the organisation of a programme of meetings and conferences across the world (See RA6). The Laboratory has notable publications for thermal comfort in ASHRAE Transactions (Case studies for thermal comfort for people with physical disabilities, thermal comfort requirements for people with multiple sclerosis and thermal comfort in displacement ventilation and chilled ceiling environments) as well as ‘Ergonomics’ (car seat comfort) and special issues of the Annals of Occupational Hygiene (The issue on heat stress assessment [1999 Vol 43 No 5] was organised by the Laboratory and based upon a special meeting of the UK Clothing Science Group at Loughborough with invited international researchers). This provided a major step forward in international progress towards heat stress assessment methods and was fundamental to the dissemination of research towards international agreement of a heat stress assessment standard (ISO CD 7933).
The Human Biology Research Centre is led by Professor Cameron, with Drs Norgan, Mastana, and Rousham, 1 RA, and 3 Research Students. Following the retirement of Professor Jones in 1996, the Centre recruited internationally and is now attracting significant research funding at project and programme level from the Wellcome Trust. This new funding will add a post-doctoral position and 2 more research students (see below). The Centre undertakes research into human biological variation across the life span, with a particular focus on health and disease in developing countries. It brings together recognised international expertise in human growth and development, nutrition and body composition, human genetics, maternal and child health and disease. Professor Cameron and Dr. Rousham are new additions to the Department as a direct result of the research strategy to build in this area. Professor Cameron joined in 1997 from the Medical School of the University of the Witwatersrand, South Africa. His pioneering research to establish the determinants of peak bone mass - critical to the aetiology of osteoporosis - is funded by Wellcome Trust Project (£110k) and Programme (£800k) grants. It utilises data from the largest and most detailed birth-cohort study in Africa (the Soweto-Johannesburg Birth to Ten study) initiated by Professor Cameron in 1991. Further research into foetal programming and glucose tolerance has identified the role of rapid early growth and beta-cell function in determining glucose tolerance in childhood - a key to the aetiology of NIDDM. In the UK, collaborative research within a British Heart Foundation funded study (£111k) uniquely investigates the prevalence and determinants of sedentary behaviour in young people. Dr Norgan, Editor of the Annals of Human Biology, is well known internationally in the area of human nutrition and its methodology, with particular reference to the assessment of nutritional status in field situations. He is an invited expert to the United Nations panel on nutrition. The "Norgan correction" is currently being promoted by the WHO to correct estimates of nutritional status (BMI) according to leg length. Dr Mastana undertakes population genetic studies of European and Indian peoples, and is involved in genetic screening for metabolic and respiratory diseases. He has shown that apo-E alleles are directly associated with heart disease in European populations - there is a clinical variation for apo-E4 allele. His Wellcome Trust project (£149k) has shown that mtDNA analysis of Indian populations indicates a presence of proto-Indian haplogroups which may have contributed towards genetic diversity of Indo-European populations. Dr Rousham has worked in both Bangladesh and Australia. In the former site she focussed on the effect of intestinal worm infections on child malnutrition and developed effective treatment regimes. In the latter she is concentrating on identifying the effect of nutritional transition and acculturation on Aboriginal children. Her UK research investigates the role of exercise during pregnancy on birth outcomes, and antenatal and postnatal care of Asian women.
The Gerontology Research Centre is led by Professor Morgan, who moved from the University of Sheffield (Centre for Ageing and Rehabilitation Studies) in 1999, bringing particular expertise in the development of community-based health research. He is joined by a new lecturer, Dr Brooke-Wavell, with the recruitment of 2 further lecturers underway. The newest grouping within HBS, the Centre was established to complement existing research expertise while developing collaborative, interdisciplinary and community-based research programmes in the field of health and ageing. Consonant with this objective, and in line with national and international research agendas, the Centre has targeted four key gerontological areas: i) physical activity and late-life health outcomes; ii) the origins and management of late-life insomnias; iii) health and quality of life among the oldest old; and iv) quality and safety in design for an ageing population. To pursue these objectives, the centre has invested considerable time in forging links with local clinical academic departments and NHS service providers, and has been proactive in the development of national and European partnerships. This ongoing investment has delivered productive collaborations addressing respite care and dementia (with Leicestershire and Rutland NHS Trust), activity and osteoporosis (with Nottingham City Hospital), the impact of primary care counselling (with Newark and Sherwood Primary Care Trust), sleep management in dementia (with the University of Leicester, Department of Psychiatry), and health and mortality in extreme old age (with the University of Leicester, Department of Epidemiology and the University of Nottingham, Trent Institute for Health Services Research). Through Professor Morgan, the Centre is a founder member of the (European Science Foundation funded) European Consortium for the Study of the Oldest Old, provides the UK lead on the proposed Framework 5 funded European Longitudinal Study of Ageing, and is a co-applicant (and steering committee member) of the EPSRC research network, Research for Extending Quality Life. Professor Morgan continues to fulfil project management responsibilities for EPSRC EQUAL (£190k) and NHS Health Technology Assesment Programme (£186k) funded research, based in his previous Department at the University of Sheffield,
The Sleep Research Centre is led by Professor Horne with Dr Reyner. There are four RAs and two support staff - all externally funded. As well as being the UK’s leading laboratory for basic and applied research into human sleep, it is a world-class sleep research centre. It maintains its international reputation through its innovative work, for example, in the understanding of sleep function, the effects of sleep loss, and the processes of "falling asleep at the wheel". Professor Horne is the founding editor of the Journal of Sleep Research. Dr Reyner has a growing reputation in the areas of sleepiness in applied settings including shift work, driving, and sleep disturbance caused by night-time noise. The Centre’s basic research, largely funded by a succession of Wellcome Trust grants (£140k), relates to pioneering work in the function of human sleep. Recently, the Centre made further advances pointing to unrecognised roles sleep may have for higher brain function, as reflected in the effects of sleep loss on prefrontal (cortical) neuropsychological performance. This has stimulated research at leading brain imaging centres in the USA (U of California at San Diego, Johns Hopkins School of Medicine), and to recent reports (e.g. Drummond et al., Nature, 2000, Vol 406; Pp 655-657) supporting the Centre’s hypotheses and extensively referring to its recent published work. More recent, innovative, published research from the Centre points to: i) sleep loss in young adults providing a model for the ageing brain, and ii) close parallels between REM sleep and wakefulness, with REM sleep argued not to be sleep per se, but as a more basic default state of "non-wakefulness". The Centre’s (>£600k income since 1996) rolling applied research programme into driver sleepiness is "state of the art" and has led to: publications in high impact journals, legal precedents being set (e.g. R v Cox, Bowles & Bowles – Old Bailey – December 1999), innovations in investigating sleep related vehicle crashes, changes to the ‘Highway Code’, the full establishment throughout the UK of motorway permanent signs ‘Tiredness can kill – Take a break’ (the first three of these were erected near Loughborough, following the Centre’s original initiative), support by MPs of all parties (e.g. Parliamentary Early Day Motion No 304 tabled 8/2/01 with 66 MP signatories - specifically referring to the Centre’s work). Driver sleepiness is at the forefront of the DETR’s new "Think" campaign on road safety, and on behalf of DETR, Professor Horne and Dr Reyner launched it (from DETR in London – August 2000). The Centre’s current work assessing the combination of sleepiness and low blood alcohol levels (<50mg/100ml blood) points to a particularly dangerous interaction for drivers. A co-authored collaborative study of fatal road crashes covering the whole of France (Phillip et al. - Br. Med. J., 2001, Vol 322; Pp 829-830), further points to this hazard. The Centre’s findings on aircraft noise and sleep disturbance (described in RAE 1996) figured prominently in the recent public enquiry into Heathrow’s Terminal 5, and has influenced the government’s current night flying policy for London’s airports. Our techniques for the mass assessment of this sleep disturbance have been adopted by investigators from the USA and The Netherlands for their major studies (e.g. Fidell et al., 2000, J. Acoust. Soc. Am., Vol 106; Pp 2335-2347). Sleep deprivation and fatigue are endemic in seafarers; a topic further highlighted in recent research on UK ferry crews, by Dr Reyner. Our new initiatives in this field have stimulated visits to the Centre from the UK Chief Inspector of Marine Accident Investigation, the Director of the Maritime and Coastguard Agency, and senior executives from the International Shipping Federation. The Centre’s other current research areas (with publications since the last RAE) include minimum daily sleep need, and sleepiness in patients with Parkinson’s disease.
Interactions within HBS, the Department, and with Outside Groups There is significant overlap and active interaction within HBS. For example, the topics of: i) "sleep disturbance and insomnia" and "ageing and sleep" link the work of Professors Horne and Morgan; ii) "ageing" links Professor Morgan with Professor Cameron and Drs Norgan and Mastana; iii) "thermoregulation in sleep" links Professors Horne and Parsons and Dr Havenith; iv) "hypothermia in the elderly" also links the latter two staff with Professor Morgan; v) "bone mineralisation and osterporosis" links Professor Cameron with Dr Brooke-Wavell. Within the Department, the "Health and Safety Ergonomics Unit" and the Gerontology Research Centre are together examining the effects of various aspects of design on safety of older people (funded by the DTI). Across the campus, HBS collaborates with Civil Engineering (thermal comfort), and PE and Sports Science (heart function, osteoporosis). There is also interaction with the various outside agencies, identified above. HBS also holds national, European and international contracts as part of multidisciplinary teams (e.g. Wellcome programme with the University of the Witwatersrand).
Introduction
The combined focus on audiology and speech and language disorders makes the Human Communication and Deafness group unique amongst UK Higher Education Institutions. The period since 1996 has seen a strengthening of the group (in terms of membership and closer collaboration amongst staff) and a significant increase in the group’s research quality and productivity. This is evident in the following ways:
· The amount of external research income. The group of 11 (9.6 FTEs) has raised nearly £2.0 million since 1996; research income per full-time member of staff is £220k during the period of assessment.
· The proportion of staff who are principal investigators. Seven members of staff have held grants during the period as principal investigators, resulting in the employment of a large number of contract researchers during the assessment period (currently 12).
· The international recognition of the group as a centre that carries out outstanding research in child language disorders, the genetics of deafness, hearing screening, and otitis media. The group has over 80 international, refereed journal publications during the assessment period.
The group resides within the Faculty of Education and enjoys budgetary control which permits local management of research support activities. Its developments have warranted submitting independently for the first time to UoA 11.
Research Teams
Human Communication and Deafness has two component Teams: Speech and Language Disorders and Audiology.
SPEECH AND LANGUAGE DISORDERS |
AUDIOLOGY |
Members: Adams, Botting, Bowen, Conti-Ramsden, Crutchley, Hesketh, Pennington
|
Members: Bamford, Mackenzie, Newton, Parker |
Research funding: Research Councils UK Charities UK Health/Hospitals Other |
£210K |
Research funding: Research Councils UK Charities UK Health/Hospitals Other |
£15K |
The Speech and Language Disorders Team focuses on developing our understanding of a range of speech and language difficulties, involving both children and adults, in order to explore the nature of the disorders, their assessment and intervention.
A major study by Conti-Ramsden (1) in the area of child language disorders has been particularly significant in stimulating the development of a new explanatory hypothesis for Specific Language Impairment (SLI), the SLI critical mass hypothesis. In addition, this study shows for the first time that children with SLI are more dependent on input than normal language learners at later stages of language development.
This is complemented by a number of studies questioning our current notions of classification and characterisation of child language impairments. First, the Nuffield National Study involving longitudinal investigations with a large cohort of children with SLI in England has provided unparalleled new evidence for the types of heterogeneity present in SLI. This has included the first-time characterisation of children attending language units in England (Conti-Ramsden, 3), the detailed analysis of their linguistic and educational outcomes (Botting, 3; Conti-Ramsden, 2) and the study of the dynamic, changing picture of SLI subgroups across time (Conti-Ramsden, 4). In the latter, the work has developed the key notion of developmental stability of SLI with the finding that different aspects of SLI may be more or less stable across time (phonology and vocabulary being the most changeable). Second, work of the group has evaluated the overlap of SLI with pragmatic disabilities and autism spectrum disorders (Adams, 2; Botting, 4). This research has proposed the existence of a separate group of children with SLI who have pragmatic language impairment without autism, raising issues of co-morbidity and necessary and sufficient conditions for a disorder. This theme has been further developed in the first detailed investigation of the conversational skills and non-verbal pragmatics of children with SLI and related impairments (Adams,1). Third, research with children of very low birthweight has provided an interesting point of comparison with SLI. The focus on outcomes and characteristics of a group of children with known aetiology has raised issues of language disorder and pragmatic-psychiatric disorders in subgroups of children with very low birthweight (Botting, 1,2). Fourth, the examination of bilingualism in SLI has extended our understanding of the influence of other languages on the classification of disordered development (Crutchley, 1). In particular, an innovative model for classification that examines in detail the contributions made by the type and nature of assessment (Crutchley, 2), professional attitudes (Crutchley, 3) and parental informedness (Crutchley, 4) has been proposed. Fifth, the analysis and evaluation of the communication skills of non-speaking children with congenital motor disorders (Pennington, 1, 4) has provided evidence for the complexities of communicative interactions and has highlighted the need for breadth in our model of the characterization of communicative impairments. This line of work has led directly to the development of UK-wide in-service training for teachers in schools (Pennington, 2, 3).
In developing this agenda, the group has also been at the forefront of debates around assessment and treatment of different types of childhood communication disorders. A programme of research has been carried out involving the evaluation of different types of treatment of developmental phonological disorders (Adams, 3,4; Hesketh, 2) with a particular contribution to knowledge on the phonological awareness abilities of children with speech disorders (Adams, 3).
Another important branch of the group’s work concerns current notions of practice in adult acquired neurological conditions. These include stroke, dementia and traumatic brain injury, which are major causes of disability and make significant demands on health care resources. Firstly, we have defined the clinical need for services through epidemiological investigations of neuropsychological disorders following traumatic brain injury (TBI) and stroke (Bowen 1, 2, 3). The research describing the prevalence of mood disorders questioned the appropriateness of previous measurement techniques which provided inaccurate estimates of the need for clinical intervention (Bowen 1,3). Similarly, the systematic review of the prevalence of a cognitive disorder (unilateral neglect) highlighted criteria necessary for valid measurement (Bowen 2). Both studies (Bowen 1, 2) were selected for editorial commentary by other journals (Neuropsychological Rehabilitation, Stroke Review) and considered to have provided advanced methodological knowledge and innovation in rehabilitation research. Secondly, we have confronted issues of outcome measurement (Hesketh 1, 3, 4) and its application in evaluating clinical services (Bowen 4). The collecting of evidence on the effects of intervention is a vital part of healthcare provision; the group's research in this area has contributed the first controlled trial evaluation of an interdisciplinary team approach to neurorehabilitation (Bowen 4), has included an investigation of current methods of outcome measurement for services to people with aphasia (Hesketh 1) and has raised awareness of efficacy, effectiveness and outcome measurement across the speech and language profession (Hesketh 4). The assessment of change and outcome requires adequate tools and the group's research has engaged with the development of reliable measurement techniques for clinical professionals (Hesketh 3).
The Audiology Team focuses on both basic science (the genetics of hearing, electrophysiology) and applied audiology (newborn hearing screening, otitis media, hearing aids). Its objectives are to build on the University’s longstanding international reputation for work in paediatric audiology, to further our understanding of related underlying mechanisms (genetic, electrophysiological, physiological), and to develop Health Services Research (HSR) which impacts directly upon service provision in audiology.
In particular, collaborative research between Manchester and Leeds has led to key developments in our understanding of the genetics of Waardenburg’s syndrome, the major autosomal dominant syndrome in sensorineural hearing loss (Newton, 1) and the discovery of the genes involved in atypical Usher syndrome (Newton, 3). Further, this collaboration has identified the genes and mechanisms involved in autosomal recessive non-syndromal sensorineural hearing loss, the largest single aetiological category for congenital permanent hearing loss (Newton, 4). Furthermore, Newton has for the first time developed new technical diagnostic procedures for the identification of Type 2 neurofibromatosis (Newton, 2).
In basic science, it is notable that the group has developed novel electrophysiological measures (Parker 1,2,3,4) involving estimation of low frequency hearing threshold and uncomfortable loudness levels. This work on steady state auditory electrophysiological measures has significant potential for more accurate hearing aid fitting in early identified deaf babies (cf. newborn screening), and also has application in the differential diagnosis of Meniere’s disease, exemplifying how our work on basic science impacts on service and users.
The applied research on hearing screening has had major international and national impact. There has been a series of key studies concerned with the cost-effectiveness of different screening programmes (Bamford, 1,2 3). This important work has investigated the evidence base for newborn hearing screening programmes. This examination has led directly to the recommendation to the National Screening Committee for the introduction of universal newborn hearing screening in the UK, and the phasing-out of the 8-month Health Visitor screen. This policy had Ministerial acceptance in June 2000, and the pilot implementation of the programme in 20 Health Authorities in England is due to begin in March 2001.
In otitis media, the group’s seminal work published in the Lancet (Mackenzie, 1) showed significant prevalence of chronic supurative otitis media (CSOM) in developing countries. These results led to a change in the WHO dry mopping recommendations in the management of CSOM with direct impact on the distribution of resources in the world. This work is complemented by the influential systematic review of the management of CSOM (Mackenzie, 2) which revealed a lack of reliable treatment for CSOM. This information led directly to the development of the „WHO protocol and software package for prevention of deafness“ by Mackenzie. This package is distributed by WHO regional offices worldwide and is currently being used in 18 major research studies.
Further evidence of the group’s contribution to applied audiology is provided by research in both use and provision of hearing aids. The analysis of Bamford (4) of two-channel hearing aids in school-age children is notable. As the only published controlled trial of non-linear amplification in children, this informed the design of the current DoH-funded multicentre trial of digital signal processing aids for children at 10 NHS Trusts in England. In the same vein, Mackenzie (3) has, for the first time, examined the key variable of ethnicity in the provision of hearing aids to minority communities. Finally, Mackenzie (4) has carried out basic science investigations with vestibulometric hearing aids identifying the neural pathways involved in vibro-tactile stimulation.
In addition to the above, the group is currently involved in a number of key research projects covering their range of interests. For example:
Promoting a Research Culture
Engagement with research users
Supporting collaborative research
The group has organised three major international conferences (The British Aphasiology Society Biennial International Conference 1997, International Association of Physicians in Audiology 1998, Symposium on New Advances in Audiology 2000) in order both to contribute to the advances in the subject and to promote collaboration and an active research culture within the group.
Promoting exchange of ideas
The group organises an annual programme of research seminars, which involves leading international researchers side by side with internal group members and research students. The1999-2000 programme included researchers from Colorado, MIT, the MRC Institute of Hearing Research, and the MRC Brain and Cognition Unit.
Research students spend a significant proportion of their first year in the Research and Graduate School of Education’s research training programme (recognised by ESRC, Mode A). In this way, they are integrated into the broader Faculty environment as well as being part of the group. But, in addition, they share designated space with research assistants/associates involved in different externally funded projects which fosters the interchange of ideas, develops a postgraduate research culture and increases informal support for students.
Research management within the group
1) The family study of SLI (Conti-Ramsden, Botting) funded by the Wellcome Trust in collaboration with the Human Genetics Research Programme at Oxford University, and with Cambridge University and Guy’s hospital;
2) The longitudinal language development SLI project (Conti-Ramsden) funded by the ESRC;
3) The clinical markers for pragmatic language impairment project (Conti-Ramsden, Botting) funded by the ESRC;
4) The assessment of older children with speech and language disorders (Adams, Crutchley, Hesketh) funded by NFER.
5) ROPA award on pragmatic Language Impairment (Adams) funded by the ESRC;
6) The evaluation of digital signal processing hearing aids for children in the NHS (Bamford) funded by DoH and MRC;
7) The evaluation of the national pilot of universal neonatal hearing screening in 20 Health Authorities for DoH (Bamford, Parker);
8) Electrophysiological correlates of SLI (Newton, Adams, Parker) funded by Action Research;
9) Otitis media in developing countries (Mackenzie) funded by the Wellcome Trust.
The research carried out by the group has resulted in ground-breaking and influential findings that have led to the Critical Review (including further primary research) for the Health Technology Assessment arm of the NHS R and D exercise (Bamford, 1). This has had a major impact on service provision (newborn hearing screening) in the UK, Canada and Australia and has contributed to the development of a European Consensus Statement on such screening. The Nuffield National Study involving 242 children with SLI (Conti-Ramsden, Botting) has directly influenced the setting up of a specialist group in QCA to develop specific guidelines for accessing National Curriculum assessments for children with SLI. The current funded project to develop language assessments for older children was won by competitive tender from NFER and the development of its assessment tool (to be published in 2001) will have a major impact on assessments used with older children with speech and language disorders (Adams, Crutchley, Hesketh). We continue to play a major role in hearing aid research and new technology, with a 12-month secondment (at the request of the DoH) of Bamford to the MRC to join the NHS hearing aid modernisation research team in Oct 2000.
A substantial proportion of the group’s funded research and published outputs is collaborative and involves a wide-ranging network of international and national centres of excellence. Some examples of these include the work on verb learning in SLI by Conti-Ramsden (with The Max Planck Institute for Evolutionary Anthropology, Leipzig) and the investigations of pragmatic language impairment by Adams (with Dorothy Bishop, Oxford University). Additional examples include the work on the genetics of hearing loss by Newton (with the medical genetics departments in Manchester and Leeds), the studies of Bamford on newborn hearing screening (with the MRC Institute of Hearing Research), and the work of Mackenzie on the treatment of otitis media (with Liverpool School of Tropical Medicine and WHO). Apart from our national and international collaborations, we also think it is important to carry out collaborative work with local NHS and Education providers (eg Bamford, Newton and Mackenzie with funded projects with Sheffield LEA, Sheffield Children’s Hospital, University of Liverpool, Wrexham Maelor Hospital, Withington Hospital, Manchester Royal Infirmary).
The group organises a local reading group on child language impairments involving research students and staff working in this area, which meets fortnightly to discuss recent important papers. Staff and research students interested in the area of child language development (including disorders) also attend a Regional Reading group, chaired and organized by a member of our group (Conti-Ramsden), which meets 6-8 times per year and involves research students and staff from eight Universities in the North-West. It also organises an annual, three-day conference to discuss research ideas and projects with an invited external international scholar. Examples of previous scholars include Martin Atkinson of the Department of Linguistics, University of Essex and Michael Tomasello of the Max Planck Institute for Evolutionary Anthropology, Germany. These scholars comment and provide feedback on the members’ work.
The group is led by a professor who develops the group’s research strategy with a Strategic Advisory Team (SAT) of four senior members of staff of the group. Research strategy is then discussed, amended and agreed at bi-monthly meetings of the whole group. Particular emphasis is placed on mentoring new members of staff and young researchers with the aim of integrating them into our research culture. In addition, all members of staff have research mentors.
Given the nature of health research along with the University's policy of promoting interdisciplinary research, staff submitted under UoA 11 come from three Faculties (Health and Social Care; Science; Arts Media and Social Sciences). Researchers work in three main groupings: (1) Health and Social Care; (2) Rehabilitation and Human Performance; and (3) Biomedicine. Professors lead each group, with external income and support from research assistants and PhD students. Each research group acts either as a Research Centre (Biological and Life Sciences) or as a Research Institute (Health and Social Care Research (IHSCR) and Public Health Research and Policy (IPHRP)). The internationally renowned IPHRP (formerly, the Public Health Research and Resource Centre, some of whose staff are returned under UoA 42 Sociology) has since 1996 raised in excess of £4m in external research grants and employed between 20 and 30 contract research staff.
Since RAE 1996, substantial steps have been taken to enhance the research base. (1) A Health Care Practice R&D Unit (HCPRDU), under the leadership of Professor Long, was established as a collaborative partnership between the NHS and the University, with core funding from eight local NHS organisations. Over the RAE period, HCPRDU has raised over £750k in external income and £250k from University sources, employing 6 to 8 contract research staff in the RAE period. (2) In 1998, within the Biomedicine group, a Centre for Molecular Epidemiology and Ecology of Parasitic Infections was established by Professors Craig and Bradley through the key appointment of Dr Hide with University funding and Wellcome Trust/EC grant support. (3) The University, as part of its research strategy to develop health and social care research, created four professorial posts within IHSCR: Raynes (Social Care), Kay (Health Informatics) and, in 2001, Johnson (Nursing) and Shardlow (Social Work).
Research Groups
Health and Social Care
Prof Kay, Prof Long, Prof Raynes, Black, Brettle, Elliott, Hardiker, Harries, Hogg, Huntington, Mitchell, Noyes, Sudbery, Young, 14 research assistants
Led by three professors with international reputations (Kay - health informatics; Long - outcomes; Raynes – regulation; older people) the Health and Social Care Group fosters inter-disciplinary and multi-professional research and development work involving nursing, midwifery, therapy and social work academics with public sector groups in health and social welfare. Work, with a strong focus on the application of research knowledge to practice development, is centred on evidence-based practice, service delivery and implementation and an emerging area of health informatics. The group has long-standing collaborative research and practice links with health authorities, trusts, social services departments, local authorities and primary care (Raynes is chair, Trafford South Primary Care Trust) across the range of health and social care professions, the North of England Institute of Health Informatics (Kay, a member of the Executive Policy Board), the National Centre for Mental Health and Deafness (Young), and the developing Cochrane and Campbell Collaboration Qualitative Research Methods Group (Long). Over the period of the RAE, funding of around £1.5m has been raised from such sources as: the Department of Health R&D programme, English National Board for Nursing, Midwifery and Health Visiting (ENB), Royal National Institute for Deaf People, Joseph Rowntree Foundation, Centre for Evidence Based Social Services, NHS Executive Regional R&D, NHS health authorities and trusts, and city councils.
Evidence Based Practice and Policy
Research focuses on knowledge development and its application to ground multi-professional practice and policy on best evidence. Examples include: development of evaluation tools to appraise quantitative and qualitative research studies and outcome measures (Long, in particular within the UK Clearing House and the European Clearing Houses on Health Outcomes with collaborators in 9 European countries); optimal information searching strategies for outcome measurement (Brettle); the use of appropriate research methods within palliative care (Raynes) and feminist research (Huntington); the history of learning disability nursing (Mitchell); Deaf studies research (Young, on professional relationships between Deaf and hearing professionals, with a report published by the Joseph Rowntree Foundation); and evidence based policy and an understanding of the interface between research, policy and practice (Harries, Elliott). £90k was secured in 1999 for a NHS PhD Research Training Fellowship in the area of economic evaluation. A developing application area is complementary and alternative medicine (CAM) research, with three PhD students. A series of six seminars taking forward the research agenda in CAM is underway with support from the King's Fund and the Institute of Complementary Medicine (£4.5k), run in collaboration with the Universities of Central Lancashire, Leeds, and John Moores Liverpool.
A major grant from the Department of Health (£180k), exploring the feasibility of undertaking systematic reviews of the effectiveness and outcomes of social care (Long and Brettle, in collaboration with the University of Leeds), resulted in substantive reviews of community based rehabilitation for those with severe mental illness and prevention services for bereaved older persons. This work led to a further collaborative, systematic review on homecare services, commissioned, published and disseminated to associated social services organisations by the Centre for Evidence Based Social Services (£15k). Noyes undertook a major empirical and literature review study of the needs of ventilator dependent children, funded and published by the Joseph Rowntree Foundation (£35k). Other examples include literature reviews of people with prolonged fatigue (Elliott), child abuse (Sudbery) and Deaf persons with mental health needs in contact with the criminal justice system (Young). Noyes, previously receiving a Smith Nephew fellowship (£30k), is currently in receipt of a four-year MRC HSR PhD Training Fellowship (£200k) and on secondment to the University of York.
Service Development and Implementation
The application of knowledge to practice forms the focus of a major R&D programme (Harries, £760k) for local health authorities on health needs assessment (drug using parents, teenage pregnancies and disabled children). A second strand centres on the evaluation of new or reconfigured health services and professional practice, for example: a health and social services funded care managed rehabilitation programme for older people with complex needs (Long, £30k); Black (funding of £128k in 2000 from local Health Action Zones (including a training fellowship); disabled and Deaf people's access to employment within one city (Young). A third strand explores the contribution service users can make to the development of appropriate health and social care services (Raynes, £94k from the Joseph Rowntree Foundation and local authorities) in specifying and regulating quality of health and social care service provision and in acheiving Best Value agendas in child care (Huntington, £6k from Bernardo's Northwest and National Youth Advocacy Service). A fourth strand centres on multi-professional working. A major study of the nurse's role within the rehabilitation team has been completed (Long, £100k), to be published and launched nationally by the ENB in May 2001 in their Research Reports Series and Research Highlights (distributed widely within nursing practice and education).
Health Informatics
Kay (appointed in 2000) has established the Salford Health Informatics Research Environment (SHIRE), exploring the application of informatics and technology to the health and social care domains. £105k research funding has been secured (NHS Information Authority, NHS Executive) and two researchers with international reputations appointed (Hardiker, nursing informatics and vocabulary and another in standardisation). Five major research streams are being developed, building upon existing strengths in interdisciplinary working and education (for example Hogg, in radiography and the provision of computer based information to patients). SHIRE is one of four national groups working on clinical headings for communication, working collaboratively with the NHS, the Universities of Manchester and Sheffield and the North of England Institute of Health Informatics. The group plays an active role at a national level in NHS Information Authority fora and committees for research and standards in the NHS and internationally in the technical standards community (the Committee for European Normalisation, the International Standards Organisation). It has close research ties to the Universities of Athens (Greece), Victoria (Australia) and Stanford (USA).
Rehabilitation and Human Performance Research
Prof Bowker, Prof Edwards, Kenney, Nester, Rithalia, 2 research assistants
Two professors, Bowker Edwards (now retired) and Bowker, with international reputations in orthotics and prosthetics lead the Centre for Rehabilitation and Human Performance Research (CRHPR), which works closely with the National Centre for Training in Prosthetics and Orthotics at the University of Salford. The group supports multidisciplinary research into the design and evaluation of rehabilitation, assistive devices (prosthetics, functional electrical stimulation and orthotics) and support surfaces (mattresses and cushions). Substantial investment (£230k) has been made by the University in establishing three permanent post-doctoral researchers, one research assistant and capital laboratory investment. CPHPR has a strong and rapidly expanding portfolio of research work. Over the RAE period, it has attracted funds in excess of £800k from the European Union, ESPRC, Arthritis Research Campaign, Dunhill Trust, the NHS and industrial partners, employed 6 research assistants and supervised 7 completed PhDs. International collaborative links exist with groups in Europe, Australia and the USA.
Prosthetics research includes an EPSRC funded project (Bowker, £42k) that successfully demonstrated the potential for using dimensional change in muscle as a control signal for powered upper-limb prostheses (patent no. 2302949). Following presentation at the World Congress of Prosthetics and Orthotics (Amsterdam, 1998), an ongoing collaboration was established between the CRHPR and research groups in St Petersburg and Moscow, including a NATO/Royal Society Visiting Fellowship (£12k) for a Russian researcher. Another member of the CRHPR is Principal Foreign Collaborator on two International Science and Technology Corporation research grants in the area of prosthetics. £100k (Rithalia) was secured in 2000 for a NHS PhD Research Training Fellowship to investigate the biomechanics of gait in trans-tibial amputees, strengthening links with NHS practitioners.
Support from the Dunhill Trust (Edwards, £210k) underpins work on functional electrical stimulation (FES) of paralysed muscles for those with spinal injuries. Edwards was a partner in the EU-funded Stand Up And Walk (SUAW) project. The British Council (£2k) funded Nester and Kenney (then working with Roessingh R&D, the Netherlands, on the EU Neuromuscular Sensing and Stimulation NEUROS project) to collaborate on the evaluation of a prototype FES system for the treatment of dropped feet. This led to CRHPR becoming a full partner in the Eureka IMPULSE project.
Research in foot orthotics and footwear focuses on clinical aspects: a clinical trial in four regional hospitals into the foot orthotic management of osteoarthrtitis of the knee (Bowker, Nester - £20k, Arthritis Research Campaign); foot orthoses in Paget’s Disease (Nester); the optimisation of rocker soled shoe design for patients with intermittent claudication (£70k); and, in collaboration with the University of Manchester, the design of footwear for the high-risk patient (County Footwear, £34k). This work is underpinned by more fundamental work on gait (funded by the Arthritis Research Campaign and the NHS). Links with Australian, American and Russian groups are being established (Nester, £2k). Internal University funds (£12k) support a regional consultation exercise on orthoses services to develop a regional research network and a 5-year, practice-focused research strategy.
Work in the assessment of pressure relieving mattresses and seating centres has a similar clinical and practice focus. Main elements include: a multi-centre trial of support surfaces (Rithalia, £180k from Medical Agency Service Ltd), in collaboration with Queen’s Hospital, Burton-on-Trent; the properties of operating table surfaces (£20k, Services to Medicine Ltd); and tissue viability in collaboration with Manchester Royal Infirmary (supported by a Diabetes UK Postgraduate Studentship).
Biomedicine
Biomedical research comprises three sub-areas (medical parasitology, medical biophysics and biochemistry, and nutrition and toxicology), each led by professors and producing research of international significance. Over the period of the RAE, funding of around £2.68m has been obtained from the Research Councils, European Union, National Institutes of Health (USA), the Wellcome Trust and the commercial sector. In addition, two spin-off companies (Photonics Research Systems Ltd. and Cestode Diagnostics Ltd.) jointly owned by the University were set up in 1996 to exploit basic research in biophysics and parasitology respectively.
Medical Parasitology (Prof Bradley, Prof Craig, Hide, Klager, Pentreath, Rogan)
Craig and Rogan direct research into applied immunobiology and the epidemiology of echinococcosis and cysticercosis diseases transmitted to humans from animal reservoir hosts. Two EC collaborative and Salford co-ordinated project grants (900k ECU) and link grants (Royal Society, British Council, Wellcome Trust - £76k) have been used to facilitate these studies. National collaborations exist with the Universities of Liverpool (Departments of Tropical Medicine and Pharmacology) and Edinburgh (Tropical Veterinary Medicine). Recent research developments include the use of novel diagnostic tools for detection of animal and human infections (including recombinant antigens) and application of remote sensing (collaboration with the Telford Institute of Environmental Systems at the University of Salford) to identify optimal rodent reservoir host habitats by characterisation of landscapes. A NATO funded (Craig, £18k) international Advanced Research Workshop was organised in 2000 to present the findings. A major National Institute of Health (USA) 4-year programme grant ($1.5 million) has been awarded in 2000 to Craig to co-ordinate and develop predictive models in China. Funding from MAFF and the Department of Health (£90k) will enable studies to establish risk of importation of zoonotic parasites from continental Europe.
Bradley and Klager carried out research on the parasite causing African river blindness in West Africa with the long-term aim of vaccine development. Detailed studies of the immunobiology and immunopathology of host-parasite infection have been facilitated by cloning of several parasite genes including a retinoid-binding protein. The Wellcome Trust funded (£395k) investigations between this tissue parasite and intestinal dwelling nematode worms. Since joining the University in 1998, Hide and Pentreath have obtained funding of £168k (Wellcome Trust, Royal Society, University of Salford) to take forward research on developing molecular methods using mobile genetic elements that can distinguish human-infective from non-human-infective strains of protozoan parasites (Trypanosoma and Toxoplasma). This trypanosomaisis research, undertaken in collaboration with the Universities of Leeds, Glasgow and Edinburgh, has been instrumental in understanding the pathology of African human sleeping sickness.
Medical Biophysics and Biochemistry (Prof Morgan, Prof Richards, Bisby, Butler, Leonard, Thomas, Wallace)
Two grants (£108k) from the Association of International Research have been used to synthesise novel candidate drugs that have anti-tumour activity after bio-reductive activation. This project is designed to build on the successful introduction by this group of a new prospective anti-tumour drug into clinical trials. Studies of free radicals using pulsed lasers at the Lasers for Science Facility at the Rutherford Appleton Laboratory (funded by BBSRC and EPSRC) have provided new insights into the mechanisms of protein-radical enzymes and actions of biological antioxidants. A recent BBSRC grant (£100k) is funding an investigation of intracellular oxidative stress produced by multiphoton femtosecond laser excitation of radical-generating compounds ('photo-Fenton' reagents). A new method known as Fluorescence Lifetime Imaging (FLIM) has been invented and patented by the Salford group, and is now in use worldwide. Further work to apply this technology with commercial support is underway in association with the spin-off company. A novel liposome system utilising a photochromic lipid has been developed for light-induced spatial and temporal control of solute release with support from BBSRC (£107k). The composition of the liposome allows wavelength-dependent solute release from the liposomes on a millisecond timescale. The liposomes show promise as an alternative to conventional 'caged' reagents and as a light-activated drug delivery system. As part of the North West Science Review (Smith/Byers), funding of £195k has been obtained to develop novel bioarray methodologies for applications in proteomics.
Nutrition and Toxicology (Prof Storey, Davies, Foster, Pentreath)
Studies undertaken by Storey and Foster have focussed on foods with potential health benefits, a key issue being the digestibility and functionality of low digestible carbohydrates including resistant starch, polyols (including erythritol and lactitol) as well as novel carbohydrates such as cyclodextrin, palatinose, tagatose and trehalose. Prebiotic and probiotic effects are investigated in vivo and in vitro with fermentation and gastrointestinal tolerance being an area of particular interest. An international symposium was organised in 1999 and a consensus statement produced for publication early in 2001. An emerging area of dental health research seeks to establish the cariogenicity of molecules at food, rather than pharmacological, levels. The development of an artificial mouth has been used to identify several naturally occurring molecules with anti-caries activity. Pentreath and Davies are focusing on the development of nervous tissue culture systems for studying mechanisms of neurotoxicity. These include a comprehensive attempt to develop an in vitro astrocyte assay system to replace animal testing. Other environmental toxicology studies involve the development of biological and immunoassays for detecting and screening toxins of environmental and public health importance. Salford trials using an insecticide formulation from Abbot Chemicals has led to its registration by the Health & Safety Executive, permitting its use in the water industry. The role of atmospheric pollutants and pulmonary dysfunction is the focus of collaborative research with Fazakerly Hospital
Prof Craig, Prof Bradley, Prof Morgan, Prof Storey, Prof Richards, Bisby, Butler, Davies, Foster, Hide, Pentreath, Rogan, Thomas, Wallace, Klager, Leonard, 4 research assistants and 3 research technicians.
Research focuses on parasitic diseases in tropical / developing countries in the Middle East, Africa, Latin America, China and SE Asia. Research relating to human and zoonotic helminthic and protozoal infections (funded to a total of £1.38 million) includes immunodiagnostics, immunobiology / immunopathology, and molecular epidemiology. Over the RAE period, 4 postdoctoral assistants and 7 PhD students have been involved in this research.
This group focuses on the development and biological applications of imaging and spectroscopic methods, free radicals in biology, bioactivated drugs, and liposomal systems for controlled solute release. In the RAE period, research income totalling £834k has been obtained from BBSRC, EPSRC, AICR, the European Union and the North West Science Review, including central facility access worth £210k (including £90k EPSRC Direct Access), and with additional grant income (£170k - MoD, DTI) to the associated spin-out company (Photonics Research Systems Ltd.). Two patents have been granted and a further six applications have been filed to protect intellectual property generated by the group.
This group researches nutritional and toxicological issues. Research funding of £471k (EPSRC, Northwest Water, Water Research Centre, Abbot Chemicals, Fazakerley Foundation of Respiratory Research, Merck Chemicals) has been obtained in the RAE period, with international collaborations with researchers in Belgium, France, Germany, the Netherlands, Switzerland and Spain. UK collaborators include the Aintree Chest Centre (Fazakerley Hospital), Cadbury-Schweppes, Celltox Centre, Cerestar, Cultor Foods, Environmental Agency, Microbio, Ninewells Hospital (Dundee), Nottingham Trent University, North West Water and Yorkshire Water.
Post-graduate research students are supported at three levels: University, Research Institute and supervisor. The RGC co-ordinates post-graduate activities across the University and has been the focus for new supportive mechanisms founded on the concept of ‘learner-researcher’. All new research students attend an induction course and a series of follow-up workshops. Where appropriate, modules are taken in taught Masters courses to extend knowledge in relevant areas. Research students are supported in attending and presenting their work at national and international conferences. A web page provides a communication network to inform students about events and news and provides an interface to a post-graduate profile database and to research skills advice. A Learning Agreement developed by the RGC enables students and supervisors to establish their respective roles and expectations at an early stage. It is updated annually. Interim assessment of progress occurs after 12 months via a written report, oral presentation and viva voce examination.
Staffing Policy
The formation of Research Institutes enables an effective balance between individuals’ research interests and teaching duties. Staff appraisal by Heads of Schools and Research Institutes includes an agreed percentage of dedicated development and research time via a University wide workload programme. A targeted strategy of academic staff appointments is pursued, focusing on those with demonstrated research activity, ideally within one of the major research areas. Young research staff appointments are provided with a senior staff mentor to act as a fulcrum for research development. This policy has been successfully pursued, facilitated by significant provision of Embryonic Development Funds and Research Promotion Funds from the University’s Central Research Committee. Since 1996 two new appointments have received £80k and three studentships from these sources. During the period of assessment, one Cat A* staff was recruited into the Health and Social Care group, strengthening health informatics. The Biomedicine group has also benefitted from four visiting research fellows, fostering industrial and international contacts in the areas of medical parasitology, nutrition and toxicology. Departure of staff (Bradley, Klager) has not significantly affected the coherence of the work in biomedicine with their foci being taken forward by other staff. Bradley has taken the Chair in Parasitology at University of Nottingham (2000) and Noyes is on secondment to the University of York.
Self Assessment
The unit of assessment includes 32.3 fte Cat A/A* persons and around £4m spent research income, an average of £126k per returnee. 66 research studentships were registered and 44 PhDs and 15 research Masters awarded over the period. All returnees have obtained research excellence at the national level and at least 25% are operating at an international level as judged by invitations to speak at international scientific meetings, the quality of journal papers, successful external grant funding and other esteem criteria (see RA6).
Since 1996, the Department of Human Communication Sciences (HCS) has met all its RAE targets and achieved very significant improvements in the quality and volume of research publications, grant income and markers of peer esteem (see Table 1 and RA6a).
Table 1: Average outputs per returned FTE 1996-2001
Books published (per FTE) | Peer reviewed articles (per FTE) |
Book chapters (per FTE) |
Keynote presentations (per FTE) | Other invited research presentations (per FTE) | Peer-reviewed conference papers (per FTE) |
New grant funding in RAE period* (per FTE) |
1.9 | 9.9 | 4.8 | 3.7 | 11.3 | 20.3 | £209K* |
Research Structure and Environment
Cluster (A): Atypical and Typical Language Development
The unifying feature of the cluster’s activity is its developmental perspective on the unfolding nature of speech, language and literacy difficulties, through the study of both normal and atypical development. The simultaneous focus on normal and atypical development formed the theme of the international Child Language Seminar hosted by HCS in 1998.
Achievements
a) Through longitudinal and cross-sectional group studies and case studies, the cluster has helped advance our knowledge about the nature, identification and management of speech and literacy difficulties and in neuropsychological development. Specific contributions include: demonstrating how children with the same medical diagnosis (e.g. dyspraxia) may have different patterns of deficit in speech processing, which can then inform treatment; elucidating associations and dissociations between: (i) prosodic and segmental phonological / linguistic skills; (ii) speech processing and word-finding difficulties; (iii) speech input processing and speech output; (iv) speech processing skills and literacy development. Staff have been supported by project grants and fellowships from ESRC, Leverhulme, MRC, NHSE, Nuffield, Psychological Corporation, Cancer Research, Williams Syndrome Foundation, British Telecom.
b) Theoretical advances have been expounded in major review papers and invited keynote addresses. Fawcett’s research (with Nicolson, Psychology) into the theoretical basis of dyslexia has led to the cerebellar deficit hypothesis, attracting great interest within the dyslexia community, because it promises to provide an ontogenetic causal chain between cerebellar impairment and phonological deficits, via impaired articulatory fluency in the young child. Locke has elaborated an influential theory of neurolinguistic development from an emergentist perspective. Perkins has proposed a novel theory of pragmatic disability, based on the notion that pragmatic ability is the emergent consequence of the way in which linguistic, cognitive and sensorimotor systems interact. This will be more fully expounded in his forthcoming book ‘Pragmatics and Language Pathology’ (CUP).
c) The cluster’s research has had a demonstrable impact on clinical and educational practice. From 1996 - 2000, 23 short courses on the Stackhouse / Wells psycholinguistic framework were delivered, the majority to NHS SLT services; as a result, c.700 UK practitioners were trained in this approach during the period. In addition, invited presentations on the framework have been made in Europe, USA, and Australia. The dyslexia screening tests developed by Fawcett (with Nicolson, Psychology) are now in use in over 5000 UK schools, with a further published test for adult screening, and a screening test for 3 year olds in press. This work has led to new, cost-effective methods for teaching reading to children at risk of dyslexia or other learning difficulties.
Future Plans
The aim of this cluster is to gain fresh insights that are relevant for practice as well as theory by combining linguistic, psycholinguistic, cognitive, neuropsychological and social perspectives. This will form the basis of a new interdisciplinary Centre for Speech and Literacy, housed in the HCS clinical suite, which will focus on speech and language difficulties, their consequences for literacy and their impact on psychosocial development across the lifespan.
Speech and language difficulties
A focus on the social and interactional context of developmental speech and language difficulties highlights the importance of hitherto neglected research areas, for which cluster members have recently attracted research funding that extends well into the next RAE period: prosody and other connected speech features (ESRC); the nature of speech difficulties e.g. cleft palate, dyspraxia, stammering, and their psychosocial consequences (Equitable Trust); sex differences in children’s speech; processing of unfamiliar accents (ESRC); conversation analysis (ESRC); formulaic language; vocabulary in high-functioning autism (ESRC); dissociations between conversational / social skills and cognitive skills (Williams Syndrome Foundation / University of Sheffield).
Literacy
The impact of underlying speech and language processing deficits on literacy and educational performance will be continuing through follow-up studies, new studies on the development of infants with a family history of dyslexia, and on commonalities and differences between dyslexia, specific language impairment, ADHD and dyspraxia. A cross-linguistic dimension will be added, exploring the effects of different linguistic and orthographic systems on the manifestations of dyslexia, and also through participation in the International Adult Literacy Survey. This will be complemented by investigation of the neuropsychological basis of dyslexia, through fMRI and analysis of eye blink conditioning.
Early years
Support for preschool children at risk for spoken and written language difficulties will be a national priority over the coming five years. Ongoing research at HCS into identification, intervention, and dissemination of good practice is supported by DfEE, Nuffield Foundation, NHS and British Telecom, and is carried out in collaboration with health, education and social services.
Cluster (B): Speech and Language Therapy Evaluation
The themes within this cluster are the development of assessments and outcome measures which can appropriately investigate the effectiveness of various therapies. This has involved the standardisation of specific tools including diagnostic testing procedures as well as the development and evaluation of traditional as well as new therapeutic procedures. A broad range of methodologies and technologies have been used to triangulate the evidence, including both prospective and retrospective investigation of cohorts of patients having received speech and language therapy, systematic reviews, qualitative studies of therapy processes, and random controlled trials. Enderby remains a Co-Director of the highly productive group in Bristol, the links with Sheffield being consolidated with reciprocal honorary lecturerships. The Bristol Unit houses six programmes of speech and language therapy research, particularly associated with technology in the provision/support of speech and language therapy. Other HCS staff have contributed to specific areas, for example Whiteside (voice) and Perkins (head injury), bringing phonetics and linguistics expertise. The links between the units have allowed a combination of different disciplines to develop interdisciplinary working protocols.
Achievements
The links between the Sheffield and Bristol centres are further demonstrated by the common theme of computerised approaches to speech and language therapy and its evaluation. The PCAD project in Bristol, grant holder Enderby, was funded by the EU Commission under the TIDE Framework Programme. The ENABL Project (on access to computer based vocational tasks with speech and language) was also funded by the EU under the Fifth Framework IST Programme (Whiteside).
Research into communication problems resulting from head injury has resulted in theoretical advances in clinical pragmatics (Perkins). Research into the psychosocial effects of aphasia is conducted in collaboration with the Department of Psychology. The resulting measure for assessing self-esteem in aphasic patients (Brumfitt, Sheeran) has been adopted nationally. Theoretical advances related to the understanding of psychosocial factors in relation to all communication impairments, as set out in a book by Brumfitt, has improved understanding of the interplay between psychosocial effects and impairment.
Future Plans
Cluster (C): Cognitive Neuroscience of Speech and Language
Achievements
Future Plans
Promotion of research and research culture
Research infrastructure, facilities and PGR support
Resources, training and support for research students
Interdisciplinary and collaborative research
Enderby’s group has established itself as a leading international centre for speech and language therapy research. This work has had a significant impact on the development of UK health policy. Much of the work associated with therapy outcomes has been adopted by professions other than speech and language therapy, particularly in the areas of benchmarking and taxonomies for processes of treatment. The Therapy Outcome Measures has facilitated the largest collection of data of patients undergoing physiotherapy, occupational therapy and speech and language therapy both in this country and two other continents. This allows comparison of healthcare achievements and benchmarking of current clinical services and will be fundamental in identifying service and clinical issues associated with recovery which require more detailed interrogation, i.e. it is likely that this data will reveal important clinical relevant research questions. The group’s randomised control trial of paediatric speech and language therapy provision has raised serious questions about the effectiveness of the ‘dosage’ of therapy currently offered in the UK, leading to extensive debate within and beyond the SLT profession. Grants supporting 15 separately identified projects have been attracted by the lead members of the cluster. These grants are housed within both the University and the NHS sector and thus they are not all reflected in the financial accounts associated with this return.
Development and evaluation of technology assisted therapy
Continuation of work with Speech and Language Therapy Research Unit (funded by Underwood Trust and Stroke Association). Expanding the programme from aphasia to phonological disorders (NEAT) and dysarthria: a new project funded by Action Research starts in 2001 (£109k).
Outcomes and benchmarking
External collaboration with 8 trusts who are involved in benchmarking study (Australia/ Commonwealth and European funding).
Processes of Therapy
Development of taxonomy and evaluation of processes of rehabilitation.
Clinical Education
Continuation of NMet funded project on informing educational change to improve the clinical competence of speech and language therapists.
Self esteem and communication change
Development of project with Hendra & Anderson (Stroke Unit, Royal Hallamshire Hospital) working with aphasic patients admitted to an acute stroke unit.
The primary purpose of this group is to investigate how the various neurocognitive dimensions of speech input and output processing are inter-related. The remit of the cluster is therefore to address neurocognitive issues that have specific relevance to speech perception and production as well as issues that pertain more generally to the organisation of language and cognition.
a) Theoretical and empirical work in the area of Apraxia of Speech (AOS) and its implications for models of speech control generally has been acknowledged by Croot (2000) as representing a 'paradigm-changing account'. This is reflected in three invited journal articles in the period 1999-2000, and increasing citations. A further article has recently been published in Aphasiology (2001) accompanied by peer commentaries from scientists in the USA, Germany, Australia and Britain.
b) Work on the complex question of the interrelationship between language and thinking has had a major impact, with empirical work reported in Current Biology (Varley & Siegal 2000) receiving peer commentary from Paul Bloom (Yale). This publication was also featured in an ‘update monitor’ article in Trends in Cognitive Science and a further invited opinion article by Siegal, Varley & Want ‘ Mind over Grammar: Reasoning in Aphasia, Deafness, and Development’ will also be published in this high profile journal in July 2001.
c) A substantive MRI and behavioural database for research into cognition and language in healthy volunteers has been established and used in the creation of a unique joint site biobehavioural data bank with the University of Liverpool (Cowell). Invitations to present data from the Life Span study to international audiences have allowed the Life Span study to attract the interest of several established neuroimaging centres.
Organisation and function of speech perception/production systems
Expanding neuroimaging repertoire to include functional MRI, through the following collaborative projects: (1) Verbal fluency in adults with a history of developmental language disorders; (2) Word processing in aphasic subjects after speech and language therapy; (3) Normative processing of phonemes and subphonemic processing.
Models of speech encoding
Using the acquired speech disorder AOS to explore models of speech encoding, with applications in the assessment and treatment of speech disorders. An 18-month project funded by PPP Healthcare Medical Trust (£52k), will start in 2001.
Neuropsychology of Language and thought
Examining evidence for sophisticated reasoning in people with severe aphasia in order to establish the role of language in reasoning.
Related Neurocognitive Studies
Analysis of brain and behavioural data will continue for the Normative Life Span study with a focus on the joint Liverpool/Sheffield database and the neurocognition of aging and individual differences in cortical systems.
HCS holds regular research seminars open to staff and students with contributions from leading international researchers. In addition, HCS staff regularly present their own research to their departmental colleagues as well as to colleagues elsewhere in the university as part of research seminar series hosted by the Institute for Language, Speech and Hearing, the Hang Seng Centre for Cognitive Studies, the School of Health and Related Research and the Departments of Psychology and Computer Science.
The department maintains a series of well-equipped research laboratories including a suite of eight linked rooms containing state-of-the-art speech analysis and audio- and video-recording equipment for the collection and analysis of normal and disordered speech and language data. In addition, the department has received a Hewlett-Packard Philanthropy award of £67k (Enderby, Perkins) to refurbish and improve computing equipment and facilities within the department. HCS staff also have full access to state-of-the-art facilities elsewhere in the university such as Brain Imaging and a wide range of computing hardware and software. Close liaison with the NHS, as reflected in jointly funded HEFCE-NHS posts (e.g. Enderby) and the siting of specialist treatment centres within the HCS clinic (e.g. Cleft Palate), ensures research access to patients and clinical facilities. HCS staff have similar privileged access to schools within the region.
In addition to the laboratory resources of individual staff supervisors, PGRs have sole use of an IT room within the postgraduate suite housing high specification computers as well as priority use of HCS’ newly instated Hewlett Packard computer room. PGRs are represented on the HCS IT and Research Committees which enables them to make requests for equipment etc. One PGR tutor and one part-time secretary are responsible for the administration of research students through the duration of their research degree. Each year the students select a representative who attends staff meetings and who meets monthly with the PG Tutor who feeds information to/from the appropriate committee or HoD. Students complete an anonymous questionnaire, and a report of student views on supervision, training and university facilities is prepared. All full-time students complete the university requirements for the research training programme, currently set at 45 credits. The remainder of training is led by the supervisor and his/her collaborators. We liaise with School of Health and Related Research for provision of Supervisory Training courses. An annual PG Seminar event is held where students give short talks on their research progress and findings for peer review to prepare them for presenting at conferences.
Sited jointly in the Faculties of Medicine and Social Sciences, HCS adopts a deliberately interdisciplinary approach to research, pooling expertise in SLT, language pathology, psychology, education, linguistics, phonetics and neuroscience. For example, Perkins (Reader in Clinical Linguistics) makes contributions in atypical development (autism, Williams Syndrome) and in acquired disorders (head injury), unified by a linguistic focus on pragmatics. Within the university HCS makes a significant contribution to the research programmes of the following cross-departmental research centres: the Institute for Language, Speech and Hearing (Howard, Perkins, Wells, Whiteside), the Sheffield Institute for the Study of Ageing (Enderby, Varley), the Hang Seng Centre for Cognitive Studies (Cowell, Perkins, Varley), and has strong collaborative research links with the School of Health and Related Research (Enderby), and the Departments of Psychology (Brumfitt, Cowell, Fawcett, Stackhouse, Varley), Computer Science (Howard, Perkins, Whiteside) and Educational Studies (Stackhouse). In addition to a range of active collaborative links between individual staff in HCS and other universities in the UK, Europe, North America and Australia, more formalised links in the form of Honorary Research Fellowships/Professorships exist with the Speech and Language Therapy Research Unit in Bristol (Enderby), the Magnetic Resonance Imaging Research Centre, University of Liverpool (Cowell), and the Department of Human Communication Science, University College London (Stackhouse, Wells). Wells is a core member of the ESRC-funded seminar on Conversation Analysis and Communication Disorders, which brings together researchers from several UK universities as well as teachers and therapists. Current research grants are jointly held with UCL (Nathan, Wright and Wood); Hammersmith Hospital (Brookes and Jenkins); Manchester (Reason); Warwick (Boucher); Bergen (Hugdahl); York (Snowling and Nash).
Relationships with industry, the public sector and other research users
Public Sector: Staff (Enderby, Lees) are working in cooperation with the DfEE in the development of evaluation of protocols for the Government-funded Sure Start Programme. Enderby is associated with the local initiatives associated with the Health Action Zone (HAZ) programme and local development of the Health Improvement Programme (HIMP). HCS also works closely with the local NHS with shared appointments, cross membership of committees, and arrangements for use of clinical and research facilities, e.g. SLT clinics, Phonetics Laboratory, MRI scanning (Cowell). Two projects funded by the NHS (£40k) and honorary positions (e.g. Lees) ensure liaison in clinical research and teaching. Enderby is a member of NHS trust, local authority and charitable organisations which promote the development and evaluation of partnership working.
Management of research within the department
Staffing Policy
Research training and conference attendance: The university Learned Societies Fund pays for academic staff, research staff and research students in HCS to present their research at all conferences and meetings of learned societies within the UK and EU at which their abstracts have been accepted, and to attend one additional conference per year purely as an auditor. In addition, staff in HCS may bid for an annual departmental Conference and Training Budget to support research training and attendance at conferences outside the EU.
Sabbatical leave and appraisal: University departments may bid for funding from a central University Research Stimulation Fund. In 1999-2000 HCS made a successful bid for £17K from this source to free 4 staff from various teaching duties in order to pump-prime several research projects. Over the last 5 years, sabbatical leave for HCS staff has been awarded according to individual need and departmental priorities. A new scheme will guarantee each research-active staff member a period of study leave once every 3 years, subject to meeting agreed objectives. The HoD leads on staff review and development and one key feature of this process is to support the development of staff in the area of research.
Industry: Grants have been obtained from British Telecom;The Psychological Corporation (USA ); and OTICON research (Denmark). In addition, collaborative research has been undertaken with industrial partners within EU funded projects. These have included: Bidesign (UK), Cambridge Adaptive Communication (UK) & Telia Promotor AB (Whiteside and Cudd within the VAESS project (4th Framework, TIDE Project)); Concentra (UK) and Enter (Sweden) (Whiteside and Cudd within the ENABL project (5th Framework IST Programme)). The activities of the ENABL project have led to the publication of the ENABL Voice Care Guidelines by the ACE Centre Advisory Trust in Oxford, an organisation partly funded by the DfEE via BECTa (British Educational Communications and Technology agency) and the Gatsby Charitable Foundation.
A departmental Research Committee reports to the Executive Committee to which the chair of the Research Committee belongs. The Research Committee comprises representatives of the research clusters, of contract research staff and PhD students. As part of its remit to meet agreed strategic departmental objectives, it manages ethical matters arising from HCS research, oversees the strategic placement of studentships, and organises the departmental research seminars. It also has the responsibility of integrating the research of this academic department with that of the National Health Service and other clinical researchers or users of research. Liaison with central research support within the University is through formal links to Faculty Research Strategy Groups in Medicine and Social Sciences and the Research Services Department.
Effect of staff changes over the census period: Enderby’s joining HCS in 1998 (HoD 1998-2000) and her continuing presence has significantly transformed the ‘Speech and language therapy evaluation’ cluster. The recent appointments of Stackhouse (as HoD) and Wells bring senior research experience to the ‘Atypical and Typical Development’ cluster, while Locke maintains active collaborative research links with other HCS staff and continues to co-supervise PhD students. Peers, a member of the same cluster who had a strong research profile demonstrated by research council and other grants and publications, resigned in 2000 to take up a post in the private sector: he will be replaced in 2001 by Szczerbinski, a promising young researcher specialising in dyslexia and cross-linguistic studies, who is integral to the research strategy for the department and will be returned in the next RAE. A new (NMET funded) lectureship has been created, as from June 2001, to which a senior research active SLT (with PhD) has now been appointed. R. Body, who specialises in head injury and clinical linguistics, complements and extends existing strengths in research clusters B and C. Lees, formerly UCL, is now honorary lecturer at HCS; her relocation to the Surestart project in Sheffield links closely with Early Years research at HCS. Boucher moved to the University of Warwick in 1998 but retains active collaborative research links and joint research grants with HCS staff.
Development of younger researchers: New researchers, whether lecturers or CRS, follow an induction and support programme which includes regular monitoring and appraisal by research mentors. Researchers are able to present, and receive constructive feedback on work in progress and draft grant proposals at regular research cluster workshops. HCS has devised and implemented a development, support and career management scheme for CRS in line with the national Concordat agreed by the CVCP and research councils.
1992-1996 | 1996-2001 | |
Number of staff on census date | 24
|
18
|
Number of research active staff on census date | N/A
|
13
|
Number of publications (from search of library databases) | 76
|
178
|
Number of books edited or authored | 3
|
21
|
Grant income | £64,000
|
£551,690
|
The School accommodates two groups of research constituents, first core research staff, research assistants and research students, and second academic members of school staff. There has been a substantial increase in the research activity of the School between 1996 and 2001. In 1996 the School had three core researchers comprising a director and two post-doctoral fellows. By 2001 the School had three Professors; a Professor of Rehabilitation (Ashburn) to lead research activity in the School, the Europe Chair of Rehabilitation Medicine (McLellan) and the award of a Personal Chair (Barnitt). In addition, core research staff had increased to two senior research fellows, nine research fellows, and two post-doctoral fellows by 2000. A new appointment of a Reader of Rehabilitation (McPherson) was made in November 2000, due to take up post in August 2001.
In recognition of the School's increasing research activity and achievements and in the absence of QR support, the University provided funding towards the new Chair in Rehabilitation, and pump priming for two three-year post-doctoral fellowships that commenced in 1998/9. In parallel the Faculty provided funding for a senior lecturer post in research and four research student bursaries. The Faculty also contributed towards the salary of a dedicated tutor (Ellis-Hill) for the Health Sciences Graduate School founded in 2000.
Research students in the School have increased significantly from 5 in 1996 to 22 in 2000 (10 full time and 12 part time). To accommodate this demand, the Graduate School was set up jointly with the Community Clinical Sciences Research Division of the School of Medicine and the School of Nursing. A particular strength of the Graduate School is the research-training programme in qualitative and quantitative methods, and provision of joint supervision. Careful management of research students over the assessment period has led to 17 Doctoral students and 1 Master of Philosophy student completing within time.
Strategic Aims and Targets
A major strategic aim of the School has been to develop research activity that will provide a critical mass for the emerging disciplines of occupational therapy, physiotherapy and podiatry. To support this intention, academic and core research staff numbers have risen from 25.8 WTE in 1996 to 43.9 WTE in 2001. Of these, four had completed doctorates by 1996, 11 more by 2000 and four are due for completion in 2001. A further 6 academic staff are engaged in doctoral studies with expected completion dates between 2002 and 2005. The growing core of staff with research qualifications and skills has led to a significant increase in research activity, grant proposals, publications and presentations at national and international conferences. These developments have been managed with the intention that research mass in the School will be guaranteed to grow exponentially over the next five years. This builds on the existing evidence of research growth in the School where in 1996, 8.5 FTE members of staff were entered as research active. This has risen to 16.6 FTE by 2001.
To achieve such significant progress over the assessment period the School set out a number of targets against an ambitious research strategy and acted vigorously in implementing them. First the School has a five-year strategic plan which sets out the research agenda, and listed actions, to ensure that outcomes can be recorded. Second, staff have twice yearly appraisals at which individual research targets and achievements are monitored. Third, the dedicated Head of Research provides leadership support to academic and research staff. This support includes the organisation of research training, seminar programmes, help with grant proposals, preparation for conference presentations, and interview techniques when applying for competitive research monies. The School also supports four research interest groups (Education, Cardio-respiratory, Low back pain and Qualitative research) that meet regularly to share information and develop methodology in the topic area. The groups’ activities are documented and disseminated in the School’s research news letters.
Interdisciplinary and Collaborative Research
Major opportunities for the development of interdisciplinary research, in particular the health services agenda for patient related research, have been created through the multidisciplinary nature of the Faculty of Medicine, Health and Biological Science in which the School is sited. The result has been joint applications across the Faculty for research grants (Wiles, Kersten, Ashburn, Conway), joint supervision across Schools of graduate students (Barnitt, Ashburn, Wiles, Conway, Burridge, Ellis-Hill) and access to specialist training and facilities in each of the constituent Schools. Research students have a Graduate School support group, and PhD supervisors are trained on University approved courses.
Interdisciplinary research in the School, and across University departments is promoted in a number of ways. The School's research unit employs occupational therapists, physiotherapists, podiatrists, sociologists, psychologists, nurses and medical doctors. In addition, research staff work with colleagues from University departments of Engineering, Statistics, Audiology, Psychology, Sociology and Public Health Medicine. The Graduate School is run jointly by the Schools of Medicine, Nursing and Midwifery and the School of Health Professions and Rehabilitation Sciences. Additionally there is regular research collaboration with clinical departments across the health region; for example Barnitt is researching medically unexplained physical symptoms with Southampton Acute and Community Trusts. Adams is researching splinting and the rheumatoid hand with Royal Bournemouth and Poole Hospital Trusts respectively, and Burridge is researching the use of Botulinum toxin with collaborators at Salisbury Hospital Trust.
Links with industry and national agencies
Links with industry and national agencies are maintained through commissioned and collaborative research. Burridge works with Alogan and IPSEN on functional electrical stimulation and is an expert evaluator for the European Union. J Potter works with Cuxson, and Gerrard on the use of salicylic acid and corn plasters. Conway works with the U.S.A. Environmental Protection Agency and has recently received a grant for £150,000 from the Wellcome Trust to carry out 3D Mapping of inhaled drugs. This is a collaborative project with Southampton University department of Chemistry. Pain works with the Medical Devices Agency of the Department of Health (DH) and carries out user evaluations of equipment for people with disabilities. A new contract for £146,000 per annum for five years was agreed in September 2000 to continue this rolling programme. Ashburn has the overall lead for this programme. Barnitt (with McGaughrin) carried out a national study for the DH of fitness for purpose of new graduates.
Research facilities and Support for Graduate students
The School has two dedicated research sites, the first is based at Southampton University Hospital Trust, where the majority of the Neurological Rehabilitation group is based. This facility allows easy access to patients, and proximity to the Gait laboratory for patient/subject assessment and measurement. The site has one part-time secretary and a full-time Experimental Officer. The Disability Equipment Assessment Centre (DEAC), where Pain is employed, is based in this accommodation. The second research site is a purpose designed unit on the University campus which provides space and facilities for up to 16 researchers. There is a newly equipped Biomechanics laboratory with a full-time Senior Experimental Officer. Two full-time secretaries are based at this site. Graduate students have dedicated accommodation and facilities on both sites.
The following developments have been designed to support research students:
a) A Senior Research Fellow (Ellis-Hill) has been appointed to co-ordinate research student activity including all aspects of quality. Ellis-Hill co-ordinates supervisor selection, training and support; research methods training, seminar programmes and joint education with other disciplines.
b) A Faculty Graduate School in Health Sciences has been established. Barnitt chaired the development group for this initiative and is now chair of the Graduate School Board that monitors student progress across the Faculty.
c) A range of research methods courses are provided which reflect the diverse needs of health sciences graduate students for either, or both, qualitative and quantitative methods. Currently those used are well-established programmes in Social Sciences, and in the School of Medicine; and from 2000 in the Health Sciences Graduate School.
d) SHPRS has also set up a centre for Post Registration studies, which offers a range of foundation research methods courses as part of its Masters programmes.
The School has been mindful of academic staff who wish to study for PhD's but for whom supervisors with expertise in the chosen subject area are not available in the School. These students have been supported in accessing supervisors with national or international reputations in other centres (Borthwick, Curtin, Dean, Gallagher, Kitsell, Pockney). The expectation is that this group of staff will bring additional expertise back into the School on completion of studies. Progress is monitored through twice annual appraisal with the Head of the relevant professional programme.
A main aim of the School strategy is to develop current PhD students into the next generation of researchers. To reflect this, the current submission includes two recent graduates who have achieved two or more publications (Ballinger and Roberts).
Research groupings in the School
Neurological Rehabilitation
The key outputs from this group have been the development of measures for recording deficits of movement and function, evaluation of treatment interventions and insights into patients’ views and perceptions of their neurological conditions. Their work has focused on people diagnosed with stroke, multiple sclerosis, head injury, cerebral palsy and Parkinson’s Disease. Standardised outcome measures have been developed for recording the movements of people with multiple sclerosis and stroke (Ashburn) and predicting outcome from head injury (McLellan, Horn). A range of treatment interventions have been evaluated for their effectiveness. These include physiotherapy for cerebral palsy (McLellan), dropped foot stimulator for people with stroke (Burridge) and Botulinum Toxin for spasticity (McLellan). The exploration of patients’ perceptions and understandings of their conditions and treatments has formed an important part of the work of this group. Ashburn and Ballinger reported on patients’ descriptions of fall events while Ellis-Hill described individual’s experiences of having a stroke and living with Parkinson’s Disease.
Specific examples of the international work of members of this group include Ashburn’s exploratory work with the Physiotherapy Department at Otago University, New Zealand into the balance function of people with recently diagnosed multiple sclerosis; Burridge’s work on the effectiveness of Functional Electrical Stimulation (FES), and Botulinum Toxin in patients with stroke and spinal cord injury which is part-funded by the European Union; and the survey by McLellan (with Kersten) of people with MS in six European countries.
The group have been successful in securing national grants from the DoH programme for Physical and Complex Disabilities and Mother and Child, NHSE Regional Research and Development Grants, and charities including the Stroke Association and the Parkinson's Disease Society. Industrial funding has been obtained for studies of functional electrical stimulation (Burridge).
The Neurological Rehabilitation group has secured four competitive full-time PhD scholarships during the RAE assessment period and ten people have been awarded their PhD's.
Health Technology Evaluation
The work from this group explores the use of advanced technologies and practice-based technologies in Therapy and Rehabilitation.
Advanced Technologies: Conway has successfully exploited the use of advanced technology in the field of respiratory care such as multi-modality imaging to examine aerosol deposits. Her team of interdisciplinary researchers includes two therapists, Bruton and Gregson, who are investigating pulmonary rehabilitation and the clinical management of asthma. Their contributions towards the assessment and management of children and adults with respiratory conditions have led to changes in the use of aerosols in clinical practice. Members of this group work across disciplines and institutions, and have two international collaborative ventures (Hofmann, University of Salzburg and Martonen, US Environmental Protection Agency). Conway is joint holder of a Wellcome Trust grant with Chemistry to investigate the use of dendrimers and other structures as radio labels.
Practice-based Technologies: Ellis (with Adams) research aspects of hand function, in particular the use of goniometry as an outcome measure, and the effectiveness of splinting the rheumatoid hand. Pain studies user evaluations of the effectiveness of disability equipment. The podiatrists in the group study foot pressure measurement related to the development of corns and callouses and treatment of the diabetic foot. These researchers have gained funding from Cuxson Gerrard and SSL International, and they carry out collaborative research with Edinburgh Royal Infirmary and Bournemouth Diabetes and Endocrine Centre.
The Health Technology Evaluation group has secured three full-time and two part-time competitive PhD studentships during the RAE assessment period and three people have been awarded their PhD's.
Education and Service Development
The practice of therapy and rehabilitation relies on principles of education to develop high quality patient care. The key components are the ascertainment of users’ views to inform service development, and the training of professionals at undergraduate and postgraduate level.
Users views and service development: Researchers in this group have focused on Primary Health Care and Community Rehabilitation with an emphasis on exploring key elements of education and learning. The scope of the work in this group has demanded the use of a range of methodologies in order to examine attitudes and needs of users. Payne has obtained funding from the Marie Curie Foundation to carry out a survey of users’ views of palliative care services. She conducted international studies of cancer in New Zealand and Guernsey. Kersten has investigated the needs of young disabled people, carers and professionals and more recently the needs of young people with stroke. Wiles has explored the perceptions of people with heart disease and their experiences of heart attack. In terms of service delivery Chapman (with Roberts) gained a grant from the NHSE South and West to study the effectiveness of information to patients with lower back pain. Adams carried out commissioned studies for Portsmouth and Southampton Social Services Departments on the provision of adaptations to clients in the community, and staff roles in residential care for people with learning disabilities respectively.
Training of Professionals: Contributions to the evaluation of continuing professional education have come from Wiles (with Barnard, Curtin) who have explored occupational therapists’ and physiotherapists’ understanding of evidence based practice. This research has been used to assist the professions in implementing clinically effective practice. Barnitt and Wiles have examined the effectiveness of interprofessional education and fitness for practice of new therapy graduates. Barnitt worked with Brockett et al at McMaster University into the links between ethical sensitivity and professional behaviour. Seale has explored the use of information technology and computer based learning in undergraduate education.
The Education and Service Development group has secured five full-time and three part-time competitive PhD studentships during the RAE assessment period and four people have been awarded their PhD's.
Staffing Policy
The configuration of research groups (Neurological Rehabilitation, Health Technology Evaluation, Education and Service Development) in the School illustrates a refinement of the research activity since 1996 and reflect the growing research expertise of staff in key domains. This also addresses the School's strategic aim of developing excellence in discrete areas of patient treatment and rehabilitation practice. Details of the groups are listed below:
Researchers: Ashburn, Burridge, Ballinger, Ellis-Hill, Horn and McLellan.
Researchers: Conway, Bruton, Gregson, Ellis, Pain, Potter J, Potter M.
Researchers: Adams, Barnitt, Borthwick, Chapman, Kersten, Payne, Roberts, Seale, Wiles.
To support these activities the Schools’ strategic targets include:
a) Payment of fees for all academic staff registered for research qualifications.
b) Academic and research staff can claim up to £350 annually and up to £800 tri-annually to attend significant national and international conferences, at which they are making a research presentation.
c) All staff who do not have research funding are allocated one day or more a week to pursue their research, monitored through annual appraisal. Two systems have been put in place to ensure this time can be freed up. First, an academic salary is retained each year to purchase additional teaching hours from external lecturers. Second the School makes available annually, small research grants for which academic staff can compete. Between 1998 and 2000, nine staff competed successfully for awards of between £1,500 and £13,000 (total grants awarded = £32,500). A further £25,000 has been made available by the charity HOPE for 2001.
d) Academic staff receive regular research support and advice from Senior Researchers in the Health and Rehabilitation Research Unit (Ashburn, Wiles, Ellis-Hill). All research grant applications, and articles for publication are monitored within the School. Opportunities are provided for staff to rehearse conference presentations and experience practice interviews prior to competitive studentship interviews. This strategy has paid off, as of seventeen academic staff and researchers applying for studentships, all have been successful (Adams, Ballinger, Barnard, Birtwhistle, Bruton, Carrera, Cresswell, Honeycombe, Hyndman, Jackson, Pockney, Quint, Roberts, Smith, Spruce, Stack and White).
Staffing Policy - Research Staff
The Health Research Unit, founded in 1996 became the Health and Rehabilitation Research Unit in 1999 following amalgamation with the Rehabilitation Research Unit and Podiatry. The dedicated space provided is as previously described. All research staff, including fixed term contract researchers working on grant funded research, have provision which conforms with the minimum standards for research laid down by the University. This includes individual desks, telephones, computers and relevant software packages. Free training in research methods courses is available and there is access to statistical help and support with computer technology. Support for contract researchers is provided through supervision monitored by the Head of Research (Payne then Ashburn), and a research support group which meets monthly. Four contract researchers have been supported in completing their PhD's (Low, Shiel, Jarret, Kersten).
In addition to contract researchers, the unit has a core of senior staff to ensure continuity and achievement of targets laid down in the strategic plan. These staff include two Professors, two Senior Research Fellows, two Postdoctoral Fellows and a Senior Lecturer. Targets for this group of staff include:
The School recognises that as new researchers in an emerging discipline, the research staff are at different stages of development and achievement. Secretarial support is provided to help researchers with research paperwork, including interview transcription and data logging. A series of weekly seminars are provided at which a range of internal and external speakers discuss their research.
One category A* left the School towards the end of the assessment period. Payne, who headed the Health Research Unit, moved to a Professorial post in Sheffield in October 2000. With the expansion of the unit over the assessment period, the University judged this the right moment to regrade the Head post to Professorial level and Ashburn was appointed to the post commencing on 1 January 2001. The School now has the benefit of a research leader who comes from within the Professions Allied to Health. To strengthen research leadership still further the University also supported the appointment of a Reader in Rehabilitation, McPherson, who joins the School from Wellington University in August 2001.
RESEARCH ACHIEVEMENTS, CURRENT WORK AND FUTURE PLANS.
During the review period our main research objectives have been successfully attained, including an increase in collaborative interdisciplinary research, an increase in research funding, an improvement in research quality and a greater focus on human health/disease. As indicated below, substantial progress has been made in the thrust areas identified in 1996.
A. Toxicology & Pharmacology
• Receptor-mediated responses to drugs & chemicals. Work in our major programme on receptor-mediated modulation of drug metabolism has further defined the role of nuclear receptors in human cytochrome P450 gene regulation (Gibson, Plant) and demonstrated cross-talk as a key feature in receptor activation. An in vitro cell-based reporter assay for CYP3A4 induction developed during this work (Gibson, Goldfarb, Plant) is being refined for use as a high throughput screening tool in a new programme to examine drug candidates for modulation of CYP3A4 gene expression. A new project with colleagues at GlaxoSmithKline to examine global changes in human gene expression patterns caused by CYP3A inducers will combine our quantitative RT-PCR and differential display approaches with micro-array screening and cluster analysis. The objective of this work is to define the role of variant drug metabolism in drug toxicity and human health. Another aspect of our work on receptor-mediated responses has been the demonstration with colleagues in Sweden of the role of apoptotic 'death receptors' in hepatotoxicity (Hinton, Kass). This work is being extended to a study linking drug inhibition of cell death with promotion of cellular regeneration as a novel therapeutic route to limiting toxicant damage in the liver. In an MRC-funded project, regio-specific and developmental regulation of CS lyase expression in the CNS has been quantified (Goldfarb, Plant) and a role for hormonal regulation during weaning identified. Future work will focus on a mechanistic investigation of our very recent and startling finding of choroid plexus damage in young rats exposed to hexachlorobutadiene. This CS lyase-mediated response was missed by previous investigators and has implications for human risk from prolonged exposure. Computer-derived homology models for all the human cytochromes P-450 have now been produced and drug-enzyme interactions examined (Lewis, Goldfarb, Parke). In an EC funded project this in silico approach to predicting in vivo human drug metabolism performed successfully against in vitro technologies. The work is now being extended with BBSRC and industrial support to modelling of receptor-ligand interactions as a means of predicting xenobiotic modulation of human drug metabolism. In a second EC funded collaboration, we were the first to report the phenotype of both mu and kappa opioid receptor gene knockout mice (Kitchen) and have used molecular imaging techniques to examine changes in receptor expression in the CNS. Our studies on the function of adenosine receptor subtypes in peripheral tissue have led to the exciting discovery of a novel mechanism of vascular smooth muscle control not involving any of the previously cloned adenosine receptors (Hourani). We now intend to breed combinatorial receptor knockout mice to study receptor heterogeneity and will be the first to use such mice to study opioid/adenosine interactions in pain and addiction. Investigation of CNS glutamate receptors using brain subfractions and cell lines (Toms) has revealed novel mechanisms of autoreceptor function and heteroreceptor cross-talk. In future studies we will use potent new glutamate receptor ligands identified during this work to examine mechanisms of glial cell death in human neurodegenerative disorders.
• Mechanisms of chemical toxicity. Interdisciplinary studies using molecular biology, biochemistry, cell biology and pathology (Bridges, Dobrota, Hinton, Kass, King) have examined the mechanism of action of liver and kidney toxicants, further elucidating their site-specificity. The molecular basis of toxicant-induced cell death has also been demonstrated for (i) genotoxic carcinogens acting via cytochrome P450 1A1 (Ioannides, Parke), (ii) compounds acting to initiate the apoptotic cascade (Kass, Hinton) and, (iii) for compounds producing oxidative cellular damage (Wiseman). Future work will concentrate on the development of mechanistically relevant in vitro human tissue models to aid risk assessment. An exciting feature of our work on chemical toxicity has been a collaborative study on dietary mutagens and antimutagens (Ioannides, King with Clifford, Walker, Nutrition & Food Safety). Collaboration between toxicologists and food scientists at Surrey is increasing rapidly, particularly in response to new research initiatives from the Food Standards Agency.
• Clinical aspects of toxicology & pharmacology. Work in the HPRU has quantified the effects of new drugs on human cognitive performance and psychomotor function (Hindmarch, Stanley, Cockle). Novel actigraphy techniques have been developed (Stanley) enabling us to broaden the range and sensitivity of psychometrics and to monitor accurately the confounding effects of social substances such as beverages (Hindmarch). We were also the first to initiate a systematic assessment of the effects of herbal preparations and micronutrients on cognitive function (Cockle). In a new programme we will extend our studies to patient groups hitherto difficult to assess (e.g. Parkinson's disease, acquired brain injury). Work in our new sleep laboratories (with Dijk, Chronobiology) will evaluate the role of antidepressants and hypnotics in sleep and biorhythm disruption in order to define additional factors that affect human performance during drug therapy. Research in the Pharmacoepidemiology Unit has focused on a new survey of the risk to women of oral contraceptive-induced thromboembolism (Farmer, Lawrenson, De Vries, MacRae) and has quantified the difference in risk between second and third generation oral contraceptives. Currently we are assessing the safety of HRT in relation to cardiovascular disease and cancer risk using innovative large dataset work. Future DoH funded studies will address the safety of alpha-2 blockers in the treatment of LUTS, the risks of hepatitis with acne treatment and the efficacy of different antidepressant therapies.
• Environmental toxicology. The use of hepatic CYP1A1 induction as a molecular biomarker of hydrocarbon pollution has been further validated (Gibson, Goldfarb) with UK and overseas collaborators and novel cell culture systems developed for examination of mechanisms of toxicity in marine organisms. Work to improve the measurement of low level environmental contamination has resulted in the development of novel bioanalytical extraction procedures (Stevenson, Nutrition & Food Safety) and a patented compound-specific quartz crystal biosensor (Reddy). Future work will address the relationship between biomarker changes and pollutant-induced cellular damage, particularly for complex chemical mixtures. The effects of genetically manipulated soil bacteria on plant growth, nitrogen balance, soil enzymes, microbial populations and plasmid transfer have been examined (Lynch, De Leij) with a view to defining the environmental impact and spread of model GM organisms and providing a basis for risk assessment of GM technology in the environment. Studies are now evaluating GM microorganisms as biosensors of environmental toxins and selected microorganisms from composts and rhizospheres as potential agents of bioremediation.
RESEARCH MANAGEMENT STRUCTURE.
The School of Biomedical & Life Sciences (SBLS) and its associated Research Units in the Postgraduate Medical School (PGMS) and European Institute of Health & Medical Sciences (EIHMS) are the focus of biomedical science research at Surrey. All staff belong to a Research Group or Unit and this strategy of involvement has enabled us to achieve our main research objectives during the review period. The Groups/Units are financially autonomous and Research Leaders, are responsible for management, communication, staff development and promotion of research collaboration within and outside the University. The Research Leaders also contribute to strategic planning and management of research through membership of their School's Research and Strategy & Policy Committees. These committees are advised by formally appointed panels of international experts including Visiting Professors Rita Colwell (Head, US National Science Foundation) and Sir Richard Sykes (formerly Chairman, GlaxoWellcome). The Research Leaders are also represented on the University Research Committee which plays a strategic role in ensuring that the University's objectives are met.
RESEARCH INFRASTRUCTURE.
The SBLS and its associated Research Units occupy some 7,000m2 of space (of which 5,000m2 is devoted to research) and have their own rolling programmes of laboratory refurbishment and equipment replacement. In the review period, £5 million has been invested in research infrastructure of which £3 million came directly from internal resources. A new Clinical Investigation & Sleep Study facility was completed in 1997. The laboratories for research in Molecular Toxicology were rebuilt in 1998 with funding from the Wolfson Foundation and the Pathology, Food Safety, and Microbial Physiology laboratories were upgraded to modern standards in 1999. A new 700m2 laboratory for the CCSM was built in 1998 and a new 1000m2 building for the HPRU was opened in 1999. In addition, a new SRIF Stream 2 grant of £1.15 million from the Wellcome Trust will enable a £1.9 million refurbishment scheme for our Nutrition laboratories to proceed this year. All of the research facilities are available for use by research students and technical staff are allocated to research groups to support research, ensure technology transfer and provide PhD training in laboratory skills. PhD students also undergo an obligatory programme of training in transferable skills and maintain a written training/supervision record. A formal assessment of progress for transfer from MPhil to PhD (dissertation and viva voce) takes place after 12 months and students are required to submit their thesis within four years of registration. PhD student supervision, training and progress is monitored by the SBLS Director of Postgraduate Studies (Research).
RESEARCH PROMOTION.
The vision of the University of Surrey is to develop an ethos and environment in which staff can achieve internationally recognised excellence in research. SBLS and its associated Units now operate under 5 year strategic and financial plans which are updated annually and submitted to the University for approval. The research element of the plans is scrutinised with regard to focus, funding, infrastructure and staffing. Staff development and the promotion of research activity is also examined. In order to facilitate bidding for new research grants and contracts, academic and administrative support is provided to ensure that all bids are scientifically and financially sound. Staff are updated monthly on bidding activity/outcomes and performance indicators of research income/expenditure are provided monthly by the University. The University also provides support for research grant/contract bidding, research management, intellectual property protection and commercial exploitation through its Office of Research Support and University Enterprise. Research groups meet frequently to discuss strategy, policy and finance and a programme of research seminars enables Groups/Units to share research ideas. All staff supervise PhD students and Research Council quota studentships are allocated to new or junior staff to promote rapid establishment of research activity. Research focus and progress is reviewed regularly at School level particularly in respect of Foresight priorities and staff are updated electronically on new initiatives and funding agency strategic plans.
PROMOTION OF COLLABORATIVE RESEARCH.
Inter-group and inter-school collaboration across the campus and with research colleagues outside the University is strongly promoted as a basis for interdisciplinary problem solving. University seed funds for new collaborative initiatives are available from central resources and Groups/Units provide matching funds from their reserves. One example is the increased collaboration with clinicians in the regional NHS Trusts during the review period and the appointment of medically qualified staff (Livingstone, Marks, Russell -Jones, Thomas) to consultant posts jointly or fully funded by the NHS. The research teams of these clinical staff and their NHS colleagues are housed in the CCSM and their work is closely allied with that of the other groups in SBLS. Other examples of successful research collaborations between the biomedical science Groups/Units at Surrey have already been highlighted.
1.1 Management
The Department has 13 research-active academic staff, comprising 7 professors, 2 senior lecturers, and 4 lecturers (see RA1). They work within research groups reflecting their individual interests and the Department’s overall research strategy. This structure facilitates sharing of expertise, equipment, materials, and other resources within groups, but interaction also takes place across groups, including postgraduate training, Departmental and research-methods seminars, and computing support. Responsibility for monitoring individual research activity lies with the Department’s Research Committee, which, with the Head of Department’s Advisory Group (comprising senior staff), provides strategic advice and direction. More detailed information is given in 1.3–1.6, 2.1, 2.2, and 3.2.
1.2 Research groups, activities and achievements
The Department has four research groups: Visual Optics, Ocular Motor Systems, Neural Mechanisms, and Visual Psychophysics & Human Electrophysiology. Their activities and achievements are as follows.
1.2.1 Visual Optics (Professors Charman and Efron, and Dr Dickinson)
Work in visual optics is concerned with the quality of the retinal image and its impact on visual performance. Principal funding comes from Bausch & Lomb, Essilor, and PPP Healthcare. Current research topics include the following:
1.2.2 Ocular Motor Systems (Professors Abadi and Barnes, and Dr Muldoon)
Sensory and motor aspects of the normal and impaired eye-movement system are investigated with high-resolution-infrared and other eye-movement-recording techniques, as well as by classical psychophysics. Muldoon holds a joint appointment with Dept Applied Mathematics, reflecting the Department’s interdisciplinary commitment. Principal funding comes from MRC programme and BBSRC project grants. Current research topics include the following:
1.2.3 Neural Mechanisms (Professor Itzhaki, and Drs Grieve, McLoughlin, and Nona)
Histochemical, immunological, electrophysiological, and optical-imaging techniques are used to elucidate brain function at sub-cellular, neural and systems levels, with some emphasis on visual structure and function. Principal funding comes from a Wellcome Trust programme grant, and project grants from BBSRC, Fidelity Foundation (USA), Royal Society, and Wellcome Trust. Current research topics include the following:
1.2.4 Visual Psychophysics and Human Electrophysiology (Professors Foster and Kulikowski, and Dr Murray)
High-resolution graphics display systems are used to investigate colour and shape perception, in both normal and impaired vision, along with electroretinography and visual evoked potentials (VEPs). Principal funding comes from EPSRC and BBSRC project grants, Unilever Research, Dept Health, and Tempus. Current research topics include the following:
1.3 Mechanisms and practices for promoting research
The Department’s research culture is supported by several mechanisms: a weekly research seminar by visiting researchers of international and national standing; a fortnightly journals club; occasional research-methods seminars; electronic alerting of research opportunities; and University-wide life-sciences research seminars. Individual research groups hold regular progress meetings. The journals club is run jointly with Univ. Manchester Neuroscience Research Division and Dept Psychology, alternating between the two sites. It encourages cross-disciplinary communication by giving less-experienced researchers opportunities to present their findings, and all participants a chance to explore speculative ideas. The Department provides support for pilot projects before external funding is sought; where necessary, it also assists travel to conferences, workshops, and overseas laboratories. In addition, support is given from time to time for external co-workers to visit the Department.
1.4 Nature of research infrastructure and support for research students
The Department has 30 purpose-built laboratories for optical, psychophysical, visuomotor, contact-lens, electrodiagnostic, neurobiological, and histological research, along with specialized laboratory facilities described in Section 3.2. In addition to high-resolution optical and graphics display systems and electrophysiological rigs, the Department has several major pieces of equipment including a corneal confocal microscope, brain-imaging CCD camera system, high-resolution multispectral CCD camera, and several high-resolution eye-movement recording systems. Fourteen full- and part-time technical staff provide research support.
Research students work within research groups under the close supervision of a member of staff and a mentor, who keeps a watching brief on the student’s progress. In their first year, research students take modules on Scientific Methods and Statistics in the Department’s taught MSc course Investigative Ophthalmology & Visual Science (including molecular-biological techniques, electrophysiological recording, design of clinical trials, data collection and analysis, model fitting, scientific writing, lecture presentation); and they also participate in the University’s Graduate School Development Programme. Students normally register initially for an MPhil and submit a Transfer Report (a mini-thesis) in their first year, which is examined (orally) to determine subsequent PhD registration. They are encouraged, and assisted financially, to present their work at national and international conferences, including ARVO (USA), AAO (USA), ECVP (Europe), and BCLA (UK). Activities such as the journals club and seminar programme are particularly helpful in giving research students experience in presenting the results of their work.
1.5 Arrangements for interdisciplinary or collaborative research.
The Department strongly supports both interdisciplinary and collaborative research. In addition to collaborations within and across groups, researchers collaborate with colleagues in the Departments of Biomolecular Sciences (amyloid peptide uptake and localization), Computation (retinal imaging and diagnostic programmes), Instrumentation and Analytical Science (cross-modal sensory aids for the blind), Civil and Construction Engineering (scene illumination), and Mathematics (time-series analysis of eye-movement records and computational modelling). Apart from the extensive teaching links (shared MSc and undergraduate teaching), researchers work on low-vision and on electrophysiology-based projects with colleagues in the Dept Ophthalmology, University of Manchester Medical School, with the two departments supporting joint research appointments.
Collaborations with other institutions and laboratories within the UK include: Birmingham Univ. (Psychology), Bolton Technological Inst. (Psychology), Bristol (Frenchay Hospital), Glasgow Caledonian Univ. (Vision Sciences), Hammersmith Hospital (MRC Lipoprotein Unit), Inst. Ophthalmology, Lond. (Visual Science), Inst. Psychiatry, Lond. (Neuropath.), Keele Univ. (Postgraduate Medicine, MacKay Inst.), Liverpool Univ. (Medical Microbiology and Pharmacology; Aintree Hospital, Pain Research Inst.), Manchester Univ. Medical School (Clinical Virology, Ophthalmology, Vascular Surgery, Medicine, Diabetes Centre), Manchester Alexandra Hospital (Rosen Eye Surgery Centre), Newcastle General Hospital (Neurochemical Pathology Unit), Nottm. Univ. (Microbiol.), Oxford Univ. (Clinical Neurology, Nuffield Dept Medicine, Pharmacol., Physiol., Exp. Psychol.), Sheffield Univ. (Molecular and Genetic Medicine), Royal Free Hospital, Lond. (Medicine), UCL (Anatomy and Developmental Biology).
Abroad, there are collaborations with Univ. S. Alabama (Aging and Memory Center), Australian National Univ. (Psychology), Boston Univ. (Psychology), Caltech (Biology), Cincinnati (Neurosurgery), La Coruna (Medicine), Cornell Univ. (Biological Sciences), Duke Univ. (Demographic Studies), Freiburg (Neurology), Granada Univ. (Optics), Harvard Univ. (Neurobiology, Neurosurgery), Hong Kong Polytechnic (Optometry), Kingston Univ. Ontario (Physiology), Leuven Univ. (Psychology), Université catholique de Louvain (Medicine), Univ. Kebangsaan, Malaysia (Optometry), Minho Univ., Portugal (Physics), Pavia Univ. (Systems Information), Univ. Perth (Neuroscience), Montreal Univ. (Optometry), NASA Ames, California (Human-Automation Integration Research), Queensland Univ. Technology (Optometry), Rochester Univ., NY (Neurobiology Anatomy), Santiago de Compostela (Physiology), Slovak Academy Sciences (Inst. Virology), Sydney Univ. (Anatomy), Trieste Univ. (Psychology), Tübingen Univ. (Ophthalmology), Univ. Utah (Ophthalmology, Anatomy), Valencia Univ. (Physics), Vilnius Univ. (Psychology), Washington Univ. (Medicine, Pathology).
1.6 Relationships with industry, public sector, and community
2.1 Development and support of staff research
2.2 Research development of younger staff
2.3 Role of Category A* staff
2.4 Linkage between Category C staff
2.5 Departure of Category B and D staff
The Department’s Eurolens Research Unit plays a key role in relationships with industry. Under the direction of Efron and the day-to-day management of Dr P. Morgan, the Unit undertakes research for the contact-lens industry worth about £250K per annum. Its principal sponsor remains Bausch & Lomb, but there are a further 12 sponsors who contribute core costs to the unit, which has 8 full- and part-time staff. Other industrially sponsored research in the Department is funded by spectacle and instrument companies (Essilor, Keeler). Further links with industry and the public sector come through the Department’s Vision Centre, under the direction of Dr J. A. Jennings and the day-to-day management of Dr C. O’Donnell. This provides an optometric service to the local community, offering specialist advice to patients and eye-care practitioners (GPs, optometrists) in the North West region. The Vision Centre also undertakes undergraduate training, and funds postgraduate students.
In addition to these clinically oriented activities, the Department works actively in many other projects with the public sector (including Dept Health, LINK (e.g. EPSRC), DERA, TRL, and the police) and industry (e.g. Unilever Research, Whitecroft Lighting, Tinsley Instruments).
2. STAFFING POLICY
In appointing academic staff, the principal criterion is research excellence, along with the capacity to interact with colleagues in cognate research areas, and to foster clinical-scientific cohesiveness. The Department ensures that there is sufficient space, equipment, and technical support for staff to function effectively and productively at the highest international level. Research-support mechanisms other than those described in Section 1.3 and 1.4 include Departmental encouragement for staff to undertake activities, such as editing, reviewing, refereeing, and serving on grant-review and conference committees. Periods of study leave, which may range from a few weeks to a full year, also encourage staff to develop new research directions and collaborative ventures. In addition, the Department’s Research Committee offers individual members of staff advice on matters on research strategy and development, and the preparation of grant applications. Staff are appraised at intervals by the Head of Department or senior colleagues.
Younger staff and new researchers joining one of the Department’s research groups have up to a year in which they have little or no non-research duties. They receive a generous start-up package and other resources to help develop or establish their research work within the group. They are assigned both a supervisor and a mentor to provide advice on all aspects of academic life in the Department, including the management of research. In most instances, they will also be working initially alongside older, more experienced, researchers. Where appropriate, arrangements are made for staff (and research students) to gain experience of new experimental techniques and research methods in laboratories outside UMIST. The university also offers general residential courses for new staff dealing with research, CAL, and management skills.
Barnes joined the Department in 2000. His work on motor function is closely related to Abadi’s research on eye movements (the two have previous collaborated). Together with Muldoon’s background in applied mathematics, this development will lead to a considerable expansion of ocular-motor research.
In addition to maintaining a highly active research programme, Itzhaki’s team provides a resource of cell and molecular biological and immunological expertise for the Department.
Professor J. Cronly-Dillon’s innovative work on navigational aids for the blind received wide publicity (BBC Tomorrows World; USA Discovery Channel), and is likely to lead to new research activity.
Self Assessment
(i) The management and promotion of research
The primary objective of the Department is to undertake vision research of the highest quality in order to facilitate the early detection and diagnosis of eye diseases and their successful treatment. To ensure and enhance momentum and strategic direction, our research effort is co-ordinated by the Department's Research Committee. The Committee which comprises the Department’s Professoriate and nominated members, including graduate students, is highly active in promoting research and in ensuring the further development of a thriving research culture by setting both short- and long-term Departmental research strategies and targets. During the current RAE period it has provided a) £230k in discretionary funds to staff, commensurate with ongoing, audited research outputs, b) £322k pump priming research funds to new members of the Department, c) £342k incentive funding for PhD studentships, d) £47k financial support for post docs and PhD students to present at national and international meetings, e) strategic and funding information arising from public and private sector sources and f) guidance on the content and structure of all applications for external funding. Given the proven success of this approach it will remain part of our long-term research strategy.
Promotion of research is further stimulated by the annual Departmental away day, by the weekly seminar programme with invited speakers of national or international acclaim (www.cf.ac.uk/optom/), by regular research group meetings and by the promotion of each individual’s research expertise and achievements on the Department’s Web site (www.cf.ac.uk/optom/).
(ii) The research groups and their main achievements in the assessment period
Since 1996, significant changes in staffing have required reappraisal of existing research groups and their restructuring into their current form. The research groups permit focussed strategic planning within the different facets of optometric research, are able to target more effectively dedicated funding sources and allow for optimal management of research staff. Bi-weekly research group meetings ensure research interaction and awareness while intergroup meetings ensure unity of approach to the delivery of the overarching Departmental Research policy. This horizontal and vertical networking facilitates the vigorous research culture within the Department and maximises both research input and output.
Table 1. Membership of the research groups: Category A and A* staff
Clinical and Investigative | Ocular Biology | Visual Biophysics |
Professor Jyrki Rovamo# | Professor Mike Boulton#* | Professor Keith Meek#* |
Professor Neville Drasdo | Dr Julie Albon* | Professor Gerald Elliott* |
Dr Pia Makela | Louise Carrington* | Professor Stuart Hodson |
Dr Tom Margrain* | Dr Jon Erichsen | Dr Andrew Quantock* |
Dr Rachel North | Dr Jez Guggenheim | Dr Chris Wigham |
Dr Outi Ukkonen* | Professor Tim Jacob$* | |
Professor John Wild†* | Dr Margarzita Rozanowska*+ | |
Dr J Margaret Woodhouse | ||
3 post docs | 7 post docs | 5 post docs |
21 PhD students (19 FTE)^ | 13 PhD students (12 FTE)^ | 9 PhD students (8 FTE)^ |
Clinical and Investigative Vision Sciences Group: seeks to identify mechanisms of processing in the normal and abnormal visual system and to develop non-invasive investigative techniques for the detection and assessment of visual abnormality. In the current RAE period members of the group have been responsible for a number of important achievements, for example:
Margrain's research on occupational vision requirements has led to new visual standards for the UK Fire Service;
Makela has refined a spatial scaling method which is fundamental to the development of novel devices utilising peripheral vision and assessing the full visual field performance in visually highly demanding professions (e.g. pilots);
North has demonstrated the need for adolescent patients with Type 1 diabetes mellitus to attend retinopathy screening and to maintain good glycaemic control;
Rovamo has developed a non-invasive method to monitor the location and magnitude of visual defects in a variety of eye disorders;
Wild and colleagues have characterised the aetiology of vigabatrin-attributed field loss that will facilitate the clinical management of patients receiving this type of anti-epileptic drug;
Woodhouse has shown the ways in which vision develops differently in children with Down's Syndrome when compared to ordinary children and has established protocols for the management of vision defects in this particularly vulnerable population. Furthermore, Down's Syndrome has been shown to provide a model for the emmetropisation process in the general population.
During this RAE period the group has received external funding totaling £900k.
Ocular Biology Group: seeks to identify the cellular and molecular basis of ocular disease, with a view to devising novel interventions/treatments. A number of important and original advances have been made by members of the group since 1996, for example:
(iii) Infrastructure, facilities and research student training
The Department provides excellent infrastructure for the pursuit of high quality research, with its laboratory space allocated between the three research groups on the basis of external funding and need. The laboratories for the Ocular Biology and the Visual Biophysics groups have been fully refurbished to a high standard with funds, in excess of £250k, from the Royal Society, Wolfson Foundation and from the University. The space for the Clinical and Investigative Vision Sciences group has also undergone expansion and refurbishment to provide additional quality laboratory space for the recently appointed chair (Professor John Wild formerly of Aston University).
Staffing policy
(i) Arrangements for the development and support of the research work of staff
As detailed in earlier sections the development and support of the research work of staff is sustained at a variety of levels, for example:
(ii) Arrangements for developing the research of younger/new researchers and for integrating them into a wider supportive research culture
Departmental research policy ensures that each new member of staff is placed in the appropriate research group and is provided with a research mentor. Their progress and personal career development is fostered by (a) regular staff appraisals, (b) the setting of realistic and monitored targets (c) advice on research direction and grant applications from the Departmental Research Committee, (d) attendance at relevant University courses, (e) availability of pump-priming funds for new projects and (f) access to University and Departmental intelligence on potential sources of grant income. Integration both within and between research groups is ensured by group meetings, weekly departmental seminars and an annual awayday dedicated to the development and refinement of departmental research strategy.
Junior appointments are based on departmental strategy and research potential (e.g. Albon, Carrington, Quantock, Ukkonen). Start-up money is made available to each appointee in order to minimise ‘downtime’ and teaching is kept to a minimum for the first year. Additional financial assistance is available from the Departmental Research Committee and the University’s Young Researchers Initiative. Senior appointees receive additional support from University research funds to ensure the smooth transition of their research groups to Cardiff. The integration of the senior appointments during this assessment period has been rapid and they are already closely collaborating with existing members of the Department (e.g. MRC programme grant Meek, Quantock, Hodson).
Self assessment
Following the departure of senior staff during the early part of the RAE period the Department made the considered decision to a) appoint 3 international scientists at chair level and b) underpin the future of the Department by the appointment of junior staff with an established research profile at international level. Furthermore, the Department elected to delay appointment until appointees of international stature had been identified. The resultant appointments have been the key to maintaining and improving the position of the Department as a world leader in optometry and vision science research and have contributed to our firm platform for future development. The cost of this delay was a reduction in grant income for 1997 and 1998, however, as can be seen in RA4 the success of this strategy is confirmed by the exponential increase in income for 1999 and 2000 compared to 1998.
The Department now has a regular establishment of 18 full time academic staff plus one part time (Drasdo) and a research fellow (Rozanowska). The 20 research active members submitted represents a 100% return (see Table 1). Following the new appointments research output, studentships and research income have flourished (see RA5c (ii)). In conclusion, all aspects of our research confirm that, through the proactive management of change, we have significantly increased both the quantity and quality of research compared to the 1996 RAE.
Management structure of the Unit. Research in Biomedical Sciences is conducted entirely within Unit of Assessment 11A. It is led by a Unit Coordinator, appointed from the academic staff, who (together with the Dean of Science and the Head of the School of Biomedical Sciences) has responsibility for the overall research strategy of the Unit, resource allocation, staff development, attainment of targets, and enhancement of the Unit’s profile within the University and in the broader research community. The Unit Coordinator is also responsible for the financial management of the Unit (including distribution of the centrally-allocated research strategy budget), dissemination of information and reporting on performance.
The Unit’s research activities are organized within six formally-recognized research groups (RRGs) led by senior scientists with international reputations and extensive experience of managing research in their own fields; this provides a highly supportive framework for research, with focussed programmes where motivation of and support for younger researchers are given high priority. Many research topics are of an interdisciplinary nature. The Unit Coordinator holds regular meetings with the RRG leaders to monitor performance and discuss strategic requirements and opportunities. The Unit has bi-annual meetings with the University’s Research Policy and Practice Committee (RPPC), which reports directly to Senate, to review performance, agree targets for output and research income and for the allocation of resources. The Unit Coordinator’s membership of this committee for the past five years has allowed the Unit to be highly influential in the formulation of research policy and to benefit fully from new initiatives. The Unit Coordinator also liaises closely with the University’s Research Office (directed by the Pro-Vice-Chancellor for Research and Development), which provides a broad-based research support structure through its four divisions: Research Grants and Contracts, Research Policy and Students, UUTECH Ltd (the University’s technology transfer vehicle) and UUSRP Ltd (the University’s management company for its Science Research Park development). The current Head of the School of Biomedical Sciences is the Chair of the University Research Degrees Committee, which makes recommendations to the University RPPC on student-related issues. The operating practices developed within the Unit have made a substantial contribution to University policy on student training.
Research group profile. The evolving and growing research activities of the Unit have led to some changes to group structure since the 1996 exercise. Acquisition of EC Structural Funds in October 1996 (£0.75M; total project cost £1m) allowed development of an integrated, multidisciplinary centre of excellence, the Northern Ireland Centre for Diet and Health (NICHE, previously the Human Nutrition Research Group). Its goal is to provide greater understanding of diet-related health issues for the benefit of both the consumer and the food industry. A new Vision Science Research Group was established in 1996 to provide a research focus for the new Optometry Clinic; more recently, reorganization of Biotechnology Research has lead to the formation of the Pharmaceutical Biotechnology Group specifically to introduce Proteomics to the already comprehensive range of expertise within the Unit. The Unit now comprises the following RRGs:
Cancer and Ageing: Prof CS Downes (Leader), Dr CZ Bachrati, Dr YA Barnett, Dr AJ Bjourson, Dr AJ Burns, Dr SJ Devlin, Prof BM Hannigan, Ms CA Lynch, Dr R Mageed, Dr AP McGlynn, Dr H McGlynn, Dr VJ McKelvey-Martin, Prof PG McKenna, Dr G McKerr, Dr CP Walsh. Cancer is very largely a disease of old age, brought on by mutagenic responses to DNA damage; probably some of the factors producing ageing are similar. This group has, therefore, investigated factors affecting the mutability, growth and developmental controls of human cells and of a variety of animal models, in close collaboration (where dietary factors are implicated) with members of NICHE. The main research themes have been: (i) genoprotective action of dietary antioxidants; (ii) DNA damage, repair and replication, and its defects at the single-cell level, and increasingly at the level of individual genes in single cells; (iii) post-replicative cell cycle control mechanisms (the novel effects of purine deoxyribonucleotides, and of morphogenetic signalling pathways on G2 control, and characterisation of two candidate tumour suppressor genes connected with the G2 checkpoint); (iv) generation of human monosomic cells as a source for temperature-sensitive, human cell cycle control mutants; (v) dietary effects on metastasis via matrix metalloproteinases; (vi) mechanisms of gene silencing in the germ line and in cancer via developmental methylation-dependent imprinting; (vii) the age-related decline in the T-cell mediated immune response (viii); mapping of the spatio-temporal migration of neural crest cells to elucidate the signalling pathways that control their migration, proliferation and differentiation during embryonal development.
Diabetes: Prof PR Flatt (Leader), Dr YHA Abdel-Wahab, Dr CR Barnett, Dr AM Gallagher (nee Gray), Dr NH McClenaghan, Dr JT McCluskey, Dr AM McKillop, Dr MH Mooney, Dr FPM O’Harte. This group’s strategy is to increase knowledge at the forefront of diabetes research and develop new approaches for diabetes therapy. The research activities continue to be directed into four main strategic areas: (i) insulin secretion and gene therapy, exploiting novel, electrofusion-derived
Vision Science: Prof RS Anderson (Leader), Dr D McKeefry, Dr KJ Saunders. The group conducts basic/developmental research, which it then applies to clinical problems through established links with centres of excellence. There are four main areas: (i) development of non-invasive techniques to measure the density of achromatic and short-wavelength sensitive retinal ganglion cells, to better detect conditions like glaucoma; (ii) development of blue pathway isolation perimetric techniques for the improved monitoring of early visual loss in diabetes; (iii) application of electro-diagnostic techniques to ascertain if motion-related activity can be generated in visual evoked potentials by motion, defined purely by change in colour; (iv) assessment and amelioration of refractive and accommodative problems in children with cerebral palsy.
Research promotion. The University distributes its £4.2M annual Research Strategy Budget to each unit of assessment in proportion to its contribution to QR income, external grant income, and its record of new grant applications. There is also a centrally-administered element that is distributed strategically to reflect the attainment of international excellence; rated "very high priority", our Unit has benefited greatly from this funding stream, mainly through the allocation of "New Blood" posts in strategically important areas. The Unit’s success can be attributed to the interactive research culture that has been established; opportunities for scientific discourse with colleagues are provided through regular meetings of the individual RRGs and through the comprehensive programme of research seminars and away days organized at Unit level and between RRGs with complementary interests.
Infrastructure. Rapid expansion over the past five years has called for frequent addition of research facilities and more sophisticated equipment. The CEC has funded extensive refurbishment, expansion and new construction of molecular laboratories, while a new transgenic unit has been funded from the JREI initiative, the Royal Society and the Department of Higher & Further Education, Training & Employment (DHFETE). This investment has helped to maintain the Unit’s research capabilities at a highly competitive level internationally. The last five years have seen dramatic advances in the capabilities of equipment available for many aspects of biomedical research. The Unit has obtained funding of over £2M from the University and through external grants for several major items, particularly in support of the strategic areas of Genomics, Proteomics and Bioinformatics. It has invested very heavily in equipment to enhance the flow of molecular data into Informatics: Maldi-Tof spectrometer, DNA micro-array reader, confocal and atomic force microscopes, real-time PCR and 2D protein electrophoresis.
Support and training for research students. The quality and enthusiasm of our postgraduate students are great strengths of the Unit and play a large part in maintaining the vibrant research culture. Studentships are supported from many external sources: DHFETE, the HPSS, local Health Authorities, Hospital Trusts, the EU, the European Social Fund, UK charities and industry. The University also supports selected students through its Vice Chancellor’s Award Scheme, funded from the Research Strategy Budget; this has allowed the Unit to access a large pool of high quality graduates from the Universities in the Republic of Ireland and overseas. The University’s Millennium Award Scheme also provides considerably enhanced stipends to students with outstanding degrees; our Unit has received a high proportion of these. The University has also been innovative (first in the UK) in offering a Doctorate in Medical Science (DMedSci). This research degree targets practising members of the health-related professions, encouraging research within the health service. Postgraduate research training within the Unit is highly structured and closely monitored. The Faculty’s Research Graduate School has responsibility for overseeing admissions, monitoring progress, ensuring best practice in supervision, and developing interactions between senior researchers and research students. It imposes a well-defined framework for student assessment and progression. Key skills training is offered in subjects including research philosophy, skills and methods, information gathering, research planning and time management, problem solving, creative thinking, presentation skills and technical writing. OST and IRTU funding has set up the Northern Ireland Centre for Entrepreneurship (NICENT) through which the University is currently developing a taught course in entrepreneurship for all students, teaching concepts and practice of knowledge and technology transfer, the protection and licensing of intellectual property and the commercialization of research outcomes. The Unit has preformed consistently well during the RAE period in the DHFETE surveys of rates of completion within 4 years (85-95%).
Interdisciplinary and collaborative research. Productive collaborations are well established with other Units within the University. Examples are: Cancer & Ageing with Psychology on models for Alzheimer's disease, Diabetes with Nursing on monitoring quality of diabetes care, Radiation Science with Rehabilitation Science on a wound-healing project funded by industry, and NICHE with Sports Studies on adolescent nutrition and lifestyles in Northern Ireland funded by the British Heart Foundation, Wellcome and HPSS. The Unit is also working with Informatics on a wide-ranging Bioinformatics programme, to be supported by professorial and lecturer appointments. External collaborations at all levels are also strongly encouraged. The success of this policy is particularly evident in the Unit’s participation in CEC FP4/5 programmes. These are too numerous to mention individually, but have attracted a research income of over £2.8M from 15 programmes; in many cases UU staff are coordinators. The recent reorganization of NHS research through the HPSS R & D office has determined that NHS funding will be distributed only to well-defined research programmes incorporated within large, multi-institutional, multidisciplinary research groupings. Fourteen members of staff in our Unit have been approved as principal programme investigators within three of these groupings: Cancer, Child Health & Welfare, and Diabetes & Endocrinology.
Relationships with industry, the public sector and other research users. The commercially valuable expertise of our scientists is actively sought by a wide range of companies, particularly those involved in high technology areas and novel product development. Companies find the interactive, multidisciplinary nature of the Unit especially attractive. Collaborations range from joint funding of PhD students (CAST awards), through a Teaching Company Scheme with Cultech Ltd, and EC-funded, European-wide research consortia, to direct industrial contracts. Companies involved include NI enterprises, such as FarmFed Chickens, Golden Cow and Nicobrand (reflecting the Unit’s commitment to strengthening the local economy) and multinational pharmaceutical and food corporations at the forefront of R & D: Unilever, Merck Sharpe & Dohme, Smith-Kline-Beecham, Smith & Nephew, Novo-Nordisk, Novartis, Hoffman La Roche, Eli Lilly, Kellogg’s, Coca-Cola, Heinz, Starkist, Cultor Food Science, Scandipharm and St Ivel.
By far the most significant development, however, and one that secures the future infrastructural requirements for the Unit’s research, is the new £14.5M, 6,200m
The following examples illustrate the scope of the Unit’s industrial collaboration: The expertise of the Pharmaceutical Biotechnology Group is being exploited with a number of companies (SKB, Unilever, MSD) for novel applications in neuroscience and neuro-immunology and for human orphan receptor projects. The group is also assisting Applied Biosystems in the development and application of new analytical equipment. Expertise in image analysis in cellular systems has provided the basis for a number of JREI collaborations of the Cancer & Ageing Group with Kinetic Imaging, Topometrix, Noran Lasers, Nikon and FEI Phillips to develop new hardware/software applications. NICHE has collaborated with Scotia Lipid Teknik to investigate a novel fat emulsion (‘Olibra’) with far-reaching implications for control of obesity. Major food companies funded NICHE’s part in the Ireland North/South Food Consumption Survey, a comprehensive database of food and drink consumption and lifestyle factors. The Vision Science Group has developed visual stimulus generation software with Cambridge Research Systems (Rochester). The Diabetes Group has generated a spin off company, Diabetica, in a joint venture with Braton Biotech Inc, Rockville, to develop new therapies for diabetes. The Radiation Science Group has a long-standing collaboration with Smith & Nephew, to investigate mechanisms of radiation-impaired wound healing. Such collaborations have been facilitated by UUTECH Ltd. Company spin-offs from the Unit in the last two years are Gendel (developer of drug-delivery systems), Xentox (R&D and toxicology service provision) and Diabetica. Three new companies are in the process of being established.
Our industrial collaborations are highly congruent with the objectives and recommendations of Foresight - both the Northern Ireland and National initiatives. Unit members have been proactive in contributing to Foresight exercises, particularly in Northern Ireland, through membership of the Food & Drink, the Life & Health Technologies (Chair), and the Ageing Population Panels. In addition, the Unit has been very responsive to calls from MAFF (now FSA) for research to inform government policy on nutrition and food safety, and is heavily funded in consequence (approx. £2.5M). A recently established collaboration with the Northern Ireland Medical Physics Agency currently supports a studentship in diagnostic imaging. The University has entered into formal relationships with the teaching hospital trusts in Northern Ireland, providing a framework for research collaboration, joint appointments and studentships. Successful links resulting in joint grant funding have also been established with hospitals in the Republic of Ireland.
The group is led by a Unit Co-ordinator who has responsibility for the overall day to day management of the group, and who, in consultation with the Dean, has responsibility for the development of the research strategy and allocation of resources. The Unit Co-ordinator meets regularly with the Dean and Pro-Vice-Chancellor for Research and Development to discuss progress, review the Unit’s strategy and report on expenditure of the Unit’s annual research budget. There are currently four research themes or subgroups associated with this unit: Electrotherapy and Muscle Damage; Women’s Health; Cardiopulmonary and Neurological Rehabilitation; and Low Back Pain. The development of these subgroups has facilitated staff and postgraduates working on complementary research projects to meet on a regular basis to formulate strategies, discuss progress and identify funding opportunities. In developing its research activities, the Unit has drawn widely from the University’s pool of scientific, clinical and research expertise: several members have worked in close collaboration with research-active staff from other Recognised Research Groups/Research Units of Assessment throughout the University, for example, Medical Informatics and Biomedical Sciences.
The Research Unit’s activities are centrally supported by the University’s Research Office which is directed by the Pro-Vice-Chancellor for Research and Development. The Research Office implements the University’s strategy through its four sections: Research Policy and Students; Research Grants and Contracts; UUTECH Ltd. (the University’s technology transfer umbrella company); and UUSRP Ltd. (a wholly-owned University company that manages on-campus Science Park developments). The Research Office communicates regularly with the Unit Co-ordinator to supply information on a range of research related activities including funding opportunities, postgraduate studentships and policy related initiatives. There are two elements of the University’s research strategy budget: an element administered by Unit Co-ordinators that is calculated on the basis of a number of performance rating indicators; and a centrally administered element that is used to fund research studentships and contract research posts. Unit Co-ordinators can also make bids for funds for special projects from this central element.
Staffing Policy/Research Culture
The structure of the Unit’s subgroups detailed above has ensured that no individual researcher works in isolation and provides peer support for new staff and postgraduates. The Unit Co-ordinator meets with new staff to discuss and plan their individual research activities; in addition, experienced staff within the Unit provide a mentoring role to support the development of research skills. In order to ensure equal distribution of research, administration and teaching workloads, regular meetings are held between the Research Unit Co-ordinator and the Academic Affairs Co-ordinator. During the assessment period, the University has actively supported the development of research within the Unit by the appointment of additional staff with a specific remit for developing research within Physiotherapy. Four of the new appointments during the review period have been included in this submission: Dr. Bradley, Dr. Lowe, Dr. McDowell and Dr. Cramp. Two of these appointments were as a result of the University’s initiative in the establishment of a number of joint appointments with local hospital Trusts. These appointments have specifically targeted the development of research in selected areas, including gait assessment in cerebral palsy (Green Park Healthcare Trust: Dr. McDowell) and cardiopulmonary rehabilitation (Belfast City Hospital Trust: Dr. Bradley). All of these new appointments reflect the rapid development of Rehabilitation Sciences, and help to illustrate the supportive research culture provided for new staff.
The University’s infrastructure supports research training through the provision of specific courses on various aspects of research, for example, grant applications, supervision of postgraduate students and specific software programs, through the University’s Staff Development Unit. Due to the variety of projects and professions represented within Rehabilitation Sciences, group meetings/seminars are held approximately every six weeks at which both staff and students are invited to present an update on their research activities. The discussions at such seminars facilitate regular intellectual stimulation as staff and students are encouraged to consider activities in other research subgroups as well as their own. These seminars are also open to staff from Physiotherapy and Occupational Therapy who are not currently research-active to facilitate internal dissemination of relevant information, and particularly, to ensure that all staff are kept informed of research developments within the therapies. These meetings also provide opportunities for regular informal contact between the Unit Co-ordinator and individual members.
The University actively encourages interdisciplinary research through a number of funding schemes, for example, over the past several years, the University has invited staff to apply for a small number of funded placements for students who are on full-time undergraduate sandwich courses. These placements are awarded competitively on the basis of staff submitting an outline proposal that details the work a student will do over a one-year period. During the review period, Rehabilitation Sciences has received funding for a total of six placement students from the following disciplines: Biomedical Sciences, Biological Sciences, Biotechnology, and Biomedical Engineering. These placement students have enhanced the interdisciplinary culture within the group while working on a combination of clinical and laboratory studies. This initiative has also been very useful in attracting potential postgraduate students to the Unit. The University is also proactive in supporting interdisciplinary grant applications to external bodies, for example, a recent successful bid under the Joint Research Equipment Initiative (£319,110) was compiled by research-active staff from several Research Units including Sports Related Subjects, Rehabilitation Sciences (Dr. McDonough), Computer Science, Nursing, and General Engineering. Part of this funding has provided a mobile laboratory facility for Dr. McDonough to conduct a study on children with cerebral palsy in the community.
In recognition of the importance of international research collaboration, the group has hosted a number of international visitors during the review period, including Dr. Shigeyuki Nakaji (Hirosaki University, Japan). The group has also successfully obtained support from the University’s Visiting Scholar scheme to fund a visit by Prof. Jeff Basford (Visiting Professor from the Mayo Clinic, Minnesota, US). This scheme was implemented by the University to facilitate a visit by a scholar of international excellence for up to three months per year over a four-year period. During his initial two-week visit in December 2000, Prof. Basford gave two presentations to the group and collaborated with staff on the development of grant applications for the Arthritis and Rheumatism Council for Research and the National Council for Complementary and Alternative Medicine (US). Most of the commercial funding detailed in this submission has come from North American and Canadian companies thus providing evidence of international recognition of the expertise within the group. Further details of international collaboration are provided in RA6(a).
Postgraduate Research Students
The recruitment, supervision, and training of postgraduate research students in the therapies has been an area of particular success for the group, and is worthy of note given the lack of a research tradition in these professions nationally. These activities are supported by the Faculty’s Research Graduate School which was established in early 1998 to support graduate research student education across the Faculty. Prof. Baxter has acted as Head of the Faculty’s Research Graduate School since its establishment. The Research Graduate School has developed procedures for the selection, training, monitoring of progress, and examination of all the Faculty’s postgraduate research students. The School organizes research and generic skills training for students, and postgraduate research conferences three times per annum to provide an opportunity for student training in presentation skills. Postgraduate students work in teams within their specific research area to encourage and develop teamwork and peer-learning of research skills in parallel with the formalized training they undertake through the Faculty’s Research Graduate School. They are encouraged to present their findings at the informal group meetings/seminars described above, and are also supported to present their findings at selected local and national conferences.
It is recognized that proactive recruitment of high quality postgraduate students is an essential element in the maintenance of current levels of research activity and in the planned development of the group. It is prudently projected that the group will recruit at least three or four new postgraduates per annum over future years. In order to maximize success in recruitment, a structured and systematic approach to the development and submission of postgraduate applications at group level has been adopted. Applicants are invited to choose from designated projects which have been subject to internal review and pre-selection from tentative proposals submitted by existing research-active staff. Funding for postgraduate research studentships has been obtained primarily from the Department of Higher and Further Education, Training and Employment (DHFETE: Northern Ireland), and one award was received from the Department of Health and Social Services (administered by the Clinical Research Awards Advisory Committee). The administration of the latter studentship was assumed by the Research and Development Office for the Health and Personal Social Services (HPSS, Northern Ireland) when it was established. More recently, Rehabilitation Sciences’ postgraduate students have been successful in obtaining a number of University-funded studentships (Vice Chancellor’s Research Studentships and Millennial Awards), and one student is currently funded from a studentship provided by an overseas commercial partner (Meditech International Inc., Toronto). This notwithstanding, it should be noted that the Unit has been disadvantaged by the late implementation of the Culyer report recommendations in Northern Ireland. The HPSS Research and Development Office in Northern Ireland was not established until 1997 and has not yet embarked fully on disbursing research funding. This has therefore disadvantaged the Northern Ireland universities with regard to research funding for specific projects in addition to postgraduate studentships compared to counterparts in Great Britain.
Research Facilities
Since our 1996 submission, refurbishment of laboratory space has provided the Unit with significantly enhanced research facilities on campus. Group members now benefit from access to three designated research suites: one split into three separate research cubicles (for clinical studies or investigations using healthy human volunteers), a neurophysiology laboratory, and one equipped with an isokinetic dynamometer. This refurbishment has greatly increased the number of research projects that can run simultaneously, and has also enhanced both postgraduate and staff training in a variety of data collection techniques.
These laboratories facilitate clinical studies as well as in vivo physiological, electrophysiological and related studies on human subjects including experimental pain techniques. In addition, there is access to modern biomedical laboratory facilities including suites for animal work. The group shares access to a dedicated facility for movement analysis (specifically for gait analysis) and fitness testing with the University’s Sports Related Subjects Research Unit of Assessment.
The recognition that fatty acid cell signallers were present not only in the central nervous system but also in accessible peripheral cells pointed the way to a novel approach to the realisation of objective diagnostics for psychiatry and neurodevelopmental disorders where none previously existed. This vision led to the development of a research strategy (outlined in more detail in RA5c) and directed a change in the structure of the research group, small though it was (5 part-time members). At this time the research group concentrated on clinical trials of fatty acids as treatments for alcoholism and subsequently for schizophrenia. The new approach led the group to develop a skin test as an aid in diagnosis of schizophrenia. In this test, methyl nicotinate (niacin) solution was applied as a skin patch in various strengths and the presence or absence of skin redness was noted. The effect arises from vasodilatation in skin capillaries produced by prostaglandin D2 released from skin macrophages. This redness, in turn, occurs in association with available arachidonic acid (AA) arising from the cyclooxygenase pathway. In schizophrenia 80 per cent of subjects have an absent or reduced skin flush, and this observation has now been replicated worldwide, including Indian subjects.
In an earlier publication, the group showed a striking reduction in AA in red blood cells in schizophrenia and had hypothesised that this might arise from increased release of AA caused by over-activity or increased expression of phospholipase A2 (PLA2). Gattaz had previously found increased phospholipase in schizophrenia but had not associated it with abnormalities in the fatty acid system. Publication of the skin test led to collaborative studies with a clinical biochemistry research group in the Victoria Infirmary, Glasgow, of cytosolic PLA2 (cPLA2) which showed increased expression of the enzyme in schizophrenia and in dyslexia. There had previously been reports of increased lipid peroxidation in schizophrenia and this seemed another potential cause of the AA abnormalities found in red cell membranes. The group decided therefore to search for end-product hydrocarbons in breath, using mass spectrometry with automated thermal desorption (ATD). These studies are at an early stage but results confirm an increased production of ethane in schizophrenia. The group has also found increased breath levels of butane in schizophrenia and in manic depressive illness. Determination of the signalling pathways involved are being investigated using cell culture.
The group has also realised that the mass spectrometry-ATD technique can be used to assess hydrocarbons in the head-space above cell cultures both to understand the pathological production of hydrocarbons and to develop antioxidant treatments. Currently a postgraduate student is developing a human monocyte cell culture to examine the relationship between pro-oxidant challenge, PLA2 activity, headspace analysis and antioxidant treatment. In this work the group has developed a strong relationship with the Scottish Association for Marine Science (SAMS).
The phospholipid paradigm, described in the book Phospholipid Spectrum Disorder in Psychiatry (Peet, Glen & Horrobin (editors), Marius Press, 1999), shows how the major psychiatric disorders of schizophrenia and manic depressive illness lie in a spectrum of neurodevelopmental disorders that also includes dyslexia, autism and attention deficit disorder. This realisation showed how diagnostic tests and treatments might be developed for these very common disorders (5-10 per cent of children have dyslexia, and 1 per cent have autism). Dr Fiona Skinner (see below), a lecturer in psychology in Inverness College, who was a member of the research group and is a director of HPRF, has a special interest in this area. She completed her doctorate with the group on the subject of visual abnormalities in schizophrenia and was able to show relationships between increased visual acuity and functional over-activity of the dopamine system. Dr Skinner went on to apply her vision work to dyslexia where she and Lois MacDonell found abnormalities in dark adaptation.
Management
The process of developing staff skills to run an effective Foundation as well as a spin-out company has been a key task. Psychiatric Diagnostics Limited acquired Investors in People (IIP) status in 2000 . The management has received support from New Park Management.
The Board of Directors of HPRF consists of Professor Sir Graham Hills (Chairman), Dr Iain Glen (Chief Executive), Lois MacDonell (Company Secretary), Keith Farquharson (Treasurer), Dr Fiona Skinner, Marion Ross, Della Matheson and Professor Alistair MacFarlane. On the board are representatives of UHI, the media, carers of users of psychiatric services and staff. There is also an Academic Advisory Board which reports to the Board of HPRF. This advisory board has representation from UHI, the University of Aberdeen and the NHS, and considers academic standards of the research being conducted. The Board of Psychiatric Diagnostics Ltd consists of Professor Sir Graham Hills (Chairman) and three executive directors: Dr Glen, Pauline Ward and Marion Ross. Regular staff meetings for administration and research purposes are held.